- Sections
- Allergy & Immunology
- Cardiovascular Medicine
- Competency-Based Patient Care
- Dermatology
- Endocrinology & Metabolism
- Ethics & Professionalism
- Gastroenterology
- Geriatric Medicine
- Hematology
- Hepatology
- Human Genetics
- Infectious Diseases
- Interdisciplinary Medicine
- Nephrology
- Neurology
- Oncology
- Organ Systems: Anatomy & Physiology
- Palliative Medicine
- Psychiatry
- Pulmonary & Critical Care Medicine
- Rheumatology
- Women's Health
- Nutrition
- Allergy & Immunology
- 1
Introduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
By Steven K. Lundy, PhD; Alison Gizinski, MD; David A. Fox, MD
Purchase PDFIntroduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
- STEVEN K. LUNDY, PHDResearch Assistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School, Ann Arbor, MI
- ALISON GIZINSKI, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, AR
- DAVID A. FOX, MDProfessor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School and Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFThe immune system is a complex network of cells and mediators that must balance the task of protecting the host from invasive threats. From a clinical perspective, many diseases and conditions have an obvious link to improper functioning of the immune system, and insufficient immune responses can lead to uncontrolled acute and chronic infections. The immune system may also be important in tumor surveillance and control, cardiovascular disease, health complications related to obesity, neuromuscular diseases, depression, and dementia. Thus, a working knowledge of the role of immunity in disease processes is becoming increasingly important in almost all aspects of clinical practice. This review provides an overview of the immune response and discusses immune cell populations and major branches of immunity, compartmentalization and specialized immune niches, antigen recognition in innate and adaptive immunity, immune tolerance toward self antigens, inflammation and innate immune responses, adaptive immune responses and helper T (Th) cell subsets, components of the immune response that are important targets of treatment in autoimmune diseases, mechanisms of action of biologics used to treat autoimmune diseases and their approved uses, and mechanisms of other drugs commonly used in the treatment of autoimmune diseases. Figures show the development of erythrocytes, platelets, lymphocytes, and other immune system cells originating from hematopoietic stem cells that first reside in the fetal liver and later migrate to the bone marrow, antigen–major histocompatibility complex recognition by T cell receptor control of T cell survival and activation, and Th cells as central determinants of the adaptive immune response toward different stimuli. Tables list cell populations involved in innate and adaptive immunity, pattern recognition receptors with known ligands, autoantibody-mediated human diseases: examples of pathogenic mechanisms, selected Food and Drug Administration–approved autoimmune disease indications for biologics, and mechanism of action of biologics used to treat autoimmune diseases.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 64 references.
- 2
Deficiencies of Innate and Adaptive Immunity
By Kathleen E Sullivan, MD, PhD; Soma Jyonouchi, MD
Purchase PDFDeficiencies of Innate and Adaptive Immunity
- KATHLEEN E SULLIVAN, MD, PHDProfessor of Pediatrics, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine, Chief, Division of Allergy/Immunology, The Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, PA
- SOMA JYONOUCHI, MDInstructor, Department of Pediatrics, Division of Allergy/Immunology, The Children’s Hospital of Philadelphia, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFDefects in B cell function, T cell function, and innate immunity comprise the majority of primary immune deficiencies. Each compartment has a characteristic set of archetypical features. Defects in B cell function are characterized by poor immunoglobulin production, which, in turn, leads to recurrent sinopulmonary infections. Defects in T cell function are characterized by delayed clearance of viruses, susceptibility to opportunistic infections, and a high rate of autoimmune disease. Defects of innate immunity are typically associated with early-onset, severe infections. This chapter describes defects in immunoglobulin production or function, T cell disorders, defects in Toll-like receptor (TLR) signaling, defects in the interleukin-12 (IL-12)/interferon-gamma signaling pathway, and defects of T helper type 17 (Th17) immunity. Tables outline specific pathogens that should alert the clinician to potential immune deficiency, provide a comparison of immunoglobulin production defects, and describe severe combined immune deficiency types. Figures include schematic representations of the TLR signaling pathway, the IL-12/interferon-gamma signaling pathway, and the Th17 immune response.
This chapter contains 3 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, 72 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 3
Allergic Response
- JOUD HAJJAR, MDAllergy and Immunology Fellow, Department of Internal Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, VA
- LAWRENCE B SCHWARTZ, MD, PHDCharles & Evelyn Thomas Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, VA
Purchase PDFThe term hypersensitivity refers to diseases caused by an immune response, regardless of whether the response is against a pathogen, nonpathogen, or self and regardless of whether the response is directed by antibodies, lymphocytes, or innate pathways. The term anaphylaxis was coined in 1902 by Charles Richet, who received the Nobel Prize in 1913; this systemic allergic response is now known to be an immediate hypersensitivity reaction, initiated by allergen delivered to a host having allergen-specific IgE, thereby causing an IgE-mediated immunologic response and activating mast cells and basophils to secrete bioactive mediators. In 2005, the National Institutes of Health organized a consensus conference to develop a working definition of anaphylaxis, designed to be used by physicians at the bedside, as a serious allergic reaction that is rapid in onset, typically eliciting various combinations of cutaneous, cardiovascular, respiratory, and gastrointestinal manifestations, and may cause death.1,2This facilitated the early treatment of such patients with epinephrine. Confusion arises over the misapplication of the term allergy or hypersensitivity to describe any untoward reaction to food, medications, or environmental exposures. Furthermore, non–IgE-mediated forms of local and systemic mast cell or basophil activation events can occur, causing signs and symptoms similar to those mediated by IgE.
This review contains 3 figures, 11 tables, and 64 references.
Keywords: allergy, hypersensitivity, anaphylaxis, interleukin, chemokines, immunoglobulin E, mast cell, eosinophil
- 4
Allergic Rhinitis, Conjunctivitis, and Sinusitis
- ROBERT NACLERIO, MDProfessor and Chief, Department of Surgery, Section of Otolaryngology, Head and Neck Surgery, University of Chicago, Chicago, IL
Purchase PDFAllergic rhinitis is an IgE-mediated inflammatory response in the nose to foreign substances known as allergens. It can be classified as seasonal or perennial, depending on the allergens triggering the reaction. This characterization is good for identifying allergen triggers but is limited because it is based on the duration of outdoor exposure (e.g., grass pollinates for 2 months in Chicago and nearly 11 months in Texas). Also, some perennial allergens, such as dust mites, have seasons. The Allergic Rhinitis in Asthma (ARIA) classification was developed to focus on therapy. It assumes that exposure to perennial and to seasonal allergen leads to the same immunologic response. ARIA places patients into the categories of mild intermittent, mild persistent, moderate/severe intermittent, and moderate/severe persistent to recommend treatment and emphasizes the link between allergic rhinitis and asthma.1
This review contains 5 figures, 12 tables, and 59 references.
Key Words: Sinusitis, infection, allergy, antibiotic, decongestant, antihistamine
- 5
Diagnostic and Therapeutic Principles in Allergy
By Mitchell H. Grayson, MD; Peter Mustillo, MD
Purchase PDFDiagnostic and Therapeutic Principles in Allergy
- MITCHELL H. GRAYSON, MDAssociate Professor of Pediatrics, Medicine, Department of Pediatrics, Microbiology and Molecular Genetics, Department of Pediatrics, Medical College of Wisconsin, Milwaukee, WI
- PETER MUSTILLO, MDAssociate Professor of Pediatrics and Internal Medicine, Department of Pediatrics, Nationwide Children’s Hospital, The Ohio State University, Columbus, OH.
Purchase PDFThe incidence of allergic diseases, like asthma, allergic rhinitis, and food allergy, is increasing in Westernized countries. This chapter discusses the importance of taking a careful and focused history and physical examination, as well as the laboratory studies that can be used to demonstrate the presence of allergic sensitization. Treatment for allergic disease is discussed, with an emphasis on new biologic therapies that have been developed. Finally, the chapter explores relatively new studies on the potential for interventions to prevent food allergy.
Allergy is defined as an untoward physiologic event mediated by immune mechanisms, usually involving the interaction between an allergen and the allergic antibody, immunoglobulin E (IgE). Allergic reactions typically occur due to exposure to either airborne allergens, foods, drugs, chemicals, or Hymenoptera (such as wasps, bees and fire ants). Allergies manifest in numerous ways, including allergic asthma, allergic rhinoconjunctivitis, urticaria, eczema, and in its most severe form, anaphylaxis.
This review contains 4 videos, 5 figures, 4 tables and 42 references
Key Words: Delayed allergic reaction (Alpha-gal), Allergy diagnosis, Measurement of specific IgE, Allergy and asthma therapies, Anticytokine therapy (dupilumab, mepolizumab, reslizumab), AntiIgE therapy (omalizumab), Allergy skin testing, Basophil histamine release assay
- 6
Urticaria and Angioedema
- JUSTIN R CHEN, MDFellow Physician, Division of Allergy & Immunology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
- DAVID A. KHAN, MDProfessor of Internal Medicine and Pediatrics, Division of Allergy & Immunology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
Purchase PDFUrticaria and angioedema are common diseases with diverse origins that constitute a substantial component of medical practice. Urticaria, or hives, refers to one or more areas of intensely pruritic papules or plaques with swelling of the superficial dermis (wheal) surrounded by local erythema (flare). Angioedema refers to deep dermal subcutaneous swelling that may manifest as swelling of the mucosa of the face, tongue, pharynx, larynx, or intestines that can be alarming and, in some cases, life threatening. These conditions are heterogeneous in their presentation and chronicity. Although allergies are responsible for some cases, autoimmunity and dysregulation of the bradykinin system often play a significant role, leading to challenging diagnostic and therapeutic dilemmas. This review discusses the epidemiology, natural history, pathophysiology, diagnosis, and treatment of acute and chronic urticaria and angioedema. Emphasis is placed on physical triggers, the role of proper laboratory testing, and alternative agents for refractory cases. Emerging therapies for hereditary and acquired angioedema syndromes are also covered. Tables list the causes of acute and chronic urticaria, an escalating treatment approach for difficult cases, and a comparison of available parenteral therapies specific to bradykinin-mediated angioedema. Figures illustrate the mechanisms of urticaria, photographs of typical presentations, and an evidence-based diagnostic algorithm for clinicians.
This review contains 9 figures, 8 tables, and 104 references.
- 7
Anaphylaxis
- CEM AKIN, MD, PHDAssociate Physician, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Department of Rheumatology, Immunology, and Allergy, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAnaphylaxis, a serious allergic reaction, is rapid in onset and marked by flushing, urticaria, angioedema, pruritus, bronchospasm, and abdominal cramping with nausea, vomiting, and diarrhea. It is not uncommon; approximate lifetime prevalence of anaphylaxis was estimated to be 0.5 to 2% or possibly higher due to the common academic belief that the incidence of anaphylactic reactions is underreported. Rarely, anaphylaxis may cause death, most commonly from drugs, foods, and insect stings. This review covers the epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, clinical manifestations, treatment, and prognosis. Figures show inflammatory pathways in allergic inflammation and mast cell degranulation and pathways of activation.
This review contains 2 figures, 5 tables, and 72 references.
Keywords: Anaphylaxis, allergy, shock, auto-injector epinephrine, inflammation, mast cell, venom
- 8
Food Allergies
- MATTHEW GREENHAWT, MD, MBA, MSCAssistant Professor, Division of Allergy and Clinical Immunology, University of Michigan Medical School, University of Michigan Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFFood allergy represents a rapidly growing public health problem in the United States and other westernized nations. Adverse reactions to foods are categorized as either immunologic or nonimmunologic reactions. This distinction is highly important but often confusing to patients and physicians unfamiliar with allergy, who may simply describe any adverse reaction to a food as an “allergy.” A food allergy is an immune-mediated, adverse reaction to one or more protein allergens in a particular food item involving recognition of that protein by specifically targeted IgE or allergen-specific T cells. This chapter discusses the definition, pathophysiology, epidemiology, testing, management, prognosis, and natural history of food allergy. Clinical manifestations are systematically covered, including cutaneous, respiratory, cardiovascular, and gastrointestinal reactions, as well as eosinophilic esophagitis, food protein–induced enterocolitis syndrome, and oral allergy syndrome. Emerging treatments such as food oral immunotherapy are also reviewed. Tables outline signs and symptoms of immediate hypersensitivity reactions to food, the prevalence of major food allergens in the United States, common patterns of cross-reactivity among foods, clinical criteria for the diagnosis of anaphylaxis, and clinical studies involving treatment for food allergies. Figures illustrate the classification of adverse reactions to food, esophageal histology, visual and radiographic features of eosinophilic esophagitis, and a food allergy action plan.
This review contains 4 figures, 10 tables, and 66 references.
KeyWords: Food allergy, Hypersensitivity, IgE-mediated allergy, Eosinophilic esophagitis, Anaphylaxis
- 9
Drug Allergies
- JAMES L BALDWIN, MDDivision Chief, Division of Allergy and Clinical Immunology, Department of Medicine, University of Michigan School of Medicine, Ann Arbor, MI
- AIMEE L. SPECK, MDFellow, Division of Allergy and Clinical Immunology, University of Michigan School of Medicine, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFAdverse drug reactions (ADRs) are an important public health problem. An ADR is defined by the World Health Organization as an unintended, noxious response to a drug that occurs at a dose usually tolerated by normal subjects. The classification of ADRs by Rawlins and Thompson divides ADRs into two major subtypes: (1) type A reactions, which are dose dependent and predictable, and (2) type B reactions, which are uncommon and unpredictable. The majority of ADRs are type A reactions, which include four subtypes: overdosage or toxicity, side effects, secondary effects, and interactions. Type B reactions constitute approximately 10 to 15% of all ADRs and include four subtypes: drug intolerance, idiosyncratic reactions, pseudoallergic reactions, and drug hypersensitivity reactions. This chapter reviews the epidemiology of ADRs, risk factors for drug hypersensitivity reactions, the classification of drug reactions, diagnostic tests, reactions to specific drugs, and management of the patient with drug allergy. Figures illustrate drugs as haptens and prohaptens, the Gell and Coombs system, the four basic immunologic mechanisms for drug reactions, the chemical structure of different β-lactam antibiotics, penicillin skin testing, sulfonamide metabolism and haptenation, nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drug effects, and patient management. Tables outline the classification of ADRs, drugs frequently implicated in allergic drug reactions, and reagents and concentrations recommended for prick and intradermal skin testing.
This review contains 8 figures, 9 tables, and 60 references
Keywords: Adverse drug reactions, drug hypersensitivity reactions, overdosage, toxicity, Type A reactions, Type B reactions, human leukocyte antigen, pruritus, angioedema, urticarial, bronchospasm, laryngeal edema, rhinoconjunctivitis
- 10
Allergic Reactions to Hymenoptera
- DAVID B. K. GOLDEN, MD, FACPAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Allergy-Clinical Immunology, Johns Hopkins University School of Medicine, Baltimore, MD
Purchase PDFAllergic reactions to insect venom can occur in individuals of all ages and may be preceded by a number of uneventful stings. These allergic reactions can be fatal. In the United States, at least 40 deaths due to insect stings occur each year; this number may be higher as some unexplained deaths may be caused by insect stings. This review details the epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and acute and preventive treatment for allergic reactions to Hymenoptera. Figures show the honeybee, the European hornet, the Eastern yellow jacket, the red imported fire ant, the paper wasp, and the appearance of a pustule resulting from the sting of a fire ant. Tables list the risk of systemic reactions and clinical recommendations based on reaction to previous stings and venom skin test or serum immunoglobulin E test results, stinging insects of the order Hymenoptera, risk factors for severe reactions to stings, and risk factors for relapse after discontinuing venom immunotherapy.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 62 references.
- 11
Igg4-related Disease and Retroperitoneal Fibrosis
- JOHN H. STONE, MD, MPHDirector, Clinical Rheumatology, Massachusetts General Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFIgG4-related disease (IgG4-RD) has been observed to affect almost every organ system, with consistent histopathologic findings across systems. IgG4-RD can mimic malignant, infectious, and inflammatory disorders; accordingly, consideration of the histopathologic features of tissue biopsies and rigorous clinicopathologic correlations are essential to avoid misdiagnosis. Since the early 2000s, IgG4-RD has increasingly been recognized as a cause of what was previously referred to as “idiopathic” retroperitoneal fibrosis (RPF), and this IgG4-related RPF is now considered to comprise an important subset of IgG4-RD. This review includes an overview of IgG4-RD and discusses the pathology, pathophysiology, and clinical manifestations of IgG4. IgG4-related RPF is also discussed in this review, with topics including IgG4-related RPF versus RPF of other causes, the differences between RPF and other subsets of IgG4-RD, and treatment of both IgG4-RD and IgG4-related RPF. Figures show the histopathology features of IgG4-RD, immunostaining of tissue for IgG4, IgG4-related RPF and chronic periaortitis, “Mikulicz disease”, IgG4-RD of the lung, IgG4-related renal disease, and type 1 (IgG4-related) pancreatitis. The table lists conditions known previously by other names that often fall within the spectrum of IgG4-RD.
This review contains 7 highly rendered figures, 1 table, and 66 references.
- 12
Disorders of Macrophages and Dendritic Cells
By Alexei A. Grom, MD; Michael B Jordan, MD, PhD; Jun Qin Mo, MD
Purchase PDFDisorders of Macrophages and Dendritic Cells
- ALEXEI A. GROM, MDAssociate Professor of Pediatrics, Division of Rheumatology, Cincinnati Children’s Hospital Medical Center, University of Cincinnati College of Medicine, Cincinnati, OH
- MICHAEL B JORDAN, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Pediatrics, Divisions of Immunobiology and Bone Marrow Transplantation and Immunodeficiency, Cincinnati Children’s Hospital Medical Center, Cincinnati, OH
- JUN QIN MO, MDAssociate Professor of Pediatrics, Division of Pathology, Cincinnati Children’s Hospital Medical Center, Cincinnati, OH
Purchase PDFThe mononuclear phagocytic system consists of dendritic cells (DCs) and monocytes/macrophages, historically referred to as histiocytes. The macrophages exhibit varying degrees of phagocytic activity. DCs typically have dendritic morphology. Their phagocytic activity is limited. Instead, they play a key role in antigen presentation to lymphocytes. The various populations of macrophages and DCs (such as Langerhans cells [LCs] and dermal dendrocytes) are usually distinguished based on characteristic morphology and patterns of expression of specific cell surface and intracellular markers. Abnormal accumulation and behavior of these cells may lead to the development of a spectrum of diseases collectively known as the histiocytoses. Clinically, histiocytic disorders comprise a wide variety of conditions that affect both children and adults and range from benign skin lesions to rapidly progressive life-threatening systemic disorders. LCs play a pivotal role in the development of Langerhans cell histiocytosis, dermal dendrocytes are the predominant cell population in the lesionsof juvenile xanthogranuloma, and macrophages are central to the pathogenesis of hemophagocytic lymphohistiocytosis and related disorders.
This review contains 5 figures, 3 tables, and 77 references.
Key words: dendritic cells, dermal dendrocytes, hemophagocytic lymphohistiocytosis, histiocytes, juvenile xanthogranuloma, Langerhans cell histiocytosis, Langerhans cells, macrophage activation syndrome,macrophages
- 13
Transplant Immunology: Basic Immunology and Clinical Practice
By David P Foley, MD; Lung-Yi Lee, MD
Purchase PDFTransplant Immunology: Basic Immunology and Clinical Practice
- DAVID P FOLEY, MDDepartment of Surgery, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, and Veterans Administration Surgical Services, William S. Middleton Veterans Hospital, Madison, WI
- LUNG-YI LEE, MDDepartment of Surgery, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
Purchase PDFEngraftment of a transplanted organ into an allogeneic host triggers a cascade of immunologic responses in the host that are designed to facilitate graft rejection. Modern donor-to-host matching techniques and immunosuppression protocols have successfully tempered this natural immune response so that graft survival has dramatically improved. However, optimizing graft survival by precisely downregulating the host response to graft rejection while preserving host immune defenses against pathologic and infectious agents remains poorly understood and elusive in current clinical practice. This review discusses transplant immunology with respect to host versus graft and the basis of allorecognition, as well as clinical management of the transplanted allograft. Figures show human leukocyte antigen (HLA), direct allorecognition, T cell receptor and CD3, T cell–associated second messenger signaling pathway, CD8 molecules directly ligating class I HLAs and CD4 molecules directly binding HLA class II, detection of alloantibodies by enzyme-linked immunosorbent assay or flow cytometry, recipient-donor crossmatch, histopathology of kidney allograft with antibody-mediated rejection, and an algorithm for assessment and management of renal allograft rejection.
This review contains 9 figures, 6 tables and 61 references.
Keywords: Transplantation, immunology, human leukocyte antigen, crossmatch, donor, acute rejection, chronic rejection
- 14
Pediatric Rashes
- SUMMER STEARS-ELLIS, MDClinical Instructor, Emergency Ultrasound Fellow, Department of Emergency Medicine, The University of Arizona, Tucson, AZ
Purchase PDFPediatric rashes are a common chief complaint in the emergency department (ED) and a source of anxiety for both parents and providers. Many of these rashes will not require intervention aside from symptomatic relief and parental reassurance. However, there is a subset of rashes that are the result of underlying life-threatening conditions that will warrant immediate intervention and treatment to prevent further deterioration and possible death. This review focuses on outlining the pathology of seven potentially deadly pediatric rashes that ED physicians are likely to encounter, how they present, and how to treat and manage them according to the most recent available guidelines. Figures show primary lesions, pattern of lesions, and distribution of rash associated with bacterial meningitis, toxic shock syndrome (TSS), Rocky Mountain spotted fever, Stevens-Johnson syndrome/toxic epidermal necrolysis, erythema multiforme minor and major, necrotizing fasciitis, and Henoch-Schönlein purpura. Tables list bacterial meningitis antibiotic treatment, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention clinical and laboratory criteria for TSS, TSS antibiotic treatment regimens, scoring systems for toxic epidermal necrolysis and necrotizing fasciitis, and the latest guidelines as of June 2017.
This review contains 9 figures, 17 tables, and 58 references
Keywords: Pediatric rash, toxic shock syndrome, skin rash, rash distribution, Rocky Mountain spotted fever, Stevens-Johnson syndrome, toxic epidermal necrolysis, necrotizing fasciitis, Henoch-Schönlein purpura
- 15
Epigenetics in Autoimmune Disease
- MATLOCK A JEFFRIES, MD
Purchase PDFAutoimmunity refers to a pathologic state of immunologic dysregulation in which the human immune system turns inward, attacking healthy tissues. The key step in this process is a break of self-immune tolerance. Recent studies have implicated dysregulation of gene expression via altered epigenetic control as a key mechanism in the development and promotion of autoimmunity. Epigenetics is defined as heritable changes in gene expression as a result of modification of DNA methylation, histone side chains, and noncoding RNA. Studies examining identical twins discordant for lupus, for example, were among the first to identify alterations in DNA methylation leading to lupus. Histone side-chain changes have been studied extensively in rheumatoid arthritis (RA), and many pathogenic cell types in RA exhibit a hyperacetylation phenotype. Finally, new research in the noncoding RNA field has not only uncovered potentially targetable pathways (e.g., miR-155) but may lead to the development of new diagnostic and prognostic biomarkers, helping physicians better tailor specific treatment regimens to improve response to therapy in autoimmune disease.
This review contains 4 figures, 1 table and 47 references
Key Words: autoimmunity, big data, biomarkers, computational biology, DNA methylation, epigenetics, histone acetylation, histone methylation, microRNA, noncoding RNA
- 16
Anaphylaxis
- CEM AKIN, MD, PHDAssociate Physician, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Department of Rheumatology, Immunology, and Allergy, Boston, MA
- 17
Food Allergies
- MATTHEW GREENHAWT, MD, MBA, MSCAssistant Professor, Division of Allergy and Clinical Immunology, University of Michigan Medical School, University of Michigan Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
- 18
Transplant Immunology: Basic Immunology and Clinical Practice
By David P Foley, MD; Lung-Yi Lee, MD
Purchase PDFTransplant Immunology: Basic Immunology and Clinical Practice
- DAVID P FOLEY, MDDepartment of Surgery, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, and Veterans Administration Surgical Services, William S. Middleton Veterans Hospital, Madison, WI
- LUNG-YI LEE, MDDepartment of Surgery, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- 19
Allergic Rhinitis, Conjunctivitis, and Sinusitis
- ROBERT NACLERIO, MDProfessor and Chief, Department of Surgery, Section of Otolaryngology, Head and Neck Surgery, University of Chicago, Chicago, IL
- 20
Introduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
By Steven K. Lundy, PhD; Alison Gizinski, MD; David A. Fox, MD
Purchase PDFIntroduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
- STEVEN K. LUNDY, PHDResearch Assistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School, Ann Arbor, MI
- ALISON GIZINSKI, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, AR
- DAVID A. FOX, MDProfessor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School and Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
- 21
Allergic Response
- JOUD HAJJAR, MDAllergy and Immunology Fellow, Department of Internal Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, VA
- LAWRENCE B SCHWARTZ, MD, PHDCharles & Evelyn Thomas Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, VA
- 22
Urticaria and Angioedema
- JUSTIN R CHEN, MDFellow Physician, Division of Allergy & Immunology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
- DAVID A. KHAN, MDProfessor of Internal Medicine and Pediatrics, Division of Allergy & Immunology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
- 23
Drug Allergies
- JAMES L BALDWIN, MDDivision Chief, Division of Allergy and Clinical Immunology, Department of Medicine, University of Michigan School of Medicine, Ann Arbor, MI
- AIMEE L. SPECK, MDFellow, Division of Allergy and Clinical Immunology, University of Michigan School of Medicine, Ann Arbor, MI
- 24
Pediatric Rashes
- SUMMER STEARS-ELLIS, MDClinical Instructor, Emergency Ultrasound Fellow, Department of Emergency Medicine, The University of Arizona, Tucson, AZ
- 1
- Cardiovascular Medicine
- 1
Approach to the Cardiovascular Patient
- CATHERINE M. OTTO, MDJ. Ward Kennedy-Hamilton Endowed Chair in Cardiology, Professor of Medicine, Departmentof Medicine, Division of Cardiology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- DAVID M SHAVELLE, MDAssociate Clinical Professor of Medicine, Keck School of Medicine at USC, Director, Interventional Cardiology Fellowship, Director, Cardiac Catheterization Laboratories, USC Medical Center, Los Angeles County, Los Angeles, CA
Purchase PDFThe complete evaluation of the cardiovascular patient begins with a thorough history and a detailed physical examination. These two initial steps will often lead to the correct diagnosis and assist in excluding life-threatening conditions. The history and physical examination findings should be assessed in the overall clinical status of the patient, including the patient's specific complaints, lifestyle, comorbidities, and treatment expectations. This chapter discusses the cardiovascular conditions that frequently require evaluation: chest pain, dyspnea, palpitations, syncope, claudication, and cardiac murmurs; and reviews the background, history and physical examination, and diagnostic tests available for each. Diagnostic algorithms are provided, and the appropriate use of invasive and noninvasive cardiac testing for each condition is discussed.
This review contains 8 figures, 21 tables, and 57 references
Keywords: Chest pain, cardiac murmur, dyspnea, palpitations, syncope, claudication, peripheral vascular disease, myocardial infarction, dissection, arrhythmia, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, asthma, pericarditis
- 2
Cardiovascular Biomarkers
- PARUL U GANDHI, MDClinical and Research Fellow, Department of Medicine, Cardiology Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- JAMES L JANUZZI JR, MDRoman W. DeSanctis Endowed Clinical Scholar, Department of Medicine, Cardiology Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Hutter Family Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe value of circulating biomarkers to care for patients with cardiovascular disease has grown significantly over the last few decades. The majority of clinical data focus on the use of natriuretic peptides (NPs) for the diagnosis, prognosis, and management of patients with heart failure (HF) and troponin measurements in patients with suspected or proven acute coronary syndrome (ACS). Part of the reason for the slow adoption of biomarkers beyond these two classes has been limitation in the optimal modes of application of new assays. Future studies are needed to clarify the use of biomarkers, with the ultimate goal of simplifying the diagnosis, prognosis, and patient care of complex cardiovascular conditions. This chapter reviews the use of established biomarkers for HF, ACS, and atrial fibrillation (AF). Tables include a summary of emerging and established cardiovascular biomarkers, characteristics of B-type natriuretic peptide and amino-terminal pro-B-type natriuretic peptide, cutoff points for NP measurement, differential diagnosis of elevated NP concentrations, biomarkers in HF with preserved ejection fraction, summary of NP management trials, third universal definition of myocardial infarction, and guidelines for recommendations of biomarkers in HF. Figures depict the various causes of NP release, the complex mechanism of troponin release in patients with HF, the ischemic and nonischemic etiologies of troponin release, timing of biomarker release during myocardial infarction, and the biomarkers involved in the pathogenesis of AF. Algorithms demonstrate evaluating outpatients with dyspnea in the clinic using NPs in their workup and the use of troponin to assist with determining an appropriate management strategy for a patient with ACS.
This review contains 8 figures, 22 tables, and 208 references
- 3
Cardiac Catheterization and Intervention
By Dharam J. Kumbhani, MD, SM, MRCP, FACC; Deepak L Bhatt, MD, MPH, FACP
Purchase PDFCardiac Catheterization and Intervention
- DHARAM J. KUMBHANI, MD, SM, MRCP, FACCAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Cardiology, University of Texas Southwestern Medical School, Dallas, TX
- DEEPAK L BHATT, MD, MPH, FACPExecutive Director of Interventional Cardiovascular Programs, Brigham and Womens Hospital Heart & Vascular Center, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFCardiac catheterization involves the insertion of a catheter (hollow polymer-coated tubing) into a blood vessel of the heart or into one of its chambers. Cardiac catheterization procedures are one of the most commonly performed cardiac procedures today. This review outlines the basics of angiography and coronary anatomy, the technical details of cardiac catheterizations, preferred access sites, and hemodynamic measurements. The basic steps in coronary intervention are listed. Common indications and contraindications for cardiac catheterization and intervention are described, as are appropriate use criteria for diagnostic catheterization and coronary intervention, fractional flow reserve (FFR) and intravascular ultrasonography, and complications of cardiac catheterization and percutaneous coronary intervention. Future directions in the field are discussed. Tables describe normal hemodynamic measurements, derived measurements during right heart catheterization, coronary artery disease prognostic index for medically managed patients, American College of Cardiology (ACC)/American Heart Association (AHA) guidelines regarding indications for coronary angiography, ACC/AHA appropriate use criteria for diagnostic catheterization, common indications for FFR, and risk of cardiac catheterization and coronary angiography. Figures include an overview of coronary anatomy, angiograms of the coronary arteries, images of a normal cardiac cycle and hemodynamic waveforms, the design of a stent, FFR evaluation, basic intravascular ultrasonography measurements, and coronary imaging with an optical coherence tomography system.
This review contains 7 figures, 8 tables, and 62 references.
Keywords: Cardiac catheterization, angiography, balloon angioplasty, coronary artery disease, Fick method, bare metal stent, drug-eluting stent, percutaneous coronary intervention
- 4
Chronic Stable Angina
- BENJAMIN J SCIRICA, MD, MPHSenior Investigator, TIMI Study Group, Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- J. ANTONIO T. GUTIERREZ, MDCardiovascular Medicine Fellow, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFBy definition, chronic stable angina is angina that has been stable with regard to frequency and severity for at least 2 months. Chronic stable angina is the initial manifestation of coronary heart disease in approximately 50% of patients. Typically, this type of angina occurs in the setting of atherosclerotic coronary arterial narrowing, although other causes are possible. This review covers the epidemiology, pathophysiology, initial evaluation, differential diagnosis, management, and treatment of patients with chronic stable angina. Figures show noninvasive testing and the probability of coronary artery disease; diagnosis of patients with suspected ischemic heart disease; probability of severe coronary artery disease; coronary outcomes for high- versus low-intensity statin therapy; optimal medical therapy (OMT) versus OMT and percutaneous coronary intervention for chronic angina; OMT versus percutaneous coronary intervention for stable coronary heart disease; and coronary artery bypass grafting versus percutaneous coronary intervention for diabetes and coronary artery disease. Tables list the grading of angina pectoris by the Canadian Cardiovascular Society classification system, the differential diagnosis of chest pain, conditions promoting myocardial oxygen supply and demand mismatch, the features of typical angina, the classification of chest pain, a comparison of the pretest likelihood of coronary heart disease (CHD) in low-risk and high-risk symptomatic patients, the posttest probability of significant CHD based on pretest probabilities of CHD and normal or abnormal results of noninvasive studies, survival according to risk groups based on Duke treadmill scores, high- and moderate-intensity statin therapy, revascularization to improve survival compared with medical therapy, revascularization to improve symptoms with significant anatomic (≥ 50% left main or ≥ 70% nonleft main coronary artery disease) or physiologic (fractional flow reserve ≤ 0.80) coronary artery stenoses, and questions recommended by an expert panel for patients with chronic stable angina at follow-up visits.
This review contains 7 figures, 13 tables, and 109 references.
- 5
Unstable Angina and Other Acute Coronary Syndromes
By R Scott Wright, MD, FACC, FESC, FAHA; Joseph G Murphy, MD, FACC, FESC
Purchase PDFUnstable Angina and Other Acute Coronary Syndromes
- R SCOTT WRIGHT, MD, FACC, FESC, FAHAProfessor of Medicine, Consultant in Cardiology and the Coronary Care Unit, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
- JOSEPH G MURPHY, MD, FACC, FESCProfessor of Medicine, Consultant in Cardiology and the Coronary Care Unit, Chair, Section of Scientific Publications, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFPatients with coronary artery disease (CAD) present clinically when their disease enters an unstable phase known as an acute coronary syndrome (ACS), in which the cap of a previously stable atheromatous coronary plaque ruptures or erodes, which in turn activates a thrombotic cascade that may lead to coronary artery occlusion, myocardial infarction (MI), cardiogenic shock, and patient death. There are nearly 2 million episodes of ACS in the United States annually; it is the most common reason for hospitalization with CAD and is the leading cause of death in the developed world.
This review contains 2 figures, 13 tables, and 78 references.
Key Words: coronary artery disease, myocardial infarction, cardiogenic shock
- 6
St-segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction
By Grant William Reed, MD; Christopher Paul Cannon, MD
Purchase PDFSt-segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction
- GRANT WILLIAM REED, MDFellow, Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH
- CHRISTOPHER PAUL CANNON, MD Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Executive Director of Cardiometabolic Trials, Harvard Clinical Research Institute, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFPatients with acute coronary syndrome fall into two groups: those with unstable angina or non—ST segment elevation (formerly non—Q wave) myocardial infarction (NSTEMI) and those with acute ST segment elevation (formerly Q wave) myocardial infarction (STEMI). STEMI is the focus of this chapter. The epidemiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and complications of STEMI are elaborated. Reperfusion therapy (including time to reperfusion; diagnostic coronary angiography; primary, facilitated, rescue, and late percutaneous coronary intervention [PCI]; thrombolytic therapy and choice of thrombolytic agent; early invasive strategy; coronary artery bypass grafting; and therapeutic hypothermia), medical therapy (including aspirin, P2Y12 inhibitors, glycoprotein IIb/IIIa inhibitors, anticoagulants, nitrates, beta blockers, inhibition of the renin-angiotensin-aldosterone system, oxygen, analgesia, lipid-lowering therapy, prophylactic antiarrhythmics, and magnesium), risk stratification, secondary prevention, and post-STEMI care are also covered.
This review contains 11 figures, 37 tables, and 79 references.
Keywords: ST-segment elevation myocardial infarction, acute coronary syndrome, transmural necrosis, ischemia, antiplatelet therapy, coronary artery bypass graft, percutaneous coronary intervention
- 7
Heart Failure
- SACHIN P SHAH, MDCenter for Advanced Heart Disease, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, Director, Cardiovascular Intensive Care Unit, Lahey Hospital and Medical Center, Burlington, MA
- MANDEEP R. MEHRA, MDMedical Director, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHeart failure is a syndrome related to abnormal cardiac performance with a consequence of impaired cardiac output at rest or with exertion and/or congestion, which usually leads to symptoms of fatigue, dyspnea, and edema. The syndrome is characterized by various phenotypes related to a vast array of etiologies with diverse management targets. The current broad categorization of heart failure separates patients based on ejection fraction. Further description of the phenotype beyond ejection fraction is imperative to correctly identify the etiology of heart failure and, ultimately, to choose medical, device, and surgical therapies appropriately. This review covers the epidemiology of heart failure, defining the phenotype and etiology of heart failure, recognition and management of acute decompensated heart failure, management of chronic heart failure with a reduced ejection fraction, implantable cardioverter-defibrillators in heart failure with a reduced ejection fraction, management of heart failure with a preserved ejection fraction, and advanced heart failure. Figures show the evolution of therapy in chronic heart failure from the symptom-directed model, the complex pathophysiology and principal aberrations underlying heart failure with preserved ejection fraction, and concepts underlying surgical therapy in advanced heart failure using Laplace’s law. Tables list various etiologies of heart failure; sensitivity and specificity of clinical, biomarker, and radiographic data in the diagnosis of acute decompensated heart failure; drugs and devices with a demonstrated survival benefit in heart failure with a reduced ejection fraction; neurohormonal antagonist dosing in heart failure with a reduced ejection fraction; randomized, placebo-controlled trials in heart failure with a preserved ejection fraction; categorization of heart failure according to American Heart Association/American College of Cardiology heart failure stage, New York Heart Association functional class, and Interagency Registry for Mechanically Assisted Circulatory Support level; and poor prognostic indicators in heart failure.
This review contains 4 figures, 8 tables, and 114 references.
- 8
Heart Transplantation - Part I: General Considerations
- MICHAEL M. GIVERTZ, MDMedical Director, Heart Transplant and Mechanical Circulatory Support and Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School
Purchase PDFHeart failure (HF) is a major public health problem with significant associated morbidity and mortality.In 2001, the American College of Cardiology/American Heart Association (ACC/AHA) guideline committee proposed a new approach to the classification of HF that emphasized both the development and progression of disease. Stage A and B patients are at high risk for developing HF, and include those without structural heart disease (Stage A) and those with structural heart disease, but without signs or symptoms of HF (Stage B). Stage C and D patients have structural heart disease with prior or current symptoms of HF (Stage C) or refractory HF requiring specialized interventions (Stage D). Rregistries suggest that between 5% and 10% of patients with HF have advanced disease, which is associated with 1-year mortality in excess of 50% and a poor quality of life.The Heart Failure Society of America (HFSA) defines Stage D heart failure as “the presence of progressive and/or persistent severe signs and symptoms of heart failure despite optimized medical, surgical, and device therapy…generally accompanied by frequent hospitalization, severely limited exertional tolerance, and poor quality of life.” In this two-part chapter, we focus on heart transplantation, which remains the standard-of-care for highly selected patients with end-stage HF and absence of contraindications to transplant.1-5
This review contains 7 figures, 8 tables, and 46 references.
Key words: heart failure, cardiomyopathy, heart transplant, mechanical circulatory support, prognosis, pulmonary hypertension, diabetes, HLA sensitization, donor
- 9
Supraventricular Tachycardia
By Laurence M. Epstein, MD; Saurabh Kumar, BSc(Med)/MBBS, PhD
Purchase PDFSupraventricular Tachycardia
- LAURENCE M. EPSTEIN, MDChief, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- SAURABH KUMAR, BSC(MED)/MBBS, PHDAdvanced Clinical Electrophysiology Fellow, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Woman’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFSupraventricular tachycardias (SVTs) comprise a group of usually benign arrhythmias that originate from cardiac tissue at or above the His bundle. SVTs include inappropriate sinus tachycardia, atrial tachycardias (ATs), atrial flutter (AFL), junctional tachycardia, atrioventricular nodal reentrant tachycardia (AVNRT), and forms of accessory pathway–mediated reentrant tachycardias (atrioventricular reentrant tachycardia [AVRT]). Although mostly benign, symptoms can be debilitating, in the form of palpitations, shortness of breath, chest discomfort, dizziness, and/or syncope; rarely, SVTs can result in cardiomyopathy due to incessant arrhythmia. This review covers the epidemiology, diagnosis, management, and classification of SVTs.
This review contains 14 figures, 17 tables, and 61 references.
Keywords: Supraventricular tachycardia, cardioversion, arrhythmia, atrial flutter, atrial fibrillation, Wolff-Parkinson-White syndrome, MAZE procedure, catheter ablation
- 10
Atrial Fibrillation
- GREGORY F. MICHAUD, MDDirector, Center for the Advanced Management of Atrial Fibrillation, Brigham and Women’s, Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MD
- ROY M. JOHN, MD, PHDAssociate Director EP Laboratory, Director, Experimental Research, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAtrial fibrillation (AF) is an abnormal rhythm characterized by chaotic atrial electrical activity resulting in loss of atrial contraction, an irregular and unpredictable heart rate, and a tendency for thrombus formation. The prevalence of AF is estimated at 1 to 2%, but it’s likely higher than that because one-third of patients may have no symptoms and might never seek medical attention. Data suggest that 1 in 4 people over the age of 40 will develop AF in their lifetime. About 10% of patients over age 80 have experienced the arrhythmia, and some estimates predict the prevalence will double in the next 50 years. This chapter discusses the pathophysiology, genetics, diagnosis, classification, and treatment of AF. Figures show atrial fibrillation and coarse atrial fibrillation plus common right atrial flutter. One algorithm is for oral anticoagulation therapy, and a second shows a recommended hierarchical choice of antiarrhythmic therapies versus catheter ablation for recurrent symptomatic atrial fibrillation. Tables list classification, diagnostic evaluation of, clinical consequences of, and conditions often associated with atrial fibrillation. Three scoring systems are included: 1) for congestive heart failure, hypertension, diabetes, stroke, and transient ischemic attack; 2) to assess the risk of bleeding with oral anticoagulation, and 3) data and proportion of patients from the Euro Heart Survey. Other tables include long-term anticoagulation guidelines for atrial fibrillation, intravenous drugs used for acute rate control, oral drugs used for chronic rate control, and antiarrhythmic drugs for conversion of atrial fibrillation and/or maintenance of sinus rhythm. In addition, there’s a summary of randomized trials weighing rate control and rhythm control strategies, plus schemes for categorizing thromboembolism risk.
This review contains 4 figures, 15 tables, and 131 references.
- 11
Ventricular Arrhythmias
- ROY M. JOHN, MD, PHDAssociate Director EP Laboratory, Director, Experimental Research, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- WILLIAM G STEVENSON, MDDirector, Clinical Cardiac Electrophysiology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFVentricular arrhythmias are common in all forms of heart disease and are an important cause of cardiac arrest and sudden death. Many ventricular arrhythmias are benign but may serve as a marker for underlying disease or its severity. Others are life threatening. The significance of an arrhythmia is determined by the specific characteristics of the arrhythmia and the associated heart disease, and these features guide evaluation and therapy. This review discusses various mechanisms and types of ventricular arrhythmias and management based on clinical presentation (including patients with symptomatic arrhythmia and increased risk of sudden death without arrhythmia symptoms). Genetic arrhythmia syndromes, such as abnormalities of repolarization and the QT interval, catecholaminergic polymorphic ventricular tachycardia (VT), and inherited cardiomyopathies, are discussed in depth. Under the rubric of management of ventricular arrhythmias, drug therapy for ventricular arrhythmias, implantable cardioverter-defibrillators (ICDs), and catheter ablation for VT are also covered. Tables chart out guideline recommendations for ICD therapy, drugs for the management of ventricular arrhythmias, and indications and contraindications for catheter ablation of ventricular arrhythmias. Electrocardiograms are provided, as well as management algorithms for ventricular arrhythmias based on patient presentation, and an algorithm for identifying patients with systolic heart failure and left ventricular ejection less than or equal to 35% who are candidates for consideration of an ICD for primary prevention of sudden cardiac death.
This review contains 5 figures, 8 tables, and 61 references.
Keywords: Ventricular arrhythmias, implanted cardioverter-defibrillator (ICD), Ventricular tachycardia (VT), Premature Ventricular Contractions (PVC), Myocardial Infarction (MI), Brugada syndrome, Arrhythmogenic right ventricular cardiomyopathy (ARVC), electrocardiographic (ECG)
- 12
Pacemaker Therapy
- SHAMAI A. GROSSMAN, MD, MSAssociate Professor of Emergency Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Vice Chair for Health Care Quality, Harvard Medical Faculty Physicians, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe number of permanent pacemakers implanted per year increased by 55.6% between 1993 and 2009, and is continuing to rise. Accordingly, the number of patients treated in the emergency department who have permanent pacemakers is increasing, and it is important for physicians in the emergency department to be familiar with the operation and potential complications of these devices. This review covers the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, diagnosis and treatment, and disposition and outcomes for patients with pacemakers presenting to the emergency department.
This review contains 6 figures, 10 tables, and 25 references.
Keywords: Pacemaker, sinus node, atrioventricular block, supraventricular tachycardia, bifascicular block, carotid sinus dysfunction, cardiac sarcoidosis, ventricular pacing, cardiac resynchronization therapy
- 13
Valvular Heart Disease - Part I
- MIRIAM S. JACOB, MDAdvanced Fellow in Heart Failure, Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
- BRIAN P GRIFFIN, MDJohn and Rosemary Brown Chair in Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
Purchase PDFValvular heart disease is an important cause of cardiac morbidity in developed countries despite a decline in the prevalence of rheumatic disease in those countries. This chapter discusses the many etiologies of valvular heart disease and presents methods for assessment and management. Specific valvular lesions discussed include mitral stenosis, mitral regurgitation, mitral valve prolapse, aortic stenosis, aortic regurgitation, and tricuspid and pulmonary disease. The section on tricuspid disease includes a discussion of mechanical prostheses (ball-in-cage and tilting-disk) and biologic prostheses (xenografts, allografts, and autografts) and their complications.
This review contains 6 figures, 13 tables, 69 references.
Keywords: Valvular heart disease, stenosis, regurgitation, mitral regurgitation, mitral valve prolapse (MVP), aortic stenosis, congenital bicuspid valve, senile valvular calcification, aortic regurgitation, chordae or papillary muscles
- 14
Congenital Heart Disease in Adults
By Susan E. Haynes, MD; Heather L. Bartlett, MD; David J Skorton, MD; Luke J Lamers, MD
Purchase PDFCongenital Heart Disease in Adults
- SUSAN E. HAYNES, MDAssociate Professor, Department of Pediatrics, University of Iowa Children’s Hospital, Iowa City, IA
- HEATHER L. BARTLETT, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Pediatrics, Director, Adult Congenital Heart Disease Program, University of Iowa Children’s Hospital, Iowa City, IA
- DAVID J SKORTON, MDProfessor, Departments of Medicine and Pediatrics, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York, NY and Department of Biomedical Engineering, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY
- LUKE J LAMERS, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Pediatrics, Director, Pediatric Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory, University of Wisconsin, Madison, WI
Purchase PDFWith advances in medical and surgical care, an increasing number of children with congenital diseases of the heart and vasculature now survive to adulthood. The proportion of adults who are affected by congenital heart disease is expected to continue to increase. Thus, it is important for clinicians to be knowledgeable about the care of these patients. This review examines acyanotic disorders (shunts and valvular lesions), vascular anomalies, cyanotic disorders, and women’s health issues. Figures show the anatomy of atrial septal defects, transcatheter closure of atrial septal defects, an anatomic cross section showing the atrioventricular septum, the anatomic positions of ventricular septal defects, a computed tomography scan of aortic coarctation, angiogram of a persistent left superior vena cava draining into the right atrium, systemic artery-to-pulmonary artery shunts, magnetic resonance image of a patient with repaired tetralogy of Fallot and long-standing pulmonary valve insufficiency, treatment of pulmonary valve regurgitation with a transcatheter pulmonary valve, computed tomographic images of a patient with atrial switch palliation of transposition of the great arteries and multiple baffle obstructions, stages in the repair of functional single ventricles, and echocardiograms of a patient with Ebstein anomaly. Tables list recommendations for pulmonary valve replacement in repaired tetralogy of Fallot, conditions in which pregnancy is high risk, and cardiac indications for fetal echocardiography.
This review contains 12 figures, 4 tables, and 62 references.
- 15
Hypertension
- MARC P BONACA, MD, MPHVascular Section, Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHypertension is a common chronic disorder with an increasing prevalence in the context of an aging population. Patients with hypertension are at risk for adverse cardiovascular, renal, and neurologic outcomes. Treatment of hypertension reduces this associated risk; therefore, early diagnosis and systematic management are critical in reducing morbidity and mortality. Although hypertension is multifactorial, a large component is related to lifestyle, including excess sodium intake, lack of physical activity, and obesity. Lifestyle intervention and education, therefore, are critical to both prevention and treatment of hypertension. Patients diagnosed with hypertension should be evaluated for their overall risk, with specific therapies and treatment targets guided by their characteristics and comorbidities. Several professional and guideline societies have published recommendations with regard to the diagnosis and treatment of hypertension, which have many similarities but also several areas of discussion and ongoing debate. Recent evolutions in the field include the expanded indications for home-based and ambulatory blood pressure monitoring and outcomes trials, which add important data regarding optimal treatment targets. These evolutions are likely to be addressed in ongoing guideline updates.
This review contains 10 figures, 15 tables, and 67 references.
Key words: ambulatory blood pressure monitoring, antihypertensive therapy, blood pressure, blood pressure targets, cardiovascular risk, high blood pressure, home blood pressure monitoring, hypertension, screening, secondary hypertension
- 16
Diseases of the Aorta
- ANNA M BOOHER, MDClinical Assistant Professor, Division of Cardiovascular Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
- KIM A EAGLE, MDAlbion Walter Hewlett Professor of Internal Medicine, Chief of Clinical Cardiology, Clinical Director, Cardiovascular Center, Division of Cardiovascular Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFThis review covers the major presentations affecting the aorta: aortic aneurysms (abdominal aortic aneurysms and thoracic aortic aneurysms), acute aortic syndromes (including aortic dissection, intramural hematoma, and penetrating atherosclerotic ulcer), other nonacute aortic processes, and traumatic disease of the aorta. The section on abdominal aortic aneurysms covers screening, clinical presentation, diagnostic evaluation, management to reduce the risk of aneurysm rupture, open surgical treatment and endovascular aortic repair, and the role of medical therapy. The section on thoracic aortic aneurysms also covers pathophysiology, etiology, and inherited and inflammatory conditions. Aortic dissections affect either the ascending aorta (type A) or the descending aorta (type B) and may be classified as acute or chronic. The discussion of aortic dissection describes the clinical presentation, diagnostic steps and decisions, and treatment for both type A and type B dissections. The figures include two algorithms: a potential management strategy for patients with thoracic aortic aneurysm and a logical procedure for the evaluation and treatment of a suspected aortic dissection. Figures also include illustrations, computed tomographic images, and echocardiograms of various aortic presentations. Tables list normal aortic dimensions by computed tomographic angiography and echocardiography, etiology and associated factors in diseases of the aorta, revised Ghent criteria for the diagnosis of Marfan syndrome, size criteria for elective surgical intervention in thoracic aortic aneurysm, and independent predictors of in-hospital death. Also included is a follow-up imaging timeline for acute aortic syndromes.
This review contains 9 figures, 6 tables, and 132 references.
- 17
Peripheral Artery Diseases
- MARK A CREAGER, MD Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Director, Vascular Center, Head, Vascular Medicine Section, Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFPeripheral arterial diseases (PADs) compromise blood flow to the limbs. Common causes of arterial obstruction include atherosclerosis, thrombus, embolism, vasculitis, arterial entrapment, adventitial cysts, fibromuscular dysplasia, arterial dissection, trauma, and vasospasm. The most frequently encountered cause of PAD is peripheral atherosclerosis. This chapter considers its epidemiology and risk factors, as well as its diagnosis, including clinical presentation and noninvasive diagnostic tests. This chapter also discusses acute arterial occlusion, atheroembolism, popliteal artery entrapment, thromboangiitis obliterans, and acrocyanosis, as well as the etiology, diagnosis, and treatment of Raynaud phenomenon. The chapter contains 4 tables and 7 figures. Tables describe the Fontaine classification and clinical categories of chronic limb ischemia, provide examples of leg segmental pressure measurements in a patient with calf claudication and foot pain, and summarize secondary causes of Raynaud phenomenon. Figures include a photograph of an ischemic foot demonstrating dependent rubor, measurement of the ankle:brachial index, ultrasonography of a stenosis of the right common femoral artery, magnetic resonance angiograms of patients with calf claudication, arteriograms of critical ischemia of the foot and of disabling claudication of the leg, and ischemia of the toes caused by atheroemboli. This chapter contains 80 references.
- 18
Venous Thromboembolism
- SAMUEL Z. GOLDHABER, MDProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School Director, Venous Thromboembolism Research Group
Purchase PDFVenous thromboembolism, which involves venous thrombosis and pulmonary embolism, is a leading cause of morbidity and mortality in hospitalized patients and is being seen with increasing frequency in outpatients. This chapter discusses the risk factors, etiology, classification, pathophysiology, natural history, prognosis, diagnosis (including venous thrombosis, recurrent venous thrombosis, and pulmonary embolism), prophylaxis, and treatment of venous thromboembolism (including the pharmacology of antithrombotic agents), as well as venous thromboembolism in pregnancy and miscellaneous thromboembolic disorders (including thrombosis of unusual sites).
This review contains 8 figures, 16 tables, and 79 references.
Keywords: Venous thromboembolism, pulmonary embolism, deep vein thrombosis, embolectomy, thrombolysis, hypercoagulability, duplex ultrasonography, D-dimer, anticoagulation
- 19
Diseases of the Pericardium, Cardiac Tumors, and Cardiac Trauma
By Terrence D. Welch, MD; Salima Shafi, MD; Jae K. Oh, MD
Purchase PDFDiseases of the Pericardium, Cardiac Tumors, and Cardiac Trauma
- TERRENCE D. WELCH, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Section of Cardiology, Dartmouth-Hitchcock Medical Center, Lebanon, NH
- SALIMA SHAFI, MDCardiovascular Consultant, United Heart and Vascular Clinic, St. Paul, MN
- JAE K. OH, MDSamsung Professor of Cardiovascular Diseases, Division of Cardiovascular Diseases, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFThe pericardium consists of an outer fibrous layer and an inner serous layer. The serous layer covers the surface of the heart and the proximal portion of the large vessels (visceral pericardium), folds back on itself, and lines the fibrous layer (parietal pericardium). Normal pericardial thickness is less than or equal to 2 mm. The space between the visceral and the parietal layer forms the pericardial cavity, which normally contains 10 to 50 mL of fluid. The pericardium lubricates and reduces friction, serves as a barrier against infection, maintains the heart in a relatively stable position within the thoracic cavity, and prevents acute distention of the cardiac chambers. None of these functions, however, is essential for life, and the pericardium may, in fact, be absent at birth.
This review contains 16 figures, 1 table, and 50 references.
Key Words: Pericardium, parietal pericardium, visceral pericardium
- 20
Medical Management of Pulmonary Embolism
By Aaron B Waxman, MD, PhD; Andrew J Schissler, MD
Purchase PDFMedical Management of Pulmonary Embolism
- AARON B WAXMAN, MD, PHDPulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Director, Pulmonary Vascular Disease Program, Executive Director, Center for Pulmonary-Heart Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Associate Professor of Medicine/Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- ANDREW J SCHISSLER, MDClinical and Research Fellow, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAcute pulmonary embolism (PE) can be fatal and requires prompt medical attention. This chapter reviews the treatment of acute PE, including a detailed report of the acute- and long-term management of high-risk (“massive”), medium-risk (“submassive”), and low-risk thrombi. It summarizes the reperfusion therapies available in hemodynamically unstable patients with massive PEs such as thrombolysis, embolectomy, and percutaneous catheter-directed treatment. There is further in-depth examination of the various anticoagulants available including parenteral therapies, vitamin K antagonists, and direct oral anticoagulants. Recommendations on the treatment duration are discussed. Other considerations are described, including how management changes in the pregnant patient with acute PE, when venous filters should be considered and whether to initiate treatment before confirming a diagnosis. Overall this chapter serves as an excellent evidenced-based guide to better manage the various presentations of acute PE.
This review contains 3 figures, 5 tables and 47 references
Key Words: anticoagulation, embolectomy, PE, pulmonary embolism, reperfusion therapy, thrombolysis, treatment
- 21
Medical Management of Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
By Inderjit Singh, MD, MRCPI ; Aaron B Waxman, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFMedical Management of Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
- INDERJIT SINGH, MD, MRCPI Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine Brigham and Women’s Hospital Harvard Medical School Boston, USA
- AARON B WAXMAN, MD, PHDPulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Director, Pulmonary Vascular Disease Program, Executive Director, Center for Pulmonary-Heart Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Associate Professor of Medicine/Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe medical management of pulmonary arterial hypertension (PAH) has advanced considerably over the years. Once the diagnosis of PAH is made, the medical management includes both conventional and PAH-pathway specific therapies. Five different classes of drugs are now available targeting the endothelin, prostacyclin, and nitric oxide pathways (i.e. endothelin receptor antagonists, phosphodiesterase-5 inhibitors, soluble guanylate cyclase stimulators, prostacyclin analogues, and prostacyclin receptor agonists). These targeted therapies are approved for treatment of patients with PAH and chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension (CTEPH) only. Long-term and event-driven studies of novel drugs have led to further improvement in the medical management of PAH and CTEPH. In this review, we will focus on the medical management of patients with PAH and CTEPH.
This review contains 4 figures, 7 Tables and 50 references
Keywords: Pulmonary arterial hypertension, Chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension, Medical management, Pulmonary vasodilators, Phosphodiesterase inhibitor, Soluble guanylate cyclase stimulator, Endothelin receptor antagonist, Prostacyclin receptor agonist
- 22
Risk Factors and Epidemiology of Pulmonary Embolism
By Aaron B Waxman, MD, PhD; Aaron W Aday, MD
Purchase PDFRisk Factors and Epidemiology of Pulmonary Embolism
- AARON B WAXMAN, MD, PHDPulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Director, Pulmonary Vascular Disease Program, Executive Director, Center for Pulmonary-Heart Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Associate Professor of Medicine/Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- AARON W ADAY, MDDivision of Cardiovascular Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, United States
Purchase PDFMore than 200,000 individuals are hospitalized with an acute pulmonary embolism in the United States annually. Despite advances in diagnosis and treatment, pulmonary embolism accounts for nearly 1% of all cardiovascular-related deaths each year in the United States alone. Those who survive an acute episode remain at a risk of recurrent events as well as ongoing dyspnea, reduced quality of life, and chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension. Recognized risk factors for pulmonary embolism include advanced age, obesity, smoking, malignancy, immobilization from any cause, pregnancy and the postpartum period, oral contraceptives, and hormone replacement therapy. Numerous heritable and acquired thrombophilias increase the risk of pulmonary embolism. Additionally, inflammation and autoimmune disorders are increasingly recognized as potent risk factors for pulmonary embolism.
This review contains 3 figures, 6 tables, 54 references.
Key Words: anticoagulation, deep vein thrombosis, epidemiology, genetics, inflammation, malignancy, pulmonary embolism, thrombosis, venous thromboembolism
- 23
Aortic Valve Stenosis
- STEPHEN H LITTLE, MD, FRCPC, FACC, FASEMedical Director, Valve Clinic, Houston Methodist Hospital, Houston, TX, United States
- JEFFREY R PARKER, MDHouston Methodist Hospital, Houston, TX, United States
Purchase PDFValvular heart disease is a common clinical syndrome that physicians face on a routine basis. Aortic stenosis (AS) accounts for a substantial amount of these cases with differing etiologies from rheumatic, congenital bicuspid to calcific AS. Clinical history and physical examination can assist in assessing the presence and severity of AS, but echocardiography has been the gold standard for the diagnosis of AS and to assess severity. Multimodality imaging including cardiac computed tomography, magnetic resonance imaging, and 3D printing have evolved over the years, lending aid in the diagnosis and prognostication of AS. This review provides a succinct overview of the prevalence, pathophysiology, clinical assessment, and diagnosis of AS.
This review contains 10 figures, 3 tables and 49 references.
Key Words: aortic stenosis, cardiac computed tomography, cardiac magnetic resonance imaging, 3D printing, low-flow low-gradient aortic stenosis
- 24
Valvular Heart Disease - Part II
- MIRIAM S. JACOB, MDAdvanced Fellow in Heart Failure, Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
- BRIAN P GRIFFIN, MDJohn and Rosemary Brown Chair in Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
Purchase PDFValvular heart disease is an important cause of cardiac morbidity in developed countries despite a decline in the prevalence of rheumatic disease in those countries. This chapter discusses the many etiologies of valvular heart disease and presents methods for assessment and management. Specific valvular lesions discussed include mitral stenosis, mitral regurgitation, mitral valve prolapse, aortic stenosis, aortic regurgitation, and tricuspid and pulmonary disease. The section on tricuspid disease includes a discussion of mechanical prostheses (ball-in-cage and tilting-disk) and biologic prostheses (xenografts, allografts, and autografts) and their complications.
This review contains 5 figures, 9 tables, and 53 references.
Keywords: Valvular heart disease, stenosis, regurgitation, mitral regurgitation, mitral valve prolapse (MVP), aortic stenosis, congenital bicuspid valve, senile valvular calcification, aortic regurgitation, chordae or papillary muscles
- 25
The Clinical Use of Nonimaging Exercise Stress Testing
By Aswini Kumar, MD; Brinda Muthuswamy, MD; W Lane Duvall, MD; Paul D Thompson, MD
Purchase PDFThe Clinical Use of Nonimaging Exercise Stress Testing
- ASWINI KUMAR, MDDivision of Cardiology, Department of Medicine, University of Connecticut School of Medicine, Farmington, CT
- BRINDA MUTHUSWAMY, MDDivision of Cardiology, Hartford Hospital, Hartford, CT
- W LANE DUVALL, MDHeart and Vascular Institute, Hartford Healthcare, Hartford, CT
- PAUL D THOMPSON, MDHeart and Vascular Institute, Hartford Healthcare, Hartford, CT
Purchase PDFExercise stress testing is an exceptionally useful cardiovascular test providing a wealth of information that can be used in patient management. It can be used in the diagnosis and/or management of chest pain, hypertension, arrhythmia, and heart failure. Non-imaging exercise stress testing not only helps evaluate the etiology of clinical symptoms but also provides an opportunity to evaluate ECG changes with exercise, total exercise capacity, heart rate response or chronotropic index, blood pressure response, heart rate recovery, and to make estimates of the risk of coronary artery disease using tools such as the Duke Treadmill Score. These parameters, individually and collectively, provide valuable information on the likelihood of disease and an individual’s prognosis. In addition, exercise testing is inexpensive, quick and widely available compared to imaging studies.
This review contains 6 figures, 5 tables, and 68 references.
Keywords: blood pressure response, chronotropic incompetence, coronary artery disease, Duke Treadmill Score, exercise physiology metabolic equivalents (METs), exercise stress test, exercise treadmill test, exercise-induced hypertension, heart rate recovery, maximal exercise capacity, ST-segment deviation
- 26
Acute Pulmonary Embolism
- BRETT J CARROLL, MDDivision of Cardiovascular Medicine, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- ERIC A SECEMSKY, MD, MSCDivision of Cardiovascular Medicine, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFPulmonary embolism (PE) is a frequently encountered clinical condition with both short- and long-term adverse consequences. An integrated approach to diagnosis is important to maximize early diagnosis but also to minimize the unnecessary utilization of diagnostic imaging. Comprehensive risk stratification with clinical features and assessment of right ventricular strain by diagnostic imaging and cardiac biomarker results are essential to guide initial management decisions. There is a growing treatment arsenal for acute PE, including increased anticoagulation and advanced therapeutic options such as catheter-based therapy. Despite such advances, mortality remains high, particularly among those who present critically ill with PE, and long-term physical and psychological effects can persist in many patients for years after the initial diagnosis.
This review contains 7 figures, 6 tables, and 69 references.
Key Words: anticoagulation, catheter-directed therapy, chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension pulmonary embolism, computed tomography, echocardiography, fibrinolysis, risk stratification, venous thromboembolism
- 27
Stable Ischemic Heart Disease: Medical Therapy With or Without Revascularization
By Ashish Sarraju, MD; David J Maron, MD
Purchase PDFStable Ischemic Heart Disease: Medical Therapy With or Without Revascularization
- ASHISH SARRAJU, MDFellow, Cardiovascular Medicine, Department of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford
- DAVID J MARON, MDClinical Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, Division of Cardiovascular Medicine, Department of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, Stanford Prevention Research Center, Stanford University, Stanford, CA
Purchase PDFCoronary artery disease (CAD) poses a significant global public health burden. Patients with CAD who do not present with acute coronary syndromes are considered to have stable ischemic heart disease (SIHD). Options for the management of SIHD are medical therapy including pharmacologic therapy and lifestyle modification and revascularization with either percutaneous coronary intervention (PCI) or coronary artery bypass grafting (CABG). Guideline-directed medical therapy is recommended for all patients with SIHD. Aside from severe stenosis in an unprotected left main coronary artery, the role of routine revascularization in the management of SIHD is unclear. Early CABG trials from the 1970s and 1980s demonstrated prognostic benefit with CABG versus medical therapy, but these results have limited applicability in the setting of modern medical therapy, including the widespread use of statins and aspirin and intensive lifestyle interventions. Contemporary strategy trials examining PCI plus medical therapy versus medical therapy alone have not demonstrated prognostic benefit with the addition of PCI. The addition of revascularization offers consistent symptom and quality-of-life benefit compared with medical therapy alone based on trial data, though this benefit may be time limited with PCI. Thus, there is a state of equipoise regarding the addition of revascularization to guideline-directed medical therapy in the management of SIHD. Therefore, shared decision-making is key when determining the best management strategy for a patient with SIHD and should include discussion of expected risks and benefits based on high-quality evidence, costs, and patient preferences.
This review contains 6 figures, 8 tables, and 55 references.
Key Words: angina, antianginal therapy, coronary artery disease, coronary artery bypass grafting, guideline-directed medical therapy, ischemia, optimal medical therapy, percutaneous coronary intervention, revascularization
- 28
Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension: Advancing Insights Into a Historically Neglected Disease
By Michael V. Genuardi, MD, MS; Stephen Y. Chan, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFPulmonary Arterial Hypertension: Advancing Insights Into a Historically Neglected Disease
- MICHAEL V. GENUARDI, MD, MSCenter for Pulmonary Vascular Biology and Medicine, Pittsburgh Heart, Lung, Blood, and Vascular Medicine Institute, Division of Cardiology, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Pittsburgh, PA
- STEPHEN Y. CHAN, MD, PHDCenter for Pulmonary Vascular Biology and Medicine, Pittsburgh Heart, Lung, Blood, and Vascular Medicine Institute, Division of Cardiology, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Pittsburgh, PA
Purchase PDFPulmonary arterial hypertension (PAH) is a rare spectrum of closely related diseases with myriad genetic, infectious, toxic, and immunologic triggers characterized by pathologic pulmonary vascular remodeling. While the natural history of PAH is marked by progressive dyspnea, hypoxia, right ventricular failure, and death, modern insights into disease pathogenesis, combined with breakthroughs in therapeutics, has greatly improved morbidity and time to disease worsening over the past two decades. Traditionally thought of as a disease of imbalance between vasodilators, such as nitric oxide and prostacyclin, and vasoconstrictors such as endothelin-1, more recent investigations have revealed important roles for perturbations in cellular metabolism, fibroblast activity, extracellular matrix maintenance, and apoptosis which contribute to pulmonary artery smooth muscle cell proliferation. Careful history and physical exam, along with echocardiography and right heart catheterization, remain essential for accurate workup and diagnosis. Cardiopulmonary exercise testing, cardiac magnetic resonance, and genetic testing have important ancillary roles. The number of approved pulmonary vasodilator therapies for PAH continues to expand, with evidence demonstrating the survival benefits of up-front combination therapy. Future prospects of next generation therapies that address the molecular origins of disease combined with comprehensive molecular profiling may usher in a new era of precision medicine for PAH.
This review contains 7 figures, 5 tables, and 57 references.
Keywords: pulmonary hypertension, vascular biology, therapeutics, hemodynamics, epidemiology, exercise physiology, genetic basis of disease, connective tissue disease, cardiac magnetic resonance imagining
- 29
Heritable and Acquired Thrombophilias in Clinical Practice
By Hanny Al-Samkari, MD; Nathan T. Connell, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFHeritable and Acquired Thrombophilias in Clinical Practice
- HANNY AL-SAMKARI, MDDivision of Hematology, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- NATHAN T. CONNELL, MD, MPHHematology Division, Brigham & Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA; Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThrombosis is common in clinical practice. Venous thromboembolism in particular raises questions of a possible underlying hereditary or acquired thrombophilic state. Despite considerable data describing the impact of various thrombophilic states on risks of initial and recurrent thromboembolic events, thrombophilia testing is not standardized. An understanding of the utility and pitfalls of clinical thrombophilia testing is necessary to employ this testing properly. When utilized appropriately, thrombophilia testing can be vital in informing an individual patient’s thrombosis risk and pursuing optimal anticoagulant management. Hereditary thrombophilia testing involves investigation for factor V Leiden, the prothrombin G202010A gene mutation, and deficiencies of the natural anticoagulants protein C, protein S, and antithrombin. Assessment for acquired thrombophilias is perhaps even more important, recognizing the possibility for myeloproliferative neoplasms, antiphospholipid antibody syndrome, occult malignancy and other important acquired thrombotic predispositions. Timing of thrombophilia testing in relation to anticoagulation, acute thrombosis, and use of hormonal agents or pregnancy is critical to ensure accurate diagnosis. This review describes each of the most important hereditary and acquired thrombophilias, explains their relationship to venous and arterial thrombosis, delineates evidence-based indications for thrombophilia testing, identifies potential testing pitfalls, and synthesizes the key points in outlining algorithms for thrombophilia testing in clinical practice.
This review contains 4 figures, 4 tables, and 48 references.
Key words: thrombophilia, venous thromboembolism, pulmonary embolus, deep vein thrombosis, factor V Leiden, prothrombin gene mutation, protein C deficiency, protein S deficiency, antiphospholipid antibody syndrome, hypercoagulability of malignancy
- 30
St-segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction
By Grant William Reed, MD; Christopher Paul Cannon, MD
Purchase PDFSt-segment Elevation Myocardial Infarction
- GRANT WILLIAM REED, MDFellow, Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH
- CHRISTOPHER PAUL CANNON, MD Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Executive Director of Cardiometabolic Trials, Harvard Clinical Research Institute, Boston, MA
- 31
Supraventricular Tachycardia
By Laurence M. Epstein, MD; Saurabh Kumar, BSc(Med)/MBBS, PhD
Purchase PDFSupraventricular Tachycardia
- LAURENCE M. EPSTEIN, MDChief, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- SAURABH KUMAR, BSC(MED)/MBBS, PHDAdvanced Clinical Electrophysiology Fellow, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Woman’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 32
Pacemaker Therapy
- SHAMAI A. GROSSMAN, MD, MSAssociate Professor of Emergency Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Vice Chair for Health Care Quality, Harvard Medical Faculty Physicians, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- 33
Cardiac Catheterization and Intervention
By Dharam J. Kumbhani, MD, SM, MRCP, FACC; Deepak L Bhatt, MD, MPH, FACP
Purchase PDFCardiac Catheterization and Intervention
- DHARAM J. KUMBHANI, MD, SM, MRCP, FACCAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Cardiology, University of Texas Southwestern Medical School, Dallas, TX
- DEEPAK L BHATT, MD, MPH, FACPExecutive Director of Interventional Cardiovascular Programs, Brigham and Womens Hospital Heart & Vascular Center, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 34
Heart Transplantation - Part II: Aspects of Procedure and Medical Management
By Michael M. Givertz, MD
Purchase PDFHeart Transplantation - Part II: Aspects of Procedure and Medical Management
- MICHAEL M. GIVERTZ, MDMedical Director, Heart Transplant and Mechanical Circulatory Support and Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School
Purchase PDFIschemic time, defined as the period from donor procurement to surgical implantation and restoration of intrinsic allograft function, is an independent risk factor for post-transplant mortality. In general, the ischemic time should be less than 4 hours. Most programs will accept donor hearts from within their own UNOS region or within a radius of 500 to 1000 miles to minimize ischemic time. Given the prevalent use of ventricular assist devices (VAD) as bridge to transplant and the increased time required to explant both the native heart and VAD hardware, patients must live within 2-3 hours (by car or air) of the transplant center. Coordinating the donor harvest and recipient preparation requires close collaboration between multiple surgeons, surgical teams and coordinators.
This review contains 11 figures, 7 tables, and 52 references.
Key words: heart transplant, immunosuppression, allograft rejection, infection, hypertension, hyperlipidemia, diabetes, malignancy, cardiac allograft vasculopathy, survival
- 35
Chronic Stable Angina
- BENJAMIN J SCIRICA, MD, MPHSenior Investigator, TIMI Study Group, Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- J. ANTONIO T. GUTIERREZ, MDCardiovascular Medicine Fellow, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
- 36
Valvular Heart Disease - Part I
- MIRIAM S. JACOB, MDAdvanced Fellow in Heart Failure, Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
- BRIAN P GRIFFIN, MDJohn and Rosemary Brown Chair in Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
- 37
Valvular Heart Disease - Part II
- MIRIAM S. JACOB, MDAdvanced Fellow in Heart Failure, Department of Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
- BRIAN P GRIFFIN, MDJohn and Rosemary Brown Chair in Cardiovascular Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland OH
- 38
Venous Thromboembolism
- SAMUEL Z. GOLDHABER, MDProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School Director, Venous Thromboembolism Research Group
- 39
Congenital Heart Disease in Adults
By Susan E. Haynes, MD; Heather L. Bartlett, MD; David J Skorton, MD; Luke J Lamers, MD
Purchase PDFCongenital Heart Disease in Adults
- SUSAN E. HAYNES, MDAssociate Professor, Department of Pediatrics, University of Iowa Children’s Hospital, Iowa City, IA
- HEATHER L. BARTLETT, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Pediatrics, Director, Adult Congenital Heart Disease Program, University of Iowa Children’s Hospital, Iowa City, IA
- DAVID J SKORTON, MDProfessor, Departments of Medicine and Pediatrics, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York, NY and Department of Biomedical Engineering, Cornell University, Ithaca, NY
- LUKE J LAMERS, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Pediatrics, Director, Pediatric Cardiac Catheterization Laboratory, University of Wisconsin, Madison, WI
- 40
Hypertension
- MARC P BONACA, MD, MPHVascular Section, Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 41
Risk Factors and Epidemiology of Pulmonary Embolism
By Aaron B Waxman, MD, PhD; Aaron W Aday, MD
Purchase PDFRisk Factors and Epidemiology of Pulmonary Embolism
- AARON B WAXMAN, MD, PHDPulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Director, Pulmonary Vascular Disease Program, Executive Director, Center for Pulmonary-Heart Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Associate Professor of Medicine/Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- AARON W ADAY, MDDivision of Cardiovascular Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, United States
- 42
Heart Failure
- SACHIN P SHAH, MDCenter for Advanced Heart Disease, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, Director, Cardiovascular Intensive Care Unit, Lahey Hospital and Medical Center, Burlington, MA
- MANDEEP R. MEHRA, MDMedical Director, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 43
Atrial Fibrillation
- GREGORY F. MICHAUD, MDDirector, Center for the Advanced Management of Atrial Fibrillation, Brigham and Women’s, Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MD
- ROY M. JOHN, MD, PHDAssociate Director EP Laboratory, Director, Experimental Research, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 44
Ventricular Arrhythmias
- ROY M. JOHN, MD, PHDAssociate Director EP Laboratory, Director, Experimental Research, Cardiac Arrhythmia Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- WILLIAM G STEVENSON, MDDirector, Clinical Cardiac Electrophysiology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 45
Aortic Valve Stenosis
- STEPHEN H LITTLE, MD, FRCPC, FACC, FASEMedical Director, Valve Clinic, Houston Methodist Hospital, Houston, TX, United States
- JEFFREY R PARKER, MDHouston Methodist Hospital, Houston, TX, United States
- 46
Approach to the Cardiovascular Patient
- CATHERINE M. OTTO, MDJ. Ward Kennedy-Hamilton Endowed Chair in Cardiology, Professor of Medicine, Departmentof Medicine, Division of Cardiology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- DAVID M SHAVELLE, MDAssociate Clinical Professor of Medicine, Keck School of Medicine at USC, Director, Interventional Cardiology Fellowship, Director, Cardiac Catheterization Laboratories, USC Medical Center, Los Angeles County, Los Angeles, CA
Purchase PDFApproach to the Cardiovascular Patient
- 47
Cardiovascular Biomarkers
- PARUL U GANDHI, MDClinical and Research Fellow, Department of Medicine, Cardiology Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- JAMES L JANUZZI JR, MDRoman W. DeSanctis Endowed Clinical Scholar, Department of Medicine, Cardiology Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Hutter Family Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 48
Medical Management of Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
By Inderjit Singh, MD, MRCPI ; Aaron B Waxman, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFMedical Management of Pulmonary Arterial Hypertension
- INDERJIT SINGH, MD, MRCPI Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine Brigham and Women’s Hospital Harvard Medical School Boston, USA
- AARON B WAXMAN, MD, PHDPulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Director, Pulmonary Vascular Disease Program, Executive Director, Center for Pulmonary-Heart Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Associate Professor of Medicine/Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 1
- Competency-based Patient Care
- 1
On Being a Physician
- ELIZABETH G NABEL, MD, FACPPresident, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe role of a physician as healer has grown more complex, and emphasis will increasingly be on patient and family-centric care. Physicians must provide compassionate, appropriate, and effective patient care by demonstrating competence in the attributes that are essential to successful medical practice. Beyond simply gaining medical knowledge, modern physicians embrace lifelong learning and need effective interpersonal and communication skills. Medical professionalism encompasses multiple attributes, and physicians are increasingly becoming part of a larger health care team. To ensure that physicians are trained in an environment that fosters innovation and alleviates administrative burdens, the Accreditation Council for Graduate Medical Education has recently revamped the standards of accreditation for today’s more than 130 specialties and subspecialties.
This review contains six references.
- 2
Ethical and Social Issues in Medicine
By Roberta Springer Loewy, PhD (PHIL, ETHICS); Erich H. Loewy, MD, FACP (deceased); Faith T. Fitzgerald, MD, MACP
Purchase PDFEthical and Social Issues in Medicine
- ROBERTA SPRINGER LOEWY, PHD (PHIL, ETHICS)Professor and Bioethics Education Consultant, VCF, University of California, Davis, Sacramento, CA
- ERICH H. LOEWY, MD, FACP (DECEASED)Professor and Founding Chair of the Bioethics Program (Emeritus), University of California, Davis, Sacramento, CA
- FAITH T. FITZGERALD, MD, MACPProfessor of Internal Medicine, University of California, Davis, Sacramento, CA
Purchase PDFSo rapidly has the field of health care ethics continued to grow that, when recently “googled,” the term produced 28.2 million hits. The challenge is to address the ethical and social issues in medicine in this very limited article space. It remains an impossible task to present more than a superficial discussion of these complex issues and the complicated cases in which they are to be found. Like good medicine, good ethics cannot be practiced by algorithm. The authors have opted to provide an operational guide to help clinicians sort through the ethical and social quandaries they must face on a daily basis. To that end, the authors have chosen to divide this chapter into the following sections:
1. A brief description of the biopsychosocial nature of ethics and how it differs from personal morality
2. A method for identifying and dealing with ethical issues
3. A discussion of the role of bioethicists and ethics committees
4. The professional fiduciary role of clinicians
5. Listings of some of the common key bioethical and legal terms (online access only)
6. A very brief discussion of the terms cited in the above listings (online access only)This reviews contains 4 tables, 8 references, 1 appendix, and 20 additional readings.
Keywords: Ethical, social, right, wrong, good, bad, obligation, moral authority, critically reflective, and multiperspectival activity, Curiosity, Honesty, Patience, Open-mindedness
- 3
Quality of Care: Performance Measurement and Quality Improvement in Clinical Practice
By Sonali P. Desai, MD, MPH; Allen Kachalia, MD, JD
Purchase PDFQuality of Care: Performance Measurement and Quality Improvement in Clinical Practice
- SONALI P. DESAI, MD, MPHAmbulatory Director, Patient Safety, Center for Clinical Excellence, Associate Director of Quality, Department of Medicine, Division of Rheumatology, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
- ALLEN KACHALIA, MD, JDAssociate Chief Quality Officer, Co-Director, Center for Clinical Excellence, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAttention to the quality of care within the United States health care system has grown tremendously over the past decade. We have witnessed a significant change in how quality improvement and clinical performance measurement are approached. The current focus on quality and safety stems in part from the increasingly clear realization that more services and technological advancement are not automatically equivalent to high-quality care. Much of the discussion about cost and quality in health care is shifting towards the concept of value. Value is defined as health outcomes achieved per dollar spent (in other words, an assessment of the quality of care per cost). This chapter reviews the current state of quality improvement in health care and, because improvement cannot be determined without measurement, reviews several aspects of effective clinical performance measurement. Since many measures are already in place, the chapter describes some of the organizations involved in quality measurement and improvement, as well the approaches they utilize. It looks at the multiple strategies in place to improve quality, from process management to collaboration, from financial incentives to transparency, and reviews newer models of care delivery that may materialize in the near future. Tables list types of quality measures, characteristics to consider when developing a quality measure, and organizations involved in quality improvement and performance measurement. A figure shows strategies used by the federal government to spur performance measurement and quality improvement.
This review contains 1 figure, 3 tables, and 56 references
Keywords: Quality of care, performance measure, quality improvement, clinical practice, sigma six, transparency
- 4
Practicing Evidence-based Medicine
- MICHAEL BARNETT, MDFellow in General Internal Medicine, Division of General Internal Medicine and Primary Care, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- NITEESH CHOUDHRY, MD, PHDAssociate Professor, Division of Pharmacoepidemiology and Pharmacoeconomics, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFToday, a plethora of resources for evidence-based medicine (EBM) are available via alert services, compendia, and more. In theory, a clinician researching a topic or looking for information regarding a clinical decision should easily find the literature or synopses needed. However, the real challenge lies in recognizing which resources (out of hundreds or possibly thousands) present the best and most reliable evidence. As well, evidence from research is only part of the decision calculus, and the clinician, not the evidence, makes the final decisions. Medical decision analysis attempts to formalize the process and reduce it to algebra, but it is difficult or impossible to represent all the components of a decision mathematically and validly let alone do so in “real time” for individual patients. This review discusses these challenges and more, including how to ask answerable questions, understand the hierarchy for evidence-based information resources, critically appraise evidence, and apply research results to patient care. Figures show the total number of new articles in Medline from 1965 to 2012, a “4S” hierarchy of preappraised medicine, percentage of physician and medical student respondents with a correct or incorrect answer to a question about calculating the positive predictive value of a hypothetical screening test, a nomogram for Bayes’s rule, an example of nomogram use for pulmonary embolism, and a model for evidence-informed clinical decisions. Tables list selected barriers to the implementation of EBM; Patient, Intervention, Comparison, and Outcome (PICO) framework for formulating clinical questions; guides for assessing medical texts for evidence-based features; clinically useful measures of disease frequency and statistical significance and precision; definitions of clinically useful measures of diagnostic test performance and interpretation; definitions of clinically useful measures of treatment effects from clinical trials; summary of results and derived calculations from the North American Symptomatic Carotid Endarterectomy Trial (NASCET); and selected number needed to treat values for common therapies.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 9 tables, and 28 references.
- 5
Medical Evaluation of the Surgical Patient
By Marie Gerhard-Herman, MD; Jonathan Gates, MD
Purchase PDFMedical Evaluation of the Surgical Patient
- MARIE GERHARD-HERMAN, MDDepartment of Medicine, Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Womens Hospital, Boston, MA
- JONATHAN GATES, MDDirector of the Burn and Trauma Unit, Department of Surgery, Brigham and Womens Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFMedical evaluation prior to surgery includes risk assessment and the institution of therapies to decrease perioperative morbidity and mortality to improve patient outcomes. The most effective medical consultation for surgical patients begins with an assessment of the individual patient and knowledge of the planned surgery and anesthesia followed by clear communication of a concise and specific recommended plan of perioperative care to the surgical team. This chapter describes anesthetic, cardiac, pulmonary, hepatic, nutritional, and endocrine risk assessment. Perioperative thrombotic management and postoperative care and complications, including fluid management; pulmonary, cardiac, renal complications; and delirium are discussed. Tables outline the American Society of Anesthesiologists class and perioperative mortality risk, a comparison of the Revised Cardiac Risk Index and National Surgery Quality Improvement Program, Duke Activity Status Index, high-risk stress test findings, markers for increased perioperative risk in pulmonary hypertension, aortic stenosis and nonemergent noncardiac surgery, risk factors for pulmonary complications in noncardiac surgery, the Model for End-Stage Liver Disease score to predict postoperative mortality, venous thromboembolism risk factors and options for pharmacologic prophylactic regimens, perioperative management of warfarin, and Brigham and Women’s Hospital guidelines for postoperative blood product replacement. Figures include a care algorithm for noncardiac surgery, an illustration of types of myocardial infarction, and an algorithm for the treatment of postoperative delirium.
This chapter contains 3 highly rendered figures, 12 tables, 68 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 6
Principles of Neurologic Ethics
- MATTHEW S. SIKET, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Providence, RI
- JAY M. BARUCH, MDAssociate Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Providence, RI
Purchase PDFNeuroethics refers to the branch of applied bioethics pertaining to the neurosciences and emerging technologies that impact our ability to understand or enhance a human mind. In the setting of emergency medicine, the clinician will encounter neuroethical dilemmas pertaining to the acutely brain injured or impaired; similar to other ethical decisions encountered in emergency medicine, such neuroethical dilemmas are often complicated by insufficient information regarding the patient’s wishes and preferences and a short time frame in which to obtain this information. This review examines the basis of neuroethics in emergency medicine; neuroethical inquiry; the neuroscience of ethics and intuition; issues regarding autonomy, informed consent, paternalism, and persuasion; shared decision making; situations in which decision-making capacity is in question; beneficence/nonmaleficence; incidental findings and their implications; risk predictions; and issues of justice. The figure shows the use of tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA) for cerebral ischemia within 3 hours of onset and changes in outcome due to treatment. Tables list common ethical theories, virtues/values of an acute care provider, components of informed consent discussion unique to t-PA in acute ischemic stroke, models of the physician-patient relationship, eight ways to promote effective shared decision making, components of capacity assessment, and emergency department assessment of futility.
This review contains 1 figure, 9 tables, and 90 references.
Keywords: Ethics, autonomy, shared decision-making, moral dilemmas, framing, decision-making capacity, beneficence and nonmaleficence
- 7
Quality of Care: Performance Measurement and Quality Improvement in Clinical Practice
By Sonali P. Desai, MD, MPH; Allen Kachalia, MD, JD
Purchase PDFQuality of Care: Performance Measurement and Quality Improvement in Clinical Practice
- SONALI P. DESAI, MD, MPHAmbulatory Director, Patient Safety, Center for Clinical Excellence, Associate Director of Quality, Department of Medicine, Division of Rheumatology, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
- ALLEN KACHALIA, MD, JDAssociate Chief Quality Officer, Co-Director, Center for Clinical Excellence, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
- 1
- Dermatology
- 1
Approach to the Diagnosis of Skin Disease
By Robert T Brodell, MD; Stephen E Helms, MD; Lindsey B Dolohanty, MD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Diagnosis of Skin Disease
- ROBERT T BRODELL, MDProfessor and Chair, Department of Dermatology and Professor of Pathology, University of Mississippi Medical School, Jackson, MI, Instructor in Dermatology, University of Rochester School of Medicine and Dentistry, Rochester, NY
- STEPHEN E HELMS, MDAssociate Professor of Internal Medicine, Dermatology Section, Northeastern Ohio Universities College of Medicine, Rootstown, Ohio, Assistant Clinical Professor of Dermatology, Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine, Cleveland, Ohio, Professor of Dermatology, University of Mississippi Medical School, Jackson, MI
- LINDSEY B DOLOHANTY, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Dermatology, University of Rochester School of Medicine, Rochester, NY
Purchase PDFThe diagnosis of skin disease is not something that changes radically year to year. In fact, for hundreds of years physicians have been assessing the skin to diagnose and treat skin diseases and to “view” internal diseases. The latest edition of this review provides several updates that enhance our approach to the diagnosis of skin disease with active links to updated digital references and atlases. These will be valuable to students, residents, and physicians interested in improving their dermatologic diagnostic skills. A new algorithm highlights our suggested approach to cutaneous diagnoses. It is our hope that readers will begin to “think like dermatologists” as they digest the contents of this review.
Key words: Macule, papule, vesicle, bulla, plaque, excoriation, scale, ulceration, diagnosis, errors
This review contains 13 figures, 5 tables, 17 references, and 7 additional readings.
- 2
Papulosquamous Disorders
- ELIZABETH A ABEL, MDAdjunct Clinical Professor of Dermatology, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, Private Practice, California Skin Institute, Mountain View, CA
Purchase PDFPapulosquamous disorders comprise a group of dermatoses that have distinct morphologic features. The characteristic primary lesion of these disorders is a papule, usually erythematous, that has a variable amount of scaling on the surface. Plaques or patches form through coalescence of the primary lesions. Some common papulosquamous dermatoses are pityriasis rosea, lichen planus, seborrheic dermatitis, tinea corporis, pityriasis rubra pilaris, psoriasis, and parapsoriasis. The etiology, diagnosis, and treatment of pityriasis rosea, lichen planus, and seborrheic dermatitis (including seborrheic dermatitis associated with AIDS) are discussed in this chapter. Also discussed are the diagnosis and treatment of pityriasis rubra, parapsoriasis (pityriasis lichenoides and small- and large-plaque parapsoriasis), and erythroderma. This chapter includes color photographs of the aforementioned dermatoses plus the Koebner phenomenon, lichen planus of the mucous membranes, and erythroderma in Sézary syndrome.
This review contains 11 highly rendered figures and 79 references.
- 3
Eczematous Disorders, Atopic Dermatitis, and Ichthyoses
- SETH R STEVENS, MDPartner Physician, Southern California Permanente Medical Group, Woodland Hills, CA, and Assistant Clinical Professor, Case Medical School, Cleveland, OH
Purchase PDFThis review describes eczematous dermatitis, or eczema, a skin disease that is characterized by erythematous vesicular, weeping, and crusting patches; atopic dermatitis, a common chronic inflammatory dermatosis that generally begins in infancy; and the ichthyoses, a group of diseases of cornification that are characterized by excessive scaling. The purpose of this review is to examine the major variants, epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment of these dermatologic diseases. Figures depict chronic eczematous dermatitis, allergic contact dermatitis to poison ivy, seborrheic dermatitis, nummular eczema, acute eczematous patches, lichenified patches that appear after chronic rubbing of eczematous patches, erythroderma (total body erythema), and marked scaling (acquired ichthyosis). Tables list the diagnostic criteria for atopic dermatitis and the differential diagnosis of atopic dermatitis.
This review contains 9 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 88 references.
- 4
Contact Dermatitis and Related Disorders
- SAVINA ANEJA, BACase Western Reserve University School of Medicine, Cleveland, OH
- JAMES S TAYLOR, MDDepartment of Dermatology, Dermatology-Plastic Surgery Institute, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH
Purchase PDFContact dermatitis is an acute or chronic skin inflammation resulting from interaction with a chemical, biologic, or physical agent. This chapter discusses the major types of contact dermatitis, including irritant contact dermatitis and allergic contact dermatitis (ACD), and their predisposing factors, pathogenesis, diagnosis, risk reduction, and treatment. Also reviewed are specific etiologic forms of contact dermatitis (including topical medication allergy dermatitis, systemic contact dermatitis, clothing, textile and shoe dermatitis, and occupational contact dermatitis) as well as subtypes of contact dermatitis (including photosensitivity and latex allergy dermatitis). Figures show different types of dermatitis (such as chronic eczematous dermatitis, acute and ACD, and photocontact dermatitis), along with specific reactions from causes such as wearing a bib, a leather hatband, or sandals and from poison oak, glyceryl thioglycolate, tosylamide formaldehyde resin, rosin applied to a violin bow, bacitracin, and powdered natural rubber latex gloves. Tables list body sites affected by contact allergens, misconceptions about ACD, criteria for determining who should be given a patch test, key points in diagnosis of ACD, North America patch-test results from 2003 through 2004, topical sensitizers and potential systemic cross-reactants, substances that may cause systemic contact dermatitis, clinical features of systemic contact dermatitis, criteria for establishing occupational causation of contact dermatitis, topical and systemic photosensitizers, and distinguishing features of phototoxic versus photoallergic contact dermatitis. A sidebar lists Internet resources on contact dermatitis.
This review contains 12 highly rendered figures, 11 tables, and 160 references.
- 5
Cutaneous Adverse Drug Reactions
By Neil H. Shear, MD, FRCPC; Sandra Knowles, BScPhm; Lori Shapiro, MD, FRCPC
Purchase PDFCutaneous Adverse Drug Reactions
- NEIL H. SHEAR, MD, FRCPCProfessor and Chief of Dermatology, Department of Medicine, Divisions of Dermatology and Clinical Pharmacology, Sunnybrook Health Sciences Centre, University of Toronto, Toronto, CA
- SANDRA KNOWLES, BSCPHMAssistant Professor (Status Only), Department of Pharmacy, Sunnybrook Health Sciences Centre, University of Toronto, Toronto, CA
- LORI SHAPIRO, MD, FRCPCAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Dermatology, Sunnybrook Health Sciences Centre, University of Toronto, Toronto, CA
Purchase PDFAn adverse drug reaction is defined as any noxious, unintended, and undesired effect of a drug that occurs at doses used in humans for prophylaxis, diagnosis, or therapy. A cutaneous eruption is one of the most common manifestations of an adverse drug reaction. This chapter reviews the epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, clinical manifestations, and differential diagnosis of adverse drug reactions, as well as laboratory tests for them. Also discussed are the types of cutaneous eruption: exanthematous eruption, urticarial eruption, blistering eruption, pustular eruption, and others. The simple and complex forms of each type of eruption are reviewed. The chapter includes 4 tables and 12 figures. Tables present the warning signs of a serious drug eruption, clinical features of hypersensitivity syndrome reaction and serum sickness-like reaction, characteristics of Stevens-Johnson Syndrome and toxic epidermal necrolysis, and clinical pearls to identify anticoagulant-induced skin necrosis. Figures illustrate hypersensitivity syndrome reaction, a fixed drug eruption from tetracycline, pseudoporphyria from naproxen, linear immunoglobulin A disease induced by vancomycin, pemphigus foliaceus from taking enalapril, pemphigus vulgaris from taking penicillamine, toxic epidermal necrolysis after starting phenytoin therapy, acneiform drug eruption due to gefitinib, acute generalized exanthematous pustulosis from cloxacillin, coumarin-induced skin necrosis, a lichenoid drug eruption associated with ramipril, and leukocytoclastic vasculitis from hydrochlorothiazide.
This chapter contains 12 figures, 8 tables and 108 references
Keywords: Adverse drug reaction, rash, urticaria, blisters, pustular eruption, exanthema, Stevens-Johnson syndrome, toxic epidermal necrolysis, skin necrosis
- 6
Fungal, Bacterial, and Viral Infections of the Skin
- JAN V. HIRSCHMANN, MDProfessor of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Staff Physician, Puget Sound VA Medical Center, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFThe skin can become infected by viruses, fungi, and bacteria, including some that ordinarily are harmless colonizing organisms. The most common fungal infections are caused by dermatophytes, which can involve the hair, nails, and skin. Potassium hydroxide (KOH) preparations of specimens from affected areas typically demonstrate hyphae, and either topical or systemic antifungal therapy usually cures or controls the process. The most common bacterial pathogens are Staphylococcus aureus and group A streptococci, which, alone or together, can cause a wide variety of disorders, including impetigo, ecthyma, and cellulitis. Topical antibiotics may suffice for impetigo, but ecthyma and cellulitis require systemic treatment. S. aureus, including methicillin-resistant strains, can also cause furuncles, carbuncles, and cutaneous abscesses. For these infections, incision and drainage without antibiotics are usually curative. Warts are the most common cutaneous viral infection, and eradication can be difficult, especially where the skin is thick, such as the palms and soles, or the patient is immunocompromised. Most therapies consist of trying to destroy the viruses by mechanical, chemical, or immune mechanisms. This review covers dermatophyte infections, yeast infections, bacterial infections, and viral infections of the skin. Figures show the classic annular lesion of tinea corporis, a typical kerion presenting as a zoophilic Microsporum canis infection of the scalp (tinea capitis), tinea corporis, tinea barbae, tinea pedis between and under the toes and on the plantar surface, inflammatory tinea pedis, tinea unguium, tinea manuum, angular cheilitis, prominent satellite lesions of discrete vesicles associated with candidiasis, facial candidiasis, Candida paronychia, tinea versicolor, nonbullous impetigo, bullous impetigo, ecthyma, leg cellulitis, erythema and edema on the cheeks, eyelids, and nose, furuncle, carbuncle, nasal folliculitis, pitted keratolysis, trichomycosis axillaris, necrotizing fasciitis, Fournier gangrene, folliculitis, plantar wart, condyloma acuminatum, and benign lesions of bowenoid papulosis. Tables list dermatophyte species, terminology of dermatophyte infections, topical agents for dermatophyte infections, treatment options for impetigo (adult doses), and treatment options for erythrasma.
This review contains 29 figures, 12 tables, and 36 references
Keywords: Staphylococcus aureus, methicillin-resistant strains, furuncles, carbuncles, cutaneous abscesses, dermatophytes, zoophilic Microsporum canis, andidiasis, facial candidiasis, Candida paronychia, tinea versicolor, nonbullous impetigo, bullous impetigo, ecthyma, leg cellulitis, erythema
- 7
Infestations
- DIRK ELSTON, MDDirector, Ackerman Academy of Dermatopathology, New York, NY
Purchase PDFThis review looks at parasitic diseases of the skin. Scabies, caused by the human itch mite (Sarcoptes scabiei), and pediculosis, caused by the bloodsucking louse, are the most prevalent parasitic diseases in temperate regions. For treatment of scabies, ivermectin is suitable for mass drug administration during severe outbreaks, although patients with heavy scabies infestation may exhibit Mazzotti reactions during treatment with oral ivermectin. Another promising scabicide is Tinospora cordifolia lotion. The increase in global travel has also meant a worldwide increase in parasitic disorders endemic to tropical regions; these disorders include cutaneous larva migrans, pyodermas, arthropod-reactive dermatitis, myiasis, tungiasis, urticaria, and cutaneous and mucocutaneous leishmaniasis. Finally, patients with delusional parasitosis will express the belief that parasitical organisms are infesting their skin. Pimozide, an antipsychotic, has been successfully used to treat delusional parasitosis.
This module contains 16 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, 15 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 8
Vesiculobullous Diseases
By Jacob Levitt, MD, FAAD; Annette Czernik, MD, FAAD; Bonnie Koo, MD
Purchase PDFVesiculobullous Diseases
- JACOB LEVITT, MD, FAADVice Chairman, Residency Director, and Associate Professor, The Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York, NY
- ANNETTE CZERNIK, MD, FAADAssistant Professor, The Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York, NY
- BONNIE KOO, MDUniversity of California, Irvine, Irvine, CA
Purchase PDFVesiculobullous diseases can be characterized most easily by the anatomic location of the blister cleft, which can result from autoimmune-mediated adhesion protein dysfunction, genetically faulty proteins, drug-induced keratinocyte necrosis, and infectious or traumatic causes. This chapter discusses several paradigmatic vesiculobullous diseases: pemphigus (including pemphigus vulgaris, pemphigus foliaceus, paraneoplastic pemphigus, and Hailey-Hailey disease), bullous pemphigoid, cicatricial pemphigoid, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, dermatitis herpetiformis, linear IgA bullous dermatosis, epidermolysis bullosa, and various infectious vesiculobullous diseases. Clinical presentation, diagnosis and monitoring, and treatment of these diseases are provided. Tables list systemic drugs used for treating pemphigus; the diseases and disease subtypes, protein defects, inheritance patterns, and clinical features of epidermolysis bullosa; and blister planes for various diseases. Figures (30 in all) illustrate presentations of vesiculobullous diseases.
This review contains 30 figures, 3 tables, and 137 references.
- 9
Malignant Cutaneous Tumors
- ALLAN C HALPERN, MDChief, Dermatology Service, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New York, NY
- PATRICIA L. MYSKOWSKI, MDAttending Physician, Dermatology Service, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New York, NY
Purchase PDFThis chapter reviews the most common malignant cutaneous tumors. The section on malignant tumors of the epidermis discusses nonmelanoma skin cancer (i.e., basal cell carcinoma and squamous cell carcinoma) and malignant melanoma. The section on malignant tumors of the dermis covers metastatic tumors, primary tumors (Merkel cell carcinoma, Paget disease, extramammary Paget disease, angiosarcoma, and dermatofibrosarcoma protuberans), and Kaposi sarcoma (i.e., classic Kaposi sarcoma, African Kaposi sarcoma, organ-transplant Kaposi sarcoma, and HIV-associated Kaposi sarcoma). The final section covers cutaneous lymphomas. The coverage of each disease includes a discussion of epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis. Tables provide the adjusted estimated relative risks of melanoma by nevus type and number, the American Joint Committee on Cancer (AJCC) TNM classification and staging system, the estimated probability of 10-year survival in patients with primary cutaneous melanoma, and an overview of overview of therapy for cutaneous T cell lymphoma. Figures illustrate the presentation of many malignant cutaneous tumors.
This review contains 10 figures, 11 tables, and 111 references.
- 10
Benign Cutaneous Tumors
- ELIZABETH A ABEL, MDAdjunct Clinical Professor of Dermatology, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, Private Practice, California Skin Institute, Mountain View, CA
Purchase PDFTumors of the cutaneous surface may arise from the epidermis, dermis, or subcutaneous tissue or from any of the specialized cell types in the skin or its appendages. Broad categories include tumors derived from epithelial, melanocytic, or connective tissue structures. Within each location or cell type, lesions are classified as benign, malignant, or, in certain cases, premalignant. Benign epithelial tumors include tumors of the surface epidermis that form keratin, tumors of the epidermal appendages, and cysts of the skin. Melanocytic (pigment-forming) lesions are very common. One of the most frequently encountered forms is the nevus cell nevus. Tumors that are derived from connective tissue include fibromas, histiocytomas, lipomas, leiomyomas, and hemangiomas. This chapter provides an overview of each type of tumor, including sections on epithelial tumors, tumors of the epidermal appendages, familial tumor syndromes, melanocytic tumors, neural tumors, connective tissue tumors, vascular birthmarks, acquired vascular disorders, Kimura disease, lipoma, leiomyoma, and lymphangioma circumscriptum. The sections discuss various forms and their diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment. Figures accompany the descriptions.
This review contains 22 tables, 26 figures, and 88 references
Keywords: Epithelial tumor, melanosis, cyst, angioma, hemangioma, neurofibromatosis, lipoma, leiomyoma, seborrheic dermatitis, nevus
- 11
Acne Vulgaris and Rosacea
- JAMES Q DEL ROSSO, DOAdjunct Clinical Professor (Dermatology), Touro University College of Osteopathic Medicine, Henderson, NV
Purchase PDFAcne vulgaris is the most common disorder seen in general dermatology practice, accounting for approximately 10% of visits each year. Both sexes and all ethnicities are affected, usually in the late preteenage or early teenage years. Both inflammatory and comedonal lesions of acne vulgaris characteristically involve the face, but truncal involvement is also relatively common. Multiple clinical presentations may be observed, with severity often progressing over time during adolescence. Severe forms of acne vulgaris can be especially disfiguring and debilitating, and are more likely to lead to permanent scarring. Therapeutic options are chosen primarily on the basis of clinical severity, with adjustments in treatment made on the basis of response or disease progression. Rosacea begins in adulthood, usually in the third decade of life or later. The disorder predominantly affects the central face in fair-skinned people, mostly those of northern European ancestry, although individuals of any race may be affected. Rosacea may present as one or more of a variety of clinical phenotypes (subtypes); it is a chronic disorder characterized by periods of exacerbation and remission. Fortunately, rosacea is not associated with scarring, although a subset of patients may develop localized proliferations of sebaceous and fibrous tissue called a phyma. Like acne vulgaris, rosacea may also adversely impact quality of life. Figures in this chapter illustrate acne vulgaris and inflammatory papules. Tables detail laboratory evaluation for women with acne vulgaris and hyperandrogenism, surgical/physical modality options for specific acne lesions and acne scars, major topical therapies for acne vulgaris, and commonly prescribed systemic therapies for acne. This chapter contains 50 references.
- 12
Disorders of Hair
- JAMES Q DEL ROSSO, DOAdjunct Clinical Professor (Dermatology), Touro University College of Osteopathic Medicine, Henderson, NV
Purchase PDFA basic knowledge of the hair growth cycle is needed to evaluate disorders of hair growth. This chapter presents a broad overview of the physiology and evaluation of hair growth, as well as discussions of specific types of alopecia. The epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, and treatment of androgenetic alopecia, the most common type of nonscarring hair loss, are covered. Diffuse hair shedding is generalized hair loss over the entire scalp. Diagnosis and treatment of telogen effluvium, anagen arrest (anagen effluvium), and other causes of diffuse hair shedding are covered in detail. Alopecia areata, typically characterized by patchy hair loss; cicatricial alopecia, which results from permanent scarring of the hair follicles; and miscellaneous causes of hair loss are also discussed. Tables list the causes of diffuse and cicatricial alopecia, telogen effluvium, and miscellaneous chemicals and categories of drugs that can cause alopecia, as well as miscellaneous causes of hair loss. Included is an algorithm outlining the approach to diagnosing nonscarring alopecia, as well as a variety of clinical photographs.
This review contains 9 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 42 references.
- 13
Diseases of the Nail Unit
- JENNIFER NGUYEN, MDAssistant Professor of Dermatology, Department of Dermatology, Perelman School of Medicine of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- GEORGE COTSERELIS, MDMilton Bixler Hartzell Professor of Dermatology, Department of Dermatology, Perelman School of Medicine of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFThe human nail is a complex unit that includes five major modified cutaneous structures: the nail matrix, nail bed, nail plate, nail folds, and cuticle (eponychium). This chapter discusses the function and structure of the five nail components and the pathophysiology affecting each. Also reviewed are nail findings associated with underlying systemic and dermatologic conditions: splinter hemorrhages, koilonychia, transverse nail-plate depressions (Beau’s lines), onycholysis, leukonychia, clubbing, nail-plate pitting, and longitudinal pigmented bands. Infections of the nail are discussed, which include bacterial paronychia, chronic paronychia, and onychomycosis. Figures illustrate the longitudinal section of the fingernail, multiple pigmented longitudinal bands, psoriasis involving the fingernail, late-stage lichen planus of the fingernail, transverse linear grooves, Pseudomonas aeruginosa causing a green nail, psoriasis of the nail, melanonychia striata, and a nail specimen for potassium hydroxide preparation. Tables describe antifungal treatment for toenail onychomycosis as well as selected dermatologic disorders that affect the nail unit. This chapter contains 50 references.
- 14
Disorders of Pigmentation
- PEARL E. GRIMES, MDClinical Professor of Dermatology, Division of Dermatology, University of California Los Angeles David Geffen School of Medicine, Los Angeles, CA; Director of the Vitiligo and Pigmentation Institute of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA
Purchase PDFThe disorders of skin pigmentation discussed in this chapter fall into two categories: disorders of hyperpigmentation (melasma, postinflammatory hyperpigmentation, drug-induced hyperpigmentation, erythema dyschromicum perstans, lentigines, confluent and reticulated papillomatosis of Gougerot and Carteaud, and Dowling-Degos disease) and disorders of hypopigmentation (vitiligo, albinism, piebaldism, and idiopathic guttate hypomelanosis). The definition, epidemiology, etiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment are discussed for each condition. Figures show examples of melasma, hyperpigmentation secondary to acne, vitiligo and its response to treatment with tacrolimus and with narrow-band ultraviolet B (UVB) light, Vogt-Koyanagi-Harada syndrome, and piebaldism. A table lists therapeutic approaches to vitiligo. This chapter contains 182 references.
- 15
Pruritus
By Hong-Liang Tey, MRCP(UK); Gil Yosipovitch, MD; Jeffrey D Bernhard, MD, FRCP(Edin)
Purchase PDFPruritus
- HONG-LIANG TEY, MRCP(UK)Consultant, National Skin Centre, Singapore
- GIL YOSIPOVITCH, MDProfessor and Chair, Department of Dermatology and Itch Center, Temple University School of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA
- JEFFREY D BERNHARD, MD, FRCP(EDIN)Editor Emeritus, Journal of the American Academy of Dermatology, Professor Emeritus, University of Massachusetts Medical School, MA
Purchase PDFPruritus, or itch, can be defined as a sensation that elicits the desire to scratch. Normal physiologic "acute" itch occurs daily and can usually be abolished by scratching the affected area. On the other hand, chronic itch (defined as itch that persists for 6 weeks or more) is often made worse by scratching and is associated with significant morbidity. The focus of this chapter is on chronic pruritus. Discussion includes causes, clinical evaluation, investigation of, and treatment for chronic pruritus. Tables cover the etiologic classification of chronic pruritus, a morphologic approach to typically pruritic dermatoses and their classic distribution (with illustrative images), systemic diseases and associated clinical signs, localized pruritus and underlying neuropathy, screening tests for pruritus, further investigations following results of clinical findings and screening tests, general measures for patients managing pruritus, topical treatment, topical calcineurin inhibitors, systemic therapies, recommended stepwise treatment options, and phototherapy. Also included are a patient history checklist, an algorithm outlining the approach to chronic pruritus, and images depicting various forms of pruritus.
This review contains 16 highly rendered figures (including table images), 13 tables, and 41 references.
- 16
Cutaneous Manifestations of Systemic Diseases
- MARK LEBWOHL, MDSol and Clara Kest Professor and Chairman, Department of Dermatology, Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York City, NY
Purchase PDFThis chapter reviews key cutaneous manifestations of systemic diseases that should be recognized by most physicians and highlights recent developments in the diagnosis and management of those disorders. In many of the disorders presented, workup and therapy of the underlying systemic condition are essential to a favorable outcome. Cardiopulmonary, vascular, endocrinologic, gastrointestinal, hematologic, immunodeficiency, infectious, neurologic, renal, and rheumatologic diseases are discussed. Many of the syndromes characterized by physical symptoms are accompanied by photographs demonstrating the manifestations for the reader's reference.
This review contains 28 figures and 104 references.
- 17
Psoriasis
- ELIZABETH A ABEL, MDAdjunct Clinical Professor of Dermatology, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, Private Practice, California Skin Institute, Mountain View, CA
- MARK LEBWOHL, MDSol and Clara Kest Professor and Chairman, Department of Dermatology, Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York City, NY
Purchase PDFPsoriasis is an immune-mediated inflammatory cutaneous disorder characterized by chronic, scaling, erythematous patches and plaques of skin. It can begin at any age and can vary in severity. Psoriasis can manifest itself in several different forms, including pustular and erythrodermic forms. In addition to involving the skin, psoriasis frequently involves the nails, and some patients may experience inflammation of the joints (psoriatic arthritis). Because of its highly visible nature, psoriasis can compromise both the personal and the working lives of its victims. Breakthroughs in the treatment of psoriasis have led to a better understanding of its pathogenesis.
This review contains 12 figures, 8 tables, and 79 references.
Keywords: Psoriases, Pustulosis of Palms and Soles, Pustulosis Palmaris et Plantaris, Palmoplantaris Pustulosis, Pustular Psoriasis of Palms and Soles
- 18
Pemphigus and Bullous Pemphigoid
By Aakaash Varma, BA; Annette Czernik, MD, FAAD; Jacob Levitt, MD, FAAD
Purchase PDFPemphigus and Bullous Pemphigoid
- AAKAASH VARMA, BACollege of Medicine, SUNY Downstate Health Sciences University
- ANNETTE CZERNIK, MD, FAADDepartment of Dermatology at the Mount Sinai Hospital
- JACOB LEVITT, MD, FAADDepartment of Dermatology at the Mount Sinai Hospital
Purchase PDFPemphigus disorders are characterized by acantholysis, whereas pemphigoid disorders are characterized by a dermal-epidermal split. Diagnosis of pemphigus or pemphigoid relies on a combination of positive anti-desmoglein or anti-collagen XVII serology, confirmatory direct immunofluorescence, and clinical features. Treatment for immunobullous disease revolves around various immunosuppressants, most often some combination of rituximab, prednisone, and IVIg. Paraneoplastic pemphigus is characterized by hemorrhagic crusting of the lips with positive indirect immunofluorescence on rat bladder epithelium, which should prompt a search for malignancy. Hailey-Hailey disease is a genetically mediated pemphigus that typically occurs in skin folds and responds to a number of agents including botulinum toxin, topical steroids, and other anecdotal therapies.
This review contains 17 figures, 2 tables, and 109 references.
Keywords: blister, pemphigus, bullous, rituximab, bullae, prednisone
- 19
Other Vesiculobullous Diseases
By Aakaash Varma, BA; Annette Czernik, MD, FAAD; Jacob Levitt, MD, FAAD
Purchase PDFOther Vesiculobullous Diseases
- AAKAASH VARMA, BACollege of Medicine, SUNY Downstate Health Sciences University
- ANNETTE CZERNIK, MD, FAADAssistant Professor, The Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York, NY
- JACOB LEVITT, MD, FAADDepartment of Dermatology, Mount Sinai Hospital
Purchase PDFLess common immunobullous diseases include cicatricial pemphigoid, epidermolysis bullosa acquisita, and linear IgA bullous dermatosis. Diagnosis of these entities are made through direct immunofluorescence, sometimes requires salt-split skin, as well as, in the case of cicatricial pemphigoid, mucosal scarring. As in pemphigus vulgaris and bullous pemphigoid, common therapies include rituximab, prednisone, and IVIg. Dapsone can be particularly effective in linear IgA bullous dermatosis and bullous lupus. Dermatitis herpetiformis is a rare cutaneous manifestation of gluten sensitivity, characterized by pruritic vesicles on extensor surfaces, that responds to dapsone and gluten avoidance. This diagnosis is confirmed with biopsy and positive serology for anti-tissue transglutaminase IgA. Blistering hypersensitivity reactions include TEN, SJS, erythema multiforme, and fixed drug eruption. All are characterized by varying degrees of keratinocyte necrosis. Common to the management of all include cessation of the offending agent. TEN can be managed by cyclosporine, TNF-inhibition, or—more controversially—IVIg. SJS can be effectively managed with systemic steroids. EM responds variably to a number of agents, including antiviral nucleoside analogues, prednisone, thalidomide, apremilast, and tofacitinib. Infectious causes of blisters include Staphylococcus aureus, HSV, and varicella zoster virus. Epidermolysis bullosa comprises a variety of genetically defective structural proteins of the skin. Recessive variants and those affecting deeper proteins carry more severe phenotypes. Management is best achieved at specialty centers and involves careful wound care as well as prevention of friction. Gene therapy is on the horizon for these disorders. Other blistering entities, mechanical or inflammatory in nature, are also discussed at the end of this chapter.
This review contains 13 figures, 1 table, and 86 references.
Keywords: Blisters, bullae, bullous, pemphigoid, necrolysis
- 20
Malignant Cutaneous Tumors
- ALLAN C HALPERN, MDChief, Dermatology Service, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New York, NY
- PATRICIA L. MYSKOWSKI, MDAttending Physician, Dermatology Service, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New York, NY
- 21
Fungal, Bacterial, and Viral Infections of the Skin
- JAN V. HIRSCHMANN, MDProfessor of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Staff Physician, Puget Sound VA Medical Center, Seattle, WA
- 22
Benign Cutaneous Tumors
- ELIZABETH A ABEL, MDAdjunct Clinical Professor of Dermatology, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, Private Practice, California Skin Institute, Mountain View, CA
- 23
Cutaneous Adverse Drug Reactions
By Neil H. Shear, MD, FRCPC; Sandra Knowles, BScPhm; Lori Shapiro, MD, FRCPC
Purchase PDFCutaneous Adverse Drug Reactions
- NEIL H. SHEAR, MD, FRCPCProfessor and Chief of Dermatology, Department of Medicine, Divisions of Dermatology and Clinical Pharmacology, Sunnybrook Health Sciences Centre, University of Toronto, Toronto, CA
- SANDRA KNOWLES, BSCPHMAssistant Professor (Status Only), Department of Pharmacy, Sunnybrook Health Sciences Centre, University of Toronto, Toronto, CA
- LORI SHAPIRO, MD, FRCPCAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Dermatology, Sunnybrook Health Sciences Centre, University of Toronto, Toronto, CA
- 1
- Endocrinology & Metabolism
- 1
Approach to the Patient With Endocrine Disorders
By Graham T McMahon, MD, MMSc; Robert G. Dluhy, MD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With Endocrine Disorders
- GRAHAM T MCMAHON, MD, MMSCAssociate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- ROBERT G. DLUHY, MDProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe distribution of hormones throughout the human body results in presentations of endocrine disease that are diffuse and variable. Although some endocrine syndromes result in characteristic sets of symptoms and features, most patients experience a limited number of components of the syndrome and may note symptoms that are not typically syndromic. This review discusses presentations of endocrine diseases and the endocrine patient. Specific attention is given to endocrine testing, which can be achieved by measuring the hormone itself, stimulating or suppressing a hormone feedback loop, or measuring peripheral hormone receptor function. The chronic care relationship is explored as many patients with endocrine diseases require extended chronic care to achieve control of abnormal hormonal systems. The dependency on chronic care necessitates that endocrinologists develop particular expertise in managing illnesses over the long term. Tables list hormones and their associated syndromes, clusters of contrasting symptoms and signs of over- and underactivity of the thyroid and adrenal glands, approaches to endocrine testing and treatment, and variability in selected hormone concentrations over time. Figures show diagnostic criteria related to hypercalcemia, growth hormone deficiency, acromegaly, and adrenal incidentaloma. The chronic care model is also represented.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 12 references.
- 2
Adrenal Insufficiency
- D. LYNN LORIAUX, MD, PHD, MACPProfessor of Medicine and Chief, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Oregon Health and Science University, Portland, OR
Purchase PDFAdrenal insufficiency (Addison disease) can be categorized as primary or secondary; the former results from adrenal cortex destruction, whereas the latter is caused by disruption of pituitary secretion of adrenocorticotropic hormone. The clinical pictures are the same, and their signs can be differentiated only by the presence of hyperpigmentation and vitiligo in autoimmune disease. Diagnosing both chronic and acute syndromes requires laboratory confirmation; however, the only available diagnostic test for adrenal insufficiency is cosyntropin stimulation. Relative adrenal insufficiency is a hypothetical situation stemming from misinterpretation of this test, and there is no pathophysiologic evidence of its existence. The most common form of congenital adrenal hyperplasia is the 21-hydroxylase deficiency syndrome.
This review contains 1 figure, 5 tables and 7 references
Keywords: Adrenal insufficiency, Addison disease, adrenocorticotropic hormone, cosyntropin, congenital adrenal hyperplasia
- 3
Cushing Syndrome
- LYNNETTE NIEMAN, MDProgram on Adult and Reproductive Endocrinology, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD
Purchase PDFCushing syndrome is a condition with protean manifestations that are caused by chronic exposure to excess glucocorticoids. Treatment with supraphysiologic doses of glucocorticoids is the most common cause. Pathologic hypercortisolism may result from autonomous adrenal production or as a result of the action of excessive adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH) production by a tumor, which stimulates adrenal cortisol production. Primary adrenal forms include unilateral adenoma or carcinoma or, rarely, bilateral hyperplasia and/or nodules. This chapter covers the epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology, and diagnosis of Cushing syndrome. Clinical manifestations, physical examination findings, and laboratory tests, including tests of the blood and other body fluids, imaging studies, and biopsy, are discussed. The differential diagnosis, treatment options, complications, and prognosis are described. Tables outline clinical features and causes of Cushing syndrome, abnormalities associated with primary adrenal causes of Cushing syndrome, diagnostic accuracy of screening tests, endogenous hypercortisolism without Cushing syndrome, and medical therapy for Cushing syndrome. Figures illustrate the causes of Cushing syndrome and a comparison of the hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis in patients with ACTH-dependent Cushing syndrome and those with pseudo–Cushing syndrome. Algorithms show the evaluation of possible Cushing syndrome and evaluation of the causes of Cushing syndrome. Second-line treatments for Cushing syndrome when surgery fails or is not possible are also detailed.
This chapter contains 5 figures, 7 tables, 50 references.
- 4
Adrenal Hypertension
- NAOMI D.L. FISHER, MDDivision of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- GAIL K ADLER, MD, PHDDivision of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe secondary causes of hypertension are associated with the excess of the principal hormones produced by the adrenal glands: cortisol, epinephrine, and aldosterone. Excess aldosterone production is recognized as primary hyperaldosteronism, or primary aldosteronism (PA). Individuals with PA are at increased risk for a variety of disorders, including atrial fibrillation, coronary artery disease, myocardial infarction, and stroke. Pheochromocytoma is a very rare tumor (accounting for fewer than one in 10,000 hypertension cases) and is marked by high secretions of catecholamines, mostly epinephrine as well as norepinephrine. Cushing disease and Cushing syndrome are addressed in a separate review.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 39 references.
- 5
Adrenal Neoplasia
- ANAND VAIDYA, MD, MMSCDirector, Center for Adrenal Disorders, Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe adrenal glands are composed of two distinct tissue types: the cortex, which serves as a factory for adrenal steroidogenesis, and the medulla, which produces catecholamines as a neuroendocrine organ. Neoplasia of the adrenal is approached by considering both whether the tumor is benign or malignant and whether it may represent a hormonally active tumor that can contribute to cardiometabolic disease or a hormonally silent tumor. Adrenal neoplasia is rarely malignant. This module discusses the approach to an incidentally discovered adrenal mass, with emphasis on the clinical determination as to whether it is benign or malignant and hormonally functional or nonfunctional. The pathogenesis and genetics of hyperaldosteronism and pheochromocytoma-paraganglioma are reviewed, as are the pathogenesis and management of adrenocortical carcinoma. Tables describe the differential diagnosis and diagnostic approach for an incidentally discovered adrenal mass; suggested biochemical screening tests for incidentally discovered adrenal masses; radiographic features of adrenal masses to determine benign or malignant potential; and the genetics of primary hyperaldosteronism, pheochromocytoma, and paraganglioma syndromes. A drawing shows the genetic mechanisms of hyperaldosteronism in familial hyperaldosteronism type III. Algorithms outline the suggested management approach for the incidentally discovered adrenal mass, genetic counseling and testing for patients with pheochromocytoma or paraganglioma, testing for family members of patients with pheochromocytoma and positive genetic testing, patients with stage I–III adrenocortical carcinoma, and patients with advanced adrenocortical carcinoma.
This module contains 6 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, 55 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 6
The Pituitary
- SHLOMO MELMED, MD, FACPSenior Vice President, Academic Affairs, Dean of Medical Faculty, Cedars Sinai Medical Center, 8700 Beverly Blvd, Los Angeles, CA 90048
Purchase PDFThe pituitary gland plays a prominent role in regulating the critical hormonal functions of growth, development, reproduction, stress homeostasis, and metabolic control; for this reason, the pituitary has been termed the master gland. The anterior pituitary synthesizes and secretes adrenocorticotropic hormone (ACTH), growth hormone (GH), prolactin (PRL), thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH), follicle-stimulating hormone (FSH), and luteinizing hormone (LH). The posterior pituitary secretes vasopressin (also known as antidiuretic hormone [ADH]) and oxytocin, which are synthesized in the hypothalamus. This chapter describes genetic syndromes associated with pituitary tumors, including multiple endocrine neoplasia type 1. Information is provided on the diagnosis and treatment of disorders associated with the underproduction and hypersecretion of pituitary hormones, including Cushing syndrome, pituitary mass effects, and pituitary failure.
This review contains 4 figures, 23 tables, and 40 references.
Keywords: Pituitary failure, empty sella syndrome, mass effect, Cushing disease, adenoma, diabetes insipidus, endocrinopathy, hormone insufficiency
- 7
Diseases of Calcium Metabolism and Metabolic Bone Disease
- CAROLYN BECKER, MDAssociate Professor, Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe precise regulation of body calcium stores and of the calcium concentration in both extracellular and intracellular compartments is critically important. Calcium is the chief mineral component of the skeleton; calcium serves major roles in neurologic transmission, muscle contraction, and blood coagulation; and calcium is a ubiquitous intracellular signal.
This review contains 5 figures, 9 tables, and 114 references.
Key Words: hyperglycemia, hypoglycemia, macrovascular, microvascular, neuropathic
- 8
Testes and Testicular Disorders
- ELIZABETH G NABEL, MD, FACPPresident, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe testes begin to function in utero and continue to function into senescence, with the major roles of testosterone secretion and sperm production. This review discusses how testicular function can be affected by diseases of the hypothalamus and pituitary, as well as by diseases of the testes themselves. These diseases may be either congenital or acquired. The clinical manifestation, history and physical examination, laboratory studies, diagnoses, and treatment of these diseases, as well as other conditions, including gynecomastia and erectile dysfunction, are discussed. Specific therapies, such as the off-label use of tamoxifen (gynecomastia) and the various oral phosphodiesterase inhibitors (for erectile dysfunction), are also covered.
This review contains 2 figures, 21 tables, and 51 references.
Keywords: Testes, hypogonadism, erectile dysfunction, gynecomastia, dihydrotestosterone, gonadotropine, luteinizing hormone, follicular-stimulating hormone
- 9
Hypoglycemia
- F JOHN SERVICE, MD, PHDEmeritus Professor of Medicine, Mayo Clinic College of Medicine, Rochester, MN
- ADRIAN VELLA, MDProfessor of Medicine, Mayo Clinic College of Medicine, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFHypoglycemia is a clinical syndrome that has diverse causes and is characterized by episodes of low blood glucose and typically marked by autonomic and neuroglycopenic manifestations. This review discusses the classification, etiology, and diagnosis for hypoglycemia, including the Whipple triad, and the classic diagnostic test, the prolonged (72-hour) fast. Specific attention is given to the conditions that cause hypoglycemia, including insulinomas, factitious hypoglycemia, insulin autoimmune hypoglycemia, and post–gastric bypass hypoglycemia, as well as the diagnosis and management of these conditions.
This review contains 2 figures, 6 figures, and 43 figures.
Keywords: Blood glucose, hypoglycemia, neuroglycopenic manifestations, Whipple triad, 72-hour fast, insulinoma, post-gastric bypass, factitious hypoglycemia
- 10
Gestational Diabetes Mellitus
- ELLEN W. SEELY, MDDirector of Clinical Research, Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- CHLOE A. ZERA, MD, MPHDivision of Maternal Fetal Medicine, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology and Reproductive Biology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFGestational diabetes mellitus (GDM) has historically been defined as glucose intolerance first identified during pregnancy. The definition fails to distinguish overt (pre-gestational) diabetes diagnosed during pregnancy from glucose intolerance induced by pregnancy. Recently, the recognition that overt diabetes may first be identified in pregnancy has led to the recommendation that diabetes diagnosed in the first trimester should be termed type 2 diabetes (T2DM) rather than GDM , a clinically relevant difference in terminology as the outcomes and management of T2DM in pregnancy are distinct from outcomes and management of GDM. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, pathophysiology, screening, diagnosis, treatment and impact of GDM, as well as the obstetric management of GDM and management of GDM after pregnancy.
This review contains 8 tables, and 56 references.
Keywords: Gestational diabetes mellitus, diabetes mellitus, stillbirth, glucose control, type 2 diabetes mellitus, pregnancy
- 11
Complications of Diabetes Mellitus
- SAMUEL DAGOGO-JACK, MD, MBBS, FRCP, FACPA. C. Mullins Professor & Chief, Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes and Metabolism, University of Tennessee Health Science Center, Memphis, TN
Purchase PDFThe long-term complications of diabetes mellitus include those attributable to hyperglycemia-mediated small vessel (microvascular)and neuropathic complications and syndromes resulting from multifactorial large vessel disease (macrovascular complications). Diabetic patients with evidence of chronic complications are best managed in consultation with appropriate specialists. The microvascular and neuropathic complications, which are specifically related to hyperglycemia, include retinopathy, nephropathy, and diabetic neuropathy.
This review contains 8 figures, 9 tables, and 83 references.
Key Words: Hyperglycemia, hypoglycemia, macrovascular, microvascular, neuropathic
- 12
Secondary Forms of Diabetes Mellitus
By Ildiko Lingvay, MD, MPH, MSCS; Philip Raskin, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFSecondary Forms of Diabetes Mellitus
- ILDIKO LINGVAY, MD, MPH, MSCSAssistant Professor, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center at Dallas, Dallas, TX
- PHILIP RASKIN, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Clifton and Betsy Robinson Chair in Biomedical Research, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center at Dallas, Director, University Diabetic Treatment Center, Parkland Memorial Hospital, Dallas, TX
Purchase PDFSecondary forms of diabetes mellitus are those cases of diabetes mellitus that have a specific identifiable cause and do not meet the diagnostic criteria for type 1, type 2, or gestational diabetes. This review discusses the etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis of these forms, which include diabetes mellitus occurring as a result of pancreatic disorders; endocrinopathies; drugs, chemical agents, or toxins; and genetic mutations or syndromes. Tables list the endocrinopathies; the drug, chemicals, and toxins; and the genetic disorders causing secondary forms of diabetes mellitus.
This review contains 3 tables and 15 references.
KeyWords: chronic pancreatitis, pancreatic carcinoma, cystic fibrosis, hemochromatosis, malnutrition, diabetic ketoacidosis or symptomatic hyperglycemia or hypoglycemia
- 13
Obesity
- JONATHAN Q. PURNELL, MDAssociate Professor, Department of Medicine, and Medical Director, Multidisciplinary Obesity Clinic, Oregon Health & Science University, Portland, OR
Purchase PDFObesity and its associated disorders are leading causes of morbidity and premature mortality around the world. Obese persons are also vulnerable to low self-esteem and depression because of the psychological and social stigmata that often accompany being overweight. Despite conventional wisdom that obesity results from deficient self-control, research has provided insight into the physiology behind unwanted weight gain. Obesity is recognized as a chronic condition resulting from an interaction between environmental influences and an individual’s genetic predisposition.
This review contains 3 figures, 13 tables, and 126 references.
Keywords: Obesity, Body mass index, Hypertension, impaired glucose tolerance or diabetes, hyperlipidemia, heart disease, pulmonary disease, gastroesophageal reflux, sleep apnea
- 14
Metabolic Disorders: Inborn Errors of Carbohydrate Metabolism
By Sameer S Chopra, MD, PhD; Gerald T Berry, MD
Purchase PDFMetabolic Disorders: Inborn Errors of Carbohydrate Metabolism
- SAMEER S CHOPRA, MD, PHDClinical Fellow in Medicine, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA
- GERALD T BERRY, MDDirector, Metabolism Program, Division of Genetics and Genomics, Boston's Children's Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe small molecule diseases include the inborn errors of carbohydrate, ammonia, amino acid, organic acid, and fatty acid metabolism. They are central to the cohort of biochemical genetic diseases that are often associated with catastrophic presentations and life-threatening illness during infancy and childhood. Many of these entities are now routinely detected through newborn screening in the majority, if not all, of the states in the United States. Several of these diseases have effective therapies that largely eliminate the signs and symptoms of disease. In many, however, the disease process is without an effective treatment or may be brought under control but not corrected.
This review contains 1 figure, 6 tables, and 11 references.
Keywords: glycogen storage diseases, galactosemia, hyperbilirubinemia, hyperchloremic metabolic acidosis, hypofibrinogenemia, and thrombocytopenia, hypophosphatemia, fructose-1,6-bisphosphatase deficiency
- 15
Metabolic Disorders: Inborn Errors of Amino Acid, Ammonia, Organic Acid, and Fatty Acid Metabolism
By Sameer S Chopra, MD, PhD; Gerard T Berry, MD
Purchase PDFMetabolic Disorders: Inborn Errors of Amino Acid, Ammonia, Organic Acid, and Fatty Acid Metabolism
- SAMEER S CHOPRA, MD, PHDClinical Fellow in Medicine, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA
- GERARD T BERRY, MDDirector, Metabolism Program, Division of Genetics and Genomics, Boston's Children's Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe small molecule diseases include inborn errors of carbohydrate, ammonia, amino acid, organic acid, and fatty acid metabolism. They are central among the biochemical genetic disorders that may present with life-threatening illnesses during infancy and childhood. Many of these disorders are now detected through routine newborn screening. Internists should be familiar with small molecule metabolic disorders as early diagnosis and therapy may enable many patients to survive into adulthood. Additionally, because some patients may not manifest symptoms until late adolescence or adulthood, recognition of the possibility of an inborn error of metabolism in a patient with unusual signs or symptoms may lead to referral to a metabolic specialist and timely diagnosis and treatment. This module reviews the diagnosis, treatment, and natural history of disorders of amino acid, ammonia, organic acid, and fatty acid metabolism. Figures show the methionine-homocysteine-cysteine pathway and branched-chain amino acid metabolism.
This module contains 2 highly rendered figures, 18 references, 53 recommended readings, and 5 MCQs.
- 16
The Porphyrias
- KARL E ANDERSON, MD, FACPProfessor, Departments of Preventive Medicine and Community Health, Internal Medicine, and Pharmacology and Toxicology, University of Texas Medical Branch, Galveston, TX
- ATTALLAH KAPPAS, MDSherman Fairchild Professor, Physician-in-Chief, Emeritus, The Rockefeller University, Attending Physician, Rockefeller University Hospital, New York, NY
Purchase PDFThe porphyrias are uncommon disorders caused by deficiencies in the activities of enzymes of the heme biosynthetic pathway. The enzymatic defects that cause porphyrias are inherited, with the exception of porphyria cutanea tarda, which is primarily acquired. In all porphyrias, there is significant interplay between genetic traits and acquired or environmental factors in the expression of clinical symptoms. This review discusses the classification, pathophysiology, and clinical presentations of the porphyrias. These include those associated with neurovisceral attacks (acute intermittent porphyria, variegate porphyria, hereditary coproporphyria, and δ-aminolevulinic acid dehydratase [alad] deficiency porphyria) and the porphyrias associated with cutaneous photosensitivity (porphyria cutanea tarda, hepatoerythropoietic porphyria, erythropoietic protoporphyria, and congenital erythropoietic porphyria). Specific emphasis on the epidemiology, molecular defects and pathophysiology, clinical features, diagnosis, and treatment are discussed for each of these disorders.A table lists the safe and unsafe drugs for patients with porphyrias. Figures illustrate the genetic pathways of the disorders and the activities of enzymes of the heme biosynthetic pathway.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 1 table, and 96 references.
- 17
Diagnosis of Diabetic Foot
- ANIL HINGORANI, MD, FACSVascular Surgery Attending, New York University Langone Brooklyn Hospital, Brooklyn, NY
Purchase PDFThe diabetic foot is a commonly encountered problem in surgical practice. Since treatment of the diabetic foot is quite complex, its management can mandate a multidisciplinary approach, including vascular surgery, acute care surgery, intensive care, podiatry, internal medicine, endocrinology, infectious disease, nursing, case management, and social work. This review highlights some of the details of the diagnosis of the diabetic foot from such an approach.
This review contains 10 figures, 1 table and 30 references
Key words: diabetic foot ulcer, infection, ischemia, off-loading, revascularization
- 18
Treatment of Diabetic Foot
- ANIL HINGORANI, MD, FACSVascular Surgery Attending, New York University Langone Brooklyn Hospital, Brooklyn, NY
Purchase PDFThe diabetic foot is a commonly encountered problem in surgical practice. Since treatment of the diabetic foot is quite complex, its management can mandate a multidisciplinary approach, including vascular surgery, acute care surgery, intensive care, podiatry, internal medicine, endocrinology, infectious disease, nursing, case management, and social work. This review highlights some of the details of the management of the diabetic foot from such an approach.
This review contains 1 figure, 2 tables and 23 references.
Key words: diabetic foot ulcer, infection, ischemia, off-loading, revascularization
- 19
Type I Diabetes Mellitus
- JOSEPH I. WOLFSDORF, MB, BCHProfessor of Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- KATHARINE GARVEY, MD, MPHInstructor of Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFType 1 diabetes mellitus is characterized by severe insulin deficiency, making patients dependent on exogenous insulin replacement for survival. These patients can experience life-threatening events when their glucose levels are significantly abnormal. Type 1 diabetes accounts for 5 to 10% of all diabetes cases, with type 2 accounting for most of the remainder. This review details the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, diagnosis and treatment, disposition and outcomes of patients with Type 1 diabetes mellitus. Figures show the opposing actions of insulin and glucagon on substrate flow and plasma levels; plasma glucose, insulin and C-peptide levels throughout the day; the structure of human proinsulin; current view of the pathogenesis of Type 1 autoimmune diabetes mellitus; pathways that lead from insulin deficiency to the major clinical manifestations of Type 1 diabetes mellitus; relationship between hemoglobin A1c values at the end of a 3-month period and calculated average glucose levels during the 3-month period; different combinations of various insulin preparations used to establish glycemic control; and basal-bolus and insulin pump regimens. Tables list the etiologic classification of Type 1 diabetes mellitus, typical laboratory findings and monitoring in diabetic ketoacidosis, criteria for the diagnosis of Type 1 diabetes, clinical goals of Type 1 diabetes treatment, and insulin preparations.
This review contains 10 figures, 9 tables, and 40 references.
Keywords: Type 1 diabetes mellitus, optimal glycemic control, hypoglycemia, hyperglycemia, polyuria, polydipsia, polyphagia, HbA1c, medical nutrition therapy, Diabetic Ketoacidosis
- 20
Type II Diabetes Mellitus
- MATTHEW C. RIDDLE, MDProfessor, Department of Medicine, and Head, Section of Diabetes, Oregon Health & Sciences University, Portland, OR
- SAUL GENUTH, MD, FACPProfessor, Division of Clinical and Molecular Endocrinology, Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine, Cleveland, OH
Purchase PDFHyperosmotic hyperglycemic nonketotic (HHNK) state (also known as hyperosmolar hyperglycemic state) is a significant acute complication of type 2 diabetes mellitus, especially for those over 65 years of age. It is characterized by extreme hyperglycemia and hyperosmolarity with little ketosis. The main clinical effect of extreme hyperosmolarity is somnolence or confusion. The absence of severe ketonemia is attributed to residual insulin secretion that is sufficient to restrain lipolysis. HHNK state is marked by extreme dehydration, with both a marked deficit of free water and serious compromise of intravascular volume and tissue perfusion. Most patients with HHNK state have hypotension, extremely dry mucous membranes, and gross elevation of urea nitrogen and creatinine. Urinary tract infection, pneumonia, stroke, myocardial infarction, and sepsis may precipitate HHNK state. Elderly patients are particularly vulnerable because their thirst mechanisms are less sensitive to a rising serum osmolality. Fluid replacement is the most important component of therapy for HHNK state. Restoration of circulating volume is an urgent first priority and is accomplished by relatively rapid intravenous infusion of 2 L of 0.9% normal saline followed by 0.45% normal saline. Later, when plasma glucose levels have declined to 250 to 300 mg/dL, 5% dextrose in water is given. Insulin treatment is started soon after administration of isotonic saline. Potassium must be added to intravenous fluids to prevent hypokalemia caused by insulin action but should not be started until hypokalemia is proven, because potassium levels can be high initially. The mortality from the HHNK state is high, ranging from 10 to 20%, and is most often from the precipitating illness.
This review contains 6 figures, 7 tables, and 73 references
Keywords: dehydration, fluid deficit, hyperglycemia, hyperglycemic nonketotic state, hyperosmolar, hyperosmotic insulin, potassium, type 2 diabetes mellitus
- 21
Hypothyroidism and Thyrotoxicosis
- PAUL W. LADENSON, MDJohn Eager Howard Professor of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Professor of Medicine, Pathology, Oncology, Radiology & Radiological Sciences, and International Health, University Distinguished Service Professor, Director, Division of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Johns Hopkins Medical Institutions, Baltimore, Maryland
Purchase PDFThyroid disorders are the most common endocrine conditions encountered in clinical practice and can range from clinically obvious to clinically silent. This review provides the definition and epidemiology of the conditions of hypothyroidism and hyperthyroidism. Hypothyroidism can be congenital or acquired, and its pathogenesis, diagnosis, and management are presented. The three most common disorders of thyrotoxicosis (diffuse toxic goiter [Graves disease], toxic nodular goiter, and iatrogenic thyrotoxicosis in thyroid hormone–treated patients are addressed, as well as the many diseases in each of these categories. This review also discusses thyroiditis, goiter, thyroid nodules, and thyroid cancer. Tables list the causes of elevated serum thyroid-stimulating hormone (TSH) levels, the etiologic classification of thyrotoxicosis, characteristic features of thyroiditis, and causes of elevated serum total thyroxine levels. Figures show the prevalence of abnormalities in thyroid function tests in different populations, certain forms of hyperthyroidism that result from pathophysiologic activation of the TSH receptor, and inflammation of thyroid tissue in acute thyroiditis.
This review contains 3 figures, 12 tables, and 61 references.
Key Words: Hypothyroidism, Thyrotoxicosis, Thyrotropin, celiac disease, vitiligo, pernicious anemia, Sjögren syndrome, Graves disease, Munchausen syndrome
- 22
Thyroiditis, Goiter, Thyroid Nodules, and Thyroid Cancer
- PAUL W. LADENSON, MDJohn Eager Howard Professor of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Professor of Medicine, Pathology, Oncology, Radiology & Radiological Sciences, and International Health, University Distinguished Service Professor, Director, Division of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Johns Hopkins Medical Institutions, Baltimore, Maryland
Purchase PDFThyroid disorders are the most common endocrine conditions encountered in clinical practice. Persons of either sex and any age can be affected, although almost all forms of thyroid disease are more frequent in women than in men, and many thyroid ailments increase in incidence with age. The presentation of thyroid conditions can range from clinically obvious to clinically silent. Their consequences can be widespread and serious, even life-threatening. With proper testing, the diagnosis and differential diagnosis can be established with certainty, and effective treatments can be instituted for almost all patients.
This review contains 1 figure, 7 tables, and 31 references
Key Words: Hypothyroidism, Thyrotoxicosis, Thyrotropin, celiac disease, vitiligo, pernicious anemia, Sjögren syndrome, Graves disease, Munchausen syndrome
- 23
Management of Dyslipidemia
- JOHN D. BRUNZELL, MD, FACPProfessor Emeritus, Active, Department of Medicine, Division of Metabolism, Endocrinology and Nutrition, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- R ALAN FAILOR, MDClinical Professor, Department of Medicine, Division of Metabolism, Endocrinology and Nutrition, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFDisorders of lipoprotein metabolism, in conjunction with the prevalence of high-fat diets, obesity, and physical inactivity, have resulted in an epidemic of atherosclerotic disease in the United States and other developed countries. The interaction of common genetic and acquired disorders of lipoproteins with these adverse environmental factors leads to the premature development of atherosclerosis. In the United States, mortality from coronary artery disease (CAD), particularly in persons younger than 60 years, has been declining since 1970; however, atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease remains the most common cause of death among both men and women.
This review contains 7 tables and 51 references.
Keywords: Lipoprotein, Hepatic Lipase, Dyslipoproteinemias, hyperlipoproteinemia, hypoalphalipoproteinemia
- 24
Diagnosis of Dyslipidemia
- JOHN D. BRUNZELL, MD, FACPProfessor Emeritus, Active, Department of Medicine, Division of Metabolism, Endocrinology and Nutrition, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- R ALAN FAILOR, MDClinical Professor, Department of Medicine, Division of Metabolism, Endocrinology and Nutrition, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFDisorders of lipoprotein metabolism, in conjunction with the prevalence of high-fat diets, obesity, and physical inactivity, have resulted in an epidemic of atherosclerotic disease in the United States and other developed countries. The interaction of common genetic and acquired disorders of lipoproteins with these adverse environmental factors leads to the premature development of atherosclerosis. In the United States, mortality from coronary artery disease (CAD), particularly in persons younger than 60 years, has been declining since 1970; however, atherosclerotic cardiovascular disease remains the most common cause of death among both men and women.
This review contains 6 figures, 12 tables, and 47 references.
Keywords: dyslipoproteinemias, hepatic lipase, hyperlipoproteinemia, hypoalphalipoproteinemia, lipoprotein,
- 25
Testes and Testicular Disorders
- ELIZABETH G NABEL, MD, FACPPresident, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 26
The Pituitary
- SHLOMO MELMED, MD, FACPSenior Vice President, Academic Affairs, Dean of Medical Faculty, Cedars Sinai Medical Center, 8700 Beverly Blvd, Los Angeles, CA 90048
- 27
Hypothyroidism and Thyrotoxicosis
- PAUL W. LADENSON, MDJohn Eager Howard Professor of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Professor of Medicine, Pathology, Oncology, Radiology & Radiological Sciences, and International Health, University Distinguished Service Professor, Director, Division of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Johns Hopkins Medical Institutions, Baltimore, Maryland
- 28
Thyroiditis, Goiter, Thyroid Nodules, and Thyroid Cancer
- PAUL W. LADENSON, MDJohn Eager Howard Professor of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Professor of Medicine, Pathology, Oncology, Radiology & Radiological Sciences, and International Health, University Distinguished Service Professor, Director, Division of Endocrinology & Metabolism, Johns Hopkins Medical Institutions, Baltimore, Maryland
- 29
Type II Diabetes Mellitus
- MATTHEW C. RIDDLE, MDProfessor, Department of Medicine, and Head, Section of Diabetes, Oregon Health & Sciences University, Portland, OR
- SAUL GENUTH, MD, FACPProfessor, Division of Clinical and Molecular Endocrinology, Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine, Cleveland, OH
- 30
Diagnosis of Dyslipidemia
- JOHN D. BRUNZELL, MD, FACPProfessor Emeritus, Active, Department of Medicine, Division of Metabolism, Endocrinology and Nutrition, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- R ALAN FAILOR, MDClinical Professor, Department of Medicine, Division of Metabolism, Endocrinology and Nutrition, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- 31
Treatment of Diabetic Foot
- ANIL HINGORANI, MD, FACSVascular Surgery Attending, New York University Langone Brooklyn Hospital, Brooklyn, NY
- 32
Diagnosis of Diabetic Foot
- ANIL HINGORANI, MD, FACSVascular Surgery Attending, New York University Langone Brooklyn Hospital, Brooklyn, NY
- 33
Adrenal Insufficiency
- D. LYNN LORIAUX, MD, PHD, MACPProfessor of Medicine and Chief, Division of Endocrinology and Metabolism, Oregon Health and Science University, Portland, OR
- 1
- Ethics & Professionalism
- 1
Management of Psychosocial Issues in Terminal Illness
By Jane DeLima Thomas, MD; Eva Reitschuler-Cross, MD; Susan D Block, MD
Purchase PDFManagement of Psychosocial Issues in Terminal Illness
- JANE DELIMA THOMAS, MDAttending Physician, Department of Psychosocial Oncology and Palliative Care, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute and Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Instructor in Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- EVA REITSCHULER-CROSS, MDClinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, Section of Palliative Care and Medical Ethics, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Pittsburgh, PA
- SUSAN D BLOCK, MDChair, Department of Psychosocial Oncology and Palliative Care, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute and Brigham and Women’s Hospital Co-Director, HMS Center for Palliative Care, Professor of Psychiatry and Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFPatients facing serious or life-threatening illness experience challenges to their psychological, social, and spiritual lives as well as to their physical function and comfort. Physicians may be accustomed to focusing on the biomedical aspects of illness, but they have a critical role in assessing the patient's psychosocial issues to identify sources of distress and help implement a plan for mitigating them. An appropriate psychosocial assessment requires a methodical and rigorous approach and includes assessment of any psychosocial issue affected by or affecting a patient's experience of illness. This chapter outlines a structured approach to addressing psychosocial issues by discussing (1) the doctor-patient relationship; (2) coping with illness; (3) family dynamics and caregiving; (4) ethnic and cultural issues; (5) religious, spiritual, and existential issues; (6) mental health issues, including adjustment disorder, depression, anxiety, personality disorders, aberrant drug behaviors, and major mental health issues; and (7) grief and bereavement. Tables outline psychosocial assessment questions, factors predisposing patients with serious illness to depression, risk factors for suicide in patients with terminal illness, and classes of antidepressants, anxiolytics, and sedatives. The Alcohol Use Disorders Identification Test-Consumption (AUDIT-C) questionnaire is provided, as well as a list of Web sites with further resources about psychosocial issues in serious illness.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 6 tables, and 216 references.
- 2
Brain Death and Organ Donation
- THOMAS I. COCHRANE, MD, MBAAssociate Neurologist, Division of Neuromuscular Disease, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFBrain death is the state of irreversible loss of the clinical functions of the brain. A patient must meet strict criteria to be declared brain dead. They must have suffered a known and demonstrably irreversible brain injury and must not have a condition that could render neurologic testing unreliable. If the patient meets these criteria, a formal brain death examination can be performed. The three findings in brain death are coma or unresponsiveness, absence of brainstem reflexes, and apnea. Brain death is closely tied to organ donation, because brain-dead patients represent approximately 90% of deceased donors and thus a large majority of donated organs. This review details a definition and overview of brain death, determination of brain death, and controversy over brain death, as well as the types of organ donation (living donation versus deceased donation), donation after brain death, and donation after cardiac death. A figure presents a comparison of organ donation after brain death and after cardiac death, and a table lists the American Academy of Neurology Criteria for Determination of Brain Death.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 3 table, and 20 references.
- 3
Advance Care Planning
By Lauren Jodi Van Scoy, M.D.; Michael Green, M.D., M.S.; Benjamin Levi, M.D., Ph.D.
Purchase PDFAdvance Care Planning
- LAUREN JODI VAN SCOY, M.D.Assistant Professor, Departments of Medicine and Humanities, Penn State College of Medicine, Hershey, PA
- MICHAEL GREEN, M.D., M.S.Professor, Departments of Humanities and Medicine, Penn State College of Medicine, Hershey, PA
- BENJAMIN LEVI, M.D., PH.D.Professor, Departments of Humanities and Pediatrics, Penn State College of Medicine, Hershey, PA
Purchase PDFAdvance care planning (ACP) is defined by the Institute of Medicine as an iterative process that involves discussing end-of-life issues, clarifying relevant values and goals of care, and embodying preferences through written documents and medical orders. ACP is predicated on the principle of respect for autonomy, which recognizes an individual’s right to accept or decline medical therapies. With the development of medical technologies that can sustain life (including mere physiologic existence), effective ACP has become a critical yet underused process for patients, their families, and clinicians. This review discusses the emergence of ACP, promises and pitfalls of advance directives, and promising approaches, including ACP interventions and research, as well as a focus on public engagement and future directions. Figures show a timeline of important advances in ACP since 1990, key features of the comprehensive ACP process, the three core aspects or pillars for implementation of ACP, stages of change for ACP behaviors, and two commercially available end-of-life games. Tables list theoretical pros and cons of advance directives, ACP resources, examples of recent research studies on ACP interventions, types and examples of ACP resources, and public engagement campaigns.
This review contains 5 figures, 12 tables, and 101 references
Keywords: Advance care planning, advance directive, end-of-life
- 4
Clinical Trial Design and Statistics
By Julie Ann Sosa, MA, MD, FACS; Samantha M. Thomas, MS; April K.S. Salama, MD
Purchase PDFClinical Trial Design and Statistics
- JULIE ANN SOSA, MA, MD, FACSAssociate Professor of Surgery, Divisions of Endocrine Surgery and Surgical Oncology, Department of Surgery, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
- SAMANTHA M. THOMAS, MSBiostatistician, Department of Biostatistics & Bioinformatics, Duke Cancer Institute, Durham, NC
- APRIL K.S. SALAMA, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Medical Oncology, Duke University School of Medicine, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFA clinical trial is a planned experiment designed to prospectively measure the efficacy or effectiveness of an intervention by comparing outcomes in a group of subjects treated with the test intervention with those observed in one or more comparable group(s) of subjects receiving another intervention. Historically, the gold standard for a clinical trial has been a prospective, randomized, double-blind study, but it is sometimes impractical or unethical to conduct such in clinical medicine and surgery. Conventional outcomes have traditionally been clinical end points; with the rise of new technologies, however, they are increasingly being supplemented and/or replaced by surrogate end points, such as serum biomarkers. Because patients are involved, safety considerations and ethical principles must be incorporated into all phases of clinical trial design, conduct, data analysis, and presentation. This review covers the history of clinical trials, clinical trial phases, ethical issues, implementing the study, basic biostatistics for data analysis, and other resources. Figures show drug development and clinical trial process, and type I and II error. Tables list Food and Drug Administration new drug application types, and types of missing data in clinical trials.
This review contains 2 figures, 3 tables, and 38 references
Keywords: Clinical trial, study design, type I error, type II error, double-blind study, ethics
- 5
Withdrawing Life Support and Medical Futility
- DAVID OXMAN, MD
Purchase PDFLife support technologies have the potential to save many lives. However, in some cases – particularly when disease is advanced or incurable – the use of these interventions may simply prolong the dying process while causing significant pain and suffering. The ethical basis for withdraw of life support has been clearly elucidated in medical ethics and the law, but given the emotions surrounding these issues, it is not surprising that controversy still exists. This review discusses withdrawal of life support and withdrawal of artificial nutrition. Additionally, this review explores medical futility, including the historical background, futility and the law, focus on process: hospital futility policies and ethics committees, and current practice and the future of medical futility. Illustrative case reports are presented. The table lists some examples of responding to requests for non-beneficial care from patients or surrogates.
This review contains 1 figure, 4 tables, and 28 references
Key Words: Withdrawal of life support; Withdrawal of care; Medical futility
- 6
Digital Professionalism and Social Media
Purchase PDFDigital Professionalism and Social Media
Purchase PDF - 7
Preparing for the Ethical Practice of Precision Medicine
By Megan A Allyse, PhD; Richard R Sharp, PhD
Purchase PDFPreparing for the Ethical Practice of Precision Medicine
- MEGAN A ALLYSE, PHD
- RICHARD R SHARP, PHD
Purchase PDFThe role of genetics in medicine is changing quickly. New discoveries are rapidly bridging the chasm from bench to bedside, and in addition to medical advances, thousands of people are exploring their genetic traits and ancestry through direct-to-consumer companies. Staying abreast of these changes and their potential implications for patient care can be difficult. To help, we suggest several high-level points of reference regarding the current state of genomic medicine, with a focus on the ethical and social issues raised by these technologies. This review covers the rise of genomic medicine, information overload, direct access to genetic information, genetic discrimination, and informed consent. Tables list the American College of Medical Genetics and Genomics recommendations for reporting of incidental findings in clinical exome and genome sequencing, an excerpt from the Genetic Information Nondiscrimination Act, and genetics education resources for physicians.
This review contains 3 tables, and 44 references.
Key words: Genomic medicine, genetic medicine, medical genetics, genetic testing, direct-to-consumer genetics, genetic discrimination
- 8
- 9
Advance Care Planning
By Lauren Jodi Van Scoy, M.D.; Michael Green, M.D., M.S.; Benjamin Levi, M.D., Ph.D.
Purchase PDFAdvance Care Planning
- LAUREN JODI VAN SCOY, M.D.Assistant Professor, Departments of Medicine and Humanities, Penn State College of Medicine, Hershey, PA
- MICHAEL GREEN, M.D., M.S.Professor, Departments of Humanities and Medicine, Penn State College of Medicine, Hershey, PA
- BENJAMIN LEVI, M.D., PH.D.Professor, Departments of Humanities and Pediatrics, Penn State College of Medicine, Hershey, PA
- 10
Clinical Trial Design and Statistics
By Julie Ann Sosa, MA, MD, FACS; Samantha M. Thomas, MS; April K.S. Salama, MD
Purchase PDFClinical Trial Design and Statistics
- JULIE ANN SOSA, MA, MD, FACSAssociate Professor of Surgery, Divisions of Endocrine Surgery and Surgical Oncology, Department of Surgery, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
- SAMANTHA M. THOMAS, MSBiostatistician, Department of Biostatistics & Bioinformatics, Duke Cancer Institute, Durham, NC
- APRIL K.S. SALAMA, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Medical Oncology, Duke University School of Medicine, Durham, NC
- 1
- Gastroenterology
- 1
Esophageal Disorders
- MICHAEL F. VAEZI, MD, PHD, MSC (EPI)Professor of Medicine, Clinical Director of Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Vanderbilt University Medical Center, Nashville, TN
Purchase PDFTypically, symptoms that may indicate the presence of an esophageal disorder include heartburn, dysphagia, odynophagia, and regurgitation. Endoscopy is the technique of choice to evaluate the mucosa of the esophagus and to detect structural abnormalities, whereas esophageal manometry is the standard test to diagnose motor disorders of the esophageal body and the lower esophageal sphincter. This review examines normal esophageal anatomy and physiology, the diagnosis of esophageal disorders, disease states causing dysphagia, and gastroesophageal reflux disease. Figures show the cross-sectional anatomy of the esophagus; an algorithm for the evaluation of dysphagia; the anatomy of the gastroesophageal junction; esophagograms of patients with achalasia, late-stage achalasia, and diffuse esophageal spasm; endoscopic views of esophageal strictures; a proximal esophageal web on barium swallow in a patient with Plummer-Vinson syndrome; an endoscopic view of the esophagus of a 25-year-old man with a 3-year history of severe dysphagia; photographs of midesophageal traction diverticulum, multiple epiphrenic diverticula, long-segment Barrett esophagus, and severe Candida esophagitis; and a treatment algorithm for extraesophageal manifestations of gastroesophageal reflux disease. Tables list the high-resolution manometry classification of esophageal motility disorders, causes of esophageal strictures, classic endoscopic findings in patients with eosinophilic esophagitis, the Los Angeles classification of erosive esophagitis, categories of dysplasia, surveillance of Barrett metaplasia, medications implicated in pill-induced esophagitis, and classification of caustic esophageal injury.
This review contains 13 figures, 40 tables, and 82 references
Keywords: achalasia, dysphagia, esophagus, reflux, strictures, diverticula, endoscopy, larynx
- 2
Gastrointestinal Bleeding
- DEEPAK AGRAWAL, MDDirector, Endoscopy, Parkland Memorial Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern, Dallas, TX
- DON C ROCKEY, MDChief, Division of Digestive and Liver Diseases, Professor of Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern, Dallas, TX
Purchase PDFGastrointestinal bleeding (GIB) is commonly encountered in clinical practice, in both outpatient and inpatient settings. Minor bleeding, such as from hemorrhoids, is exceedingly common. Major bleeding requiring a high level of care results in approximately 1 million hospital admissions in the United States every year. Approximately 50% of these admissions are for upper gastrointestinal bleeding (UGIB), 40% for lower gastrointestinal bleeding (LGIB), and 10% for obscure GIB. This chapter discusses acute gastrointestinal bleeding covering history, physical examination, and laboratory studies, as well as endoscopic management and radiologic imaging. A section on UGIB covers endoscopic management, medical management, and radiologic and surgical management, variceal bleeding, Mallory-Weiss tear, Dieulafoy’s lesions, Cameron’s lesions, gastric antral vascular ectasia (GAVE), and portal hypertensive gastropathy. A section on LGIB covers diverticulosis, hemorrhoids, angiodysplasia, rectal ulcers, radiation proctitis, ischemic colitis, rectal varices, postpolypectomy bleeding, anal fissures, cancer, and polyps. Obscure GIB includes Meckel’s diverticulum, small intestinal diverticula, small intestine neoplasms, small intestine Dieulafoy’s lesion, non-steroidal antiinflammatory drug–induced small intestine erosions, and blue rubber bleb nevus syndrome. Figures include various bleeding ulcers, the wireless capsule, the bleeding vessel, a duodenal bulbar ulcer, treatment of a high-risk gastric ulcer, formation of varices, varices with a spurting lesion, various treatments for esophageal varices, a Mallory-Weiss tear, a Dieulafoy lesion in the rectum, severe portal hypertensive gastropathy, vascular ectasia, and ischemic colitis, plus an algorithm for obscure GIB. Tables cover major causes, terms and their definitions, clinical high-risk criteria for rebleeding and mortality, endoscopic high-risk stigmata for rebleeding and indications for endoscopic therapy, differentiation of portal hypertensive gastropathy and GAVE, and uncommon causes of obscure GIB.
This review contains 22 figures, 16 tables, and 115 references.
Keywords: Upper gastrointestinal bleeding, lower gastrointestinal bleeding, diverticulosis, peptic ulcer disease, hemorrhoids, variceal bleeding, Mallory-Weiss tear, endoscopy
- 3
Eosinophilic Esophagitis in Children and Adolescents
- ELIZABETH J HAIT, MD, MPHAssistant Professor, Department of Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School, Attending Physician, Division of Gastroenterology and Nutrition, Boston Children’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFEosinophilic esophagitis (EoE) is an inflammatory disorder of the esophagus characterized by symptoms of esophageal dysfunction in association with histologic evidence of eosinophilic infiltration of the esophageal mucosa. The diagnosis is based on esophageal biopsies showing more than 15 eosinophils per high-power field in the absence of pathologic gastroesophageal reflux. It can present with a wide array of upper gastrointestinal tract symptoms. Babies and toddlers typically present with feeding intolerance or refusal, vomiting, and failure to thrive. Older children often present with abdominal pain and reflux symptoms, whereas adolescents and adults typically present with solid-food dysphagia and/or food impaction. Diagnosis is also supported by a family history of EoE and other allergy-based disorders, such as asthma, seasonal allergies, and atopy. Topical corticosteroids and dietary elimination are acceptable first-line treatment approaches.
This review contains 7 figures, 5 tables, and 51 references.
Key words: dysphagia, elimination diets, endoscopic dilation, eosinophilic esophagitis, eotaxin-3, feeding dysfunction, interleukin-5, proton pump inhibitor–responsive esophageal eosinophilia, swallowed fluticasone, viscous budesonide
- 4
Gastrointestinal Motility and Functional Disorders
- ADIL E BHARUCHA, MBBS, MDProfessor of Medicine, Director, Motility Interest Group, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFGastrointestinal (GI) motility disorders represent diseases characterized by abnormal, predominantly impaired, sometimes exaggerated, movement of contents through the GI tract due to neuromuscular dysfunctions in the absence of mucosal disease and mechanical causes of impaired passage. By contrast, functional GI disorders represent illnesses, defined only by GI symptoms, which occur in the absence of mucosal or structural abnormality or of known biochemical or metabolic disorders. The first section of this chapter discusses the enteric and extrinsic neural regulation of GI sensorimotor functions and normal GI motility in humans. Disorders such as gastroparesis (including diabetic gastroparesis, idiopathic gastroparesis, and postsurgical gastroparesis), dumping syndrome, intestinal pseudo-obstruction, small intestinal bacterial overgrowth, megacolon (including Hirschsprung disease, toxic megacolon, and colonic pseudo-obstruction), chronic constipation (including defecatory disorders, normal transit constipation, and slow transit constipation), functional dyspepsia, functional diarrhea and irritable bowel syndrome, and fecal incontinence are then discussed in depth. Tables present a comparison of GI motility and functional disorders, the causes of gastroparesis, the etiology of intestinal pseudo-obstruction and fecal incontinence, common medical conditions and medications associated with constipation, and the symptom severity scale in fecal incontinence. Illustrations, graphs, magnetic resonance images, and algorithms are provided.
This chapter contains 10 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, 92 references, and 5 MCQs. - 5
Diseases Producing Malabsorption and Maldigestion
By Rupa Mukherjee, MD; Ciarán P Kelly, MD
Purchase PDFDiseases Producing Malabsorption and Maldigestion
- RUPA MUKHERJEE, MDClinical Instructor in Medicine, Department of Gastroenterology, The Celiac Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- CIARÁN P KELLY, MDProfessor of Medicine, Medical Director of The Celiac Center, Director of Gastroenterology Fellowship Training Program, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFMalabsorption refers to the impaired intestinal absorption of nutrients. It can result from congenital defects in absorption and the transport of ions and nutrients, defects in hydrolysis within the intestinal lumen, acquired defects in the intestinal absorptive cells that line the surface of the intestine, impaired bile production, or interruption of enterohepatic circulation or secondary to pancreatic insufficiency. Maldigestion, another factor in nutrient absorption, refers to the impaired digestion of nutrients within the intestinal lumen or at the terminal digestive site of the brush border membrane of mucosal epithelial cells. Although malabsorption and maldigestion are pathophysiologically distinct, they are interdependent, and in clinical practice, malabsorption has come to signify derangements in either or both processes. This chapter discusses the clinical manifestations of malabsorption and tests for suspected malabsorption. The diseases that can cause malabsorption, their diagnosis, and treatment recommendations are included. Figures illustrate the diagnosis and management of celiac disease; an approach to gluten challenge for the diagnosis or exclusion of celiac disease in patients maintained on a gluten-free diet without previous definitive diagnostic testing; and the histologic features of celiac disease, Crohn disease, collagenous sprue, autoimmune enteropathy, eosinophilic gastritis, and intestinal lymphangiectasia.
This review contains 9 figures, 25 tables, and 116 references.
Keywords: Malabsorption, maldigestion, Crohn disease, celiac disease, tropical sprue, diarrhea, endoscopy, short bowel syndrome, bacterial overgrowth
- 6
Peptic Ulcer Diseases
- EDWARD A LEW, MD, MPHStaff Gastroenterologist, VA Boston Healthcare System, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFPeptic ulcers are defects or breaks in the inner lining of the gastrointestinal (GI) tract. Although the pathogenesis is multifactorial they tend to arise when there is an imbalance between protective and aggressive factors, such as when GI mucosal defense mechanisms are impaired in the presence of gastric acid and pepsin. Peptic ulcers extend through the mucosa and the muscularis mucosae, a thin layer of smooth muscle separating the mucosa from the deeper submucosa, muscularis propria, and serosa. Peptic ulcer disease affects up to 10% of men and 4% of women in Western countries at some time in their lives. This chapter discusses the pathogenesis of peptic ulcer disease and the etiologic contribution of Helicobacter pylori infection, nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs, and gastrinoma or other hypersecretory states. Also addressed are rare and unusual causes for ulcers and GI bleeding. A section on the diagnosis of peptic ulcers discusses clinical manifestations, physical examination findings, laboratory and imaging studies, and surgical diagnosis. Differential diagnosis is also reviewed. Tests to establish the etiology of peptic ulcer disease include endoscopy, quantitative serologic tests, the urea breath test, and the fecal antigen test. Discussed separately are treatments for uncomplicated duodenal ulcers, uncomplicated gastric ulcers, intractable duodenal or gastric ulcers, complicated peptic ulcers (bleeding ulcers, acute stress ulcers, perforated ulcers, obstructing ulcers, fistulizing ulcers, and Cameron ulcers), H. pylori ulcers, and gastric cancer. Figures illustrate the etiopathogenesis of peptic ulcers, prevalence of H. pylori infection in duodenal and gastric ulcer patients compared with normal controls, the approach to a patient with new and undiagnosed ulcerlike symptoms refractory to antisecretory therapy, an upper GI series showing an uncomplicated duodenal ulcer, a chest x-ray showing pneumoperitoneum from a perforated duodenal ulcer, gastric biopsy samples showing H. pylori organisms, and the approach to treatment and follow-up in patients with either complicated or uncomplicated duodenal or gastric ulcer. Tables list differential diagnoses of peptic ulcer disease, commonly used regimens to eradicate H. pylori, additional antimicrobial agents with activity against H. pylori, and FDA-approved antisecretory drugs for active peptic ulcer disease.
This review contains 5 figures, 6 tables and 78 references
- 7
Gastrointestinal Tract Infections
- MARCIA B GOLDBERG, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Infectious Diseases, Harvard Medical School, and Physician, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MOLLY PARAS, MDDivision of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine
Purchase PDFGastrointestinal infections, which present with acute diarrhea, sometimes accompanied by vomiting, are an extremely common medical complaint, with an annual incidence of 0.6 illnesses per person. Transmission can occur from animals to person, from person to person, or by the ingestion of contaminated foodstuffs. In the United States, more than 90% of cases are caused by viruses, with norovirus being by far the most common. Common among bacterial causes of acute gastrointestinal infection are Salmonella, Campylobacter, Shigella, Shiga toxin–producing Escherichia coli, Vibrio,Yersinia, and Clostridium difficile. These infections are typically self-limited, but depending on the etiologic agent and characteristics of the host, antibiotic therapy may be indicated. Certain gastrointestinal infections are associated with significant complications, including reactive arthritis, Guillain-Barré syndrome, or septicemia.
This review contains 4 figures, 7 tables, and 60 references.
Key words: Campylobacter, Escherichia coli, Guillain-Barré syndrome,reactive arthritis, Shiga toxin, Shigella, Vibrio, Yersinia
- 8
Diverticulosis, Diverticulitis, and Appendicitis
- WILLIAM V. HARFORD, MD, FACPProfessor, Internal Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Director, GI Endoscopy, VA Medical Center, Dallas, TX
Purchase PDFColonic diverticula are herniations of colonic mucosa and submucosa through the muscularis propria. They occur where perforating arteries traverse the circular muscle layer, in parallel rows between the mesenteric and antimesenteric taenia. Colonic diverticular disease may present as diverticulosis, diverticulitis, or diverticular bleeding. Of patients with known diverticulosis, only 10% to 20% will develop diverticulitis. Diverticulitis varies in presentation and severity. This chapter discusses the diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and management of diverticulitis and its complications. Appendicitis is generally caused by obstruction of the lumen of the appendix, followed by infection. In the United States, the lifetime risk of appendicitis is about 9% for males and 7% for females. This chapter also discusses the diagnosis of appendicitis (including typical and atypical presentations and appendicitis as it presents in special groups of patients) and its management.
This review contains 3 figures, 21 tables, and 76 references.
Keywords: Diverticulosis, diverticulitis, gastrointestinal bleeding, appendicitis, abdominal infection, appendiceal perforation, antibiotics, appendectomy, colectomy, laparoscopy
- 9
Appendicitis
- JAMES CRESWELL SIMPSON, MDResident Physician, Department of Anesthesiology, Critical Care and Pain Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- SARAH SEBBAG, MD, CM, CCFP(EM)Director, Emergency Ultrasound, Ochsner Health System, Department of Emergency Medicine, New Orleans, LA
Purchase PDFAppendicitis is defined as inflammation of the vermiform appendix. It is the most common abdominal surgical emergency and occurs at an annual rate of approximately one in 10,000 in the United States. The lifetime risk of appendicitis is about 9% for males and 7% for females; approximately 80% of cases occur before 45 years of age. Appendicitis rarely occurs in infants; it increases in frequency between 2 and 4 years of age and reaches a peak between the ages of 10 and 19 years. However, clinicians must maintain a high index of suspicion in patients of all age groups. This review covers the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, and diagnosis and treatment of complicated and uncomplicated appendicitis. The disposition and outcomes are also reviewed. Figures show an image of appendicitis on a bedside sonogram, and a computed tomographic image of appendicitis. Tables list likelihood ratios of signs and symptoms of appendicitis, the sonographic appearance of appendicitis, the Alvarado scoring system, and the differential diagnosis of appendicitis.
This review contains 2 figures, 7 tables, and 36 references.
Key words: appendicitis, obstructed appendiceal lumen, rebound abdomen, right lower quadrant pain, ruptured appendix
- 10
Peritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
By W. Conrad Liles, MD, PhD; E Patchen Dellinger, MD
Purchase PDFPeritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
- W. CONRAD LILES, MD, PHDProfessor and Vice-Chair of Medicine, Director, Division of Infectious Diseases, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON
- E PATCHEN DELLINGER, MDProfessor and Vice-Chair, Department of Surgery, University of Washington, Chief, Division of General Surgery, University of Washington Medical Center, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFPeritonitis is a diffuse or localized inflammatory process affecting the peritoneal lining. Peritonitis has acute and chronic forms and may have a variety of causes. The etiology, epidemiology, diagnosis, and treatment of acute peritonitis caused by bacteria or fungi, including primary and secondary peritonitis, are discussed in this chapter. Primary or spontaneous peritonitis has no underlying intra-abdominal disorder as a direct cause of the infection but usually involves an underlying disorder that inhibits normal host defenses in the peritoneal cavity. Secondary peritonitis has an intra-abdominal focus that initiates the infection. Tertiary peritonitis is a relatively new term that refers to the persistence of intra-abdominal infection after the initial treatment of secondary peritonitis. Peritonitis in dialysis patients is also discussed. Intra-abdominal abscesses may present as complications of abdominal surgery, intra-abdominal conditions (e.g., diverticulitis, appendicitis, biliary tract disease, pancreatitis, perforated viscus), or penetrating abdominal trauma; as fever of obscure origin; or as dysfunction of neighboring organs (e.g., so-called lower lobe pneumonia related to a subphrenic abscess). Intra-abdominal abscesses are classified according to the anatomic location in which they occur: intraperitoneal, retroperitoneal, or visceral.
This review contains 1 figure, 13 tables, and 76 references.
Keywords: Peritonitis, spontaneous bacterial peritonitis, secondary peritonitis, intra-abdominal infection, abscess
- 11
Enteral and Parenteral Nutrition
By Kris M. Mogensen, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC; Malcolm K. Robinson, MD
Purchase PDFEnteral and Parenteral Nutrition
- KRIS M. MOGENSEN, MS, RD, LDN, CNSCTeam Leader Dietitian, Department of Nutrition, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- MALCOLM K. ROBINSON, MDDirector, Nutrition Support Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Surgery, Department of Surgery, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAlternative routes of nutrient administration are available for patients who are unable to eat or digest sufficient food to prevent malnutrition. These routes include enteral (administered through the gastrointestinal tract) and parenteral (administered intravenously). This review details the clinical consequences of malnutrition, nutritional assessment, the benefits of nutrition support therapy, determining the nutrient prescription, special considerations in nutrition support therapy, aspects of obtaining enteral or parenteral access, monitoring of patients receiving nutrition support therapy, and complications and ethical issues associated with enteral and parenteral nutrition. Figures include algorithms showing the identification of malnutrition, the nutrition support decision process, and the approach to gastric residual monitoring; nasogastric tube displacement leading to pneumothorax; proper placement of a long or “midline” catheter versus a peripherally inserted central catheter; and photographs of a 43-year-old man with Crohn disease complicated by enterocutaneous fistula formation, distal small bowel obstruction, and evisceration of the small bowel after developing a pelvic abscess. Tables list acute illness- or injury-related malnutrition; chronic disease−related malnutrition; social or environmental circumstances−related malnutrition; indications and contraindications to enteral and parenteral nutrition; selected examples of predictive equations; electrolyte provision in parenteral nutrition; parenteral vitamin and trace element requirements; complications associated with enteral and parenteral nutrition; and indications, contraindications, and complications of gastrostomy tube placement.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 11 tables, and 167 references.
- 12
Diseases of the Pancreas
By Sunil Sheth, MD; Gyanprakash Ketwaroo, MD, MSc; Steven Freedman, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFDiseases of the Pancreas
- SUNIL SHETH, MDCo-Director, The Pancreas Center, Division of Gastroenterology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- GYANPRAKASH KETWAROO, MD, MSCClinical Fellow, The Pancreas Center, Division of Gastroenterology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- STEVEN FREEDMAN, MD, PHDDirector, The Pancreas Center, Division of Gastroenterology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAcute pancreatitis is characterized by an acute inflamatory process of the pancreas associated with abdominal pain and elevations in serum levels of pancreatic enzymes. The acute inflammation usually completely resolves with restoration of normal pancreatic architecture and function. By contrast, chronic pancreatitis is characterized by the presence of ongoing inflammation and irreversible damage to the gland. Recurrent attacks of acute pancreatitis may lead to chronic pancreatitis over time. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, and treatment of acute and chronic pancreatitis. Figures illustrate findings on imaging studies in patients with pancreatic disorders.
This review contains 6 figures, 25 tables, and 86 references.
Keywords: Acute pancreatitis, chronic pancreatitis, pseudocyst, exocrine insufficiency, endocrine insufficiency, magnetic retrograde cholangiopancreatography, endoscopic ultrasonography
- 13
Gallstones and Biliary Tract Disease
By Vinay Chandrasekhara, MD; Gregory G. Ginsberg, MD
Purchase PDFGallstones and Biliary Tract Disease
- VINAY CHANDRASEKHARA, MDInstructor of Medicine, Gastroenterology Division, Penn Medicine, University of Pennsylvania Perelman School of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA
- GREGORY G. GINSBERG, MDProfessor of Medicine, Gastroenterology Division, Director of Endoscopic Services, Penn Medicine, University of Pennsylvania Perelman School of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFGallstones (cholelithiasis) are hardened deposits of digestive fluid that can form in the gallbladder and bile ducts. Gallstones range in size from as small as a grain of sand to as large as a billiard ball. Some people develop a single gallstone, whereas others develop many. Gallstone disease or disorders may encompass biliary pain, acute and chronic cholecystitis, choledocholithiasis, and gallstone pancreatitis. Gallstones (cholelithiasis) and biliary tract diseases constitute a common and costly health problem in the United States. This chapter reviews the formation of the two principal types of stone, the cholesterol stone and the pigment stone, that form in the gallbladder and biliary tract. The prevention of gallstones is discussed. The diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and complications of acute cholecystitis are presented. Diagnosis and treatment of chronic cholecystitis, asymptomatic cholelithiasis, choledocholithiasis, Mirizzi syndrome, and gallbladder polyps are also discussed. Common bile duct stricture, primary sclerosing cholangitis, recurrent pyogenic cholangitis, choledochal cyst, and sphincter of Oddi dysfunction are summarized.
This review contains 6 figures, 19 tables, and 111 references.
Keywords: Gallbladder, gallstones, cholecystectomy, biliary sludge, cholangitis, choledocholithiasis, cholecystitis, endoscopic retrograde cholangiopancreatography
- 14
Pancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
By Davendra Sohal, MD, MPH; Weijing Sun, MD; Daniel Haller, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
- DAVENDRA SOHAL, MD, MPHFellow, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Abramson Cancer Center, Philadelphia, PA
- WEIJING SUN, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- DANIEL HALLER, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFAccording to 2009 estimates from the American Cancer Society, cancers originating in the gastrointestinal tract rank second in both incidence and cancer-related deaths. One in four deaths in the United States is caused by cancer, with 25% of cancer-related deaths caused by gastrointestinal (GI) malignancies; more than 50% of these deaths are caused by cancer of the pancreas, stomach, esophagus, liver, or biliary tract. Recent advances in molecular biology, medical genetics, and imaging and endoscopic techniques, as well as the development of antitumor agents, have significantly altered the approaches to the prevention, diagnosis, and treatment of GI cancers. The chapter covers esophageal, gastric, pancreatic, hepatocellular, biliary tract, and anal cancers, as well as GI stromal tumors and gastric lymphoma. Coverage of all cancers includes diagnosis and treatment; various sections include information on epidemiology, etiology, risk factors, screening and prevention, molecular mutations, pathogenesis, and/or metastatic disease. Figures depict a barium esophagogram showing squamous cell carcinoma; imaging of esophageal cancer, gastric cancer, and pancreatic cancer; a pedigree of a family with inactivation of germline mutation of E-cadherin; hereditary gastric cancer; gastric cancer survival rates after gastrectomy; axial T1-weighted magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) showing cancer of the pancreatic head; and T1- and T2-weighted MRIs of intrahepatic bile duct carcinoma. Tables provide information on new cases and mortality from GI cancer in 2009; guidelines for diagnosis and surveillance of Barrett esophagus; the declining incidence of gastric cancer in Japan, Slovenia, and the United States; TNM staging of gastric cancer, pancreatic cancer, and hepatocellular carcinoma; the incidence of familial pancreatic carcinoma; molecular mutations involved in pancreatic cancer; staging of pancreatic intraepithelial neoplasia; and the Chinese University Prognostic Index.
This review contains 9 figures, 39 tables, and 173 references.
Keywords: biliary cancer, carcinoma, endoscopic, esophageal, gastric, hepatic, lesions, lymphoma, malignant, mutations
- 15
Pathophysiology and Diagnosis of Ulcerative Colitis and Crohn Disease
By Julia B. Greer, MD, MPH; Miguel D. Regueiro, MD
Purchase PDFPathophysiology and Diagnosis of Ulcerative Colitis and Crohn Disease
- JULIA B. GREER, MD, MPHAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Pittsburgh, PA
- MIGUEL D. REGUEIRO, MDProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Co-Director, Inflammatory Bowel Disease Center, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Pittsburgh, PA
Purchase PDFInflammatory bowel disease (IBD) encompasses both ulcerative colitis and Crohn disease, and is characterized by recurrent bouts of inflammation of the gastrointestinal tract. IBD affects approximately 4 million people worldwide, and rates are gradually increasing. This review covers the etiology, epidemiology, definition and pathophysiology, extraintestinal manifestations, and other disease-related complications of IBD. Figures show the distribution of ulcerative colitis and Crohn disease by location, several colonoscopic photographs of patients with ulcerative colitis as well as those with Crohn disease, computed tomography images of patients with Crohn disease, small bowel follow-through and fluoroscopic spot images of a patient with chronic structuring Crohn disease, and a computed tomographic scan showing extraenteric manifestations of Crohn disease. Tables list the differential diagnosis of ulcerative colitis, types of infectious colitis, complications of IBD, diagnostic criteria of toxic colitis, physical signs of Crohn disease, differences between Crohn disease and ulcerative colitis, and common extraintestinal manifestations of IBD.
This review contains 11 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 63 references.
- 16
Management of Ulcerative Colitis and Crohn Disease
By Julia B. Greer, MD, MPH; Miguel D. Regueiro, MD
Purchase PDFManagement of Ulcerative Colitis and Crohn Disease
- JULIA B. GREER, MD, MPHAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Pittsburgh, PA
- MIGUEL D. REGUEIRO, MDProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Co-Director, Inflammatory Bowel Disease Center, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Pittsburgh, PA
Purchase PDFThere have been considerable advances in the treatment of inflammatory bowel disease (IBD) since the 20th century, and there are multiple options available to the clinician. The management of IBD depends on the location of disease, as well as its clinical, endoscopic and histologic severity. The field is currently undergoing a paradigm shift from a step-up approach (starting treatment with a “milder” medication and, if this treatment fails, moving on to a more powerful medication) to a top-down approach (in which stronger medications are given earlier in the disease course). This review details the medications used to treat IBD, nutrition in IBD patients, and surgical treatment of IBD. Figures show step-up therapy, top-down therapy, strictureplasty technique, gross pathology image of a patient with Crohn disease and previous ileocecal resection, and ileal pouch anal anastomosis surgery. Tables list 5-aminosalicylic acid medications, antibiotics, corticosteroids, immunomodulators, and biologic medications used to treat IBD, as well as causes of nutritional deficiencies in IBD patients.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 96 references.
- 17
Constipation in the Emergency Department
By Jamie Santistevan, MD; Mary C. Westergaard, MD, FACEP; Ciara J. Barclay-Buchanan, MD, FACEP
Purchase PDFConstipation in the Emergency Department
- JAMIE SANTISTEVAN, MDResident Physician, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- MARY C. WESTERGAARD, MD, FACEPResidency Program Director, Assistant Professor (Clinical Health Sciences), Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- CIARA J. BARCLAY-BUCHANAN, MD, FACEPAssociate Residency Program Director, Assistant Professor (Clinical Health Sciences), Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
Purchase PDFConstipation can be classified as either primary constipation or secondary constipation. Constipation can be distressing to patients and can lead to serious complications, including bowel obstruction, perforation, volvulus, and proctitis. Emergency physicians should be aware of the evaluation, diagnosis, and management of patients presenting with the chief complaint of constipation. This review covers the risk factors, pathophysiology, assessment, diagnosis and treatment, and disposition and outcomes for patients presenting to the emergency department with constipation. Figures show radiographic and schematic images of several diagnoses which may present with the chief complaint of constipation.
This review contains 6 figures, 14 tables, and 54 references.
Key words: Bowel obstruction, constipation, laxative, enema, fecal impaction, abdominal distension, megacolon, megarectum, bowel motility
- 18
Hernias in the Emergency Department
By Mary C. Westergaard, MD, FACEP; Daniel Berhanu, MD; Ciara J. Barclay-Buchanan, MD, FACEP
Purchase PDFHernias in the Emergency Department
- MARY C. WESTERGAARD, MD, FACEPResidency Program Director, Assistant Professor (Clinical Health Sciences), Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- DANIEL BERHANU, MDResident Physician, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- CIARA J. BARCLAY-BUCHANAN, MD, FACEPAssociate Residency Program Director, Assistant Professor (Clinical Health Sciences), Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
Purchase PDFHernia is defined as an abnormal protrusion of an organ or tissue through a pathologic defect in its surrounding wall. Overall, hernia is common and is generally believed to be a benign condition associated with some morbidity, although it is not thought to be associated with significant mortality. Between 2001 and 2010, 2.3 million inpatient abdominal hernia repairs were performed in the United States, of which 567,000 were performed emergently. In some cases, a hernia can be a deadly condition. In 2002, hernia was listed as the cause of death for 1,595 US citizens. This review covers the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, diagnosis and treatment, and disposition and outcomes of hernia. Figures show anatomic locations of the various abdominal wall, groin, lumbar, and pelvic floor hernias; a direct inguinal hernia; an indirect inguinal hernia; point-of-care sonograms showing a ventral wall hernia and an abdominal wall hernia; and the differential diagnosis of an abdominal mass based on anatomic location. Tables list risk factors for the development of inguinal hernia, sex-based differences in inguinal hernia development, risk factors for the development of incisional hernia, factors to consider when assessing the patient for a hernia, and factors associated with the highest rates of incarceration in patients with groin hernia.
Key words: emergent hernia, hernia incarceration, incisional hernia, inguinal hernia, strangulated hernia
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 66 references.
- 19
Mesenteric Ischemia
- UGO A. EZENKWELE, MD, MPHChief, Emergency Department, Mount Sinai Queens, Associate Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, Icahn Mount Sinai School of Medicine, New York, NY
Purchase PDFAcute mesenteric ischemia is interruption of intestinal blood flow by embolism, thrombosis, or a low-flow state. Bowel infarction is the end result of a process initiated by mediator release and inflammation. On clinical assessment, the early hallmark is severe abdominal pain but minimal physical findings. The abdomen remains soft, with little or no tenderness. Mild tachycardia may be present. Early diagnosis is difficult, but selective mesenteric angiography and computed tomographic angiography have the most sensitivity; other imaging studies and serum markers can show abnormalities but lack sensitivity and specificity early in the course of the disease, when diagnosis is most critical. Treatment is by embolectomy, anticoagulation, revascularization of viable segments, or resection; sometimes vasodilator therapy is successful. If diagnosis and treatment take place before infarction occurs, mortality is low; after intestinal infarction, mortality approaches 30 to 70%. For this reason, in the emergency department, clinical diagnosis should supersede diagnostic tests, which may delay treatment.
This review contains 6 figures, 4 tables and 40 references
Key words: acute mesenteric ischemia; bowel necrosis; chronic mesenteric ischemia; mesenteric occlusive disease; mesenteric venous thrombosis; nonocclusive mesenteric ischemia; postprandial abdominal pain; superior mesenteric artery thromboembolism
- 20
Infections Due to Salmonella
- MARCIA B GOLDBERG, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Infectious Diseases, Harvard Medical School, and Physician, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MOLLY PARAS, MDDivision of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine
Purchase PDFSalmonella, which is acquired via ingestion, is classified as nontyphoidal or typhoidal disease. Typhoidal disease is caused by S typhi or S paratyphi,and nontyphoidal disease is caused by all other serovars. Salmonella causes a range of infectious syndromes that include gastroenteritis, bacteremia, endovascular infections, and enteric fever. For immunocompromised hosts or patients with extraintestinal disease, antibiotic therapy should be provided. Effective agents often include third-generation cephalosporins and fluoroquinolones, although rates of resistance of Salmonella isolates to many antibiotics are increasing. A carrier state exists whereby patients may shed bacteria despite being asymptomatic. To eradicate the carrier state, longer courses of antibiotics and, in rare instances, surgical removal of the reservoir, which is most commonly the gallbladder, may be required.
This review contains 2 figures, 4 tables, and 20 references.
Key Words: Salmonella, typhoidal, non-typhoidal, enteric fever, endovascular infection, gastroenteritis, carrier, food-borne, antibiotic resistance
- 21
Nutritional Management of Celiac Disease
By Ciarán P Kelly, MD; Satya Kurada, MD; Mariana Urquiaga, MD
Purchase PDFNutritional Management of Celiac Disease
- CIARÁN P KELLY, MDProfessor of Medicine, Medical Director of The Celiac Center, Director of Gastroenterology Fellowship Training Program, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- SATYA KURADA, MD
- MARIANA URQUIAGA, MD
Purchase PDFCeliac disease (CD) is an autoimmune disorder characterized by an immune response to gluten peptides in wheat, barley, and rye. The diagnosis of celiac disease is confirmed by three important characteristics: consistent symptoms, positive celiac-specific serology, and small intestinal biopsy findings of inflammation, crypt hyperplasia, and villous atrophy. CD may present with overt gastrointestinal symptoms, including diarrhea (or constipation), weight loss, and abdominal bloating and discomfort, or covertly with micronutrient deficiencies such as iron deficiency with anemia. A gluten-free diet (GFD) remains the mainstay of treatment. The aim of this review is to highlight the pathogenesis of CD, concepts and challenges associated with a GFD, and nutritional management of CD applicable in clinical practice to internists, gastroenterologists, and dietitians. Patients should be referred to an expert celiac dietitian for education on adherence to a GFD to address gluten contamination in the diet, the psychosocial implications of following a GFD, and macro- and micronutrient disequilibria arising from celiac disease and the GFD. Several novel therapeutics are on the horizon in various stages of development, including glutenases, antigliadin antibodies, tight junction regulators, modulation of the immune response to gliadin, and efforts to engineer less toxic gluten-containing foodstuffs.
This review contains 3 figures, 5 tables, and 61 references.
Key words: celiac disease, genetic engineering, food engineering, gluten, glutenases, gluten-free diet, oats, IgY, nutrition, tight junction regulators, wheat
- 22
Overview of Enteral Nutrition
By Rebecca Lynch, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC; Erin Sisk, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC
Purchase PDFOverview of Enteral Nutrition
- REBECCA LYNCH, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC
- ERIN SISK, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC
Purchase PDFEnteral nutrition (EN) is recognized as a medical nutrition therapy for patients with a functional gastrointestinal tract who are unable to maintain their weight and health by oral intake alone either due to a highly catabolic medical condition or a functional limitation. EN support provides calories and protein to help improve or maintain adequate weight, lean body mass, and overall nutritional status. EN also provides nonnutritive benefits such as maintaining intestinal integrity, supporting the immune system, and preventing infection. EN support can be tailored to a patient’s nutrient needs, and there are various formulas that vary in composition of macronutrients, concentration, and electrolytes for specific disease processes or conditions that may help with tolerance and absorption. EN support complications include issues with access, diarrhea, constipation, electrolyte abnormalities, hyperglycemia, and dehydration/overhydration. Generally, EN is well tolerated. While a patient is on this type of nutrition support, it is important to closely monitor tolerance, weight, laboratory values if indicated, and overall clinical progress, with adjustment to the regimen as needed.
This review contains 1 figure, 4 tables, and 48 references.
Key words: enteral access, enteral formula, enteral nutrition support, gastric residuals, gastrointestinal tract, immunonutrition, malnutrition, medical nutrition therapy, tube feed formula, tube feed tolerance, tube feeding, volume-based feeding
- 23
Endoscopic Techniques for Obtaining Enteral Access
By Marvin Ryou, MD; Sanjay Salgado, MD
Purchase PDFEndoscopic Techniques for Obtaining Enteral Access
- MARVIN RYOU, MDAssociate Staff Physician, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- SANJAY SALGADO, MD
Purchase PDFIn the absence of contraindications, enteral feeding is recommended for patients who are expected to be intolerant of oral feedings beyond 7 days. Enteral access can be accomplished by a variety of means, including surgical, endoscopic, or radiographic methods. This review focuses on endoscopy-guided options for enteral access. These methods include gastric feeding, which can be accomplished by orogastric, nasogastric, or percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy tube placement, and postpyloric feeding, accessed through oral or nasal jejunal tubes, percutaneous gastrostomy with a jejunal extension, or direct percutaneous jejunostomy. The indications, techniques, complications, and comparative data of these placement options are outlined, and special clinical considerations (including establishing access in patients with dementia or cirrhosis and those on anticoagulation) are discussed.
This review contains 5 figures, 1 table, and 33 references.
Key words: direct percutaneous jejunostomy, endoscopy, enteral access in cirrhosis, enteral access in dementia, enteral feeding, enteric access, nasogastric feeding tubes, percutaneous endoscopic gastrojejunostomy tubes, percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy tubes
- 24
Nonvariceal Upper Gastrointestinal Bleeding
By John R. Saltzman, MD; Wasif Abidi, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFNonvariceal Upper Gastrointestinal Bleeding
- JOHN R. SALTZMAN, MDDirector of Endoscopy, Division of Gastroenterology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- WASIF ABIDI, MD, PHDResearch Fellow in Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Endoscopy, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFGastrointestinal (GI) bleeding that is proximal to the ligament of Treitz is considered upper GI bleeding (UGIB). UGIB can be further divided into variceal and nonvariceal, differentiated by etiology, presentation, management, and mortality. This review of nonvariceal UGIB addresses the epidemiology, diagnosis, treatment (including endoscopic therapy), prognosis, and differential diagnosis. Recommendations presented are evidence based and consistent with consensus statements and society guidelines. Figures show stigmata of recent hemorrhage, endoscopic therapy, peptic ulcer disease, Mallory-Weiss syndrome, angiodysplasia, Dieulafoy lesion, and arterioenteric fistula. Tables list the manifestation of GI bleeding and the presumed source of the bleeding, clues in the symptom and presentation of the patient that may suggest the diagnosis, medical history and physical examination findings that can suggest a specific diagnosis, a comparison of different prognostic scoring systems, differential diagnosis of UGIB, various etiologies of peptic ulcer disease, and treatment regimens for Helicobacter pylori.
This review contains 7 figures, 10 tables, and 85 references
- 25
Lower Gastrointestinal Bleeding
- JENNIFER NAYOR, MDClinical Research Fellow, Division of Gastroenterology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- JOHN R. SALTZMAN, MDDirector of Endoscopy, Division of Gastroenterology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFOf patients who present with major gastrointestinal (GI) bleeding, 20 to 30% will ultimately be diagnosed with bleeding originating from a lower GI source. Lower GI bleeding has traditionally been defined as bleeding originating from a source distal to the ligament of Treitz; however, with the advent of capsule endoscopy and deep enteroscopy allowing for visualization of the entire small bowel, the definition has been updated to GI bleeding originating from a source distal to the ileocecal valve. Lower GI bleeding can range from occult blood loss to massive bleeding with hemodynamic instability and predominantly affects older individuals, with a mean age at presentation of 63 to 77 years. Comorbid illness, which is a risk factor for mortality from GI bleeding, is also more common with increasing age. Most deaths related to GI bleeding are not due to uncontrolled hemorrhage but exacerbation of underlying comorbidities or nosocomial complications. This review covers the following areas: evaluation of lower GI bleeding (including physical examination and diagnostic tests), initial management, and differential diagnosis. Disorders addressed in the differential diagnosis include diverticulosis, arteriovenous malformations (AVMs), ischemic colitis, anorectal disorders, radiation proctitis, postpolypectomy bleeding, and colorectal neoplasms. Figures show an algorithm for management of patients with suspected lower GI bleeding, tagged red blood cell scans, diverticular bleeding, colonic AVM, ischemic colitis, bleeding hemorrhoid, chronic radiation proctitis, and ileocolonic valve polyp. Tables list descriptive terms for rectal bleeding and suggested location of bleeding, imaging modalities and differential diagnosis for lower GI bleeding, endoscopic techniques for hemostasis, and an internal hemorrhoids grading system.
This review contains 9 figures, 8 tables, and 103 references.
- 26
Intestinal Obstruction
- LILAH F MORRIS-WISEMAN, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Surgery, University of Arizona, Tucson, AZ
Purchase PDFBowel obstruction (mechanical and functional) is a common cause of hospitalization for abdominal pain; patients with complaints of abdominal pain, nausea, vomiting, distention, and lack of flatus or bowel movement should be evaluated for obstruction. The surgeon must approach this diagnosis in a stepwise fashion to determine whether the patient has ischemia necessitating emergent operative intervention or whether initial nonoperative management is warranted. Mechanical obstruction in the small bowel is most commonly caused by adhesions from previous surgery, hernia, or mass, whereas mechanical obstruction in the colon is most often caused by volvulus, cancer, and diverticular stricture. Initial evaluation includes a detailed history, physical examination, and biochemical evaluation with initiation of resuscitative efforts as needed. CT with intravenous contrast is often most readily available and most helpful in diagnosing bowel obstruction type; specific CT findings can suggest the need for urgent operative intervention. Water-soluble contrast medium challenge has emerged as an important adjunct in evaluating the likelihood that a patient with nonischemic bowel obstruction will require operative intervention.
This review contains 14 figures, 15 tables and 65 references
Keywords:Adhesive bowel obstruction, ileus, ischemic bowel obstruction, laparoscopic adhesiolysis, large bowel obstruction, postoperative bowel obstruction, small bowel obstruction, volvulus, water-soluble contrast medium
- 27
Evaluation and Treatment of Monogenic Forms of Inflammatory Bowel Diseases
By Dror S Shouval, MD, MMSc
Purchase PDFEvaluation and Treatment of Monogenic Forms of Inflammatory Bowel Diseases
- DROR S SHOUVAL, MD, MMSCPediatric Gastroenterology Unit, Edmond and Lily Safra Children’s Hospital, Sheba Medical Center, Tel Hashomer, Israel; Sackler Faculty of Medicine, Tel Aviv University, Tel Aviv, Israel
Purchase PDFInflammatory bowel diseases (IBDs) are complex disorders that develop in genetically susceptible hosts due to dysregulated immune responses to microbial dysbiosis and environmental changes. Although in the vast majority of cases, the genetic contribution to development of these diseases is small, in rare cases, IBD develops directly as a result of deleterious mutations in the genes involved in immune and epithelial cell function. In these cases, intestinal inflammation is usually severe, which develops in most cases in the first years of life and occasionally is accompanied by recurrent or atypical infections. In this review, the approach to different monogenic disorders that cause IBD is discussed, including mutations in the IL-10 pathway, neutrophil defects, regulatory T-cell disorders, autoinflammatory conditions, epithelial cell diseases, and disorders affecting B- and T-lymphocyte dysfunction. Moreover, a multidisciplinary diagnostic approach is suggested, which highlights in which cases a monogenic disorder should be suspected.
This review contains 3 figures, 3 tables, and 42 references.
Key Words: inflammatory bowel disease, IL-10, chronic granulomatous disease, common variable immune deficiency, epithelial cells, genetics, immune cells, mucosal homeostasis, pathogenesis, very early–onset disease.
- 28
Evaluation and Treatment of Pediatric Obesity
- NIRAV K DESAIInstructor in Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Boston Children’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- SAMIR SOFTICInstructor in Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Boston Children’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFObesity is one of the most significant health problems facing children and adolescents. The definition of overweight in children is a body mass index between the 85th and less than 95th percentile, whereas obesity is greater than or equal to the 95th percentile for age and sex. There are multiple comorbidities associated with obesity, including dyslipidemia, hypertension, type 2 diabetes, sleep apnea, and nonalcoholic fatty liver disease, as well as psychosocial issues.
This review contains 3 figures, 4 tables and 63 references.
Key Words bariatric surgery, metabolic syndrome, obesity treatment, pediatric obesity, weight loss surgery
- 29
Nutrition Management in Mechanical Circulatory Support
By Dane A Coyne, MD; Mitali P Shah, MD; Kris M Mogensen, MS, RD-AP, LDN, CNSC; John C Klick, MD, FCCP, FASE, FCCM
Purchase PDFNutrition Management in Mechanical Circulatory Support
- DANE A COYNE, MD
- MITALI P SHAH, MD
- KRIS M MOGENSEN, MS, RD-AP, LDN, CNSC
- JOHN C KLICK, MD, FCCP, FASE, FCCM
Purchase PDFHeart failure is a devastating progressive disease process that is rising in incidence throughout the world. For patients with end-stage heart failure, orthotopic heart transplantation had been the only therapeutic option. Unfortunately, the number of patients requiring such therapy far exceeds the number of available organs. Recent advancements in technology have made implantable cardiac assist devices a reality. Outcomes with these devices are superior to maximal medical therapy and may serve either as a bridge to the availability of a donor organ or as “destination” therapy for the patient with end-stage heart failure. In addition, new technology can also provide temporary mechanical support for patients with acute decompensated cardiogenic shock, allowing preservation of end-organ function until more definitive long-term mechanical support can be coordinated. Patients with end-stage heart failure experience unique nutritional challenges. Mechanical circulatory support adds yet another unique dimension to the nutritional support challenges of this patient population.
This review contains 2 figures, 5 tables, and 29 references.
Key words: cardiogenic shock, enteral nutrition, extracorporeal membrane oxygenation, heart failure, mechanical circulatory support, nutritional support, parenteral nutrition, ventricular assist device
- 30
Endoscopic Management of Lower Gastrointestinal Hemorrhage
By Rebecca Kosowicz, MD; Lisa L. Strate, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFEndoscopic Management of Lower Gastrointestinal Hemorrhage
- REBECCA KOSOWICZ, MDGastroenterology Fellow, Department of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- LISA L. STRATE, MD, MPHProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFLower gastrointestinal bleeding (LGIB) is a common gastrointestinal emergency. Colonoscopy is the initial diagnostic and therapeutic procedure for most patients with LGIB. The optimal timing of colonoscopy is uncertain, but earlier examinations are associated with higher diagnostic yield. In patients with severe bleeding, colonoscopy should be performed within 24 hours of presentation after an adequate orally administered colon preparation. Additional washing during colonoscopy and careful inspection should be performed to identify high-risk stigmata. Endoscopic therapy should be attempted if high-risk bleeding stigmata are identified. The endoscopic treatment modality depends on the bleeding source, location, operator expertise, and the need for ongoing anticoagulation or antiplatelet therapy.
This review 5 tables, 5 figures, and 50 references.
Keywords: argon plasma coagulation, clipping, colonoscopy, diverticular bleeding, endoscopic band ligation, endoscopic hemostasis, postpolypectomy bleeding, stigmata of recent hemorrhage, vascular ectasias
- 31
Constipation in the Emergency Department
By Jamie Santistevan, MD; Ciara J. Barclay-Buchanan, MD, FACEP; Mary C. Westergaard, MD, FACEP
Purchase PDFConstipation in the Emergency Department
- JAMIE SANTISTEVAN, MDResident Physician, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- CIARA J. BARCLAY-BUCHANAN, MD, FACEPAssociate Residency Program Director, Assistant Professor (Clinical Health Sciences), Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- MARY C. WESTERGAARD, MD, FACEPResidency Program Director, Assistant Professor (Clinical Health Sciences), Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Wisconsin School of Medicine and Public Health, Madison, WI
- 32
Gallstones and Biliary Tract Disease
By Vinay Chandrasekhara, MD; Gregory G. Ginsberg, MD
Purchase PDFGallstones and Biliary Tract Disease
- VINAY CHANDRASEKHARA, MDInstructor of Medicine, Gastroenterology Division, Penn Medicine, University of Pennsylvania Perelman School of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA
- GREGORY G. GINSBERG, MDProfessor of Medicine, Gastroenterology Division, Director of Endoscopic Services, Penn Medicine, University of Pennsylvania Perelman School of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA
- 33
Diseases of the Pancreas
By Sunil Sheth, MD; Gyanprakash Ketwaroo, MD, MSc; Steven Freedman, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFDiseases of the Pancreas
- SUNIL SHETH, MDCo-Director, The Pancreas Center, Division of Gastroenterology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- GYANPRAKASH KETWAROO, MD, MSCClinical Fellow, The Pancreas Center, Division of Gastroenterology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- STEVEN FREEDMAN, MD, PHDDirector, The Pancreas Center, Division of Gastroenterology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- 34
Peritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
By W. Conrad Liles, MD, PhD; E Patchen Dellinger, MD
Purchase PDFPeritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
- W. CONRAD LILES, MD, PHDProfessor and Vice-Chair of Medicine, Director, Division of Infectious Diseases, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON
- E PATCHEN DELLINGER, MDProfessor and Vice-Chair, Department of Surgery, University of Washington, Chief, Division of General Surgery, University of Washington Medical Center, Seattle, WA
- 35
Pancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
By Davendra Sohal, MD, MPH; Weijing Sun, MD; Daniel Haller, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
- DAVENDRA SOHAL, MD, MPHFellow, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Abramson Cancer Center, Philadelphia, PA
- WEIJING SUN, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- DANIEL HALLER, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- 36
Diverticulosis, Diverticulitis, and Appendicitis
- WILLIAM V. HARFORD, MD, FACPProfessor, Internal Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Director, GI Endoscopy, VA Medical Center, Dallas, TX
- 37
Esophageal Disorders
- MICHAEL F. VAEZI, MD, PHD, MSC (EPI)Professor of Medicine, Clinical Director of Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Vanderbilt University Medical Center, Nashville, TN
- 38
Intestinal Obstruction
- LILAH F MORRIS-WISEMAN, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Surgery, University of Arizona, Tucson, AZ
- 39
Crohn Disease in Childhood and Adolescence
- LORI ZIMMERMANBoston Children's Hospital, Department of Gastroenterology and Nutrition, Boston, MA, United States
Purchase PDFCrohn disease (CD) is a chronic inflammatory condition that can occur throughout the gastrointestinal tract (the mouth to the anus). CD is classified by location within the gastrointestinal tract and behavior of the disease (inflammatory, penetrating, and/or stricturing). It can also affect the extraintestinal tissue and cause perianal disease. It occurs from a complex interplay of genetic predisposition, altered gut microbiota, immunologic dysregulation, and likely environmental triggers. Children with CD often present with signs and symptoms related to the inflammation within their gastrointestinal tract. Most children with CD will present with diarrhea and abdominal pain, whereas some will present with rectal bleeding, fevers, weight loss, perianal disease, or joint disease. There is no single test to confidently diagnose a patient with CD. Instead, clinicians rely on a combination of biomarkers in the serum and stool, imaging studies, and endoscopic evaluation to make the diagnosis. The general aims of treatment of children with CD are to induce and maintain clinical remission of disease, optimize nutrition and growth, minimize adverse effects of therapies, and ultimately target mucosal healing.
This review contains 3 figures, 3 tables and 34 references.
Key Words: biologics, child, chronic diarrhea, Crohn disease, hematochezia, inflammatory bowel disease, immunodeficiency, pediatric, weight loss
- 40
Peptic Ulcer Diseases
- EDWARD A LEW, MD, MPHStaff Gastroenterologist, VA Boston Healthcare System, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 41
Lower Gastrointestinal Bleeding
- JENNIFER NAYOR, MDClinical Research Fellow, Division of Gastroenterology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- JOHN R. SALTZMAN, MDDirector of Endoscopy, Division of Gastroenterology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 42
Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
- R. THOMAS FINN III, MD, MBAClinical Fellow in Medicine, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- WALTER W CHAN, MD, MPHDirector, Center for Gastrointestinal Motility, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Endoscopy, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFGastroesophageal reflux disease (GERD) is the most common gastrointestinal diagnosis made in outpatient clinics, responsible for over 5 million annual outpatient visits and likely hundreds of thousands of inpatient stays for noncardiac chest pain. GERD’s current definition, based on international consensus, is a “condition which develops when the reflux of stomach contents causes troublesome symptoms (i.e., at least two heartburn episodes per week) and/or complications.” Also defining GERD is the presence of erosive esophagitis on upper endoscopy (esophagogastroduodenoscopy [EGD]) with or without the presence of troublesome symptoms or the presence of troublesome symptoms without endoscopic evidence of erosive esophagitis (also known as nonerosive reflux disease). This review looks at GERD in detail, including its epidemiology and risk factors, genetics, pathogenesis and etiologic factors, clinical presentation and symptoms, differentials, diagnosis, and complications. Figures presented are an EGD image showing signs of erosive esophagitis, Barrett esophagus, and hiatal hernia and sample recordings from a 24-hour combined multichannel intraluminal impedance and pH testing. Tables list differential diagnoses for GERD, indications for performing EGD in patients with GERD symptoms, and a summary of GERD therapies.
This review contains 2 figures, 4 tables, and 74 references.
- 43
Gastroesophageal Reflux Disease
- R. THOMAS FINN III, MD, MBAClinical Fellow in Medicine, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- WALTER W CHAN, MD, MPHDirector, Center for Gastrointestinal Motility, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Endoscopy, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 44
Nonvariceal Upper Gastrointestinal Bleeding
By John R. Saltzman, MD; Wasif Abidi, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFNonvariceal Upper Gastrointestinal Bleeding
- JOHN R. SALTZMAN, MDDirector of Endoscopy, Division of Gastroenterology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- WASIF ABIDI, MD, PHDResearch Fellow in Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Endoscopy, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 45
Gastrointestinal Bleeding
- DEEPAK AGRAWAL, MDDirector, Endoscopy, Parkland Memorial Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern, Dallas, TX
- DON C ROCKEY, MDChief, Division of Digestive and Liver Diseases, Professor of Medicine, University of Texas Southwestern, Dallas, TX
- 1
- Geriatric Medicine
- 1
Approach to the Geriatric Patient
By Tia Kostas, MD; Mark Simone, MD; James L Rudolph, MD, SM
Purchase PDFApproach to the Geriatric Patient
- TIA KOSTAS, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Section of Geriatrics & Palliative Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Chicago, Chicago, IL
- MARK SIMONE, MDInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associate Program Director-Primary Care, Mount auburn Hospital Internal Medicine Residency, Director, Quality Improvement, Division of Geriatric Medicine, Department of Medicine, Mount Auburn Hospital, Cambridge, MA
- JAMES L RUDOLPH, MD, SMAssociate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Chief (Interim) Geriatrics and Palliative Care, Director, Boston, GRECC, VA Boston Healthcare System, Jamaica Plain, MA, Acting Clinical Chief, Associate Epidemiologist, Division of Aging, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAs of 2012, over one in eight Americans is over the age of 65, and this number is rising, particularly in the 85+ age group. This segment of the population has a rate of hospitalization three times higher than that for persons of all ages. General internists and family medicine physicians provide a large portion of care for this age group and should therefore be comfortable using a comprehensive approach to geriatric assessment. This review describes general considerations regarding geriatric care, including the process of taking a functional history and clinical implications of geriatric care. The geriatric assessment process is discussed in terms of physical, cognitive, social, and medical domains. The benefits of geriatric assessment in primary care, specialty care, and hospitalized patients are described. Tables outline activities of daily living, sensory changes with aging, major causes of visual impairment in the geriatric population, major neurocognitive disorder diagnostic criteria, medications to avoid or use with caution based on Beers criteria and Screening Tool of Older individuals’ Potentially inappropriate Prescriptions criteria, U.S. Preventive Services Task Force–recommended services relevant to older adults, and vaccinations in older adults. Figures illustrate the key vulnerabilities of older adults; outcomes linked to functional dependence; common disorders associated with cognitive concerns; domains of cognition and examples of impairment in theDiagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, fifth edition; the social and medical domains of geriatric assessment; barriers to medication adherence in older patients; and resources for medication appropriateness in older adults.
This review contains 8 highly rendered figures, 8 tables, 110 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 2
Rehabilitation of Geriatric Patients
By Stephanie Studenski, MD, MPH; Cynthia R. Brown, MD, MSPH; Susan E. Hardy, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFRehabilitation of Geriatric Patients
- STEPHANIE STUDENSKI, MD, MPHProfessor, Department of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh School of Medicine, Pittsburgh, PA
- CYNTHIA R. BROWN, MD, MSPHAssistant Professor, Division of Geriatrics, Department of Medicine, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- SUSAN E. HARDY, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFPrimary care physicians play an important role in the rehabilitation of geriatric patients: they must be able to assess rehabilitation potential, determine specific patient needs, and then determine the appropriate setting to optimize patient care. Rehabilitation service planning is usually based on a different model of diagnosis and treatment than traditional medical care. This chapter describes the key aspects of rehabilitation planning for stroke, amputation and peripheral vascular disease, hip fracture, rheumatoid arthritis, and arthroplasty. The revised World Health Organization International Classification of Functioning, Disability and Health (ICIDH-2), included in a figure, can be used to assess the causes of disability, plan treatment approaches, and determine the outcomes of care. Tables describe selected results of the neurologic examination of a patient with stroke, assessment and management of complications of stroke and other disabling conditions, and pharmacologic therapy for poststroke depression. An algorithm shows the selection of the appropriate setting for rehabilitation after hospitalization for acute stroke. The Orpington Prognostic Scale for estimating stroke recovery is provided, as is a list of current Internet resources pertaining to geriatric care. This chapter contains 96 references.
- 3
Mistreatment of Elders
- EMILY I GORMAN, MDDepartment of Emergency Medicine, Boston Medical Center and Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- JUDITH LINDEN, MDAssociate Professor and Vice Chair for Education, Department of Emergency Medicine, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston Medical Center, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFElder mistreatment affects a considerable proportion of individuals older than 60 to 65 years of age and may include intentional abuse (physical, sexual, emotional, or financial) and neglect. As the proportion of the population that is older than 65 years of age increases, elder mistreatment will become an increasingly common issue. Only a minority of cases of elder abuse are reported; thus, an interview with the patient should be conducted in private if elder mistreatment is suspected. Patient risk factors for elder mistreatment include cognitive or behavioral impairment, poor physical health, and poor social supports. This review examines the approach to the patient, as well as definitive treatment, disposition, and outcomes for victims of elder abuse. The figure shows an algorithm for elder abuse assessment and intervention. Tables list types of elder abuse, factors predisposing to elder mistreatment, indicators of abuse, and the Elder Abuse Suspicion Index.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 4 tables, and 42 references.
- 4
Assessment of the Geriatric Patient
- MICHELLE MARTINCHEK, MD
Purchase PDFGeriatric syndromes are complex conditions that are common in older adults and often have multiple contributing factors. These syndromes do not fit into discrete disease or organ system categories like other conditions. As the population of older adults continues to grow, it is important that providers are equipped to assess older adults for these geriatric syndromes. These syndromes are associated with functional disability and other poor outcomes. Examples of these syndromes include cognitive impairment, delirium, falls, frailty, weight loss, and pressure ulcers. Understanding the epidemiology, pathogenesis, and predisposing factors may help providers identify patients at risk for these syndromes. Furthermore, a thorough assessment is key in the evaluation of these syndromes.
This review contains 4 figures, 17 tables and 52 references
Key Words: cognition, dementia, delirium, fall, frailty, gait, geriatric, malnutrition, pressure ulcer, weight loss
- 5
Management of the Geriatric Patient
- MICHELLE MARTINCHEK, MD
Purchase PDFGeriatric syndromes are complex conditions in older adults that often have many contributing factors. Examples of common geriatric syndromes include cognitive impairment, delirium, falls, frailty, weight loss, and pressure ulcers. Identifying the patients at risk for these syndromes and enacting preventive measures are also important to try to reduce the impact that many of these syndromes may have on outcomes. These syndromes can happen across many different care settings including in the community, outpatient setting, hospital, and nursing facilities. Once these syndromes are identified, management techniques often include multifactorial approaches and use both nonpharmacologic and pharmacologic means. Management strategies may include assistance from interdisciplinary team members, families, and caregivers of the patient.
This review contains 4 figures, 5 tables and 30 references
Keywords:cognition, delirium, dementia, fall, frailty, gait, geriatric, malnutrition, pressure ulcer, weight loss
- 6
- 7
- 1
- Hematology
- Hematologic Malignancies
- 1
Acute Leukemia
- RICHARD A. LARSON, MDProfessor of Medicine, Pritzker School of Medicine, University of Chicago. Chicago, IL
- ROLAND B WALTER, MD, PHD, MSAssistant Member, Clinical Research Division, Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center, Seattle, WA, Associate Professor of Medicine, Division of Hematology/Department of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFThe acute leukemias are malignant clonal disorders characterized by aberrant differentiation and proliferation of transformed hematopoietic progenitor cells. These cells accumulate within the bone marrow and lead to suppression of the production of normal blood cells, with resulting symptoms from varying degrees of anemia, neutropenia, and thrombocytopenia or from infiltration into tissues. They are currently classified by their presumed cell of origin, although the field is moving rapidly to genetic subclassification. This review covers epidemiology; etiology; classification of leukemia by morphology, immunophenotyping, and cytogenetic/molecular abnormalities; cytogenetics of acute leukemia; general principles of therapy; acute myeloid leukemia; acute lymphoblastic leukemia; and future possibilities. The figure shows the incidence of acute leukemias in the United States. Tables list World Health Organization (WHO) classification of acute myeloid leukemia and related neoplasms, expression of cell surface and cytoplasmic markers for the diagnosis of acute myeloid leukemia and mixed-phenotype acute leukemia, WHO classification of acute lymphoblastic leukemia, WHO classification of acute leukemias of ambiguous lineage, WHO classification of myelodysplastic syndromes, European LeukemiaNet cytogenetic and molecular genetic subsets in acute myeloid leukemia with prognostic importance, cytogenetic and molecular subtypes of acute lymphoblastic leukemia, terminology used in leukemia treatment, and treatment outcome for adults with acute leukemia.
This review contains 2 figures, 15 tables, and 119 references.
Keywords: Acute leukemia, acute myeloid leukemia, acute lymphoblastic leukemia, cancer, cytogenetics, chromosomal abnormality
- 2
Essential Thrombocythemia and Myelofibrosis
By Hagop M. Kantarjian, MD; Srdan Verstovsek, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFEssential Thrombocythemia and Myelofibrosis
- HAGOP M. KANTARJIAN, MDProfessor and Chair, Department of Leukemia, The University of Texas MD Anderson Cancer Center, Houston, TX
- SRDAN VERSTOVSEK, MD, PHDProfessor, Department of Leukemia, The University of Texas MD Anderson Cancer Center, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFThis review details two major clonal stem cell disorders: essential thrombocythemia (ET) and myelofibrosis (MF). ET is distinguished by a sustained proliferation of megakaryocytes that results in peripheral blood thrombocytosis. Primary myelofibrosis (PMF) is associated with extramedullary hematopoiesis, splenomegaly, a leukoerythroblastic blood picture, and varying degrees of marrow fibrosis with marked megakaryocyte hyperplasia and atypia. The epidemiology, etiology/genetics, pathogenesis, diagnosis (including clinical manifestations and laboratory tests), differentials, management, and prognosis of each disorder are examined. Also included is the evaluation of treatment options for MF, including interferon alfa, JAK inhibitors, and allogeneic stem cell transplantation, the latter of which is still the only curative treatment for MF. Figures show treatment algorithms for ET and MF. Tables list the current criteria for the diagnosis of ET and PMF via the World Health Organization (WHO), the guidelines for diagnosis of post-ET MF via the International Working Group for Myelofibrosis Research and Treatment (IWG-MRT), prognostic factors in the International Prognostic Score for ET (IPSET) and IPSET-thrombosis, prognostic scoring systems for MF, and the clinical activity of JAK2 inhibitors.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 60 references.
- 3
Chronic Myeloid Leukemia
- ELIAS JABBOUR, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Department of Leukemia, The University of Texas MD Anderson Cancer Center, Houston, TX
- SUSAN O'BRIEN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Department of Leukemia, The University of Texas MD Anderson Cancer Center, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFChronic myeloid leukemia (CML), also known as chronic myelogenous leukemia, chronic myelocytic leukemia, and chronic granulocytic leukemia, is characterized by the expansion of myeloid progenitor cells at various stages of maturation, their premature release into the circulation, and a tendency to home to extramedullary sites. Symptoms at presentation reflect the increase in mass and turnover of the leukemic cells, although as many as 50% of patients are asymptomatic at diagnosis and come to attention through unexpected findings on routine blood tests. In treatment, the ongoing development of established and novel tyrosine kinase inhibitors (TKIs) has made for closer to normal life spans in patients diagnosed with CML. This review serves as an overview of CML, detailing its epidemiology and etiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, treatment (including an assessment of the latest clinical trials involving TKIs), and management of patients with advanced phases. Figures show BCR-ABL signaling pathways and mechanisms of resistance to imatinib. Tables list stages of CML, differential diagnosis of CML and Philadelphia chromosome–negative myeloproliferative disorders, a summary of pivotal phase III trials of approved TKIs for the treatment of front-line or relapsed CML, response evaluation to TKIs used as first-line therapy, and a summary of important phase II trials of second- and third-generation TKIs after previous TKI failure.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 87 references.
- 4
Chronic Lymphocytic Leukemia and Other Chronic Lymphoid Leukemias
By Tait D. Shanafelt, MD
Purchase PDFChronic Lymphocytic Leukemia and Other Chronic Lymphoid Leukemias
- TAIT D. SHANAFELT, MDProfessor of Medicine, Division of Hematology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFThe chronic lymphoid leukemias are a group of generally indolent B cell malignancies that include chronic lymphocytic leukemia (CLL), prolymphocytic leukemia, hairy cell leukemia, and large granular lymphocyte leukemia. The unique aspects of diagnosis and management for each condition are discussed separately, with the primary focus being on CLL, the most common form of leukemia in most Western countries. Charts show the percentages of CLL patients’ survival divided into Rai risk category, treatment-free survival, and overall survival, and an algorithm displays approaches to selecting therapy for CLL patients. Tables list how CLL and other B cell lymphoproliferative disorders can be distinguished using immunophenotyping, chromosome categories by fluorescence in situ hybridization for predicting CLL patient survival, criteria indications for the initiation of therapy from the International Workshop on CLL and the National Cancer Institute CLL Working Group, and criteria for high-risk CLL disease.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 172 references.
- 5
Plasma Cell Disorders
- MORIE A. GERTZ, MD, MACPChair, Department of Medicine, Roland Seidler Junior Professor of the Art of Medicine, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFMultiple myeloma represents 1.4% of all new patients with cancer and will result in an estimated 11,090 deaths in 2014. It is twice as common in black men as in white men and 2.5 times more common in black women than in white women. Myeloma is the 14th most common cause of cancer in the United States, with a median age at diagnosis of 69 years. Multiple myeloma is defined by the presence of a clonal growth of plasma cells, usually in the bone marrow, but patients may also present with extramedullary disease. Anemia and bone disease are common in patients with multiple myeloma. Multiple myeloma cells display multiple genetic abnormalities, with no one specific genetic lesion common to a majority of patients. This module describes the immunologic profile of multiple myeloma and its diagnosis, monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance, smoldering multiple myeloma, plasmacytoma, plasma cell leukemia, the clinical presentation of multiple myeloma bone disease, anemia, renal impairment, hypercalcemia, and neurologic symptoms associated with multiple myeloma. Therapy for transplantation-eligible and non–transplantation-eligible patients, maintenance treatment for multiple myeloma, Waldenström macroglobulinemia, and amyloidosis are also discussed. Tables outline the risk of monoclonal gammopathy of undetermined significance evolution, the myeloma staging system, recommended diagnostic testing and uniform response criteria for myeloma, and commonly used regimens in the treatment of myeloma. Figures include a magnetic resonance image showing multiple plasmacytomas, tibial lytic lesion from myeloma, calvarial lytic lesions, a positron emission tomographic scan in a myeloma patient, and hyperviscosity causing retinal hemorrhages.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 149 references.
- 6
Lymphomas
- KIERON DUNLEAVY, MDAttending Physician/Investigator, Lymphoma Therapeutics Section, Metabolism Branch, National Cancer Institute, Bethesoa, Maryland
- WYNDHAM H WILSON, MD, PHDSenior Investigator, Chief, Lymphoma Therapeutics Section, Metabolism Branch, National Cancer Institute, Bethesoa, Maryland
Purchase PDFLymphoma is the fifth most common type of cancer in the United States, with 74,490 new cases estimated in 2009. Approximately 15% of patients with lymphoma have Hodgkin lymphoma; the remainder have one of the non-Hodgkin lymphomas. The incidence of non-Hodgkin lymphoma has increased steadily over recent decades. This chapter reviews the epidemiology, classification, clinical features, pathology, diagnostic evaluation, staging and prognosis, and treatment of Hodgkin and non-Hodgkin lymphoma. Other topics discussed include the acute and chronic effects of therapy for Hodgkin disease, as well as the subtypes of non-Hodgkin lymphomas, including indolent B cell lymphoma, follicular lymphoma, small lymphocytic lymphoma, mantle cell lymphoma, marginal-zone lymphoma, diffuse large B cell lymphoma (DLBCL), primary central nervous system lymphoma (PCNSL), Burkitt lymphoma, and HIV-related non-Hodgkin lymphoma. Figures illustrate the cellular appearance of Hodgkin lymphoma subtypes and DLBCL, diagnosis of DLBCL subtypes by gene expression, computed tomography and plain chest film in primary mediastinal cell lymphoma, MRI of the brain in PCNSL, and gene expression and gene expression predictors of survival among patients with DLBCL treated with rituximab, cyclophosphamide, hydroxydaunorubicin, vincristine [Oncovin], and prednisone (R-CHOP). Tables describe the Ann Arbor classification and the Cotswold modification for staging of lymphoma; the International Prognostic Score for advanced Hodgkin lymphoma; the World Health Organization classification of hematopoietic neoplasms; chromosomal translocations in non-Hodgkin lymphoma; the Eastern Cooperative Oncology Group performance scale; the International Prognostic Index for aggressive non-Hodgkin lymphoma; and the Follicular Lymphoma International Prognostic Index. This chapter has 185 references.
This review contains 9 tables, 7 figures and 185 references
- 7
Acute Leukemia
- RICHARD A. LARSON, MDProfessor of Medicine, Pritzker School of Medicine, University of Chicago. Chicago, IL
- ROLAND B WALTER, MD, PHD, MSAssistant Member, Clinical Research Division, Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center, Seattle, WA, Associate Professor of Medicine, Division of Hematology/Department of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- 1
- Principles of Nonmalignant Hematology
- 1
Approach to the Patient With Benign Hematologic Disorders
By J Mark Sloan, MD; David C Seldin, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With Benign Hematologic Disorders
- J MARK SLOAN, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Boston Univeristy School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- DAVID C SELDIN, MD, PHDChief, Section of Hematology-Oncology, Professor of Medicine and Microbiology, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHematology principally concerns the function and disorders of the formed elements of the blood—red blood cells (RBCs), white blood cells (WBCs), and platelets—as well as those factors governing hemostasis. Hematologists have been a powerful force in basic biomedical and translational research. Their work, propelled partly by the ease of collection of blood and bone marrow for study, has enabled an understanding of many blood disorders at a fundamental molecular level. Techniques developed for the study of hematology are often adopted by other disciplines. This chapter discusses the anatomy of the hematopoietic system, hematopoiesis and the bone marrow, physical examination of the hematology patient, evaluation of the complete blood count (CBC) and peripheral blood smear, and coagulation. Tables delineate CBC parameters with normal ranges; peripheral smear findings, descriptions, and RBC indices and significance; laboratory findings in erythrocytosis; diseases commonly associated with eosinophilia and useful workup; common medications strongly associated with thrombocytopenia; and the 4Ts score for determining pretest probability of heparin-induced thrombocytopenia. Figures depict the three fractions of centrifuged blood, the lymph node, hematopoietic stem cells, bone marrow aspirate and biopsy procedure, architecture of the bone marrow microenvironment, petechiae, WBC types found in the smear of peripheral blood, the direct antiglobulin test, myeloid cells, and the coagulation system.
This review contains 10 figures, 19 tables, and 49 references
Keywords: Hematology, bleeding, thrombocytopenia, anemia, thrombophilia, leukopenia, neutrophilia, neutropenia, erythrocytosis, polycythemia vera
- 2
Red Blood Cell Function and Disorders of Iron Metabolism
By Robert T. Means Jr, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFRed Blood Cell Function and Disorders of Iron Metabolism
- ROBERT T. MEANS JR, MD, FACPDean of Medicine, Professor of Internal Medicine, Office of the Dean, James H. Quillen College of Medicine, East Tennessee State University, Johnson City, TN
Purchase PDFThe red blood cell, or erythrocyte, is an anucleate biconcave disk, approximately 7 µm in diameter. The principal function of the red blood cell is to exchange carbon dioxide for oxygen while in the pulmonary circulation, exchange that oxygen for carbon dioxide in the peripheral tissue, and carry that carbon dioxide back to the lungs. The physicochemical composition of the red cell is aligned to optimize that function. The state of tissue oxygenation, in turn, regulates the production of red cells. This review covers red blood cell function, iron metabolism, iron deficiency, iron overload, and primary iron overload. Figures show a model of the hemoglobin molecule showing the relative alignment of the α chains and β chains; the normal oxygen-hemoglobin dissociation curve shifted by changes in temperature, pH, and the intracellular concentration of 2,3-diphosphoglycerate; body iron supply and storage; regulation of hepcidin expression and its role in disease; blood smear from a patient with iron deficiency; and mechanisms contributing to iron overload in iron-loading anemias. Tables list laboratory results associated with decreased iron balance, causes of iron deficiency, oral iron replacement therapy, parenteral iron replacement therapy, primary iron overload syndromes, secondary iron overload syndromes, laboratory results associated with increased iron stores, and other rare disorders of iron overload.
This review contains 6 figures, 20 tables, and 111 references
Keywords: Red blood cell, iron deficiency anemia, iron overload, hemochromatosis, hemoglobin, iron balance
- 3
Transfusion Medicine
- HARVEY G KLEIN, MDThe Department of Transfusion Medicine is at the National Institutes of Health (NIH). I am Chief, Department of Transfusion Medicine. I also hold Professorships in both the Departments of Medicine and Pathology at the Johns Hopkins School of Medicine
Purchase PDFTransfusion medicine has advanced to a laboratory-based clinical discipline because of key discoveries and technical advances. These include the discovery of blood group antigens and the understanding of the host immune response to these antigens, development of methods of anticoagulation and storage of blood, and creation of plastic bags that allow sterile fractionation of whole blood into components. The potential of blood to act as an agent of disease transmission has heavily shaped both the donation process and transfusion practice. This chapter offers information to help the physician decide whether to transfuse. It includes sections on blood donation (autologous and directed), on postdonation screening procedures for the presence of viral agents (e.g., hepatitis, retrovirus, and emerging infectious pathogens), on pretransfusion testing (i.e., antigen phenotyping and testing for the presence of antibodies), and on blood components. Sections give specific information on transfusion of red cells, platelets, fresh frozen plasma, and recombinant clotting factors. Indications and complications of apheresis are described. Complications of transfusions are discussed, as are future prospects for transfusion therapy. Tables detail the advantages and disadvantages of autologous donation, estimated risks of blood transfusion, characteristics of blood products and indications for their use, plasma and recombinant clotting factors, indications for recombinant factor VIIa therapy, indications for the use of irradiated blood products, indications for the use of cytomegalovirus-negative blood products, and recommendations for therapeutic apheresis. This chapter contains 154 references.
- 4
Hematopoietic Cell Transplantation
- FRED APPELBAUM, MDExecutive Vice President and Deputy Director, Fred Hutchinson Cancer Research Center, Professor, Division of Medical Oncology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFHematopoietic cell transplantation (HCT) can replace abnormal nonmalignant hematopoietic stem cells with cells from a healthy donor, making transplantation a potential cure for a variety of nonmalignant and malignant diseases. This review discusses the indications for HCT, source of stem cells, preparative regimen, engraftment, complications, late effects and long-term survivorship, and treatment of post-transplantation relapse. Figures show the estimated total numbers of allogeneic and autologous HCTs performed in the United States, the major histocompatibility loci on chromosome 6, an approximation of the relative intensities of various preparative regimens, the typical patterns of myeloid recovery after HCT, the description and timing of major syndromes complicating allogeneic HCT, and erythema and desquamation associated with cutaneous acute graft versus host disease (GVHD). Tables list estimated 3-year survival rates following HCT, probability of finding a donor for HCT, clinical staging and grading of acute GVHD, National Institutes of Health global severity score of chronic GVHD, typical approach to infection prophylaxis in allogeneic transplant recipients, and summary of Centers for Disease Control and Prevention HCT vaccine guidelines.
Key words: Hematopoietic cell transplantation; HCT; Allogeneic HCT; Hematopoietic stem cell transplantation; HSCT; Diseases of the lymphohematopoietic system; Autologous HCT; Hematopoietic stem cells
- 5
Approach to the Patient With Benign Hematologic Disorders
By J Mark Sloan, MD; David C Seldin, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With Benign Hematologic Disorders
- J MARK SLOAN, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Boston Univeristy School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- DAVID C SELDIN, MD, PHDChief, Section of Hematology-Oncology, Professor of Medicine and Microbiology, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- 1
- Nonmalignant Hematologic Disorders
- 1
Anemia: Production Defects Generally Associated With a Normal or Largely Normal Bone Marrow
By Nancy Berliner, MD; John M Gansner, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFAnemia: Production Defects Generally Associated With a Normal or Largely Normal Bone Marrow
- NANCY BERLINER, MDProfessor of Medicine (Hematology), Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JOHN M GANSNER, MD, PHDInstructor in Medicine (Hematology), Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis review focuses on anemia resulting from production defects generally associated with a normal or largely normal bone marrow. The definition, epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis of the following production defects are discussed: Anemia of inflammation (AI; formerly known as anemia of chronic disease), and anemia in kidney disease, as well as anemia secondary to other conditions such as alchohol abuse and starvation. Iron deficiency anemia (IDA) is discussed elsewhere in this publication. A figure depicts peripheral smear changes in the size and shape of red blood cells seen in starvation. A table lists the differential diagnoses of hypochromic anemias.
This review contains 1 figure; 1 table; 79 references
- 2
Anemia: Production Defects Generally Associated With Marrow Aplasia or Replacement
By Nancy Berliner, MD; John M Gansner, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFAnemia: Production Defects Generally Associated With Marrow Aplasia or Replacement
- NANCY BERLINER, MDProfessor of Medicine (Hematology), Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JOHN M GANSNER, MD, PHDInstructor in Medicine (Hematology), Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis review focuses on anemia resulting from production defects generally associated with marrow aplasia or replacement. The definition, epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis of the following production defects are discussed: Acquired aplastic anemia and acquired pure red cell aplasia. Figures depict a leukoerythroblastic blood smear, a biopsy comparing normal bone marrow and bone marrow showing almost complete aplasia, and a marrow smear. A table lists the causes of aplastic anemia.
This review contains 3 figures; 1 table; 108 references.
- 3
Anemia: Production Defects Generally Associated With Marrow Erythroid Hyperplasia and Ineffective Erythropoiesis
By Nancy Berliner, MD; John M Gansner, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFAnemia: Production Defects Generally Associated With Marrow Erythroid Hyperplasia and Ineffective Erythropoiesis
- NANCY BERLINER, MDProfessor of Medicine (Hematology), Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JOHN M GANSNER, MD, PHDInstructor in Medicine (Hematology), Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis review focuses on anemia resulting from production defects generally associated with marrow erythroid hyperplasia and ineffective erythropoiesis. The definition, epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis of the following production defects are discussed: Megaloblastic anemias, megaloblastic anemia caused by cobalamin deficiency, megaloblastic anemia caused by folic acid deficiency, copper deficiency, and sideroblastic anemias. Figures depict intracellular interdependent cofactor activity of cobalamin and folic acid, synthesis of succinyl–coenzyme A from methylmalonyl–coenzyme A, folic acid functions as a coenzyme in single-carbon transfer reactions, cobalamin assimilation, peripheral blood smear in folic acid or cobalamin deficiency, and a Prussian blue stain showing ring sideroblasts. Tables list causes of cobalamin deficiency and folic acid deficiency.
This review contains 5 figures; 2 tables; 95 references.
- 4
Hemoglobinopathies and Hemolytic Anemias
By Stavrula Otis, MD; Elizabeth A. Price, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFHemoglobinopathies and Hemolytic Anemias
- STAVRULA OTIS, MDClinical Instructor in Medicine, Stanford University, Stanford, CA
- ELIZABETH A. PRICE, MD, MPHAssistant Professor in Medicine (Hematology), Stanford University, Stanford, CA
Purchase PDFAlteration of the erythrocyte membrane usually signals the reticuloendothelial macrophages to remove the damaged red blood cell (RBC) from the circulation. In extraordinary circumstances, however, the damage to the membrane is so great that the erythrocyte undergoes hemolysis, and its intracellular contents, including hemoglobin, are liberated into the plasma. This chapter describes the structural and functional features of normal erythrocytes and diseases involving membrane architecture, RBC proteins, and extracorpuscular factors that can lead to shortened RBC survival. The chapter contains major discussions of sickle cell disease and the thalassemias. Included are tables providing information on erythrocyte metabolism and etiologies of hemolysis in glucose-6-phosphate dehydrogenase (G6PD) deficiency; figures illustrating histologic features of abnormal erythrocytes and sickle cells are also provided.
This review contains 7 figures, 2 tables, and 243 references.
- 5
Polycythemias
- VIRGINIA C BROUDY, MDProfessor of Medicine and Vice Chair, Department of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFPolycythemia, also called erythrocytosis, is an increase in the number of circulating red blood cells per volume of blood, as reflected by an elevated hematocrit or hemoglobin level. The three major categories of polycythemia are relative polycythemia, secondary polycythemia, and polycythemia vera. Included in this chapter are discussions on initial evaluation; familial polycythemia; and polycythemia caused by renal and hepatic disorders, drug use, and appropriate increases in erythropoietin production. A flowchart depicts an approach to the evaluation of a patient with polycythemia. Other figures depict the oxygen-hemoglobin dissociation curve characteristic of various polycythemias and a gene mutation associated with familial polycythemia.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures and 27 references.
- 6
Nonmalignant Disorders of Leukocytes
- ALISON M. SCHRAM, MD
- NANCY BERLINER, MD
Purchase PDFLeukocytes, also known as white blood cells, are hematologic cells important for a host’s immune defense. They comprise several diverse cell types including lymphocytes, neutrophils, monocytes, macrophages, and eosinophils. Each plays a unique and important role in fighting infection, cancer surveillance, and maintaining immune homeostasis. Leukocytes exert their effect and interact with host and foreign cells through the release of cytokines, chemokines, enzymes, and vasoactive substances. Altered number and function of these cells can lead to clinical disorders that range from benign to severe and life-threatening. Here we review the diagnosis, natural history, and treatment of nonmalignant disorders of leukocytes.
This review contains 100 references, 6 figures, and 9 tables.
Key Words: eosinophilia, hemophagocytic histiocytosis, Langerhans cell histiocytosis, lymphocytopenia, lymphocytosis mastocytosis, neutropenia, neutrophilia
- 7
Hemostasis and Its Regulation
- LAWRENCE L K LEUNG, MDChief of Staff, Maureen Lyles D’Ambrogio Professor of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Chief of Staff, Veterans Affairs Palo Alto Health Care System, Stanford, CA
Purchase PDFHemostasis, the process of blood clot formation, is a coordinated series of responses to vessel injury. It requires complex interactions between platelets, the clotting cascade, blood flow and shear, endothelial cells, and fibrinolysis. This review covers platelet plug formation, clotting cascade, initiation and propagation of blood clot formation, control mechanisms, overview of blood coagulation, blood coagulation as part of the host defense system, heterogeneity of endothelial cells and vascular bed–specific hemostasis, platelet production and thrombopoietin, and coagulation tests and their use. Figures show activated platelets, platelet aggregation, the classic and revised view of the clotting cascade, the inhibition of thrombin by antithrombin, the protein C/protein S pathway, the synergism between nitric oxide (NO) and prostacyclin (PGI2), tissue-type plasminogen activator, the transformation of fibrinogen to fibrin, activated protein C (APC) and carboxypeptidase B-2 (CPB-2) at the site of vascular injury, and an algorithm detailing the exposure of tissue factor at a vascular wound that initiates the clotting cascade. The table lists natural antithrombotic mechanisms of endothelial cells.
This review contains 10 figures, 4 tables, and 45 references
Keywords: hemostasis, coagulation, fibrinolysis, bleeding disorder, platelets
- 8
Platelet Disorders
- LAWRENCE L K LEUNG, MDChief of Staff, Maureen Lyles D’Ambrogio Professor of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Chief of Staff, Veterans Affairs Palo Alto Health Care System, Stanford, CA
- JAMES L. ZEHNDER, MDProfessor of Pathology and Medicine (Hematology), Departments of Pathology and Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA
Purchase PDFA bleeding disorder may be suspected when a patient reports spontaneous or excessive bleeding or bruising, often secondary to trauma. Possible causes can vary between abnormal platelet number or function, abnormal vascular integrity, coagulation defects, fibrinolysis, or a combination thereof. This review addresses hemorrhagic disorders associated with quantitative or qualitative platelet abnormalities, such as thrombocytopenia, platelet function disorders, thrombocytosis and thrombocythemia, and vascular purpuras. Hemorrhagic disorders associated with abnormalities in coagulation (e.g., von Willebrand disease and hemophilia) are not covered. An algorithm shows evidence-based practice guidelines for the management of immune thrombocytopenic purpura. Tables list questions regarding bleeding and bruising to ask patients, clinical manifestations of hemorrhagic disorders, typical results of tests for hemostatic function in bleeding disorders, causes of thrombocytopenia, other forms of drug-induced thrombocytopenia, classification of platelet function disorders, and selected platelet-modifying agents.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 7 tables, and 82 references.
- 9
Microangiopathic and Vascular Disorders
- NATHAN T. CONNELL, MD, MPHInstructor in Medicine, Department of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associate Physician, Hematology Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe thrombotic microangiopathies are characterized by microangiopathic hemolytic anemia and thrombocytopenia and can be classified as autoimmune, drug induced, complement mediated, and infectious/other. Reaching a definitive diagnosis for these disorders can be challenging due to the similarity of presenting symptoms and laboratory findings. Specific disorders described in this review include thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, the hemolytic-uremic syndrome, thrombotic microangiopathies of pregnancy (including preeclampsia and HELLP syndrome), disseminated intravascular coagulation, and antiphospholipid syndrome. Vascular disorders that lead to hematologic abnormalities are also discussed. Figures show the major classifications of the thrombotic microangiopathies; ADAMTS13 activity in normal and thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura plasma; a fragmented red blood cell (arrow), also known as a schistocyte or helmet cell; major considerations in the initial treatment of thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura and options for refractory patients as well as treatment considerations after discontinuation of plasma exchange; and a diagram of the complement pathway showing regulatory proteins as well as the site of action for the monoclonal antibody eculizumab. Tables list medications associated with thrombotic thrombocytopenia purpura, diagnostic criteria for HELLP, major classifications and examples of the causes of disseminated intravascular coagulation, diagnostic criteria for the antiphospholipid syndrome, vascular purpuras, and criteria for diagnosing hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 10 tables, and 74 references
Key words: anemia, hereditary hemorrhagic telangiectasia,thrombotic microangiopathies, thrombotic Thrombocytopenic Purpura, von Willebrand factor
- 10
Thrombotic Disorders
- LAWRENCE L K LEUNG, MDChief of Staff, Maureen Lyles D’Ambrogio Professor of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Chief of Staff, Veterans Affairs Palo Alto Health Care System, Stanford, CA
Purchase PDFThe three main elements in the pathophysiology of thrombosis are endothelial injury, a decrease in blood flow, and an imbalance between procoagulant and anticoagulant factors. The latter element can be either hereditary (e.g., antithrombin deficiency) or acquired (e.g., antiphospholipid syndrome). This review details the assessment of patients with thrombotic disorders, hereditary and acquired hypercoagulable states, and the management of venous thromboembolism. Figures show how the degradation of thrombin-activated factor V Leiden by activated protein C (APC) is significantly slower than that of normal activated factor V (factor Va), leading to enhanced thrombin generation; how normal factor V serves as a cofactor of APC in the inhibition of factor VIIIa, whereas factor V Leiden has a poor cofactor function; and how IgG antibodies recognize platelet factor 4–heparin complexes in heparin-induced thrombocytopenia. Tables list inherited and acquired hypercoagulable states, questions for assessing thrombosis, screening tests for patients with suspected hypercoagulable states, clinical features that suggest thrombophilia, frequency and relative risk of venous thrombosis in selected hypercoagulable states, proposed clinical and laboratory criteria for antiphospholipid syndrome, the classification of antiphospholipid antibodies, the 4Ts scoring system for heparin-induced thrombocytopenia, and general guidelines for the management of patients with venous thromboembolism.
This review contains 2 figures, 27 tables, and 174 references
Keywords: Venous thromboembolism, deep vein thrombosis, pulmonary embolism, protein S, protein C, factor V Leiden, heparin-induced thrombosis, antiphospholipid syndrome
- 11
Hemophilia
- ARIC PARNES, MDHematology Division, Instructor in Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- LISA ROTENSTEIN, MD, MBAHarvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHemophilia is a family of rare bleeding disorders characterized by deficiency of clotting factors. Hemophilia A is an inherited deficiency of factor VIII, whereas hemophilia B (Christmas disease) represents a deficiency of factor IX. Both hemophilia A and B are X-linked diseases, with hemophilia A accounting for 80 to 85% of cases and hemophilia B 15 to 20%. Although hemophilia has historically referred to deficiencies of factors VIII and IX, it is important to recognize that similar bleeding disorders can occur with other missing clotting factors, although this is far more rare. This review covers the definition, history, epidemiology, biology/genetics, clinical manifestations, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, complications, measures of quality of care, and prognosis of hemophilia, as well as future directions. Figures show the clotting cascade, the genetic makeup of severe hemophilia A, an algorithm for diagnosing hemophilia, and hemophilic arthropathy in a patient’s knees. Tables list severity in hemophilia A and B, treatment of acute bleeding in hemophilia A and B, frequency of dosing in acute bleeding, and treatment of acute bleeding with inhibitors.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 59 references.
- 12
Von Willebrand Disease
- MEGHAN CAMPO, MDInstructor in Medicine, Department of Hematology Oncology, Harvard Medical School, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA
- ELISABETH M. BATTINELLI, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Associate Physician, Department of Hematology, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFVon Willebrand disease is the most common hereditary bleeding disorder. The disease is caused by inherited defects in the concentration, structure, or function of von Willebrand protein, a multimeric protein that mediates the initial adhesion of platelets at sites of vascular injury and binds and stabilizes blood clotting factor VIII in plasma. Defects in von Willebrand factor concentration, structure, or function that were not inherited can also occur; this is termed acquired von Willebrand syndrome. These defects occur as a consequence of other medical disorders (valvular heart disease, thrombocythemia, malignant neoplasms, and myeloproliferative and autoimmune diseases). This review examines the laboratory evaluation, clinical variants, and treatment of von Willebrand disease. Figures show the initial assessment of von Willebrand disease, and a treatment algorithm for von Willebrand disease. Tables list types of von Willebrand disease and medications used to treat von Willebrand disease.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 10 references.
- 13
Hemostasis and Its Regulation
- LAWRENCE L K LEUNG, MDChief of Staff, Maureen Lyles D’Ambrogio Professor of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Chief of Staff, Veterans Affairs Palo Alto Health Care System, Stanford, CA
- 14
Thrombotic Disorders
- LAWRENCE L K LEUNG, MDChief of Staff, Maureen Lyles D’Ambrogio Professor of Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Chief of Staff, Veterans Affairs Palo Alto Health Care System, Stanford, CA
- 1
- Hematologic Malignancies
- Hepatology
- 1
Evaluating the Patient With Liver Disease
- ANDREW J MUIR, MD, MHSClinical Director of Hepatology, Division of Gastroenterology, Department of Medicine, Duke University School of Medicine, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFUntil the advanced stages of cirrhosis, the identification of liver disease can be challenging for clinicians. In the earlier stages of the condition, most forms of chronic liver disease are asymptomatic or associated with vague and rather nonspecific complaints, such as fatigue. Even in the setting of cirrhosis, liver enzymes may be normal or mildly elevated. Patients with liver disease are currently recognized through a variety of routes, including screening programs, routine laboratory testing, and imaging performed for other complaints.
This review contains 5 figures, 10 tables and 64 references
Key Words: Primary biliary cirrhosis, Variceal hemorrhage, hepatocellular carcinoma, Hepatitis A, B and C, Discriminant function, Liver biopsy, Alcoholic liver disease, Autoimmune hepatitis, Hemochromatosis, Nonalcoholic fatty liver disease, Wilson disease
- 2
Liver Transplant Immunology 1: Fundamentals of Liver Immunology and Allorecognition
By Michael Kriss, MD; Hugo Rosen, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFLiver Transplant Immunology 1: Fundamentals of Liver Immunology and Allorecognition
- MICHAEL KRISS, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Gastroenterology & Hepatology, GI and Liver Innate Immune Program, University of Colorado Anschutz Medical Campus, Aurora, CO
- HUGO ROSEN, MD, FACPProfessor and Chairman of Medicine, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA
Purchase PDFThe liver is a multifunctional organ responsible for complex metabolic and immune functions. Although not a classic lymphoid organ, the liver is enriched with traditional immune cells as well as parenchymal and nonparenchymal cells that play a key role in immune homeostasis. Due to its location and unique anatomic structure, the liver must finely balance immunity and tolerance to avoid undue inflammation in the setting of constant antigenic exposure from portal blood flow while maintaining appropriate immunity against pathogens. Since the first successful liver transplantation in humans in 1967 at the University of Colorado, our knowledge of hepatic immunity and tolerance, in the context of both liver disease and liver transplantation, has evolved dramatically. With these advancements, therapeutic modalities have been developed that have revolutionized the care of liver transplant recipients. In Part 1: Fundamentals of Liver Immunology and Allorecognition, we review current knowledge of hepatic immunity, including anatomic features and cellular components that give the liver its unique properties. In addition, we describe critical concepts of innate and adaptive immune function to provide a context for understanding allograft injury and rejection.
This review contains 4 figures, 4 tables and 26 references.
Key Words: adaptive immunity; allorecognition; antigen presenting cells; innate immunity; liver transplantation; T lymphocytes
- 3
Viral Hepatitis Other Than A, B, or C
By Nadeem Anwar, MD ; Kenneth E. Sherman, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFViral Hepatitis Other Than A, B, or C
- NADEEM ANWAR, MD University of Cincinnati College of Medicine, Cincinnati, OH
- KENNETH E. SHERMAN, MD, PHD University of Cincinnati College of Medicine, Cincinnati, OH
Purchase PDFViral hepatitis is a global, although variably distributed, health problem associated with significant morbidity and mortality. Infection with a hepatitis virus leads to acute inflammation and liver cell damage (hepatocyte injury). Such infection may be symptomatic or subclinical and may result in disease resolution, death from fulminant hepatic failure, or development of a chronic disease state. Whereas the chronic infection with hepatitis B and C accounts for a global burden of more than 500,000,000 cases, the global death rate from all types of hepatitis is approximately 1 million people annually. This review focuses on the virology, epidemiology, clinical features, diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of hepatitis D and hepatitis E, as well as other viruses associated with hepatitis. Figures show the global distribution of hepatitis D infection, elevation of anti–hepatitis D virus antibodies in hepatitis B/hepatitis D virus coinfection, geographic distribution of hepatitis E virus by genotype, factors significant in the pathogenesis of hepatitis E, and pattern of antibody elevation in hepatitis E. The table lists proposed diagnostic criteria for hepatitis E virus.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 1 table, and 42 references.
Key words: hepatitis D, hepatitis D virus, hepatitis E, hepatitis E virus, non-A hepatitis, non-B hepatitis, non-C hepatitis, viral hepatitis
- 4
Chronic Liver Diseases
- SANDRA CIESEK, MDDepartment of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Enterology, The Hannover Medical School, Hannover, Germany
- MICHAEL P MANNS, MDProfessor and Chairman, Department of Gastroenterology, Hepatology, and Enterology, The Hannover Medical School, Hannover, Germany
Purchase PDFThe term chronic hepatitis encompasses many distinct clinical and pathologic diseases affecting the liver, the most important of which are autoimmune hepatitis (AIH), chronic hepatitis B with or without hepatitis D, and chronic hepatitis C caused by hepatitis C virus (HCV). The standard treatment of AIH is immunosuppressive therapy either with prednisolone alone or in combination with azathioprine. Although mycophenolate mofetil or cyclosporine can be used for retherapy in the case of treatment failure, controlled clinical trials are missing for these immunosuppressive drugs; thus, they are not part of the American Association for the Study of Liver Diseases (AASLD) practice guidelines for AIH.
Chronic hepatitis B is a major global health care problem as 5% of the world’s population, or approximately 350 million persons, is chronically infected. Anti–hepatitis B virus (HBV) drugs can be divided into three classes: alfa interferons, nucleoside analogue (lamivudine, entecavir, telbivudine), and nucleotide analogue (adefovir dipivoxil, tenofovir dipivoxil). Interferon alfa has a number of potential side effects, and careful consideration must be given to its use. Tenofovir, which falls under the nucleotide analogue class, was approved by the Food and Drug Administration in 2008 and has been shown in clinical trials to have more potent activity in serum-suppressing HBV DNA levels than the comparable adefovir.
More prevalent than chronic hepatitis B is chronic hepatitis C due to the high chronicity rate of HCV infection (approximately 160 million people are chronically infected with HCV worldwide). Until 2011, the only treatment for chronic HCV was a combination therapy of pegylated interferon alfa and ribavirin (RBV); however, new treatments for chronic hepatitis C include the directly acting antivirals (DAAs) sofosbuvir and simeprevir, although host-targeting agents are also being developed. The side effects of pegylated interferon/RBV therapy and DAAs should be considered, of which only sofosbuvir has shown no specific side effects so far in clinical studies.
This module contains 5 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, 61 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 5
Hereditary Hemochromatosis
- MATTHEW S CHANG, MDResearch/Clinical Fellow, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology & Endoscopy, Brigham & Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- BENJAMIN N SMITH, MDLecturer on Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology & Endoscopy, Brigham and Women’s Faulkner Hospital, Jamaica Plain, MA
Purchase PDFHereditary hemochromatosis is an inherited iron overload disorder that can result in liver and other end-organ involvement and injury. The phenotypic expression ranges from asymptomatic to end-stage liver disease and can be separated into three stages. This review covers the epidemiology, etiology and genetics, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, treatment, complications, and prognosis of hereditary hemochromatosis. Figures show the fraction of patients with mutations for hemochromatosis and clinical manifestations, the regulation of iron by hepcidin, physical examination findings in hemochromatosis, a diagnostic algorithm for hemochromatosis, and a treatment algorithm for hemochromatosis. Tables list hemochromatosis disease stage according to the European Association for the Study of the Liver, genetic mutations in hemochromatosis, secondary (non-hemochromatosis-related) causes of iron overload, indications for liver biopsy in patients with hemochromatosis, and clinical manifestations in hemochromatosis.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 32 references
Key words: Hemochromatosis; Hereditary hemochromatosis; Iron overload; Iron regulatory pathways; Hepatic iron; Hepcidin
- 6
Liver and Pancreas Transplantation
- JULIE A THOMPSON, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
- ALEKSANDRA KUKLA, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Medical Director of Pancreas Transplant Program, Division of Renal Diseases and Hypertension, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
Purchase PDFMore than 6,000 liver transplantations are performed annually in the United States. Enhancements in patient selection and surgical technique and the availability of more powerful immunosuppressive agents have resulted in steady improvement in patient survival. As a result, liver transplantation has been accepted as the standard of care for patients with severe acute or chronic liver disease in whom conventional modalities of therapy have failed. The major obstacle to patients receiving the procedure is the critical shortage of donor organs. Many more recipients of liver transplantation are now receiving the bulk of their care from general internists, gastroenterologists, and primary care physicians. As a result, recognition of potential long-term complications and the need for appropriate immunizations and regular screening visits have become increasingly important. This chapter discusses who qualifies as a candidate for liver transplantation, contraindications to transplantation, timing of transplantation, operative procedures, complications of transplantation (e.g., perioperative and surgical complications, immunologic complications, infectious complications, complications of medical and immunosuppressive therapy, and disease-specific complications), and transplantation outcome. Pancreas transplantation, which aims at providing physiologic insulin replacement, is a therapy that reliably achieves euglycemia in patients with type 1 diabetes mellitus. The discussion of pancreas transplantation focuses on topics such as evaluation of candidates for transplantation (including islet transplantation); contraindications to transplantation; operative procedures; outcome survival; and the effect of transplantation on disorders associated with type 1 diabetes mellitus. The figures show estimated 3-month survival as a function of the Model for End-Stage Liver Disease (MELD) score, the sections of the liver that can be used for transplantation, an algorithm for evaluation of patients with type 1 diabetes mellitus being considered for pancreas transplantation, and an illustration of enteric drainage technique used in whole pancreas transplantation. The tables provide the common indications for liver transplantation, the scoring system for the Child-Turcotte-Pugh classification of liver disease severity, drug interactions with immunosuppressants, and immunization recommendations for liver transplant patients.
This chapter contains 4 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, 101 references, 5 MCQs, and 1 teaching slide set. - 7
Cirrhosis and Complications of Portal Hypertension
By Andres Cardenas, MD; Isabel Graupera, MD; Elsa Sola, MD; Pere Ginès, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFCirrhosis and Complications of Portal Hypertension
- ANDRES CARDENAS, MDGI Unit, Hospital Clínic and University of Barcelona, Institut d’Investigacions Biomèdiques August Pi-Sunyer, Ciber de Enfermedades Hepaticas y Digestivas, Instituto Reina Sofía de Investigación Nefrológica, Barcelona, Spain
- ISABEL GRAUPERA, MDLiver Unit, Hospital Clínic and University of Barcelona, Institut d’Investigacions Biomèdiques August Pi-Sunyer, Ciber de Enfermedades Hepaticas y Digestivas, Instituto Reina Sofía de Investigación Nefrológica, Barcelona, Spain
- ELSA SOLA, MDLiver Unit, Hospital Clínic and University of Barcelona, Institut d’Investigacions Biomèdiques August Pi-Sunyer, Ciber de Enfermedades Hepaticas y Digestivas, Instituto Reina Sofía de Investigación Nefrológica, Barcelona, Spain
- PERE GINÈS, MD, PHDChairman, Liver Unit, Hospital Clínic, Professor of Medicine, University of Barcelona, Institut d’Investigacions Biomèdiques August Pi-Sunyer, Ciber de Enfermedades Hepaticas y Digestivas, Instituto Reina Sofía de Investigación Nefrológica, Barcelona, Spain
Purchase PDFCirrhosis is the most advanced stage of all the different types of chronic liver diseases. It is defined as a diffuse disorganization of normal hepatic structure by extensive fibrosis associated with regenerative nodules. Hepatic fibrosis is potentially reversible if the causative agent is removed. However, advanced cirrhosis leads to major alterations in the hepatic vascular bed and is usually irreversible. Cirrhosis is a progressive and severe clinical condition associated with considerable morbidity and high mortality. It leads to a wide spectrum of characteristic clinical manifestations, mainly attributable to hepatic insufficiency and portal hypertension. Major complications of portal hypertension include ascites, gastrointestinal (GI) variceal bleeding, hepatic encephalopathy (HE), renal failure, and bacterial infections. In recent years, major advances in the understanding of the natural history and pathophysiology of cirrhosis and the treatment of its complications have led to improved management, quality of life, and life expectancy of patients with this disease. Cirrhosis is also a risk factor for developing hepatocellular carcinoma (HCC). Decompensated cirrhosis carries a poor short-term prognosis; thus, orthotopic liver transplantation (OLT) should always be considered in suitable candidates. This chapter describes the epidemiology, etiology and genetic factors, pathogenesis, diagnosis, general management, and treatment of cirrhosis. Complications of cirrhosis are discussed, including ascites, spontaneous bacterial peritonitis, dilutional hyponatremia, hepatorenal syndrome, variceal bleeding, hepatopulmonary syndrome and postpulmonary hypertension, HE, and HCC. Indications and contraindications for liver transplantation are described. Figures show liver biopsy results and ultrasound images in cirrhosis from hepatitis C, a patient with tense ascites, transjugular intrahepatic portosystemic shunting (TIPS), large esophageal varices with red spots, and HCC. Tables outline the main causes of cirrhosis and the diagnostic methods for identifying them, the Child-Pugh score, diagnostic criteria for hepatorenal syndrome, grades of HE, and indications for liver transplantation.
This chapter contains 6 highly rendered figures, 8 tables, 73 references. - 8
Parenteral Nutrition Associated Liver Toxicity: Prevention, Diagnosis and Management
By Meredith A. Baker, MD; Lorenzo Anez-Bustillos, MD; Duy T. Dao, MD; Gillian L. Fell, MD; Kathleen M. Gura, PharmD; Mark Puder, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFParenteral Nutrition Associated Liver Toxicity: Prevention, Diagnosis and Management
- MEREDITH A. BAKER, MD
- LORENZO ANEZ-BUSTILLOS, MD
- DUY T. DAO, MD
- GILLIAN L. FELL, MD
- KATHLEEN M. GURA, PHARMD
- MARK PUDER, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFLong-term parenteral nutrition (PN) treatment is limited by parenteral nutrition–associated liver disease (PNALD), which is characterized initially by intrahepatic cholestasis, typically defined as a direct bilirubin greater than 2 mg/dL in the absence of other causes of liver disease. PNALD is typically less common and less severe and progresses more slowly in older children and adults than in infants. The etiology of PNALD is multifactorial. Key factors include immature liver function, sepsis, and a lack of enteral nutrition. Additionally, nearly every component of PN has been attributed to or exacerbated hepatotoxicity. PN preparations must be carefully individualized and monitored to minimize hepatotoxicity from its various components. Although many hepatotoxic components or imbalances have been recognized, soybean oil–based lipid emulsions continue to be widely used as they are the only lipid emulsions currently approved for PN by the Food and Drug Administration. Fish oil–based lipid emulsions have been shown to reverse PNALD, with an associated decrease in mortality. As such, fish oil therapy should be considered early once biochemical cholestasis is detected in PN-dependent patients. Studies investigating the use of novel lipid emulsions for prevention and treatment of PNALD are ongoing.
This review contains 5 figures, 5 tables, and 114 references.
- 9
Liver Disease in Pregnancy
- MATTHEW S CHANG, MDResearch/Clinical Fellow, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology & Endoscopy, Brigham & Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- ANNA E. RUTHERFORD, MD, MPHAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associate Physician, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology & Endoscopy, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFLiver disease in pregnancy can be unique to pregnancy or coincidental to pregnancy, or pregnancy can occur in women with chronic liver disease, cirrhosis, or portal hypertension. The gestational age of the pregnancy can help determine the diagnosis. Liver disease occurring during pregnancy has the potential to be life threatening to mother and fetus, and any elevation in liver tests should be investigated. Disorders unique to pregnancy include hyperemesis gravidarum; intrahepatic cholestasis of pregnancy; preeclampsia/eclampsia; hemolysis, elevated liver enzymes, and low platelets (HELLP) syndrome; and acute fatty liver of pregnancy. Liver diseases coincidental to pregnancy include acute viral hepatitis, gallstones/biliary disease, and thrombosis such as Budd-Chiari syndrome/hepatic vein thrombosis. Pregnant women may have chronic liver disease or cirrhosis from all of the same etiologies as nonpregnant women, most commonly chronic viral hepatitis. Treatment options may differ during pregnancy because of the potential risks to the fetus. Women who have cirrhosis or portal hypertension or who are post liver transplantation should be managed in conjunction with a hepatologist.
This review contains 4 figures, 6 tables and 40 references
Key words: acute liver failure, delivery, trimester
- 10
The Risk of Surgery in Patients With Liver Disease 2
By Adrian Reuben, BSc, MBBS, FRCP, FACG, FAASLD
Purchase PDFThe Risk of Surgery in Patients With Liver Disease 2
- ADRIAN REUBEN, BSC, MBBS, FRCP, FACG, FAASLDProfessor of Medicine Emeritus, Division of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Medical University of South Carolina, Charleston, SC
Purchase PDFThe results of retrospective largescale registry and cohort studies and small case series, substantiate the common perception that operating on a liver disease patient is risky. The preexisting physiological derangements of liver disease may be exacerbated by the trauma of surgery and its complications, which contributes strongly to the aforementioned surgical risks, especially but not exclusively in cirrhotics. The risks of operating on patients with non-cirrhotic liver disease are reviewed with particular emphasis on the poor outcomes in acute hepatitis—especially alcoholic hepatitis—severe fatty liver disease, and obstructive jaundice. The outcomes of a broad spectrum of surgical procedures in cirrhotics (abdominal, cardiothoracic, orthopedic, vascular, etc.) are reviewed, with particular reference to common predictors of survival and morbidity, such as the Child-Turcotte-Pugh (CTP) score/class and the model for end-stage liver disease (MELD) score. The concept is proposed that the height of portal pressure may be a predictive factor of surgical outcome, which derives from experience with hepatic resection and suggests that measurement of hepatic venous pressures may be worthwhile in selected cases. New, non-invasive estimates of liver function are presented. A simple practical pre-operative decision tree is provided.
This review contains 5 figures, 3 tables and 91 references
Keywords: cirrhosis, fatty liver, hepatic venous pressure gradient, hepatitis, model for end-stage liver disease, operative mortality, portal hypertension, Child-Turcotte-Pugh
- 11
The Risk of Surgery in Patients With Liver Disease 1: Epidemiology, Pathophysiology, and Pre-operative Evaluation
By Adrian Reuben, BSc, MBBS, FRCP, FACG, FAASLD
Purchase PDFThe Risk of Surgery in Patients With Liver Disease 1: Epidemiology, Pathophysiology, and Pre-operative Evaluation
- ADRIAN REUBEN, BSC, MBBS, FRCP, FACG, FAASLDProfessor of Medicine Emeritus, Division of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Medical University of South Carolina, Charleston, SC
Purchase PDFThe results of retrospective large scale registry and cohort studies, and small case series, substantiate the common perception that operating on a liver disease patient is risky. The preexisting physiological derangements of liver disease may be exacerbated by the trauma of surgery and its complications, which contributes strongly to the aforementioned surgical risks, especially (but not exclusively) in cirrhotics. Perturbations in liver blood flow and oxygenation may be exaggerated by anesthesia, surgery itself, blood loss, and other operative complications. Cirrhotics are especially susceptible to acute and chronic kidney injury. Malnutrition is common in cirrhosis, which compromises wound healing and recovery from surgery. In cirrhosis, elimination of infection is impaired and its systemic effects are deleterious. The metabolic and immunological stresses of surgery may lead to liver function deterioration, even in stable cirrhotics. Presented here is the pre-operative evaluation of liver disease patients, including the use of predictive indices, new dynamic tests of liver function, and modestly invasive assessment of portal hypertension.
This review contains 9 figures, 6 tables and 52 references
Keywords: acute-on-chronic liver failure, Child-Turcotte-Pugh, cirrhosis, coagulopathy, infection, hepatic venous pressure gradient, liver blood flow, model for end-stage liver disease, systemic inflammatory response syndrome, thrombocytopenia
- 12
Autoimmune Hepatitis/overlap Syndromes
- ALBERT J CZAJA, MDDivision of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Mayo Clinic College of Medicine, Rochester, Minnesota USA.
Purchase PDFWhen autoimmune hepatitis has features of primary biliary cholangitis or primary sclerosing cholangitis, these mixed clinical phenotypes constitute overlap syndromes. Diagnostic criteria have been promulgated, but clinical judgement and liver tissue examination remain cornerstones of diagnosis. Cholestatic laboratory and histological findings, concurrent inflammatory bowel disease, or non-response to conventional corticosteroid therapy compel practitioners to consider overlap in patients with autoimmune hepatitis. Laboratory indices of marked liver inflammation and histological findings of moderate to severe interface hepatitis, especially with lymphoplasmacytic infiltration, also warrant consideration of overlap in patients with primary biliary cholangitis or primary sclerosing cholangitits. Treatment recommendations to date have been based on weak clinical evidence, and disease management should be individualized and guided by the predominant disease component. Prednisone or prednisolone in combination with azathioprine has been used in patients with predominantly autoimmune hepatitis, whereas low dose ursodeoxycholic acid in conjunction with corticosteroid-based regimens has been recommended in syndromes with predominately cholestatic disease. All treatments have been variably effective, especially in patients with overlapping features of primary sclerosing cholangitis. Mycophenolate mofetil and calcineurin inhibitors have been used as salvage therapies in limited experiences, and liver transplantation has been associated with graft and overall survivals similar to those of the classical unmixed diseases.
This review contains 6 figures, 7 tables and 50 references
Keywords: autoimmune hepatitis, primary biliary cholangitis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, overlap, cholestatic laboratory and histological features
- 13
Acute Liver Failure
By Constantine J Karvellas, MD, SM, FRCPC; R. Todd Stravitz, MD, FACP, FACG, FAASLD
Purchase PDFAcute Liver Failure
- CONSTANTINE J KARVELLAS, MD, SM, FRCPCAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology (Liver Unit), Department of Critical Care Medicine; Adjunct Professor, School of Public Health Sciences, University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB
- R. TODD STRAVITZ, MD, FACP, FACG, FAASLDProfessor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Medical Director of Liver Transplantation, Hume-Lee Transplant Center of Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, VA
Purchase PDFAcute liver failure (ALF) remains one of the most dramatic and highly mortal syndromes in modern medicine, with a poor outcome (death or need for emergency liver transplantation) in more than 50% of affected patients. However, prevention of specific etiologies of ALF, general improvements in intensive care medicine, and specific improvements in the management of the systemic complications of ALF, have markedly reduced mortality over the last 40 years. Specific ALF etiologies, including hepatitis A and B, appear to have decreased in developed nations along with improvements in sanitation and widespread vaccination. The management of specific complications—cerebral edema in particular—has lowered the proportion of ALF deaths due to intracranial hypertension, which was once the most dreaded systemic manifestation of ALF. A recent randomized, multicenter trial has documented the efficacy of high-volume plasma exchange in improving transplant-free and overall in-hospital survival. These and other advances have led to a speculation that ALF will be a “curable” clinical condition by the year 2024. Challenges persist, however, as acetaminophen (APAP) overdose continues to account for ~50% of cases of ALF in many developed nations. In the United Kingdom, legislation to limit access to the drug has led to a marked decrease in the incidence of ALF due to acetaminophen overdose: an important lesson for other governments to consider as they work to meet the goal of rendering ALF a “curable” condition.
This review contains 6 figures, 19 tables and 54 references
Key Words: acetaminophen, acute liver failure, cerebral edema, drug-induced liver injury, extracorporeal liver assist device, fulminant liver failure, hepatic encephalopathy, intracranial hypertension, liver transplantation
- 14
Viral Hepatitis A
- KENRAD E NELSON, MDProfessor, Department of Epidemiology and Department of International Health, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, MD
- BRITTANY L KMUSH, PHDAssistant Professor, Department of Public Health, Food, Studies and Nutrition, Falk College of Sport and Human Dynamics, Syracuse University, Syracuse, NY
Purchase PDFEpidemics of infectious jaundice have been reported throughout recorded history. However, the proof that many of these outbreaks and individual cases of acute hepatitis were caused by a viral infection, the hepatitis A virus (HAV), did not appear until the 1960s. After the transmission of infection to marmosets and humans, the epidemiologic and virologic characteristics that differed between hepatitis A and hepatitis B virus infections were defined more clearly. After the development and licensure of hepatitis A vaccines in the 1990s, it became possible to implement an effective prevention program involving routine immunization of young children in the United States and several other Western countries. However, despite the dramatic efficacy of the childhood immunization program in reducing the incidence of acute hepatitis from HAV in the population, older children and adults remained susceptible. Significant morbidity continues to occur in the United States among international travelers, injection drug users, persons with underlying liver disease, and other high-risk populations. Since HAV is a global pathogen, the prevention of increasing morbidity from hepatitis A attributable to the incidence of clinically more severe disease increases in countries transitioning from high to intermediate or low endemic status is a major public health challenge. In this review, we discuss the epidemiology, virology, clinical characteristics, and prevention of hepatitis A infections.
This review contains 8 figures, 3 tables and 89 references
Key words: epidemiology, global impact, hepatitis A vaccine, hepatitis A virus, prevention, reservoirs, risk factors, treatment
- 15
Hepatitis B Virus
- MING V. LIN, MDInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associated Physician, Division of, Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Endoscopy, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- APRIL WALL, MDResident, Department of Internal Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFChronic hepatitis B virus (HBV) infection is a major health burden worldwide, with approximately 257 million people with chronic infection. HBV is a small partially double-stranded DNA virus that replicates within the nucleus of the hepatocyte and commonly leads to chronic infection. Chronic HBV infection can cause cirrhosis, hepatocellular carcinoma, and extrahepatic manifestations such as glomerulonephritis or vasculitis. The latter is due to deposition of circulating immune complex in the different tissues. The natural history of HBV infection can be conceptualized as a spectrum encompassing different phases, including immune tolerance, immune clearance, inactive carrier, and reactivation and resolution. The diagnosis of the different phases of chronic HBV infection relies on various HBV serologies, liver enzyme levels, and histology findings. There are currently eight therapies approved for the treatment of HBV. Tenofovir alafenamide was the most recently approved therapy with a better side effect profile compared with tenofovir disoproxil fumarate. With the recent advances in the basic research in hepatitis B, new treatment options may become available in the near-future.
This review contains 9 figures, 11 tables and 80 references
Key words: cirrhosis, entecavir, Hepadnaviridae, hepatitis B virus, hepatocellular carcinoma, precore mutation, tenofovir
- 16
Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease
- MICHAEL FUCHS, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Virginia Commonwealth University Medical Center, Staff Physician, Hepatology Service, Hunter Holmes McGuire Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Richmond, VA
- PUNEET PURI, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Virginia Commonwealth University Medical Center and Gastrointestinal & Hepatology Service, Hunter Holmes McGuire Department of Veterans Affairs Med¬ical Center, Richmond, VA
Purchase PDFNonalcoholic fatty liver disease (NAFLD) is defined by the pathologic accumulation of fat in more than 5% of hepatocytes in the absence of significant alcohol consumption (daily intake < 20 g in women and < 30 g in men) and by excluding secondary causes of hepatic steatosis. NAFLD can be categorized into two principal phenotypes: nonalcoholic fatty liver (NAFL) and nonalcoholic steatohepatitis (NASH). NAFL is defined by the presence of macrovesicular steatosis without inflammation, whereas NASH sees inflammation and hepatocyte ballooning injury, is associated with varying degrees of fibrosis, and can progress to cirrhosis and end-stage liver disease. This review addresses the epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis of NAFLD. Figures show the spectrum of fatty liver disease, hepatic consequences of insulin resistance, role of liver biopsy in evaluation of NAFLD, histologic features of NASH, and principles of NAFLD. Tables list risk factors and clinical manifestations for NAFLD, physical examination findings in NAFLD, comparison of imaging modalities, and noninvasive fibrosis markers.
This review contains 6 figures, 9 tables and 167 references
Keywords: Nonalcoholic fatty liver disease, nonalcoholic steatohepatitis, non-invasive assessment, vibration controlled transient elastography, magnetic resonance elastography, diet and lifestyle treatment
- 17
Viral Hepatitis C: Epidemiology, pathogenesis, Transmission, and natural History
By Raymond T. Chung, MD; Anna Lidofsky, BS; Jacinta A Holmes, MBBS, PhD
Purchase PDFViral Hepatitis C: Epidemiology, pathogenesis, Transmission, and natural History
- RAYMOND T. CHUNG, MDLiver Center, Gastrointestinal Division, Department of Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- ANNA LIDOFSKY, BSPredoctoral Research Fellow, Gastrointestinal Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JACINTA A HOLMES, MBBS, PHDPostdoctoral Research Fellow, Gastrointestinal Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA; Postdoctoral Research Fellow, Department of Gastroenterology, St Vincent’s Hospital, Melbourne, Australia
Purchase PDFChronic infection with the hepatitis C virus (HCV) remains a significant global health issue, with more than 71 million infected worldwide and accounting for over 720,000 deaths annually in the United States alone. It can be associated with significant liver-related morbidity and mortality owing to complications from cirrhosis and end-stage liver disease. The aging HCV population, together with changing patterns of drug use, has seen an increase in these complications of HCV and an increase in the number of acute HCV infections. Screening and managing complications of chronic hepatitis C are an important consideration. The changing epidemiology, risk factors, transmission, diagnosis, natural history (including complications) and patient evaluation and education are discussed.
This review contains 4 figures, 2 tables, and 70 references
Key words: epidemiology, hepatitis C virus, transmission, risk factors, natural history, patient education, evaluation
- 18
Viral Hepatitis C: Treatment
By Jay Luther, MD; Raymond T. Chung, MD; Anna Lidofsky, BS; Jacinta A Holmes, MBBS, PhD; Stephanie M Rutledge, MBBCh BAO MRCPI
Purchase PDFViral Hepatitis C: Treatment
- JAY LUTHER, MDLiver Center, Gastrointestinal Division, Department of Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- RAYMOND T. CHUNG, MDLiver Center, Gastrointestinal Division, Department of Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- ANNA LIDOFSKY, BSPredoctoral Research Fellow, Gastrointestinal Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JACINTA A HOLMES, MBBS, PHDPostdoctoral Research Fellow, Gastrointestinal Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA; Postdoctoral Research Fellow, Department of Gastroenterology, St Vincent’s Hospital, Melbourne, Australia
- STEPHANIE M RUTLEDGE, MBBCH BAO MRCPIResident, Department of Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFInfection with the hepatitis C virus (HCV) leads to chronic infection in the majority, and is associated with the development of complications including cirrhosis, end-stage liver failure, hepatocellular carcinoma and death. HCV is curable, and successful viral eradication is associated with a reduction in cirrhosis and liver-related mortality. However, previous HCV therapy, consisting of pegylated interferon plus ribavirin, was associated with poor cure rates and significant adverse events. The development of direct-acting antiviral agents (DAAs) that specifically target HCV replication has revolutionized the treatment of HCV. Current regimens are now highly potent, all-oral, interferon-free combinations of these DAAs. The Food and Drug Administration has now approved many of these regimens. The changing management of HCV infection, including recent advances in HCV therapy, are discussed.
This review contains 1 figure, 5 tables and 59 references
Key words: direct-acting antiviral agents, hepatitis C virus, interferon-free therapy, management, treatment
- 19
The Natural History of Chronic Liver Disease
- ESPERANCE A K SCHAEFER, MD, MPHResearch fellow, Department of Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe natural history of chronic liver disease is that of a slowly progressive course, in most cases evolving over the course of years to decades. The rate of progression varies by disease state and comorbid conditions, but fibrosis advances on average by one stage every 7 to 10 years. While the development of fibrosis is reversible when the underlying etiology is successfully treated, a large number of patients present to medical attention once advanced fibrosis has already developed. The ultimate clinical and pathological manifestation of chronic liver disease is cirrhosis. Cirrhosis has long been clinically divided into “compensated” and “decompensated” disease, with an estimated 12-year survival in compensated disease and 2-year survival in decompensated disease. Additional clinical stratifications have been proposed, including a five-stage model progressing from cirrhosis without portal hypertension (hepatic venous pressure gradient below 10 mm Hg) to cirrhosis with portal hypertension, and then cirrhosis complicated by bleeding or other decompensating events. These clinical stages correspond to a step-wise increase in mortality and, with the presence of more than one decompensating event, the five-year mortality approaches 90%. The major complications of cirrhosis include varices with or without hemorrhage, ascites, hepatic encephalopathy, immune dysfunction, renal impairment, and hepatocellular carcinoma. Liver transplantation has provided an avenue to alter the course and outcomes in chronic liver disease, with graft survival rates that reach 80% at 5 years.
This review contains 4 figures, 6 tables and 51 references
Key Words: natural history, cirrhosis, mortality, hepatocellular carcinoma, acute-on-chronic liver failure
- 20
Viral Hepatitis E
- KENRAD E NELSON, MDProfessor, Department of Epidemiology and Department of International Health, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, MD
- BRITTANY L KMUSH, PHDAssistant Professor, Department of Public Health, Food, Studies and Nutrition, Falk College of Sport and Human Dynamics, Syracuse University, Syracuse, NY
Purchase PDFHepatitis E Virus (HEV) infections are among the most frequent causes of viral hepatitis globally. They are especially common in southern Asia where large epidemics of waterborne hepatitis, primarily affect adults with increased mortality in pregnant women, occur frequently during and after monsoon rains when there is contamination of the drinking water supply. These epidemics have been recognized throughout modern history. Similar epidemics have been reported from Sub-Saharan Africa during humanitarian crises, when the water supply is compromised. The causal virus, HEV, was discovered in 1983. About a decade later, similar HEV viruses were found to be transmitted as a foodborne infection from infected pigs, deer, wild boar, and other zoonotic reservoirs. There are 4 genotypes of HEV that infect humans: genotypes 1 and 2 are strictly human pathogens, and genotypes 3 and 4 have zoonotic reservoirs and are transmitted as a foodborne infection or from contact with the zoonotic reservoir. Although most HEV infections cause asymptomatic infections or acute selflimited hepatitis in humans, in recent years, chronic infections among immunocompromised patients after solid organ transplants or other immunocompromising conditions have been reported among persons with genotype 3 infections.
This review contains 4 figues, 4 tables and 162 references
Key Words: epidemiology, global impact, Hepatitis E Vaccine, HEV, prevention, reservoirs, risk factors, treatment
- 21
Drug Hepatotoxicity
- FERNANDO BESSONE, MDProfessor of Gastroenterology and Chief of the Gastroenterology and Hepatology Department, University of Rosario School of Medicine, Argentina
- RAÚL J ANDRADE, MD, PHDProfessor of Medicine, Director of the Department of Medicine at the University of Málaga, University of Málaga, Spain
Purchase PDFIdiosyncratic drug-induced liver injury (DILI) caused by xenobiotics (drugs, herbals, and dietary supplements) is an elusive liver disease presenting with a range of phenotypes and severity, including acute hepatitis that is indistinguishable from viral hepatitis, autoimmune hepatitis, steatosis, fibrosis or rare chronic vascular syndromes, asymptomatic liver test abnormalities,and acute liver failure. Case definition and characterization using liver biochemistry and histology are crucial for appropriate phenotyping. The incidence of DILI is probably higher than expected by the cases that are identified in clinical practice because of misdiagnosis and underreporting.The pathogenesis of DILI is complex, depending on the interaction of a drug’s physicochemical properties and host factors. Genome-wide association studies have identified several alleles from the major histocompatibility complex system, indicating a fundamental role of the adaptive immune system in DILI pathogenesis. As specific biomarkers for hepatotoxicity are still not available, the diagnosis of DILI remains one of exclusion of the alternative causes of liver damage. Structured causality assessment using the Roussel Uclaf Causality Assessment Method (RUCAM) or previously Council for International Organizations of Medical Sciences (CIOMS) instrument adds consistency to the diagnostic process, although there is room for improvement in the scale domains and score weighting. The therapy for idiosyncratic hepatotoxicity is supportive and relies on the prompt withdrawal of the offending agent. Corticosteroid therapy for hypersensitivity reactions or ursodeoxycholicacid for prolonged cholestasis is empirically used, although the degree of evidence is low. Existing databases have enabled a better prediction of immediate and long-term DILI prognosis. Multivariate models have identified clinical and analytical variables as predictive of acute liver failure and mortality as well as of chronic DILI.
This review contains 2 figures, 5 tables and 55 references
Key Words: adaptive immune system;causality assessment;drug-induced liver injury; epidemiology; HLA alleles; pharmacogenetics; registries; risk factors
- 22
Posttransplant Complications: Renal, Cardiovascular, Diabetes, and Obesity
By Pranab Barman, MD; Josh Levitsky, MD, MS
Purchase PDFPosttransplant Complications: Renal, Cardiovascular, Diabetes, and Obesity
- PRANAB BARMAN, MDGastroenterology Fellow, Division of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Northwestern University Feinberg School of Medicine, Chicago, IL
- JOSH LEVITSKY, MD, MSDivision of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Northwestern University Feinberg School of Medicine, Chicago, IL
Purchase PDFWith improving surgical technique and perioperative care, liver transplant recipients will continue to survive longer and longer. After the first year of transplantation, the risk of mortality is largely based on the development of renal disease and metabolic syndrome, including hypertension, hyperlipidemia, diabetes, and obesity. Mechanistically, these complications can be a result of immunosuppressive medications as well as a return to poor dietary and exercise regimens posttransplant. Renal injury is almost exclusively a result of calcineurin toxicity over time, and new strategies are in place, utilizing mammalian target of rapamycin inhibitors to minimize this risk. Cardiovascular complications can also be spurred on by immunosuppressive medications, and close monitoring and treatment with standard agents are required in the recipient. Diabetes is perhaps the most feared medical complication posttransplant, as it carries a higher risk of mortality. It is also impacted by many of the different immunosuppressive regimens. Finally, novel strategies are being researched to appropriately treat the obese patient pre- and post liver transplant.
This review contains 1 figure, 2 tables, and 52 references.
Key Words: complications, diabetes, everolimus, immunosuppression, liver transplant, medical, metabolic syndrome, obesity, posttransplant, renal disease, tacrolimus.
- 23
Adherence to Posttransplantation Medical Regimen
By Lauren S Jones, BS; Marina Serper, MD, MS
Purchase PDFAdherence to Posttransplantation Medical Regimen
- LAUREN S JONES, BSClinical Research Coordinator, Division of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Perelman School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania
- MARINA SERPER, MD, MSAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Perelman School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania. Division of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Perelman School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA, United States
Purchase PDFIn this review, we provide an overview of the most current evidence on the prevalence, risk factors, and consequences of medication non-adherence (NA) in liver transplant recipients. Despite the improvement in long-term liver transplantation outcomes, medication NA is the leading cause of graft failure, graft rejection, and poor clinical outcomes. We examine methods of measuring NA as well as interventions that have been carried out to improve medication adherence and posttransplantation outcomes. Common risk factors for NA include low social support, medication-related factors (eg. side effects), regimen complexity, younger age, financial barriers, and low literacy. Additionally, we discuss special at-risk populations with pretransplantation substance abuse or psychiatric comorbidities as well as adolescents making a transition into adulthood and independent self-care. Multifaceted interventions that are personalized and specific to identified adherence barriers for high-risk groups seem to be the most promising approach to improve medication NA and posttransplantation outcomes.
This review contains 4 figures, 5 tables, and 53 references
Key Words: electronic monitoring, immunosuppression, liver transplantation, medication, nonadherence, noncompliance, tacrolimus standard deviation, transplantation outcomes
- 24
Acute and Chronic Rejection in Liver Transplantation
By Ester Coelho Little, MD; Marina Berenguer, MD
Purchase PDFAcute and Chronic Rejection in Liver Transplantation
- ESTER COELHO LITTLE, MDBanner University Medical Center, Liver Transplant and Advanced Liver Disease, Phoenix, AZ and Clinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Arizona Phoenix Campus
- MARINA BERENGUER, MDHepatology and Liver Transplanting Consulting, Hepatology Research Director, Servicio de Medicina Digestivo (Torre F-5), La Fe University Hospital, IISLa Fe, Ciberehd and University of Valencia, Valencia, Spain.
Purchase PDFAdvances in immunosuppression have improved the outcome of transplantation. Although early cellular rejection does not adversely impact transplantation outcome, late cellular rejection appears to behave differently from both a clinical and a histologic point of view, potentially resulting in poor outcomes. Histologic assessments continue to play an important role in the diagnosis and management of liver allograft rejection. Former conditions known as “de novo autoimmune hepatitis” and “idiopathic posttransplantation chronic hepatitis” are currently labeled “atypical cases of rejection” and late T cell–mediated rejection. There is increasing evidence to suggest that central perivenulitis may be an important manifestation of these immune conditions. In addition, although the liver appears relatively resistant to donor-specific antibody–mediated injury, alloantibody-mediated adverse consequences are increasingly being recognized, including cases of acute and chronic antibody-mediated rejection and the potential implication of atypical immune-mediated manifestations of rejection, particularly late and chronic rejection. Judicious immunosuppression appears to be a common protective factor against these complications.
This review contains 5 figures, 5 tables, and 72 references.
Key words: antibody-mediated rejection, chronic rejection, de novo autoimmune hepatitis, fibrosis, idiopathic posttransplantation hepatitis, late rejection, liver transplantation, plasma cell–rich rejection, T cell–mediated rejection
- 25
Allograft Liver Biopsy
- ESTER COELHO LITTLE, MDBanner University Medical Center, Liver Transplant and Advanced Liver Disease, Phoenix, AZ and Clinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Arizona Phoenix Campus
- MARINA BERENGUER, MDHepatology and Liver Transplanting Consulting, Hepatology Research Director, Servicio de Medicina Digestivo (Torre F-5), La Fe University Hospital, IISLa Fe, Ciberehd and University of Valencia, Valencia, Spain.
Purchase PDFAlthough not ideal, liver biopsy is the best available method for evaluation of the liver and is considered the gold standard. The most common use of liver biopsies in the posttransplantation setting is for diagnosis of allograft dysfunction presenting with abnormal liver chemistry tests. The causes of allograft dysfunction differ according to time. Early on, preservation and reperfusion injury, infection, donor-related disease, and acute rejection are more common. Later, disease recurrence, de novo disease, and chronic rejection are seen more frequently. A complete history and physical examination are followed by ultrasonography with Doppler. If biliary or vascular causes are suspected, further imaging is performed and stents or surgery planned. If these tests are not diagnostic, a liver biopsy is performed. In addition to diagnosis of allograft dysfunction, protocol liver biopsy can be helpful particularly to diagnose disease recurrence, particularly the immune-mediated diseases, as well as to evaluate the patient for eligibility for immunosuppression minimization and possible withdrawal. Given the risks and cost associated with liver biopsy, several methods are used for evaluation of fibrosis and rejection in the liver allograft. Although very promising, these methods have not been widely validated and are not ready for clinical use.
This review contains 9 figures, 2 tables, and 54 references.
Key Words: biopsy to diagnose allograft liver dysfunction, disease recurrence after liver transplant, immunosuppression withdrawal after liver transplant, liver biopsy to guide immunosuppression minimization, noninvasive methods to evaluate liver allograft, posttransplant diagnostic liver biopsy, preservation and reperfusion injury, protocol liver biopsy after transplant
- 26
Posttransplant Complications: Biliary and Vascular
By Ester Coelho Little, MD; Marina Berenguer, MD
Purchase PDFPosttransplant Complications: Biliary and Vascular
- ESTER COELHO LITTLE, MDBanner University Medical Center, Liver Transplant and Advanced Liver Disease, Phoenix, AZ and Clinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Arizona Phoenix Campus
- MARINA BERENGUER, MDHepatology and Liver Transplanting Consulting, Hepatology Research Director, Servicio de Medicina Digestivo (Torre F-5), La Fe University Hospital, IISLa Fe, Ciberehd and University of Valencia, Valencia, Spain.
Purchase PDFSince it was first described, the overall patient and graft survival after liver transplant have improved with advances in immunosuppression and surgical and anesthetic techniques. Despite this improvement, there continues to be both biliary and vascular complications associated with this life-saving operation, which can lead to further procedures, reoperation, and retransplant. Advances in endoscopic and percutaneous techniques have had a significant impact on the perioperative management of posttransplant complications, resulting in a reduction in reoperations and retransplants. Changes in intraoperative management with the use of thrombolytic therapy have allowed for the expansion of the donor pool, allowing the use of donation after cardiac death with increased safety and decreased risk of ischemic biliary tract injury. This article serves to highlight the vascular and biliary complications following transplant, their etiology, diagnosis, and management.
This review contains 9 figures, 1 table, and 33 references.
Key Words: bile leak, biliary stricture, deceased donor liver transplant, donation after brain death (DBD), donation after cardiac death, hepatic artery thrombosis, ischemic cholangiopathy, living donor liver transplant, portal vein thrombosis, thrombolytic therapy, venous outflow obstruction.
- 27
Malnutrition in Cirrhosis and Its Management
By Shareef Syed, MD; Adrienne E Lebsack, MPH, MAS; Jennifer C Lai, MD, MBA
Purchase PDFMalnutrition in Cirrhosis and Its Management
- SHAREEF SYED, MDDepartment of Surgery, University of California San Francisco
- ADRIENNE E LEBSACK, MPH, MASDepartment of Medicine, University of California, San Francisco
- JENNIFER C LAI, MD, MBADepartment of Medicine, University of California, San Francisco
Purchase PDFThe World Health Organization defines malnutrition as a term referring to deficiencies, excesses, or imbalances in a person’s intake or energy and/or nutrients. Malnutrition is a nearly universal complication of end-stage liver disease, with a prevalence of up to 90%. Given their hepatic synthetic dysfunction, patients with cirrhosis are at a particularly high risk for protein-calorie depletion, which has been reported in over half of patients with cirrhosis and worsens with disease severity. Undernutrition is a potent predictor of adverse outcomes in cirrhotic patients, including lower survival rates, hepatic decompensation, longer length of days in the hospital and intensive care unit (ICU), increased number of infection episodes, and higher resource utilization. On the other hand, excess energy intake, or overnutrition, is increasingly being recognized as an important determinant of long-term outcomes in this population, particularly those with nonalcoholic steatohepatitis. Nearly one quarter of patients with cirrhosis are overnourished and up to 72% show excessive daily intake of energy and protein. In this review, we will consider the full spectrum of malnutrition in patients with end-stage liver disease and highlight key areas in need of further investigation.
This review contains 4 figures, 4 tables, and 54 references.
Key Words: frailty, inflammation, nocturnal feeding, nutritional assessment, nutritional risk, nutritional screening, protein-energy malnutrition, sarcopenia
- 28
Viral Hepatitis A
- KENRAD E NELSON, MDProfessor, Department of Epidemiology and Department of International Health, Johns Hopkins University, Baltimore, MD
- BRITTANY L KMUSH, PHDAssistant Professor, Department of Public Health, Food, Studies and Nutrition, Falk College of Sport and Human Dynamics, Syracuse University, Syracuse, NY
- 29
Viral Hepatitis C: Epidemiology, pathogenesis, Transmission, and natural History
By Raymond T. Chung, MD; Anna Lidofsky, BS; Jacinta A Holmes, MBBS, PhD
Purchase PDFViral Hepatitis C: Epidemiology, pathogenesis, Transmission, and natural History
- RAYMOND T. CHUNG, MDLiver Center, Gastrointestinal Division, Department of Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- ANNA LIDOFSKY, BSPredoctoral Research Fellow, Gastrointestinal Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JACINTA A HOLMES, MBBS, PHDPostdoctoral Research Fellow, Gastrointestinal Division, Massachusetts General Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA; Postdoctoral Research Fellow, Department of Gastroenterology, St Vincent’s Hospital, Melbourne, Australia
- 30
Acute Liver Failure
By Constantine J Karvellas, MD, SM, FRCPC; R. Todd Stravitz, MD, FACP, FACG, FAASLD
Purchase PDFAcute Liver Failure
- CONSTANTINE J KARVELLAS, MD, SM, FRCPCAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology (Liver Unit), Department of Critical Care Medicine; Adjunct Professor, School of Public Health Sciences, University of Alberta, Edmonton, AB
- R. TODD STRAVITZ, MD, FACP, FACG, FAASLDProfessor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Medical Director of Liver Transplantation, Hume-Lee Transplant Center of Virginia Commonwealth University, Richmond, VA
- 31
Nonalcoholic Fatty Liver Disease
- MICHAEL FUCHS, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Virginia Commonwealth University Medical Center, Staff Physician, Hepatology Service, Hunter Holmes McGuire Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Richmond, VA
- PUNEET PURI, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Gastroenterology, Hepatology and Nutrition, Virginia Commonwealth University Medical Center and Gastrointestinal & Hepatology Service, Hunter Holmes McGuire Department of Veterans Affairs Med¬ical Center, Richmond, VA
- Transplant Hepatology
- 1
Liver Transplant Immunology 2: Application to Liver Allograft Immunity
By Michael Kriss, MD; Hugo Rosen, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFLiver Transplant Immunology 2: Application to Liver Allograft Immunity
- MICHAEL KRISS, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Gastroenterology & Hepatology, GI and Liver Innate Immune Program, University of Colorado Anschutz Medical Campus, Aurora, CO
- HUGO ROSEN, MD, FACPProfessor and Chairman of Medicine, University of Southern California, Los Angeles, CA
Purchase PDFThe liver is a multifunctional organ responsible for complex metabolic and immune functions. Although not a classic lymphoid organ, the liver is enriched with traditional immune cells as well as parenchymal and nonparenchymal cells that play a key role in immune homeostasis. Due to its location and unique anatomic structure, the liver must finely balance immunity and tolerance to avoid undue inflammation in the setting of constant antigenic exposure from portal blood flow while maintaining appropriate immunity against pathogens. Since the first successful liver transplantation in humans in 1967 at the University of Colorado, our knowledge of hepatic immunity and tolerance, in the context of both liver disease and liver transplantation, has evolved dramatically. With these advancements, therapeutic modalities have been developed that have revolutionized the care of liver transplant recipients. In Part 2: Application to Liver Allograft Immunity, we apply the basic principles of liver immunology and allorecognition to our current management of liver transplant recipients in the context of both immunosuppression and the holy grail of transplantation, operational tolerance.
This review contains 4 figures, 3 tables, and 32 references
Key Words: adaptive immunity; allograft rejection; allograft tolerance; allorecognition; antigen presenting cells; immunosuppression; innate immunity; liver transplantation; T lymphocytes
- 1
- 1
- Human Genetics
- 1
Genomics Overview
- W GREGORY FEERO, MD, PHDSpecial Advisor to the Director, National Human Genome Research Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD, Faculty, Maine-Dartmouth Family Medicine Residency, Augusta, ME
Purchase PDFNew genomic applications are affecting internal medicine subspecialties and will soon affect the practices of all physicians. This chapter discusses the fields of genetics versus genomics and details the fundamentals of a genomic approach to health care. It includes special considerations such as the intersection between genomics and evidence-based medicine, genetic discrimination, the regulation of genetic testing, and the marketing of genetic testing directly to consumers. The chapter looks at genome-wide association studies and clinical care, as well as sequencing technologies. Tables offer examples of patterns of inheritance, clinical recommendations and red flags raised by family history, and intended uses for genetic tests. One figure shows an example pedigree obtained by using the US surgeon general's My Family Health Portrait family history tool, while the other shows the chromosomal locations of genetic markers associated with disease risk discovered in genome-wide association studies between 2005 and 2009. This chapter contains 41 references.
- 2
Practice of Genetics in Clinical Medicine
By Bruce R Korf, MD, PhD, FACMG; Carlos Gallego, MD
Purchase PDFPractice of Genetics in Clinical Medicine
- BRUCE R KORF, MD, PHD, FACMGProfessor and Chair, Department of Genetics, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- CARLOS GALLEGO, MDInternist Geneticist, Huntsville Hospital
Purchase PDFThis review provides a general overview of the genetic approach in medical practice, discusses the principles of genetic testing, including interpretation of genetic tests and direct-to-consumer genomic testing, and looks at genetic counseling and approaches to treatment. The internist should become familiar with genetic disorders such as those associated with mutations in single genes or changes in chromosome number or structure. This is the traditional area of focus for medical geneticists and is likely to remain so. The internist should be familiar with basic principles of care for individuals with the more common of these conditions and needs to recognize clues that suggest the presence of these disorders, especially in family history. The section on genetics of common disorders focuses on pharmacogenetics, risk assessment, and prevention. Figures illustrate commonly used standard pedigree symbols and examples of autosomal recessive, autosomal dominant, X-linked recessive, and maternal inheritance. Tables offer different forms of genetic testing and types of gene mutations at genome and DNA levels.
This review contains 2 figures, 2 tables, and 83 references.
- 3
Heritable and Acquired Thrombophilias in Clinical Practice
By Hanny Al-Samkari, MD; Nathan T. Connell, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFHeritable and Acquired Thrombophilias in Clinical Practice
- HANNY AL-SAMKARI, MDDivision of Hematology, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- NATHAN T. CONNELL, MD, MPHHematology Division, Brigham & Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA; Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThrombosis is common in clinical practice. Venous thromboembolism in particular raises questions of a possible underlying hereditary or acquired thrombophilic state. Despite considerable data describing the impact of various thrombophilic states on risks of initial and recurrent thromboembolic events, thrombophilia testing is not standardized. An understanding of the utility and pitfalls of clinical thrombophilia testing is necessary to employ this testing properly. When utilized appropriately, thrombophilia testing can be vital in informing an individual patient’s thrombosis risk and pursuing optimal anticoagulant management. Hereditary thrombophilia testing involves investigation for factor V Leiden, the prothrombin G202010A gene mutation, and deficiencies of the natural anticoagulants protein C, protein S, and antithrombin. Assessment for acquired thrombophilias is perhaps even more important, recognizing the possibility for myeloproliferative neoplasms, antiphospholipid antibody syndrome, occult malignancy and other important acquired thrombotic predispositions. Timing of thrombophilia testing in relation to anticoagulation, acute thrombosis, and use of hormonal agents or pregnancy is critical to ensure accurate diagnosis. This review describes each of the most important hereditary and acquired thrombophilias, explains their relationship to venous and arterial thrombosis, delineates evidence-based indications for thrombophilia testing, identifies potential testing pitfalls, and synthesizes the key points in outlining algorithms for thrombophilia testing in clinical practice.
This review contains 4 figures, 4 tables, and 48 references.
Key words: thrombophilia, venous thromboembolism, pulmonary embolus, deep vein thrombosis, factor V Leiden, prothrombin gene mutation, protein C deficiency, protein S deficiency, antiphospholipid antibody syndrome, hypercoagulability of malignancy
- 4
Achondroplasia and Hypochondroplasia
By Catherine Gooch, MD; Akila Subramaniam, MD; Nathaniel Robin, MD
Purchase PDFAchondroplasia and Hypochondroplasia
- CATHERINE GOOCH, MDUniversity of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- AKILA SUBRAMANIAM, MDUniversity of Alabama at Birmingham Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Birmingham, AL
- NATHANIEL ROBIN, MDUniversity of Alabama at Birmingham Department of Genetics, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFMany women with skeletal dysplasias, such as achondroplasia and hypochondroplasia, choose to become pregnant. These women and their partners should receive pre-conception genetic counseling. Once the woman becomes pregnant, a multidisciplinary team at a tertiary care hospital should mange her antepartum care and birth process. An anesthesia plan should be in place that addressed kyphosis, weight based medications and the possibility of a Cesarean Section. Patients should be monitored for respiratory compromise from the gravid uterus on a smaller body frame. Neonatology must be available to help care for the infant. With a supportive antepartum and postpartum care plan, most women with skeletal dysplasia do well and resume routine OBGYN care after birth.
This review contains 5 figures, and 21 references.
Keywords: Maternal Achondroplasia, Maternal Hypochondroplasia, Inheritance patterns, short limb dwarfism, high risk pregnancy, autosomal dominant inheritance
- 1
- Infectious Diseases
- 1
Autoimmune Hepatitis/overlap Syndromes
- ALBERT J CZAJA, MDDivision of Gastroenterology and Hepatology, Mayo Clinic College of Medicine, Rochester, Minnesota USA.
Purchase PDFWhen autoimmune hepatitis has features of primary biliary cholangitis or primary sclerosing cholangitis, these mixed clinical phenotypes constitute overlap syndromes. Diagnostic criteria have been promulgated, but clinical judgement and liver tissue examination remain cornerstones of diagnosis. Cholestatic laboratory and histological findings, concurrent inflammatory bowel disease, or non-response to conventional corticosteroid therapy compel practitioners to consider overlap in patients with autoimmune hepatitis. Laboratory indices of marked liver inflammation and histological findings of moderate to severe interface hepatitis, especially with lymphoplasmacytic infiltration, also warrant consideration of overlap in patients with primary biliary cholangitis or primary sclerosing cholangitits. Treatment recommendations to date have been based on weak clinical evidence, and disease management should be individualized and guided by the predominant disease component. Prednisone or prednisolone in combination with azathioprine has been used in patients with predominantly autoimmune hepatitis, whereas low dose ursodeoxycholic acid in conjunction with corticosteroid-based regimens has been recommended in syndromes with predominately cholestatic disease. All treatments have been variably effective, especially in patients with overlapping features of primary sclerosing cholangitis. Mycophenolate mofetil and calcineurin inhibitors have been used as salvage therapies in limited experiences, and liver transplantation has been associated with graft and overall survivals similar to those of the classical unmixed diseases.
This review contains 6 figures, 7 tables and 50 references
Keywords: autoimmune hepatitis, primary biliary cholangitis, primary sclerosing cholangitis, overlap, cholestatic laboratory and histological features
- 2
Important Infections Due to Molds
- JO-ANNE H. YOUNG, MD, FACPProfessor, Division of Infectious Disease and International Medicine, Department of Medicine, Executive Medical Director, Program in Adult Transplant Infectious Disease, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
- JAIME S GREEN, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Infectious Disease and International Medicine, Department of Medicine, Assistant Director, Program in Adult Transplant Infectious Disease, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
Purchase PDFMold-based fungal infections have become increasingly important over several decades, paradoxically because advances in medical practice have allowed patients with chronic medical conditions to live longer and have lives that are more productive. Allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis can affect those individuals with an atopic predisposition. Use of direct antimold antifungal agents can decrease the number of steroid treatment courses and monoclonal antibody therapy used in these patients. Pulmonary invasive aspergillosis remains the most important opportunistic mold infection among immunocompromised patients. Surrogate markers of diagnosis can include β-d-glucan or Aspergillus galactomannan antigen testing, although the specificity of both tests is not robust. There are three general classes of antifungal agents in use, with less nephrotoxic options. With safer therapeutic options, empirical treatment occurs with tremendous frequency among otherwise immunosuppressed individuals. Thus, clinicians will need to maintain a high suspicion for mold infections that can be resistant to a previously used antifungal therapy. Attention to liver function testing during long-term use of these advanced-generation azole antifungal agents, and at times therapeutic drug monitoring with blood levels, will be needed. The echinocandin class of antifungal agents does not have hepatic or renal toxicity in general, but these agents need to be administered via an intravenous route. With routine use of agents that have activity against aspergillosis, fusariosis, mucormycosis, or other mold infections become evident for a minority of at-risk patients.
This review contains 5 figures, 14 tables and 91 references
Key words: allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, dematiaceous fungi, Exserohilum, fusariosis, invasive aspergillosis, mucormycosis, Scedosporium
- 3
Acute Pneumonia
- JOHN I HOGAN, MD
- BENJAMIN DAVIS, MD
Purchase PDFAcute pneumonia continues to represent a major source of morbidity, mortality, and healthcare expenditure in the U.S. It is imperative that clinicians at all levels of training have a firm understanding of this potentially deadly infection and its numerous complications. The current state of our diagnostic capabilities often dictates that clinicians will need to make important therapeutic decisions in patients presenting with acute pneumonia before identifying a culprit pathogen. Only after understanding the pathogenesis of pneumonia under different clinical circumstances can one devise rational empiric therapeutic regimens. In this practical review we offer a succinct description of the epidemiology and pathogenesis of acute pneumonia. We then proceed to discuss the evaluation and management of patients presenting with acute pneumonia with emphasis on the most valuable clinical trials and major guidelines that we use to inform our clinical decisions. Despite significant advances in the field of infectious disease over the past century, clinicians continue to recognize pneumonia, the infection of the pulmonary parenchyma, as a major source of morbidity and mortality. In this article we attempt to provide the general practitioner with a practical review of acute pneumonia and its complications. Prioritizing the needs of the general practitioner, we most thoroughly address community acquired pneumonia (CAP). Though we do not intend for this review to be completely comprehensive, in this article we also briefly discuss healthcare associated pneumonia (HCAP), hospital associated pneumonia (HAP), and ventilator associated pneumonia (VAP). Focusing much of our attention on the most important clinical trials and guidelines underpinning the diagnosis and management of this common problem, we hope that this publication will serve as a useful review to aid in clinical decision making.
This review contains 1 figure, 6 tables and 65 references
Key Words: Pneumonia, viral pneumonia, bacterial pneumonia, community-acquired pneumonia, ventilator-associated pneumonia, VAP, healthcare-associated pneumonia, hospital-acquired pneumonia
- 4
Coronaviruses: Hcov, Sars-cov, Mers-cov, and COVID-19
- MICHAEL G. ISON, MD, MSCAssociate Professor, Divisions of Infectious Diseases & Organ Transplantation, Northwestern University Feinberg School of Medicine, Chicago, IL
Purchase PDFCoronaviruses (CoVs) are a group of viral pathogens that infect mammals and birds. The presentation in humans is typically that of a mild upper respiratory tract infection, similar to the common cold. However, in recent years, dramatic attention has arisen for more lethal members of this viral family (e.g., severe acute respiratory syndrome [SARS-CoV], Middle East respiratory syndrome [MERS-CoV], and coronavirus disease 2019 [COVID-19]). The epidemiology, clinical presentation, diagnosis, and management of these viruses are discussed in this review. Importantly, new guideline tables from the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, as well as the World Health Organization are provided at the conclusion of the review.
This review contains 12 tables, 3 figure and 48 references.
Keywords: Coronavirus, severe acute respiratory distress syndrome (SARS), Middle East respiratory syndrome (MERS), COVID-19, respiratory infection, antiviral, real-time polymerase chain reaction
- 5
Urogenital Mycoplasma Infections
By T. Prescott Atkinson, M.D., Ph.D; William M. Geisler, M.D., M.P.H.; Ken B. Waites, M.D., F(AAM)
Purchase PDFUrogenital Mycoplasma Infections
- T. PRESCOTT ATKINSON, M.D., PH.DProfessor and Director Division of Pediatric Allergy and Immunology Department of Pediatrics University of Alabama at Birmingham
- WILLIAM M. GEISLER, M.D., M.P.H.Professor of Medicine Division of Infectious Diseases Department of Medicine University of Alabama at Birmingham
- KEN B. WAITES, M.D., F(AAM)Professor, Department of Pathology University of Alabama at Birmingham
Purchase PDFClass Mollicutes includes organisms in the genera Mycoplasma and Ureaplasma. They are prokaryotes that lack a cell wall and are among the smallest known living organisms both in cellular dimension and genome size. At least 17 different species inhabit the mucosae of the respiratory and urogenital tracts of humans, several of which are pathogenic in a variety of clinical illnesses. Their fastidious nature and often slow growth in vitro has hampered understanding of their roles as agents of human disease. Mycoplasma hominis and Ureaplasma spp. have been recognized as causes of various pelvic inflammatory syndromes in women and systemic illnesses in immunocompromised persons, and U. urealyticum has been identified as a potential cause of urethritis in men. The appreciation of Mycoplasma genitalium as an important cause of inflammatory urogenital syndromes in men and women has come about over the past decade as a result of the advancement of molecular methods for its detection. Development of resistance to macrolides and fluoroquinolones in M. genitalium has made management of these infections more challenging. This review provides an update on the epidemiology, pathogenesis, disease spectrum, diagnosis, and treatment of urogenital and/or systemic infections caused by these organisms.
This review contains 1 figure, 2 tables and 97 references
Key Words: Antimicrobial Resistance, Inflammation, Mycoplasma, Pelvic Inflammatory Disease, Sexually Transmitted Infections, Ureaplasma
- 6
- 7
Important Infections Due to Molds
- JO-ANNE H. YOUNG, MD, FACPProfessor, Division of Infectious Disease and International Medicine, Department of Medicine, Executive Medical Director, Program in Adult Transplant Infectious Disease, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
- JAIME S GREEN, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Infectious Disease and International Medicine, Department of Medicine, Assistant Director, Program in Adult Transplant Infectious Disease, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
- Overview of Infectious Diseases
- 1
Introduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
By Steven K. Lundy, PhD; Alison Gizinski, MD; David A. Fox, MD
Purchase PDFIntroduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
- STEVEN K. LUNDY, PHDResearch Assistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School, Ann Arbor, MI
- ALISON GIZINSKI, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, AR
- DAVID A. FOX, MDProfessor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School and Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFThe immune system is a complex network of cells and mediators that must balance the task of protecting the host from invasive threats. From a clinical perspective, many diseases and conditions have an obvious link to improper functioning of the immune system, and insufficient immune responses can lead to uncontrolled acute and chronic infections. The immune system may also be important in tumor surveillance and control, cardiovascular disease, health complications related to obesity, neuromuscular diseases, depression, and dementia. Thus, a working knowledge of the role of immunity in disease processes is becoming increasingly important in almost all aspects of clinical practice. This review provides an overview of the immune response and discusses immune cell populations and major branches of immunity, compartmentalization and specialized immune niches, antigen recognition in innate and adaptive immunity, immune tolerance toward self antigens, inflammation and innate immune responses, adaptive immune responses and helper T (Th) cell subsets, components of the immune response that are important targets of treatment in autoimmune diseases, mechanisms of action of biologics used to treat autoimmune diseases and their approved uses, and mechanisms of other drugs commonly used in the treatment of autoimmune diseases. Figures show the development of erythrocytes, platelets, lymphocytes, and other immune system cells originating from hematopoietic stem cells that first reside in the fetal liver and later migrate to the bone marrow, antigen–major histocompatibility complex recognition by T cell receptor control of T cell survival and activation, and Th cells as central determinants of the adaptive immune response toward different stimuli. Tables list cell populations involved in innate and adaptive immunity, pattern recognition receptors with known ligands, autoantibody-mediated human diseases: examples of pathogenic mechanisms, selected Food and Drug Administration–approved autoimmune disease indications for biologics, and mechanism of action of biologics used to treat autoimmune diseases.
This review contains 3 figures, 5 tables, and 64 references.
- 2
Vaccines and Vaccination
- LINDSEY OBRADOVICH, PHARMD, MSCSenior Research Pharmacist, Investigational Drug Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- NICHOLAS C ISSA, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe advent of vaccination began a new era in the world and in medicine. From the eradication of smallpox and near-eradication of polio to the significant reduction in many childhood diseases, vaccination has saved countless lives. Progress continues today in the form of safer and more effective vaccines, along with new vaccines against old and emerging pathogens that threaten worldwide pandemics. Several vaccines have been approved recently by the Food and Drug Administration, including a more immunogenic pneumococcal vaccine, new meningococcal serotype B vaccines, a 9-valent HPV vaccine, and the first adjuvanted influenza vaccine. Additional advancement with improved vaccines against herpes zoster and novel vaccines against emerging pathogens (Ebola and Zika viruses) is on the horizon. In this review, we discuss the immune mechanisms by which vaccines induce protection, the different types of vaccines, and the most recent recommendations by the Advisory Committee on Immunization Practices for vaccination schedules in adults. Key information for the general practitioner is presented in a concise and easy-to-read format, summarized in tables whenever possible. Vaccination in special populations, such as pregnant women, immunocompromised patients, international travelers, and health care workers, is also included in this review. A list of guidelines is also included.
This review contains 7 figures, 13 tables, and 57 references.
Key words: immunocompromised host, postexposure prophylaxis, travel, vaccination, vaccine
- 3
General Principles of Antibiotic Therapy
By Alyssa R. Letourneau, MD, MPH; Michael S. Calderwood, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFGeneral Principles of Antibiotic Therapy
- ALYSSA R. LETOURNEAU, MD, MPHDepartment of Medicine , Harvard Medical School, Assistant Director, Antimicrobial Stewardship Program, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MICHAEL S. CALDERWOOD, MD, MPHAssistant Professor, Department of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Assistant Hospital Epidemiologist/Associate Director, Antimicrobial Stewardship, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe essential feature of effective antibiotic agents is the ability to inhibit the growth of microorganisms at concentrations tolerated by the host. Antibiotic agents generally target anatomic structures or biosynthetic pathways unique to bacteria. The appropriate choice of an antibiotic for an infection depends on the following: clinician’s level of suspicion; the infecting organism and its antibiotic susceptibilities; the type of infection; factors associated with specific antibiotic agents; host factors; and public health considerations. This review provides an overview of antibiotic therapy and covers identifying the cause of an infection, determination of bacterial susceptibility to specific drugs, site of infection and ancillary therapy, antibiotic drug targets, pharmacodynamic parameters, factors affecting dosage and route of administration, host factors, complications of antibiotic therapy, Clostridium difficile infection, and antimicrobial resistance.
This review contains 2 figures, 7 tables, and 45 references.
Key words: Antimicrobial therapy, antibiotic, infection, microorganism, renal dosing, hepatic dosing, Clostridium difficile
- 4
Specific Antibiotic Agents
By Alyssa R. Letourneau, MD, MPH; Michael S. Calderwood, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFSpecific Antibiotic Agents
- ALYSSA R. LETOURNEAU, MD, MPHDepartment of Medicine , Harvard Medical School, Assistant Director, Antimicrobial Stewardship Program, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MICHAEL S. CALDERWOOD, MD, MPHAssistant Professor, Department of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Assistant Hospital Epidemiologist/Associate Director, Antimicrobial Stewardship, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe simultaneous use of multiple antibiotics in a shotgun fashion should be avoided because of the problems of drug toxicity and hypersensitivity reactions, microbial superinfections, and antagonisms between certain agents. Most bacterial infections can be treated satisfactorily with a single antibiotic agent. There are a limited number of situations, however, in which the simultaneous administration of different antibiotics is warranted. This review covers specific antimicrobial agents, including β-lactam antibiotics, aminoglycosides, polymyxins, tetracyclines, macrolides, clindamycin, nitroimidazoles, chloramphenicol, vancomycin, lipoglycopeptides, oxazolidinones, daptomycin, streptogramins, sulfonamides and trimethoprim, fluoroquinolones, nitrofurantoin, fosfomycin, rifamycins, and fidaxomicin, and provides empirical therapy recommendations. Figures show an overview of penicillin antibiotics, an overview of β-lactam/β-lactamase inhibitor combinations, and a positive D-zone test for inducible clindamycin resistance. Tables list antibacterial guidelines for initial inpatient empirical therapy and empirical sepsis guidelines.
This review contains 3 figures, 5 tables, and 51 references.
Keywords: β-Lactam Antibiotics ,penicillins,Cephalosporins, Carbapenems , monobactams, Gentamicin, Tobramycin, Polymyxins, Tetracyclines, Clarithromycin, Clindamycin
- 5
Antimicrobial Resistance in Enteric Gram-negative Organisms
By Allison Mah, MD, FRCPC; Inna Sekirov, MD, PhD; Theodore S Steiner, MD, FRCPC
Purchase PDFAntimicrobial Resistance in Enteric Gram-negative Organisms
- ALLISON MAH, MD, FRCPCPostgraduate Year 6, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Internal Medicine, University of British Columbia, Vancouver General Hospital, Vancouver, BC
- INNA SEKIROV, MD, PHDPostgraduate Year 5, Division of Medical Microbiology, Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, University of British Columbia, Vancouver General Hospital , Vancouver, BC
- THEODORE S STEINER, MD, FRCPCProfessor and Associate Head, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Internal Medicine, Associate Member, Department of Microbiology and Immunology, University of British Columbia , Vancouver General Hospital , Vancouver, BC
Purchase PDFAntimicrobial resistance is a phenomenon that predates the introduction of antibiotics into clinical practice and has become an exponentially growing problem worldwide, leading to increased mortality and increased costs of health care use. Among the many organisms with ever-worsening resistance profiles, Escherichia coli and other Enterobacteriaceae species are significant pathogens, both in terms of numbers and the severity of the infections they cause. The purpose of this review is to examine the emerging concern of antimicrobial resistance and the approach to treatment in the setting of infection with resistant organisms. We will focus on the resistance mechanisms of Enterobacteriaceae to select antimicrobial classes, briefly discuss the epidemiology of resistance, and discuss current treatment strategies. The specific epidemiology, clinical manifestations, and treatment of individual members of the Enterobacteriaceae are discussed in the review “Infections Due to Escherichia coli and Other Enteric Gram-Negative Bacilli,” found elsewhere in this publication. Figures illustrate the mechanisms of antimicrobial resitance in Enterobacteriaceae. Tables list the Ambler classification of ESBL/AmpC and carbapenemase enzymes, and antibiotics with activity against carbapenem-resistant enterobacteriaceae.
This review contains 4 figures, 3 tables, and 28 references.
- 6
Vaccines and Vaccination
- LINDSEY OBRADOVICH, PHARMD, MSCSenior Research Pharmacist, Investigational Drug Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- NICHOLAS C ISSA, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 7
Introduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
By Steven K. Lundy, PhD; Alison Gizinski, MD; David A. Fox, MD
Purchase PDFIntroduction to Clinical Immunology: Overview of the Immune Response, Autoimmune Conditions, and Immunosuppressive Therapeutics for Rheumatic Diseases
- STEVEN K. LUNDY, PHDResearch Assistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School, Ann Arbor, MI
- ALISON GIZINSKI, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Arkansas for Medical Sciences, Little Rock, AR
- DAVID A. FOX, MDProfessor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School and Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
- 8
Antimicrobial Resistance in Enteric Gram-negative Organisms
By Allison Mah, MD, FRCPC; Inna Sekirov, MD, PhD; Theodore S Steiner, MD, FRCPC
Purchase PDFAntimicrobial Resistance in Enteric Gram-negative Organisms
- ALLISON MAH, MD, FRCPCPostgraduate Year 6, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Internal Medicine, University of British Columbia, Vancouver General Hospital, Vancouver, BC
- INNA SEKIROV, MD, PHDPostgraduate Year 5, Division of Medical Microbiology, Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, University of British Columbia, Vancouver General Hospital , Vancouver, BC
- THEODORE S STEINER, MD, FRCPCProfessor and Associate Head, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Internal Medicine, Associate Member, Department of Microbiology and Immunology, University of British Columbia , Vancouver General Hospital , Vancouver, BC
- 1
- Infectious Syndromes
- 1
Hyperthermia, Fever, and Fever of Undetermined Origin
- HARVEY B SIMON, MD, FACPAssociate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Health, Sciences, Technology Faculty, Massachusetts Institute of Technology, Physician, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAbnormal elevation of body temperature, or pyrexia, can occur in one of two ways: hyperthermia or fever. In hyperthermia, thermal control mechanisms fail, so that heat production exceeds heat dissipation. In contrast, in fever, the hypothalamic thermal set point rises, and intact thermal control mechanisms are brought into play to bring body temperature up to the new set point. The distinction between fever and hyperthermia is more than academic: hyperthermia is best treated with physical cooling methods that promote heat dissipation. Fever of undetermined origin (FUO) presents one of the most challenging and perplexing problems in clinical medicine. Such fevers may persist for weeks or months in the absence of characteristic clinical findings or clues. Ultimately, most such obscure fevers prove to be caused by common diseases presenting in an atypical fashion rather than by rare and exotic illnesses. This chapter discusses fever and hyperthermia and further clarifies the distinction between fever and hyperthermia. The section on hyperthermia discusses the etiology of hyperthermia; the epidemiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of heatstroke; and the diagnosis and treatment of neuroleptic malignant syndrome, serotonin syndrome, and malignant hyperthermia of anesthesia. The section on fever discusses the pathogenesis, diagnosis, and treatment of fever, as well as the possible benefits and complications of elevated body temperature. The section on FUO presents the defining criteria of FUO; the etiologic classification of FUO, including the infections and neoplasms possibly responsible; and the diagnosis of FUO, including laboratory and radiologic studies, biopsies, and the role of exploratory laparotomy. Tables describe the causes of hyperthermia; the causes of FUO as reported in various studies over five decades; and a comprehensive list of causes of FUO. An algorithm depicts the progressive steps in the pathogenesis of fever and hyperthermia.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 26 tables, and 107 references
Key Words: collagen, vascular disease, febrile seizures, fever, heatstroke, hyperthermia, pyrogen
- 2
Sepsis
- STEVEN P LAROSA, MDStaff Physician, Infectious Disease Division, Beverly Hospital/Lahey Health System, Beverly, MA
- STEVEN M. OPAL, MDChief, Infectious Disease Division, Memorial Hospital of Rhode Island, Pawtucket, RI
Purchase PDFSepsis, along with the multiorgan failure that often accompanies this condition, is a leading cause of mortality in the intensive care unit. Although modest improvements in the prognosis have been made over the past two decades and promising new therapies continue to be investigated, innovations in the management of septic shock are still required. This chapter discusses the definitions, epidemiology, and pathogenesis (including microbial factors, host-derived mediators, and organ dysfunction) relating to sepsis. Management of severe sepsis and septic shock is also described.
This review contains 5 figures, 11 tables, and 99 references
Keywords:Organ dysfunction, sepsis, septic shock, infection, bacteremia, fluid resuscitation, vasopressor
- 3
Bacterial Infections of the Adult Upper Respiratory Tract
By Laura K Certain, MD, PhD; Miriam B Barshak, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFBacterial Infections of the Adult Upper Respiratory Tract
- LAURA K CERTAIN, MD, PHDInstructor, Harvard Medical School, Assistant in Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MIRIAM B BARSHAK, MD, PHDAssistant Professor, Harvard Medical School, Attending Physician, Massachusetts General Hospital, Clinical Associate, Massachusetts Eye and Ear Infirmary, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFUpper respiratory tract infections are the most common maladies experienced by humankind.1 The majority are caused by respiratory viruses. A Dutch case-controlled study of primary care patients with acute respiratory tract infections found that viruses accounted for 58% of cases; rhinovirus was the most common (24%), followed by influenza virus type A (11%) and coronaviruses (7%). Group A streptococcus (GAS) was responsible for 11%, and 3% of patients had mixed infections. Potential pathogens were detected in 30% of control patients who were free of acute respiratory symptoms; rhinovirus was the most common.2 Given the increasing problem of antibiotic resistance and the increasing awareness of the importance of a healthy microbiome, antibiotic use for upper respiratory infections should be reserved for those patients with clear indications for treatment. A recent study of adult outpatient visits in the United States found that respiratory complaints accounted for 150 antibiotic prescriptions per 1,000 population annually, yet the expected “appropriate” rate would be 45.3 In other words, most antibiotic prescriptions for these complaints are unnecessary. Similarly, a study in the United Kingdom found that general practitioners prescribed antibiotics to about half of all patients presenting with an upper respiratory infection, even though most of these infections are viral.4
This review contains 5 figures, 16 tables, and 82 references.
Keywords: infection, airway, sinusitis, otitis media, otitis externa, pharyngitis, epiglottitis, abscess
- 4
Respiratory Viral Infections
- MICHAEL G. ISON, MD, MSCAssociate Professor, Divisions of Infectious Diseases & Organ Transplantation, Northwestern University Feinberg School of Medicine, Chicago, IL
Purchase PDFThe respiratory tract can be infected by a diverse group of viruses that produce syndromes ranging in severity from mild colds to fulminant pneumonias. Respiratory viral infections are a leading cause of morbidity, hospitalization, and mortality throughout the world; influenza and pneumonia were the most prevalent infectious causes of death during the 20th century in the United States.
This review contains 8 figures, 26 tables and 87 references.
Keywords: Virus, infection, respiratory tract, antiviral, pneumonia, croup, pharyngitis, epidemic, pandemic, outbreak
- 5
Acute Bacterial Meningitis
- KAREN L. ROOS, MDJohn and Nancy Nelson Professor of Neurology and Professor of Neurological Surgery, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, IN
Purchase PDFAcute bacterial meningitis is a life-threatening infection. By definition, meningitis is an infection of the meninges and the subarachnoid space. Bacterial meningitis is associated with an inflammatory response that involves the meninges, the subarachnoid space, the brain parenchyma, and the cerebral arteries and veins. As such, bacterial meningoencephalitis is the more accurate descriptive term. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, complications, and prognosis of the disease. The discussion of diagnosis covers clinical manifestations, physical examination findings, laboratory tests, and imaging studies. The discussion of treatment covers empirical therapy, specific antimicrobial therapy, and dexamethasone therapy. Graphs compare causative organisms and clinical manifestations of community-acquired meningitis. Illustrations depict proper patient positioning for detecting nuchal rigidity, Kernig sign, Brudzinski sign, and lumbar puncture, as well as a sagittal view of a lumbar puncture needle as it is advanced into the subarachnoid space. An algorithm delineates the approach to the patient with symptoms and signs of bacterial meningitis. Tables outline bacterial pathogens based on predisposing and associated conditions, cerebrospinal fluid diagnostic studies for meningitis, the appearance of the organism on a Gram stain, empirical antimicrobial therapy based on predisposing and associated conditions, recommendations for specific antibiotic therapy in bacterial meningitis, and recommended doses for antibiotics commonly used in the treatment of bacterial meningitis.
This chapter contains 8 figures, 13 tables, 78 references
Keywords: Bacterial meningitis, antibiotics, Kernig sign, Brudzinski sign, nuchal rigidity, headache
- 6
Acute Viral Meningitis
- KAREN L. ROOS, MDJohn and Nancy Nelson Professor of Neurology and Professor of Neurological Surgery, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, IN
- JARED R. BROSCH, MDDeptment of Neurology, Assistant Professor of Neurology, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, IN
Purchase PDFAcute viral meningitis refers to inflammation of the meninges of the brain in response to a viral pathogen. Viruses cause meningitis, encephalitis, myelitis, or a combination of these, meningoencephalitis or encephalomyelitis. Viral meningitis is typically a self-limited disorder with no permanent neurologic sequelae. This chapter reviews the epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, complications, and prognosis. Tables describe Wallgren’s criteria for aseptic meningitis, important arboviral infections found in North America, herpes family viruses and meningitis, classic cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) abnormalities with viral meningitis, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention criteria for confirming arboviral meningitis, basic CSF studies for viral meningitis, and etiology of CSF pleocytosis. Figures depict common causes of viral meningitis, nuchal rigidity, examination for Kernig sign, and Brudzinski sign for meningeal irritation.
This chapter contains 4 figures, 12 tables, 19 references
Keywords: Meningitis, viral infection, encephalitis, enterovirus, herpesvirus, lumbar puncture, arbovirus, aseptic meningitis, Kernig sign, Brudzinski sign
- 7
Brain and Spinal Abscesses
- ALLAN R TUNKEL, MD, PHDProfessor of Medicine, Drexel University College of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA, Chair, Department of Medicine, Monmouth Medical Center, Long Branch, NJ
- W MICHAEL SCHELD, MDProfessor of Medicine and Neurosurgery, University of Virginia School of Medicine, Charlottesville, VA
Purchase PDFBrain and spinal abscesses are focal infections of the central nervous system that are often associated with significant morbidity and mortality if not recognized early and managed in a timely manner. In patients with brain abscess, the clinical manifestations run the gamut from indolent to fulminant; most are related to the size and location of the space-occupying lesion within the brain and the virulence of the infecting organism. Untreated spinal epidural abscess usually progresses through four stages: backache and focal vertebral pain, nerve root pain, spinal cord dysfunction, and complete paralysis. Magnetic resonance imaging is the diagnostic neuroimaging procedure of choice in patients with brain and spinal abscesses; on diffusion-weighted images, restricted diffusion may be seen and may help distinguish abscesses from necrotic neoplasms. Aspiration of the abscess is important to facilitate microbiologic diagnosis; after aspiration and submission of specimens for special stains, histopathologic examination, and culture, empirical antimicrobial therapy should be initiated based on stains of the aspirated specimen and the probable pathogenesis of infection. Once the infecting pathogen is isolated, antimicrobial therapy can be modified for optimal treatment. Surgical therapy is often required for the optimal approach to patients with brain and spinal abscesses.
This review contains 6 figures, 5 tables, and 72 references.
Key words: antimicrobial therapy for central nervous system infections, brain abscess, epidural abscess, focal intracranial infections, head trauma, infections in immunocompromised hosts, spine infections, subdural empyema, toxoplasmosis
- 8
Septic Arthritis, Septic Bursitis, and Osteomyelitis
- CAMERON ASHBAUGH, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associate Physician, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFInfections of joints and bones are important causes of morbidity due to the potential for permanent injury to structures necessary for mechanical support and useful motion. The spectrum of disease is broad, with host factors, pathogen, site of infection, and comorbidities all influencing outcome. In some cases of bone infection, cure may not be possible, and the therapeutic goal becomes control. This review details the epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis of septic arthritis, septic bursitis, vertebral body osteomyelitis, pedal osteomyelitis in association with diabetes, and chronic posttraumatic osteomyelitis with union or malunion.
This review contains 13 highly rendered figures, 16 tables, and 192 references.
- 9
Infective Endocarditis
- PATRICK T. O'GARA, MD, FACC, FAHA, FACPDirector, Clinical Cardiology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFInfective endocarditis is a microbial infection of a cardiac valve or the mural endocardium caused by bacteria or fungi. Forms of this infection include subacute bacterial endocarditis (SBE) and acute bacterial endocarditis (ABE). Etiology and epidemiology are discussed. There is a section on pathogenesis followed by specific clinical presentations, including endocarditis associated with parenteral drug abuse as well as prosthetic valve endocarditis (PVE). Diagnosis and cardiac complications of endocarditis, treatment, recommendations for prophylaxis, and prognosis are addressed. There are several figures showing manifestations and anatomic relations from the infection. Tables describe microorganisms that cause native valve endocarditis, the etiology of PVE, the Duke criteria for diagnosis of infective endocarditis, antimicrobial therapy for endocarditis in adults, guidelines to prevent endocarditis, and recommendations and regimens for endocarditis prophylaxis. This chapter contains 99 references.
- 10
Vaginitis and Sexually Transmitted Diseases
- JOEL T. KATZ, MD, FACPMedicine Education Office, Brigham and Woman’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFSexually transmitted infections (STIs) are among the most common causes of infectious illness worldwide, and therefore, familiarity with the recognition and management of these infectious pathogens is critical for physicians. This chapter reviews the epidemiology and transmission of STIs and describes the principles of taking a sexual history, reporting STIs, and screening for them. Urethritis, vulvovaginitis, mucopurulent cervicitis, pelvic inflammatory disease (PID), and genital ulcer disease are discussed. STIs in men who have sex with men is discussed, as is anorectal STIs in women. One figure shows a Gram stain in gonorrhea; the other shows ectopic pregnancy and tubal infertility in PID.
This review contains 2 figures, 24 tables, and 89 references.
Keywords Vulvovaginitis, sexually transmitted infection, herpes, gonorrhea, urethritis, human papilloma virus, syphilis, chlamydia, viral hepatitis, pelvic inflammatory disease
- 11
Diseases Due to Chlamydiaceae
- WALTER E STAMM, MD, FACP (DECEASED)
Purchase PDFThe Chlamydiaceae are obligate intracellular bacteria that produce a wide variety of infections in many mammalian and avian species. Three species belonging to two genera of Chlamydiaceae infect humans: Chlamydia trachomatis, Chlamydophila psittaci, and Chlamydophila pneumoniae. C. trachomatis is exclusively a human pathogen and is transmitted from person to person via sexual contact, perinatal transmission, or close contact in households. C. psittaci, in contrast, is more widely distributed in nature, producing genital, conjunctival, intestinal, or respiratory infections in many avian and mammalian species. C. pneumoniae is a fastidious organism that produces upper respiratory tract infection and pneumonitis in both children and adults. This chapter details the epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, and treatment of chlamydial diseases. Sexually transmitted diseases, perinatal infections, adult inclusion conjunctivitis, trachoma, and psittacosis are covered. The chapter also includes tables outlining comparative features of the three species and treatment of sexually transmitted diseases caused by C. trachomatis, as well as a figure illustrating the life cycle of Chlamydiaceae.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 2 tables, and 87 references.
- 12
Syphilis and the Nonvenereal Treponematoses
- MICHAEL AUGENBRAUN, MD, FACPAssociate Professor of Medicine, State University of New York Downstate Medical Center, New York, NY
Purchase PDFSyphilis is an infectious disease with complex acute and chronic manifestations that is transmitted primarily through sexual contact. The disease has been recognized for many centuries, although its origin remains unknown. This chapter’s discussion of the epidemiology of syphilis includes figures illustrating the rate of syphilis in the United States by state and county and the rate of syphilis in the United States from 1941 to 2009. The etiology, pathogenesis and disease course, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and complications of syphilis are discussed. Special cases of syphilis—in pregnant women, in children, in HIV-infected patients, and congenital syphilis—are also considered. Illustrations include a dark-field microphotograph of treponemes and photographs of a syphilitic chancre, the classic aculopapular rash from spirochetemia, condylomata lata, and a gumma. Tables outline the clinical manifestations of syphilis in adults and the treatment of syphilis. The nonvenereal treponematoses—yaws, endemic syphilis, and pinta—are a group of infections distributed throughout tropical and semitropical areas of the world. They are primarily noted to cause a variety of skin and skeletal lesions. There is little biologic difference between the treponemes that cause these conditions. The epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment of the nonvenereal treponematoses are discussed.
This review contains 7 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 60 references.
- 13
Urinary Tract Infections
- SIGAL YAWETZ, MDAssociate Physician, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA; Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFUrinary tract infection (UTI) is the most common bacterial infection, affecting women far more than men. Aerobic gram-negative bacteria are the most common uropathogens causing UTI, with Escherichia coli remaining the most predominant organism in complicated infections. UTI can result in a variety of infections and inflammations, from asymptomatic bacteriuria to typical symptomatic cystitis to acute pyelonephritis, as well as bacterial prostatitis in men. In general, antimicrobial therapy is warranted for any symptomatic infection of the urinary tract. However, new consensus treatment guidelines for uncomplicated UTI in women, set by the Infectious Diseases Society of America and the European Society for Microbiology of Infection Diseases in 2010, account for the increasing antimicrobial resistance of pathogens and focus on first-line empirical treatment regimens. To reduce the use of antibiotics, treatment and prevention of recurrent UTI may involve several strategies on varying levels of effectiveness; some of the more well-tested options include probiotics, antiseptics, and topical estrogen. Antimicrobial approaches should be reserved for women in whom these options prove to be ineffective.
This review contains 7 figures, 10 tables, and 122 references.
- 14
Gastrointestinal Tract Infections
- MARCIA B GOLDBERG, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Infectious Diseases, Harvard Medical School, and Physician, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MOLLY PARAS, MDDivision of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine
Purchase PDFGastrointestinal infections, which present with acute diarrhea, sometimes accompanied by vomiting, are an extremely common medical complaint, with an annual incidence of 0.6 illnesses per person. Transmission can occur from animals to person, from person to person, or by the ingestion of contaminated foodstuffs. In the United States, more than 90% of cases are caused by viruses, with norovirus being by far the most common. Common among bacterial causes of acute gastrointestinal infection are Salmonella, Campylobacter, Shigella, Shiga toxin–producing Escherichia coli, Vibrio, Yersinia, and Clostridium difficile. These infections are typically self-limited, but depending on the etiologic agent and characteristics of the host, antibiotic therapy may be indicated. Certain gastrointestinal infections are associated with significant complications, including reactive arthritis, Guillain-Barré syndrome, or septicemia.
This review contains 4 figures, 7 tables, and 60 references.
Key words: Campylobacter, Escherichia coli, Guillain-Barré syndrome, reactive arthritis, Shiga toxin, Shigella, Vibrio, Yersinia
- 15
Peritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
By W. Conrad Liles, MD, PhD; E Patchen Dellinger, MD
Purchase PDFPeritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
- W. CONRAD LILES, MD, PHDProfessor and Vice-Chair of Medicine, Director, Division of Infectious Diseases, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON
- E PATCHEN DELLINGER, MDProfessor and Vice-Chair, Department of Surgery, University of Washington, Chief, Division of General Surgery, University of Washington Medical Center, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFPeritonitis is a diffuse or localized inflammatory process affecting the peritoneal lining. Peritonitis has acute and chronic forms and may have a variety of causes. The etiology, epidemiology, diagnosis, and treatment of acute peritonitis caused by bacteria or fungi, including primary and secondary peritonitis, are discussed in this chapter. Primary or spontaneous peritonitis has no underlying intra-abdominal disorder as a direct cause of the infection but usually involves an underlying disorder that inhibits normal host defenses in the peritoneal cavity. Secondary peritonitis has an intra-abdominal focus that initiates the infection. Tertiary peritonitis is a relatively new term that refers to the persistence of intra-abdominal infection after the initial treatment of secondary peritonitis. Peritonitis in dialysis patients is also discussed. Intra-abdominal abscesses may present as complications of abdominal surgery, intra-abdominal conditions (e.g., diverticulitis, appendicitis, biliary tract disease, pancreatitis, perforated viscus), or penetrating abdominal trauma; as fever of obscure origin; or as dysfunction of neighboring organs (e.g., so-called lower lobe pneumonia related to a subphrenic abscess). Intra-abdominal abscesses are classified according to the anatomic location in which they occur: intraperitoneal, retroperitoneal, or visceral.
This review contains 1 figure, 12 tables, and 75 references.
Keywords: Peritonitis, spontaneous bacterial peritonitis, secondary peritonitis, intra-abdominal infection, abscess
- 16
Peritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
By W. Conrad Liles, MD, PhD; E Patchen Dellinger, MD
Purchase PDFPeritonitis and Intra-abdominal Abscesses
- W. CONRAD LILES, MD, PHDProfessor and Vice-Chair of Medicine, Director, Division of Infectious Diseases, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON
- E PATCHEN DELLINGER, MDProfessor and Vice-Chair, Department of Surgery, University of Washington, Chief, Division of General Surgery, University of Washington Medical Center, Seattle, WA
- 17
Vaginitis and Sexually Transmitted Diseases
- JOEL T. KATZ, MD, FACPMedicine Education Office, Brigham and Woman’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 18
Urinary Tract Infections
- SIGAL YAWETZ, MDAssociate Physician, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA; Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 19
Acute Viral Meningitis
- KAREN L. ROOS, MDJohn and Nancy Nelson Professor of Neurology and Professor of Neurological Surgery, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, IN
- JARED R. BROSCH, MDDeptment of Neurology, Assistant Professor of Neurology, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, IN
- 1
- Infectious Pathogens
- 1
Herpesvirus Infections
- MARTIN S. HIRSCH, MDProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe herpes group of viruses is composed of at least eight human viruses and numerous animal viruses. The human herpesviruses include herpes simplex virus types 1 and 2 (HSV-1 and HSV-2), varicella-zoster virus (VZV), cytomegalovirus (CMV), Epstein-Barr virus (EBV), and human herpesvirus types 6 (HHV-6), 7 (HHV-7), and 8 (HHV-8, also known as Kaposi sarcoma–associated herpesvirus). Human herpesviruses share the properties of latency and reactivation. Members of the group can cause productive lytic infections, in which infectious virus is produced and cells are killed, or nonproductive lytic infections, in which viral DNA persists but complete replication does not occur and cells survive. After acute lytic infections, herpesviruses often persist in a latent form for years; periodic reactivations are followed by recurrent lytic infections. Sites of latency vary: HSV and VZV persist in neural ganglion cells, EBV persists in B cells, and CMV probably remains latent in many cell types. The sites of latency for HHV-6 and HHV-7 have not been identified, although both herpesviruses have been detected in salivary glands. All human herpesviruses have a worldwide distribution. Considerable efforts are being directed toward the development of vaccines and antiviral agents that will be active against herpesviruses. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, prevention, and treatment of herpes simplex virus and varicella-zoster virus and their clinical syndromes. The descriptions of the clinical syndromes include complications and clinical features, as well as descriptions of symptoms. Tables provide information on chemotherapy for primary genital and mucocutaneous herpes infection, suppression of severe and recurring genital herpes infection, and varicella-zoster infection. Figures provide photographic illustrations of the various clinical syndromes. A sidebar about herpesvirus information on the Internet provides further detail.
This review contains 123 references, 4 tables, and 6 highly rendered figures.
- 2
Viral Zoonoses
By Lyle R Petersen, MD, MPH; Duane J. Gubler, ScD; Daniel R Kuritzkes, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFViral Zoonoses
- LYLE R PETERSEN, MD, MPHDirector, Division of Vector-Borne Diseases, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Fort Collins, CO
- DUANE J. GUBLER, SCDProfessor, Program on Emerging Infectious Diseases, DUKE-NUS Graduate Medical School, Singapore
- DANIEL R KURITZKES, MD, FACPChief, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women's Hospital; Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHuman infection by zoonotic viruses—pathogens that normally infect animals—may result in no obvious illness, a nonspecific viral syndrome, or more severe illness typically characterized by hemorrhagic fever, encephalitis, or rash arthralgia. Transmission usually occurs by direct contact with or a bite from an infected animal or arthropod. Viral families discussed include Flaviviridae, Bunyaviridae, Arenaviridae, Filoviridae, Togaviridae, Rhabdoviridae, Paramyxoviridae, and Reoviridae, with consideration given to the epidemiology, diagnosis, treatment, and prevention of specific viruses. Hemorrhagic fevers addressed include dengue fever, dengue hemorrhagic fever, yellow fever, Crimean-Congo hemorrhagic fever, and Rift Valley fever; hantavirus infections; and the Marburg and Ebola viruses. Encephalitic fever–causing viruses discussed include La Crosse; Japanese; Murray Valley; St. Louis; tick-borne; West Nile; Powassan; eastern, western, and Venezuelan equine; rabies; Nipah; Barmah Forest; and Colorado tick fever. Rash arthralgia may be caused by the Barmah Forest, Chikungunya, Mayaro, O’nyong-nyong, Ross River, and dengue viruses. Other viral zoonoses considered include monkey B virus, ruminant and primate poxvirus, Newcastle, and foot-and-mouth diseases, as well as vesicular stomatitis virus infection. A diagram depicts the generalized arbovirus maintenance cycle. Tables list the important viral zoonoses that cause human disease, the principal hantaviruses that cause human disease, the arenaviruses that cause significant human illness, and the viral zoonoses endemic in the United States.
This review contains 1 figure, 32 tables, and 80 references.
Key words: dengue, diagnosis, encephalitis, epidemic, epidemiology, infection, rabies, virus, vaccine
- 3
HIV and AIDS
- DANIEL R. KURITZKES, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFIn the quarter-century since the first report of AIDS in the United States, HIV infection has spread throughout the population, disproportionately affecting black women, Hispanic women, and men who have sex with men. The prognosis for persons infected with HIV has improved dramatically with the introduction and evolution of highly active antiretroviral therapy (HAART). The underlying principle of HAART is that a combination of potent antiretrovirals, each of which requires different mutations in the HIV genome for resistance to develop, can suppress replication sufficiently to prevent mutation and the emergence of resistance. The prospect that currently available antiretroviral therapy (ART) regimens may suppress HIV replication indefinitely provides the hope that infected patients will have life expectancies similar to those of age-matched uninfected individuals. For these patients, HIV care has shifted from an emphasis on treatment and prevention of the complications of HIV disease itself to a focus on suppression of HIV replication and management of short- and long-term complications of HIV, ART toxicities, and aging. This chapter describes the epidemiology, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, prevention, diagnosis, and management of acute and chronic HIV infection and AIDS, with figures and tables illustrating each chapter section.
This review contains 9 figures, 32 tables, and 257 references - 4
Infections Due to Gram-positive Cocci
- DENNIS L. STEVENS, PHD, MD, FACP, FIDSAChief Infectious Diseases, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Boise, ID, Professor of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFThe gram-positive cocci that produce infection include pneumococci, group A streptococci, non?group A streptococci (including groups B, C, D, G, and nongroupable streptococci), anaerobic streptococci, enterococci, and staphylococci. This chapter discusses the pathogenesis, diagnosis, and treatment of infections associated with each of these gram-positive cocci, including methicillin-resistant Staphylococcus aureus (MRSA). The clinical infections caused by each of these organisms are reviewed. Tables describe the incidence of pneumococcal disease according to age and underlying disease, factors associated with adverse outcomes in pneumococcal pneumonia; medically important streptococci and enterococci; antibiotic treatment for penicillin-resistant Streptococcus pneumoniae, enterococcal infections, and staphylococcal infections; laboratory tests for streptococcal pharyngitis; clinical manifestations and antibiotic treatment for staphylococcal toxic-shock syndrome (TSS); revised Jones criteria for the diagnosis of acute rheumatic fever, and drug treatment of acute rheumatic fever.
This review contains 105 references.
- 5
Infections Due to Escherichia Coli and Other Enteric Gram-negative Bacilli
By Allison Mah, MD, FRCPC; Inna Sekirov, MD, PhD; Theodore S Steiner, MD, FRCPC
Purchase PDFInfections Due to Escherichia Coli and Other Enteric Gram-negative Bacilli
- ALLISON MAH, MD, FRCPCPostgraduate Year 6, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Internal Medicine, University of British Columbia, Vancouver General Hospital, Vancouver, BC
- INNA SEKIROV, MD, PHDPostgraduate Year 5, Division of Medical Microbiology, Department of Pathology and Laboratory Medicine, University of British Columbia, Vancouver General Hospital , Vancouver, BC
- THEODORE S STEINER, MD, FRCPCProfessor and Associate Head, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Internal Medicine, Associate Member, Department of Microbiology and Immunology, University of British Columbia , Vancouver General Hospital , Vancouver, BC
Purchase PDFThis review describes infections caused by Escherichia coli and related members of the family Enterobacteriaceae, excluding other genera that principally cause enteric infections. Infections caused by Salmonella, Shigella, and Yersinia are described in the review “Gastrointestinal Tract Infections," found elsewhere in this publication. The purpose of this review is to examine the specific epidemiology, clinical manifestations, and treatment of individual members of the Enterobacteriaceae. The emerging concern of antimicrobial resistance amongst enteric gram-negative organisms and the approach to treatment in the setting of infection with these resistant organisms are discussed in the review “Antimicrobial Resistance in Enteric Gram-Negative Organisms,” found elsewhere in this publication. Figures illustrate the mechanisms of antimicrobial resistance in Enterobacteriaceae. A table lists the clinical, epidemiologic, pathogenetic, and therapeutic aspects of infection with various pathotypes of Escherichia coli.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 1 table, and 79 references.
- 6
Infections Due to Brucella, Francisella, Yersinia Pestis, and Bartonella
By W. Conrad Liles, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFInfections Due to Brucella, Francisella, Yersinia Pestis, and Bartonella
- W. CONRAD LILES, MD, PHDProfessor and Vice-Chair of Medicine, Director, Division of Infectious Diseases, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON
Purchase PDFBrucellosis, tularemia, (bubonic) plague, and bartonellosis are zoonoses (i.e., infectious diseases that can be transmitted from animals to humans) caused by gram-negative bacilli. The causative agents of these diseases are Brucella species, Francisella tularensis, Yersinia pestis, and Bartonella species, respectively. Infected arthropods, such as ticks or fleas, can serve as vectors for the transmission of tularemia, (bubonic) plague, and bartonellosis. In general, the diagnosis of these zoonoses requires the physician to consider the clinical presentation (which is not always distinctive) in light of the epidemiology of these diseases. This chapter contains discussions of epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis and differential diagnosis, treatment, complications, and prognosis of brucellosis, tularemia, plague, and Bartonella infections (including trench fever, cat-scratch disease, and bacillary angiomatosis). Also included are tables outlining diagnosis and treatment and a figure showing the distribution of tularemia in the United States from 1990 to 2000.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 2 tables, and 81 references.
- 7
Anaerobic Infections
- ITZHAK BROOK, MDProfessor of Pediatrics at Georgetown University, Washington, DC.
- ELLIE JC GOLDSTEIN, MD, FIDSA, FSHEAClinical Professor of Medicine at the David Geffen School of Medicine, UCLA; Director of the R. M. Alden Research Laboratory
Purchase PDFAnaerobes are the most predominant components of the bacterial flora of normal human skin and mucous membranes and are a frequent cause of endogenous bacterial infections. Anaerobic infections can occur in all body locations: the central nervous system, oral cavity, head and neck, chest, abdomen, pelvis, skin, and soft tissues. Treatment of anaerobic infection is complicated by the slow growth of anaerobes in culture, by their polymicrobial nature, and by their growing resistance to antimicrobials. Antimicrobial therapy is frequently the only form of therapy needed, whereas in some patients it is an important adjunct to drainage and surgery. Because anaerobes are generally isolated mixed with aerobes, the antimicrobial chosen should provide for adequate coverage of both. The most effective antimicrobials against anaerobes are metronidazole, the carbapenems (imipenem, meropenem, doripenem, ertapenem), chloramphenicol, the combination of a penicillin and a β-lactamase inhibitors (ampicillin or ticarcillin plus clavulanate, amoxicillin plus sulbactam, piperacillin plus tazobactam), tigecycline, cefoxitin, and clindamycin.
This review contains 4 figures, 9 tables, and 150 references.
Key words: anaerobic bacteria, antibiotics, antimicrobial resistance, Bacteroides fragilis, Clostridium spp, Fusobacterium spp, infection, Peptostreptococcus spp
- 8
Lyme Disease and Other Spirochetal Zoonoses
By David C Tompkins, MD; Benjamin J Luft, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFLyme Disease and Other Spirochetal Zoonoses
- DAVID C TOMPKINS, MDVice Chairman, Department of Medicine, Head, Division of Infectious Diseases, Lutheran Medical Center, Brooklyn, NY
- BENJAMIN J LUFT, MD, FACPEdmund D. Pellegrino Professor, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine, SUNY at Stony Brook, Stony Brook, NY
Purchase PDFThis review discusses the epidemiology, pathology, clinical features, laboratory findings, and treatment for Lyme disease, leptospirosis, relapsing fever, and rat-bite fever. Lyme disease is a tick-borne illness caused by the spirochete Borrelia burgdorferi. Lyme disease is a progressive infectious disease with a wide array of clinical manifestations. In most persons, the initial sign of infection is the development of erythema migrans. In general, three stages of the illness can be distinguished: early localized disease, early disseminated disease, and persisting late disease. A photograph shows an erythema migrans lesion, and an algorithm for diagnosis of Lyme disease is provided. A table lists the antibiotic regimens used for the different stages and manifestations of Lyme disease. Leptospirosis is a worldwide zoonosis caused by spirochetes from the genus Leptospira; these spirochetes are shown in a photomicrograph. The disease is acquired by contact with infected animals or exposure to contaminated soil or freshwater and can cause illness ranging from asymptomatic infection to severe multisystem disease with a significant mortality. Relapsing fever is an acute louse-borne or tick-borne infection caused by spirochetes of the genus Borrelia and is characterized by recurrent febrile episodes separated by asymptomatic intervals. Rat-bite fever is infection caused by Streptobacillus moniliformis in the United States and Europe or by Spirillum minus in Asia.
This review 6 figures, 13 tables, and 95 references.
Keywords: Spirochete, borreliosis, tick, Lyme disease, rat bite fever, leptospirosis, zoonosis, target rash, relapsing fever, louse
- 9
Infections Due to Rickettsia and Related Organisms
- LUCAS S BLANTON, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Internal Medicine, The University of Texas Medical Branch, Galveston, TX
Purchase PDFInfections caused by organisms of the genus Rickettsia, Orientia, Ehrlichia, Anaplasma, and Coxiella occur throughout the world and are important, yet often overlooked, causes of febrile illness. They are transmitted by ticks, lice, mites, fleas, and, in the case of Coxiella, infected aerosols. Some are considered emerging and reemerging infectious diseases, as exemplified by the emergence of Rocky Mountain spotted fever in the American Southwest and Mexico; the reemergence of murine typhus in parts of Texas; and the discovery of new pathogens, such as Ehrlichia muris–like agent. Manifestations are usually of an acute undifferentiated febrile illness, with associated headache, malaise, myalgias, and varying frequency of rash. Since confirmation of diagnosis is often retrospective, requiring the dynamic change in antibody titers from acute and convalescent phase sera, clinical recognition for empirical treatment is imperative. Indeed, timely treatment is effective at abating symptoms and preventing complications. This review discusses important aspects of the epidemiology, clinical manifestations, diagnostic methods, and treatment of infections caused by Rickettsia and related organisms.
This review contains 5 figures, 9 tables, and 50 references.
Key words: anaplasmosis, ehrlichiosis, Q fever, Rocky Mountain spotted fever, scrub typhus, spotted fever group rickettsioses, typhus group rickettsioses
- 10
Mycoplasma Pneumoniae Infections
By T. Prescott Atkinson, M.D., Ph.D; William M. Geisler, M.D., M.P.H.; Ken B. Waites, M.D., F(AAM)
Purchase PDFMycoplasma Pneumoniae Infections
- T. PRESCOTT ATKINSON, M.D., PH.DProfessor and Director Division of Pediatric Allergy and Immunology Department of Pediatrics University of Alabama at Birmingham
- WILLIAM M. GEISLER, M.D., M.P.H.Professor of Medicine Division of Infectious Diseases Department of Medicine University of Alabama at Birmingham
- KEN B. WAITES, M.D., F(AAM)Professor, Department of Pathology University of Alabama at Birmingham
Purchase PDFThe class Mollicutes includes organisms in the genera Mycoplasma and Ureaplasma. They are prokaryotes that lack a cell wall, and are among the smallest known living organisms in both cellular dimensions and genome sizes. At least 17 different species inhabit the mucosae of the respiratory and urogenital tracts of humans, several of which are pathogenic in a variety of clinical illnesses. Their fastidious nature and often slow growth in vitro have hampered understanding of their roles as agents of human disease. Mycoplasma pneumoniae is an important cause of community acquired respiratory infections that occur endemically and epidemically worldwide in persons of all ages and ranges in severity from mild to life-threatening. Molecular-based laboratory techniques have resulted in increased understanding of the pathogenesis and epidemiology M. pneumoniae infections as well as improved means for laboratory detection. Resistance of M. pneumoniae to macrolide antimicrobials has emerged worldwide over the past several years, complicating treatment strategies.
This review contains 2 figures, 1 table and 58 references
Key Words: Antimicrobial Resistance, Ciliated respiratory epithelium, Community Acquired Pneumonia, Cytadherence, Mycoplasma pneumoniae, Reinfections
- 11
Tuberculosis
By Jonathan B. Parr, MD, MPH; Michael K Leonard Jr, MD; Henry M Blumberg, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFTuberculosis
- JONATHAN B. PARR, MD, MPHClinical Instructor, Division of Global Health Equity, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- MICHAEL K LEONARD JR, MDID Consultants, Charlotte, NC
- HENRY M BLUMBERG, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Epidemiology, and Global Health, Division of Infectious Diseases, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
Purchase PDFTuberculosis (TB) is a bacterial disease caused by Mycobacterium tuberculosis, a relatively slow-growing, aerobic, acid-fast bacillus (AFB). Classically, TB is a pulmonary disease, but disseminated and extrapulmonary manifestations may also occur, especially in immunocompromised persons. TB is transmitted person to person and is usually contracted by inhalation of M. tuberculosis droplet nuclei generated by an infectious person. If infection occurs after M. tuberculosis enters the body, the host’s cell-mediated immunity may contain the organism but not eradicate all the bacilli, resulting in latent tuberculosis infection (LTBI). M. tuberculosis can remain dormant and persist (e.g., within macrophages); persons with LTBI are at risk for reactivation and development of active TB.
This review contains 5 figures, 7 tables, and 75 references.
Key Words: tuberculosis, pulmonary tuberculosis, extrapulmonary tuberculosis, tuberculosis in hiv-infected patients
- 12
Infections Due to Mycobacterium Leprae and Nontuberculous Mycobacteria
By Michael K Leonard Jr, MD; Henry M Blumberg, MD, FACP; Carlos Franco-Paredes, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFInfections Due to Mycobacterium Leprae and Nontuberculous Mycobacteria
- MICHAEL K LEONARD JR, MDID Consultants, Charlotte, NC
- HENRY M BLUMBERG, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Epidemiology, and Global Health, Division of Infectious Diseases, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- CARLOS FRANCO-PAREDES, MD, MPHDirector, Clinical and Translational Research Training Programs
Purchase PDFMycobacterium leprae infection (i.e., leprosy) is a disease that has been recognized—and often misunderstood—since ancient times. The emergence of HIV/AIDS and the development of newer culture methodologies and molecular diagnostic tools have brought about increased interest in the epidemiology, diagnosis, and treatment of human infections from nontuberculous mycobacteria (NTM). More than 140 species of NTM have been identified; approximately 50 of these may be pathogenic for humans, causing a broad spectrum of disease. This chapter covers both M. leprae and selected NTM organisms, including M. avium complex; M. kansasii; M. marinum; and rapidly growing mycobacteria such as M. chelonae, M. fortuitum, and M. abscessus. The section on leprosy encompasses subsections on diagnosis, clinical manifestations and classification, laboratory studies, treatment, and leprosy reactions. Treatments for nontuberculous mycobacteria infections are also covered. Figures include a natural history of leprosy, tuberculoid leprosy, lepromatous leprosy, and various forms of borderline leprosy, as well as type 1 and type 2 leprosy reaction. Tables include the Ridley-Jopling classification of leprosy, recommendations for treatment of leprosy, clinical characteristics and treatment of leprosy, major clinical syndromes associated with nontuberculous mycobacterial infections, diagnosing nontuberculous mycobacterial lung disease, a listing of slow and rapidly growing mycobacteria that are human pathogens, plus treatment regimens for selected nontuberculous mycobacterial infections in adults.
This review contains 59 references.
- 13
Mycotic Infections
- CAROL A KAUFFMAN, MD, FACPChief, Infectious Diseases Section, Veterans Affairs Ann Arbor Healthcare System, Professor, Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School, Ann Arbor, Michigan
Purchase PDFEndemic mycoses are caused by fungi that share several important characteristics but differ greatly in other respects. They include histoplasmosis, blastomycosis, coccidioidomycosis, and sporotrichosis. Discussions on their epidemiology, pathogenesis, clinical presentation, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis are included. A section on antifungal therapy is included, discussing the use of azoles and amphotericin B. Figures show photomicrographs of biopsy samples from patients with histoplasmosis, blastomycosis, and coccidioidomycosis. Tables list selected drugs that may interact with azoles to change serum levels and information on the administration of amphotericin B for treatment of endemic mycoses.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 71 references.
- 14
Mycotic Infections in the Compromised Host
- JO-ANNE H. YOUNG, MD, FACPProfessor, Division of Infectious Disease and International Medicine, Department of Medicine, Executive Medical Director, Program in Adult Transplant Infectious Disease, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
Purchase PDFOpportunistic fungal infections have become increasingly important over the past several decades, paradoxically because advances in medical practice have improved the survival of debilitated and immunosuppressed patients. The mycotic infections that appear in the compromised host are candidiasis, cryptococcosis, pneumocystosis, aspergillosis, zygomycosis, and fusariosis. The aspergillosis section addresses allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis and invasive aspergillosis separately. Timely diagnosis of opportunistic fungal infection depends on understanding host characteristics, environmental risk factors, clinical presentation, and diagnostic testing, which each section covers. There is also a section on infection by dematiaceous fungi. Figures illustrate the cysts of Pneumocystis and the bimodal distribution of Aspergillus infection after bone marrow transplantation. Tables describe the desensitization of adult patients with sulfa allergy; the stages of allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis; the treatment of infections caused by Candida, Cryptococcus, Aspergillus, and Fusarium species; and the treatment and prophylaxis of Pneumocystis jiroveci pneumonia.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 108 references.
- 15
Infections Due to Salmonella
- MARCIA B GOLDBERG, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Infectious Diseases, Harvard Medical School, and Physician, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MOLLY PARAS, MDDivision of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine
Purchase PDFSalmonella, which is acquired via ingestion, is classified as nontyphoidal or typhoidal disease. Typhoidal disease is caused by S typhi or S paratyphi,and nontyphoidal disease is caused by all other serovars. Salmonella causes a range of infectious syndromes that include gastroenteritis, bacteremia, endovascular infections, and enteric fever. For immunocompromised hosts or patients with extraintestinal disease, antibiotic therapy should be provided. Effective agents often include third-generation cephalosporins and fluoroquinolones, although rates of resistance of Salmonella isolates to many antibiotics are increasing. A carrier state exists whereby patients may shed bacteria despite being asymptomatic. To eradicate the carrier state, longer courses of antibiotics and, in rare instances, surgical removal of the reservoir, which is most commonly the gallbladder, may be required.
This review contains 2 figures, 4 tables, and 24 references.
Key Words: Salmonella, typhoidal, non-typhoidal, enteric fever, endovascular infection, gastroenteritis, carrier, food-borne, antibiotic resistance
- 16
Protozoan Infections
- WESLEY C VAN VOORHIS, MD, PHD, FACPProfessor of Medicine and Adjunct Professor of Pathobiology, Head Allergy and Infections Diseases Division, Department of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Attending Physician, Infectious Diseases & Tropical Medicine Clinic, University of Washington Medical Center, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFProtozoans cause a number of important infectious diseases. This chapter discusses malaria, babesiosis, toxoplasmosis, trichomoniasis, leishmaniasis, and trypanosomiasis; in addition, the chapter describes the intestinal protozoan infections caused by Giardia lamblia; Dientamoeba fragilis; Entamoeba histolytica; Blastocystis hominis; the coccidial organisms Cystoisospora belli, Cryptosporidium, and Cyclospora cayetanensis; Balantidium coli; and microsporidia. Figures illustrate the taxonomy of pathogenic protozoans; the life cycle of malaria; identification of species of malaria based on forms seen on blood smears; Babesia parasites in erythrocytes; the life cycle, tachyzoites, and tissue cysts ofToxoplasma gondii; G. lamblia trophozoites and cysts; a D. fragilis trophozoite; E. histolytica cyst and trophozoite forms; Entamoeba coli; clinical involvement in amebiasis; B. hominis; cysts of Cryptosporidium, Cyclospora, and Cystoisospora; Acanthamoeba polyphaga cyst and histopathologic features; histopathology of Naeglaria meningoencephalitis;Leishmania (Viannia) braziliensis cutaneous infection; amastigotes of Old World leishmaniasis; the insect vector for Chagas disease; Romaña sign in acute Chagas disease;Trypanosoma cruzi, and T. brucei. Tables list the differentiating features of Plasmodium species that cause malaria; dosages, principal side effects, and main limitations of antimalarial drugs; and forms of New World leishmaniasis. A sidebar provides Internet links on protozoan infection.
This review contains 22 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 121 references.
- 17
Helminthic Infections
- WESLEY C VAN VOORHIS, MD, PHD, FACPProfessor of Medicine and Adjunct Professor of Pathobiology, Head Allergy and Infections Diseases Division, Department of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Attending Physician, Infectious Diseases & Tropical Medicine Clinic, University of Washington Medical Center, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFHelminthic parasites are multicellular worms that possess differentiated organ systems. They (with a few exceptions) do not replicate in the human host, and they tend to elicit eosinophilia within the tissues and blood of infected humans. Helminthic parasites include nematodes (roundworms), cestodes (tapeworms), and trematodes (flukes). The major intestinal nematodes are roundworm, pinworm, hookworm, whipworm, and Strongyloides stercoralis. Trichinellosis is caused by five species of the nematode Trichinella and develops after ingestion of infected meat, usually pork or the meat of certain carnivores. Nematode infections of the major tissue are anisakiasis, visceral larva migrans,Angiostrongylus cantonensis infection, mammomonogamosis (syngamosis), gnathostomiasis, dracunculiasis, and filariasis. Trematode and cestode infections are also described in this chapter, including infections by fish, beef, and pork tapeworms, as well as cysticercosis. Disease from Paragonimus, Clonorchis, Fasciola, Fasciolopsis, and Schistosoma is covered. Echinococcus infection and hydatid cyst disease are discussed. Tables describe intestinal nematode infection and treatment and filarial parasites of humans. Figures illustrate a variety of helminthic parasites and their life cycles.
This review contains 136 references.
- 18
Infections Due to Staphylococci
By Dennis L. Stevens, PhD, MD, FACP, FIDSA; Sarah E Hobdey, PhD
Purchase PDFInfections Due to Staphylococci
- DENNIS L. STEVENS, PHD, MD, FACP, FIDSAChief Infectious Diseases, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Boise, ID, Professor of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- SARAH E HOBDEY, PHDResearch Scientist, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Boise, ID
Purchase PDFStaphylococci are nonsporulating, nonmotile, gram-positive cocci that have an average diameter of 1 µm. Microscopically, staphylococci tend to be larger and rounder than streptococci. Because cell division occurs on three planes, these organisms are typically found in grapelike clusters and tetrads, as well as in pairs and sometimes in short chains. Staphylococci are very hardy organisms and can withstand much more physical and chemical stress than pneumococci and streptococci. Because staphylococci are facultative anaerobes, they will grow in the presence or absence of oxygen. Staphylococci are catalase positive. Of the species of staphylococci, Staphylococcus aureus is by far the most important human pathogen. This review covers the epidemiology and pathogenesis of S. aureus, clinical infections associated with S. aureus, treatment of staphylococcal infections, and staphylococcal toxic shock syndrome. Clinically important coagulase-negative staphylococci such as S. epidermidis and S. saprophyticus are also discussed. Tables list antibiotic treatment for staphylococcal infections, clinical manifestations of staphylococcal toxic shock syndrome, and antibiotic treatment for staphylococcal toxic shock syndrome.
This review contains 3 figures, 6 tables, and 54 references.
Key words: Staphylococcus aureus;Staphylococcal infections;Coagulase-negative staphylococci; Skin and soft tissue infections; S. aureus bacteremia; MRSA; Methicillin-resistant S. aureus; Toxic shock syndrome
- 19
Infections Due to Streptococcus Pneumoniae
By Dennis L. Stevens, PhD, MD, FACP, FIDSA; Sarah E Hobdey, PhD
Purchase PDFInfections Due to Streptococcus Pneumoniae
- DENNIS L. STEVENS, PHD, MD, FACP, FIDSAChief Infectious Diseases, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Boise, ID, Professor of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- SARAH E HOBDEY, PHDResearch Scientist, Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Boise, ID
Purchase PDFPneumococci, or Streptococcus pneumoniae, are gram-positive, lancet-shaped diplococci but may also grow in short chains. The polysaccharide polymer that forms the outer capsule of S pneumoniae is chemically and antigenically unique and is crucial to virulence. There are at least 90 distinct serotypes. The capsule allows the bacteria to resist phagocytosis by leukocytes unless the organisms have been opsonized by antibody or serum complement components. Certain pneumococcal serotypes, such as the heavily encapsulated type 3 pneumococcus, are particularly virulent. In fact, only 23 serotypes account for 80% of bacteremic pneumococcal infections in the United States; capsular polysaccharides from these 23 serotypes are incorporated into the polyvalent polysaccharide pneumococcal vaccine (PPSV23), which has been available since 1983. This review covers the epidemiology and pathogenesis of pneumococcal infections, clinical pneumococcal infections, and prevention of pneumococcal infections. Adverse outcomes in pneumococcal pneumonia, antibiotic treatment for penicillin-resistant S pneumoniae, and Centers for Disease Control and Prevention child and adolescent immunization schedules are discussed.
This review contains 1 figure, 6 tables, and 41 references.
Key words: bacterial pneumonia, PCV13, penicillin-resistant Streptococcus pneumoniae, pneumococcal pneumonia, pneumococcus, PPSV23, pneumonia vaccine, Streptococcus pneumoniae
- 20
Infections Due to Candida, Cryptococcus, Other Yeasts, and Pneumocystis
By Jo-Anne H. Young, MD, FACP; Jaime S Green, MD
Purchase PDFInfections Due to Candida, Cryptococcus, Other Yeasts, and Pneumocystis
- JO-ANNE H. YOUNG, MD, FACPProfessor, Division of Infectious Disease and International Medicine, Department of Medicine, Executive Medical Director, Program in Adult Transplant Infectious Disease, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
- JAIME S GREEN, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Infectious Disease and International Medicine, Department of Medicine, Assistant Director, Program in Adult Transplant Infectious Disease, University of Minnesota, Minneapolis, MN
Purchase PDFYeast-based fungal infections have become increasingly important over several decades, paradoxically because advances in medical practice have allowed patients with chronic medical conditions to live longer and have more productive lives. Many of these yeast infections are superficial in nature, such as thrush and candidal vaginitis among persons treated with antibiotics or with short courses of steroids. A minority of the yeast infections are associated with significant morbidity and mortality, generally among debilitated or otherwise immunosuppressed patients who have survived major surgeries or extensive chemotherapy regimens. These opportunistic yeast pathogens may originate as human commensals (e.g., Candida albicans) or have an environmental reservoir (e.g., Cryptococcus neoformans). Opportunistic Pneumocystis infections are inhaled. Knowledge of the host characteristics associated with specific infections will allow high suspicion for the type of yeast infection that may be occurring. Standard methods for making a diagnosis have included antigen testing, culture, and cytology. Newer methods for making the diagnosis include nucleic acid testing and nanotechnology. There are three general classes of antifungal agents. Treatment with antifungal agents for the most serious of these infections requires source control for cure. In addition, correction of predisposing conditions will also assist with prevention of recurrence. Immunocompromised patients require either prophylaxis or early empirical treatment during high-risk periods.
This review contains 1 figure, 4 tables, and 74 references.
Key words: Candida, Candidiasis, Cryptococcus, Malassezia, Trichosporon, Pneumocystis
- 21
HIV Prevention
- JENNIFER A JOHNSON, MDAssociate Physician, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital; Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- DANIEL R KURITZKES, MD, FACPChief, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women's Hospital; Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAlthough risk reduction counseling and barrier protection remain important strategies for prevention of HIV acquisition and other sexually transmitted infections, there have been significant advances in medication-based prevention strategies in recent years following advances in HIV treatment. There are now many safe and highly effective methods for HIV prevention, components of a prevention toolkit that clinicians may choose from or use in combination as appropriate for each patient. Treatment of HIV-infected individuals to achieve virologic suppression prevents transmission to others in nearly all cases. Treatment of HIV-infected pregnant women with combination antiretroviral therapy also prevents transmission to the infant in nearly all cases. Treating HIV-uninfected individuals with antiretroviral agents either before or after possible exposure has also been shown to be effective in significantly reducing the risk of HIV acquisition. Clinicians should use these effective tools to compose an HIV prevention strategy that is individualized to each patient.
This review contains 1 figure, and 34 references.
Key words: circumcision, dolutegravir, emtricitabine, needle exchange, preexposure prophylaxis, prevention of mother-to-child transmission, postexposure prophylaxis, raltegravir, tenofovir, treatment as prevention
- 22
Lyme Disease and Other Spirochetal Zoonoses
By David C Tompkins, MD; Benjamin J Luft, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFLyme Disease and Other Spirochetal Zoonoses
- DAVID C TOMPKINS, MDVice Chairman, Department of Medicine, Head, Division of Infectious Diseases, Lutheran Medical Center, Brooklyn, NY
- BENJAMIN J LUFT, MD, FACPEdmund D. Pellegrino Professor, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine, SUNY at Stony Brook, Stony Brook, NY
- 23
Viral Zoonoses
By Lyle R Petersen, MD, MPH; Duane J. Gubler, ScD; Daniel R Kuritzkes, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFViral Zoonoses
- LYLE R PETERSEN, MD, MPHDirector, Division of Vector-Borne Diseases, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, Fort Collins, CO
- DUANE J. GUBLER, SCDProfessor, Program on Emerging Infectious Diseases, DUKE-NUS Graduate Medical School, Singapore
- DANIEL R KURITZKES, MD, FACPChief, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women's Hospital; Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 24
Infections Due to Clostridium Difficile
By Marcia B Goldberg, MD; Molly Paras, MD; K.C Coffey, M. D
Purchase PDFInfections Due to Clostridium Difficile
- MARCIA B GOLDBERG, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Infectious Diseases, Harvard Medical School, and Physician, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MOLLY PARAS, MDDivision of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine
- K.C COFFEY, M. D
Purchase PDFClostridium difficile is one of the most common causes of healthcare associated infection in the United States. Despite significant attention and resources, national rates increased dramatically between 2000-2011 and have only started to decline in the last five years.. The Infectious Diseases Society of America (IDSA) and Society for Healthcare Epidemiology of America (SHEA) updated their clinical practice guidelines on the diagnosis and management of C. difficile disease in 2017. The recommended changes in therapeutic guidelines, recommendations for pediatric patient populations, and overview of available diagnostics are described herein. Additionally, this review discusses the changing epidemiology, examines the pathophysiology of the disease process, and outlines current infection control and prevention strategies.
This review has 6 figures, 9 tables and 53 references.
Key Words: Clostridium difficile, diarrhea, colitis, antibiotics, spores, nosocomial, hospital
- 25
- 1
- Special Hosts and Exposures
- 1
Fever in Returning Travelers
- MARY E WILSON, MDVisiting Professor of Epidemiology and Biostatistics, School of Medicine, University of California, San Francisco, CA; Adjunct Professor of Global Health and Population, Harvard T.H. Chan School of Public Health, Boston, MA
- LIN H CHEN, MDDirector, Travel Medicine Center, Mount Auburn Hospital, Cambridge, MA; Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFFevers in individuals with recent tropical travel require rapid assessment because many of the potential causes are treatable and/or have important public health implications. History and clinical findings are essential to identify the likely causes of the fever and, thus, recognize those that require urgent intervention.This review outlines obtaining the travel history, incubation periods, undifferentiated fever, and evaluation based on syndromes. Figures show the most common diagnoses and range of incubation periods; the top specific diagnoses in febrile returned travelers by geographic region; countries/areas at risk for dengue transmission; images of Aedes aegypti and Aedes albopictus, vectors of dengue virus and chikungunya virus; countries and territories where chikungunya cases have been reported (as of March 10, 2015), excluding where imported cases only are documented; cases of Ebola virus disease in Africa, 1976–2015, by species and size; and an algorithm for approach to workup. Tables list Web sites and resources for travel medicine; the epidemiology of fever in travelers; key areas of exposure queries in returned travelers; obtaining exposure history in febrile returned travelers; estimated protective effect of previous vaccination; common posttravel infections, by incubation period; guiding principles for care of febrile patients returning from tropical travel; common clinical findings and associated infections; key cannot-miss diagnoses with fever; malaria antigens; fever syndromes, diagnoses, and diagnostic tests to be considered; and major hemorrhagic fevers and their distribution based on world regions.
This review contains 7 highly rendered figures, 12 tables, and 151 references.
- 2
Infections in Cancer Patients
- SARAH P. HAMMOND, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- GOWRI SATYANARAYANA, MDAssistant Professor of Internal Medicine, Division of Infectious Diseases, Department of Medicine, Vanderbilt University, Nashville, TN
Purchase PDFInfection is a common complication in cancer patients who receive cytotoxic chemotherapy and other targeted therapies. A clear understanding of the underlying host risk factors, the immunologic effects of specific cancer therapies, and the anatomic location of the tumor and its impact on surrounding structures helps predict the types of infection to which the host is most vulnerable. This review covers fever in the setting of neutropenia, infection risk with biological and targeted cancer therapy, and infections in patients with solid tumors. Figures show risk for fever and neutropenia, and empirical antibiotic algorithm for initial management of febrile neutropenia in patients at high risk for complications, radiographic findings associated with invasive fungal disease, a schematic of hepatitis B virus infection and reactivation after anti-CD20 therapy, and management of nonpurulent cellulitis in cancer patients. Tables list the Multinational Association of Supportive Care in Cancer (MASCC) risk index score, the Clinical Index of Stable Febrile Neutropenia (CISNE) scoring system, common bacterial pathogens that cause infection in neutropenic patients, assessment of specific signs and symptoms during febrile neutropenia, empirical antibiotic management of febrile neutropenia, criteria for addition of vancomycin to empirical antibiotic regimen for febrile neutropenia, and biological and targeted agents commonly used to treat hematologic malignancy and associated infections.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 107 references
- 1
- 1
- Interdisciplinary Medicine
- 1
Adult Preventive Health Care
- JENNIFER S HAAS, MD, MSCProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFOver the past quarter century, prevention has become a major activity in primary care. During a typical day, primary care clinicians spend much of their time managing asymptomatic conditions in which the main goal is to prevent death or complications (e.g., hypertension, hyperlipidemia, osteoporosis). This chapter focuses primarily on preventive screening recommendations from the United States Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF). The rationale and evolution of preventive care guidelines are discussed. Advantages and disadvantages of cervical, colorectal, breast, prostate, ovarian and lung cancer screening are explained, along with recommendations regarding behavioral counseling, especially for smoking cessation and alcohol use. Graphs are included. Tables delineate major causes of death in the United States, criteria for evaluating a screening program, sample board examination questions about screening, government-sponsored preventive guidelines programs, the USPSTF grading system, strongly recommended noncancer preventive services in adults, the recommended adult immunization schedule, recommended and strongly recommended measures for cancer prevention, recommended preventive noncancer screening measures, and selected recommendations for counseling and patient education.
This review contains 5 figures, 10 tables, and 77 references.
- 2
Diet
- ELIZABETH G NABEL, MD, FACPPresident, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAn unhealthy diet is a major risk factor for chronic diseases such as cardiovascular diseases, cancer, diabetes, and conditions related to obesity. In the 20th century, the average American diet shifted from one based on fresh, minimally processed vegetable foods to one based on animal products and highly refined, processed foods, leading to an increased consumption of calories, fat, cholesterol, refined sugar, animal protein, sodium, and alcohol and far less fiber and starch than was healthful. As a result, more than one third of US adults are obese, with an estimated medical cost of $147 billion. Physicians have an important role in educating patients about healthful nutrition and in providing dietary guidelines. This module discusses the role of energy in weight loss; the structure of fat and cholesterol, their effects on blood lipid levels and cardiovascular risk, and related dietary recommendations; carbohydrates; dietary fiber; proteins; vitamin and mineral consumption; water and food consumption; and the relationship between diet and health. Tables review the principles of a healthy diet; recommended daily intake of fat and other nutrients; types of dietary fiber and representative food sources; types of vitamins; essential minerals and trace elements; and dietary guidelines for healthy people. Figures include a graph showing the percentage of adults who are healthy weight, overweight, and obese and the structure of fat and cholesterol.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 37 references.
- 3
Exercise
- ELIZABETH G NABEL, MD, FACPPresident, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFNumerous observational studies have demonstrated an inverse relationship between physical activity and risk of many chronic illnesses. The protective effect of exercise is strongest against coronary artery disease, hypertension, stroke, type 2 diabetes mellitus, obesity, anxiety, depression, osteoporosis, and cancers of the colon and breast. Despite these proven benefits, only 25% of adults in the United States exercise at recommended levels. Globally, physical inactivity is the fourth leading risk factor for death, followed by overweight and obesity. This module describes exercise physiology, including cardiovascular response to dynamic exercise, pulmonary response, musculoskeletal response, metabolic effects, effects on blood lipid levels, hematologic effects, effects on vascular inflammation, effects on body fluids, and psychological effects. Exercise and the elderly and the relationship between exercise and longevity are reviewed. Prescribing exercise and complications of exercise are also discussed. Tables describe the categories of patients screened for possible coronary artery disease, exercise time required to consume 2,000 kcal, and exercise advice for patients. Figures include a graph showing the number of adults who met the federal physical activity guidelines criteria, the top 10 global risk factors for death in 2004, the process of providing energy for the muscle, and trends in physician prescriptions for exercise.
This module contains 4 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, 35 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 4
Nutritional Support
By Rindi Uhlich, MD; Parker Hu, MD; Patrick L Bosarge, MD, FACS, FCCM
Purchase PDFNutritional Support
- RINDI UHLICH, MDResident, General Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- PARKER HU, MDFellow, Surgery Critical Care, Division of Acute Care Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- PATRICK L BOSARGE, MD, FACS, FCCMAssociate Professor of Surgery, Division of Acute Care Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFNutritional optimization of the critically ill patient remains a cornerstone of perioperative care. Significant effort and scrutiny are routinely directed to the field as it has the potential to improve outcomes, limit infectious complications, and decrease hospital length of stay and mortality. As such, previously identified cornerstones of care have been called into question. The timing, route, and intensity of nutritional supplementation remain the subject of controversy in an ever-evolving field. Previous methods of nutritional assessment, such as albumin and transthyretin, have proved unreliable, and their use is no longer recommended. In their place, new scoring systems are available to risk assess patients for malnutrition. We review the most pressing changes and assess the landscape of the field today.
Key words: critical illness, enteral, glutamine, malnutrition, nutrition, outcomes, parenteral, protein
- 5
Reducing the Risk of Injury and Disease
- HAROLD C. SOX, MD, MACPEditor, Annals of Internal Medicine, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFPublic interest in disease and injury prevention is very high, driven by a steady accumulation of high-quality evidence that preventive interventions do reduce cause-specific death rates. The purpose of these interventions is to eliminate the root causes of diseases that precede death (e.g., heart disease, cancer, and stroke). This chapter presents a review of health risks posed by substance abuse (tobacco, alcohol, and drugs), accidents (e.g., from motor vehicles, accidental poisoning, falling, fire, drowning, and firearms), and domestic violence. The physician’s role in prevention is to identify risk factors for disease and injury and counsel patients about modifying potentially harmful behaviors. Figures illustrate the life expectancy of men and women, and years of potential life lost from various causes, in the United States. Tables list recommendations of the United States Preventive Services Task Force (USPSTF), years of smoking abstinence needed to reduce the risk of disease, elements of a successful smoking cessation strategy, stages of readiness for smoking cessation, the test performance of screening questionnaires for alcohol abuse, the CAGE questionnaire, unintentional and undetermined poisoning deaths in 11 states, and risk factors for falls among the elderly. A sidebar provides links to domestic violence information on the Internet.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 9 tables, and 87 references.
- 6
Complementary, Alternative, and Integrative Medicine
- HELENE M. LANGEVIN, MDDirector, Osher Center for Integrative Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFComplementary and alternative medicine (CAM) refers to a group of diverse medical and health care systems, practices, and products that are not considered to be part of conventional or allopathic medicine. Common CAM practices (e.g., acupuncture, meditation, and therapeutic massage) are gradually becoming incorporated into conventional care in response to patients looking to alternative sources for information and advice about health matters and increased understanding of various CAM methods through evidence-based testing. However, although the claims of some methods are supported with academic research, well-founded concerns remain in many popularized CAM practices regarding the lack of evidence and placebo effects. It is thus imperative for physicians to be comfortable in discussing CAM-related topics with patients and be able to appropriately and informatively guide them in a way that harnesses potential benefits and avoids potential harm. In this review, the major CAM therapies in the United States are examined, including the settings in which they are being used, evidence base status, and efficacy of some of the most commonly used modalities.
This review contains 5 figures, 21 tables, and 123 references.
Keywords: Alternative medicine, complementary medicine, acupuncture, homeopathy, osteopathy, chiropractic, massage therapy, naturopathy
- 7
Occupational Medicine
By Tee L. Guidotti, MD, MPH, FACP, DABT, QEP (Air Quality), FRCPC, FCBOM, FFOM
Purchase PDFOccupational Medicine
- TEE L. GUIDOTTI, MD, MPH, FACP, DABT, QEP (AIR QUALITY), FRCPC, FCBOM, FFOMVice President for Health/Safety/Environment & Sustainability, Medical Advisory Services, Rockville, Maryland
Purchase PDFOccupational medicine concerns keeping workers healthy, screening for early signs of health problems, and promoting good health through workplace initiatives. According to recent estimates, 55,000 deaths and 3.8 million disabling injuries per year result from occupational illness at a cost of $125 to $155 billion. This chapter covers the basic principles and clinical evaluation of occupational disease, guidelines for taking a patient’s occupational history, and exposure assessment. Major occupational disorders in developed countries are discussed, including respiratory tract disorders, skin disorders, disorders of the kidneys, liver disease, central and peripheral nervous systems, organs of sensation, occupational cancer, musculoskeletal disorders, hematologic disorders, endocrine and reproductive effects, stress and psychogenic effects, and nonspecific illness. Tables outline critical dimensions of occupational medicine, the conceptual approach to a patient with a suspected workplace injury or illness, common hazards with widely available tests for exposure, historically common occupational disorders, and established occupational carcinogens. Figures includes a chest film of asbestosis, a sample occupational and environmental history questionnaire, lungs in various states of pneumoconiosis, a photograph of contact dermatitis, and a graph showing hearing decline at 4,000 Hz frequency. Illustrations demonstrate the impact of occupational exposure on the kidneys and liver and the anatomy of the hearing mechanism.
This review contains 9 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 112 references.
- 8
Medical Evaluation of the Surgical Patient
By Marie Gerhard-Herman, MD; Jonathan Gates, MD
Purchase PDFMedical Evaluation of the Surgical Patient
- MARIE GERHARD-HERMAN, MDDepartment of Medicine, Cardiovascular Division, Brigham and Womens Hospital, Boston, MA
- JONATHAN GATES, MDDirector of the Burn and Trauma Unit, Department of Surgery, Brigham and Womens Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFMedical evaluation prior to surgery includes risk assessment and the institution of therapies to decrease perioperative morbidity and mortality to improve patient outcomes. The most effective medical consultation for surgical patients begins with an assessment of the individual patient and knowledge of the planned surgery and anesthesia followed by clear communication of a concise and specific recommended plan of perioperative care to the surgical team. This chapter describes anesthetic, cardiac, pulmonary, hepatic, nutritional, and endocrine risk assessment. Perioperative thrombotic management and postoperative care and complications, including fluid management; pulmonary, cardiac, renal complications; and delirium are discussed. Tables outline the American Society of Anesthesiologists class and perioperative mortality risk, a comparison of the Revised Cardiac Risk Index and National Surgery Quality Improvement Program, Duke Activity Status Index, high-risk stress test findings, markers for increased perioperative risk in pulmonary hypertension, aortic stenosis and nonemergent noncardiac surgery, risk factors for pulmonary complications in noncardiac surgery, the Model for End-Stage Liver Disease score to predict postoperative mortality, venous thromboembolism risk factors and options for pharmacologic prophylactic regimens, perioperative management of warfarin, and Brigham and Women’s Hospital guidelines for postoperative blood product replacement. Figures include a care algorithm for noncardiac surgery, an illustration of types of myocardial infarction, and an algorithm for the treatment of postoperative delirium.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 12 tables, and 68 references.
- 9
Bioterrorism
- JEFFREY DUCHIN, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Disease, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- JOHN D MALONE, MD, MPHAdjunct Professor of Medicine, Center for Disaster and Humanitarian Assistance Medicine, Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences, Bethesda, MD; National Naval Medical Center, Bethesda, MD
Purchase PDFWell before the 2001 anthrax outbreak, public health and government leaders in the United States recognized the need for increased preparedness to detect and respond to acts of biologic terrorism. In April 2000, the Centers for Disease Control and Prevention (CDC) published a strategic plan for preparedness and response to biologic and chemical terrorism. This chapter describes the clinician's role in recognizing potential bioterrorism agents and responding accordingly, as presented in the CDC plan. It also reviews data analyses arising from the United States military and civilian smallpox vaccination programs of 2002 to 2004. The critical biologic agent categories for public health preparedness are presented in a table. Current information is provided on the diagnosis and management of the following agents of bioterrorism: smallpox, anthrax, plague, botulism, tularemia, and hemorrhagic fever viruses.
This review contains 7 figures, 30 tables, and 86 references.
Keywords: Bioterrorism, smallpox, tularemia, hemorrhagic fever virus, anthrax, postexposure prophylaxis, vaccination, botulism, plague
- 10
The Future of Transplant Biology and Surgery
By Marc Colaco, MD, MBA; Anthony Atala, MD
Purchase PDFThe Future of Transplant Biology and Surgery
- MARC COLACO, MD, MBAResident, Department of Urology, Wake Forest School of Medicine, Winston-Salem, NC
- ANTHONY ATALA, MDDirector, Wake Forest Institute for Regenerative Medicine, and W.H. Boyce Professor and Chair, Department of Urology, Wake Forest University, Winston-Salem, NC
Purchase PDFAlthough organ transplantation remains the mainstay of treatment for patients with severely compromised organ function, with the growing number of patients in need of treatment and the lack of organ supply, medical scientists have begun seeking out alternatives. In the last two decades, researchers have attempted to grow native and stem cells, engineer tissues, and design treatment modalities using regenerative medicine techniques for almost every tissue of the human body. This chapter discusses the basics of tissue engineering, including cell isolation and biomaterial selection. It then outlines specific advances and potential surgical uses.
This review contains 9 figures, 2 tables, and 135 references.
- 11
Management of Poisoning and Drug Overdose
By Timothy J Wiegand, MD; Manish M Patel, MD; Kent R. Olson, MD, FACEP, FAACT, FACMT
Purchase PDFManagement of Poisoning and Drug Overdose
- TIMOTHY J WIEGAND, MDAssistant Adjunct Professor of Medicine, University of California, San Francisco, CA
- MANISH M PATEL, MDAssistant Professor, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- KENT R. OLSON, MD, FACEP, FAACT, FACMTClinical Professor of Medicine, Pediatrics and Pharmacy, University of California, San Francisco, San Francisco, CA
Purchase PDFDrug overdose and poisoning are leading causes of emergency department visits and hospital admissions in the United States, accounting for more than 500,000 emergency department visits and 11,000 deaths each year. This chapter discusses the approach to the patient with poisoning or drug overdose, beginning with the initial stabilization period in which the physician proceeds through the ABCDs (airway, breathing, circulation, dextrose, decontamination) of stabilization. The management of some of the more common complications of poisoning and drug overdose are summarized and include coma, hypotension and cardiac dysrhythmias, hypertension, seizures, hyperthermia, hypothermia, and rhabdomyolysis. The physician should also perform a careful diagnostic evaluation that includes a directed history, physical examination, and the appropriate laboratory tests. The next step is to prevent further absorption of the drug or poison by decontaminating the skin or gastrointestinal tract and, possibly, by administering antidotes and performing other measures that enhance elimination of the drug from the body. The diagnosis and treatment of overdoses of a number of specific drugs and poisons that a physician may encounter, as well as food poisoning and smoke inhalation, are discussed. Tables present the ABCDs of initial stabilization of the poisoned patient; mechanisms of drug-induced hypotension; causes of cardiac disturbances; drug-induced seizures; drug-induced hyperthermia; autonomic syndromes induced by drugs or poison; the use of the clinical laboratory in the initial diagnosis of poisoning; methods of gastrointestinal decontamination; methods of and indications for enhanced drug removal; toxicity of common beta blockers; common stimulant drugs; corrosive agents; dosing of digoxin-specific antibodies; poisoning with ethylene glycol or methanol; manifestations of excessive acetylcholine activity; common tricyclic and other antidepressants; seafood poisonings; drugs or classes that require activated charcoal treatment; and special circumstances for use of activated charcoal.
This review contains 3 figures, 22 tables, and 198 references.
- 12
Venomous Bites and Stings
- J PATRICK WALKER, MD, FACSChief of Surgery, ETMC, Crockett, TX, Houston County Surgical Associates, Crockett, TX
Purchase PDFApproximately 8000 persons are bitten by venomous snakes in the US each year. Mortality is low (4 to 6/yr), but morbidity can be significant, treatment costly. Overuse of surgery and antivenom is common. Simply cutting the wound with attempted aspiration is not indicated. Fasciotomy should only be used for patients with elevated compartment pressures. CroFab is a highly effective (but expensive) treatment useful for serious envenomation. Antivenom should be used in patients with life-threatening symptoms (hypotension, clinical coagulopathy) or rapid advancement of local signs, and to reduce compartment pressures to avoid fasciotomy. The most significant morbidity from insect envenomation is secondary to anaphylaxis. A bite from the black widow spider can induce abdominal cramping and pain that can mimics an acute abdomen. Brown recluse envenomation can produce tissue necrosis and long-term complications. Most events are seen rarely by the average physician; this review can be a useful guide in management.
Key words: antivenom, copperhead bite, CroFab, insect bite, rattlesnake bite, snakebite, water moccasin bite
- 13
Toxic Gases
- STEPHANIE T WEISS, MD, PHDAssociate Director, Emergency Medicine, Morton Hospital and Medical Center, Taunton, MA
- KATHRYN W WEIBRECHT, MDAssociate Director, Emergency Medicine, Morton Hospital, Taunton, MA
Purchase PDFThis review looks at the potential causes, diagnoses, and possible treatments for three asphyxiant gases: carbon monoxide, hydrogen cyanide, and hydrogen sulfide, Exposure to these gases can lead to central nervous system depression, unconsciousness, and death due to tissue hypoxia. These gases are among the most common causes of fatalities related to toxic gas poisoning, with carbon monoxide responsible for 36% and hydrogen sulfide 7.7%. It is necessary to remove victims affected by poisoning immediately from the source of the toxic gas, administer oxygen, and assess their stability. As symptoms of these gases can differ widely, ranging from broad and unspecific to highly morbid, and may require different levels of care, the correct diagnosis should also rely on inferences from the patient history and the context of the admission, including evidence of fire and chemical reactions. Normobaric oxygen and hyperbaric oxygen are the two main treatments for carbon monoxide, although studies have been inconclusive in regards to the effectiveness of hyperbaric oxygen. The Cyanokit (containing hydroxocobalamin) is considered to be more effective for hydrogen cyanide when compared with the Cyanide Antidote Kit due to the former’s low toxicity and high effectiveness. Hydrogen sulfide is often used as a suicide agent, the mortality of which is close to 100%. Figures show the mechanisms by which the asphyxiant gases carry out their negative effects on the human body. Tables show the half-life of carboxyhemoglobin with oxygen therapy and a comparison between the Cyanide Antidote Kit and the Cyanokit.
This review contains 3 figures, 13 tables, and 44 references.
Keywords: Inhalation, poisoning, carbon monoxide, cyanide, methemoglobin, carboxyhemoglobin, hydrogen sulfide, smoke
- 14
Toxic Plants and Mushrooms
- MARIE KING, MD, PHDEmergency Physician, Harrington Hospital, Southbridge, MA
- RICHARD CHURCH, MDAssistant Professor, Emergency Medicine and Toxicology, University of Massachusetts, Worcester, MA
Purchase PDFMany species of plants and mushrooms exist that, when consumed, can induce poisoning in individuals, causing a range of side effects. As the toxins do not always correspond to an antidote, it is important to have the ability to identify each harmful species to determine the appropriate treatment. This review gives an overview of some of the more prevalent toxic plants and mushrooms, detailing their principles of toxicity, recommendations for immediate stabilization, keys to proper diagnosis and definitive therapy, and patient disposition and outcomes. Figures show photographs of the various toxic plants and mushrooms featured. Tables show a list of toxic species for both plants and mushrooms, including their common names, the toxins contained within, their effects, and the corresponding antidote (if any).
This review contains 16 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 44 references.
- 15
Anticholinergic Toxicity
- JEFFREY T LAI, MDResident Physician, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
- KAVITA M BABU, MDAssociate Professor, Division of Medical Toxicology, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
Purchase PDFAnticholinergic compounds oppose the action of the endogenous neurotransmitter acetylcholine at its target receptors and are found in over-the-counter and prescription medication, natural products, and plants. Anticholinergic medications, such as atropine and scopolamine, are used for the treatment of a wide range of conditions, including bradycardia, motion sickness, and insomnia. Antihistaminergic medications, such as diphenhydramine, also possess anticholinergic activity and are used in the treatment of seasonal allergies, common cold symptoms, and allergic reactions. Other medications, such as antidepressants (especially the older tricyclic class), antipsychotics, muscle relaxants, and anticonvulsants, can act as anticholinergic agents or produce anticholinergic side effects. Toxicity can result from therapeutic misadventure, intentional overdose, recreational use, and pediatric exposures. This review covers the principles of toxicity, immediate stabilization, diagnosis and definitive therapy, and disposition and outcomes. Figures show the anticholinergic toxidrome, look-alike structures, and electrocardiographic changes in tricyclic antidepressant overdose. Tables list medications with anticholinergic activity and selected botanicals that cause anticholinergic toxicity.
Key words: anticholinergic overdose, anticholinergic toxicity, anticholinergic toxidrome, physostigmine, tricyclic antidepressant toxicity
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 49 references.
- 16
Cholinergic Toxicity
- STEVEN B BIRD, MD, FACEP, FACMTAssociate Professor of Emergency Medicine, Division of Medical Toxicology, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
Purchase PDFCholinergic drugs exert their functions by inhibiting acetylcholinesterase, the enzyme responsible for hydrolyzing acetylcholine and ending neuronal or neuromuscular neurotransmission. These compounds are used in clinical medicine to treat various disorders, as pesticides, and as weapons of mass destruction. This review describes the drugs that affect the cholinergic system and discusses stabilization, diagnosis and definitive therapy, principles and controversies of definitive care, and disposition and outcomes for these agents. Figures show acetylcholinesterase hydrolysis of acetylcholine, neurotransmission in the nervous system, the mechanism of inhibition of acetylcholinesterase by an organophosphorus (OP) compound, and the general chemical structure of thion OP and oxon OP agents and carbamates. Tables list OP pesticides associated with OP-induced delayed neuropathy, the effects of cholinesterase inhibition, the symptoms of cholinergic poisoning according to severity, and a treatment algorithm for acetylcholinesterase poisoning.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 85 references.
- 17
Caustics
- KAVITA BABU, MD, FACEP, FACMTFellowship Director, Division of Medical Toxicology, Associate Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
- LYNN A FARRUGIA, MDEmergency Medicine Residency Program, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
Purchase PDFA caustic is any substance capable of causing full-thickness damage on contact with healthy, intact tissue. Caustic agents are generally classified by pH as acids or bases. Irritants are those substances that do not produce true breakdown of tissue but cause discomfort and inflammation, such as vomiting, burning eyes, or coughing. This review covers caustic and irritant agents, dermal caustic exposure, caustic inhalation and pulmonary irritants, caustic ingestion, and ocular caustic exposure, along with special consideration of hydrofluoric acid, including hydrofluoric acid and dermal exposure, hydrofluoric acid ingestion, hydrofluoric acid inhalation, ocular hydrofluoric acid exposure, and systematic hydrofluoric acid toxicity. Figures show classification of burns; chemical burns; an autopsy specimen of the tongue, epiglottis, and esophagus after caustic ingestion; and an autopsy specimen of the stomach after caustic ingestion. Tables list common caustic and irritant agents, household products containing caustic and irritant agents, agents for which water or saline irrigation is not recommended, indications for endoscopy after caustic ingestion, ocular chemical burn management, and common chemicals and products containing fluoride.
Key words: caustic eye injury, caustic ingestion, caustic injury, chemical burn, hydrofluoric acid, pulmonary irritants
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 53 references.
- 18
Drugs of Abuse
- MATTHEW D ZUCKERMAN , MDAssistant Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, Medical Toxicology, University of Colorado Anschutz Medical Campus, Aurora, CO
- KAVITA BABU, MD, FACEP, FACMTFellowship Director, Division of Medical Toxicology, Associate Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
Purchase PDFThe term “drugs of abuse” lacks a formal medical definition. Historically, discussions of drugs of abuse focused on “street drugs”; however, the adverse effects of the nonmedical use of prescription medications, such as opiates, benzodiazepines, and therapeutic amphetamines, are increasingly seen. The purpose of this review is to aid the clinician in identifying and treating a broad representation of drugs of abuse, which may include those illicitly produced in laboratories (e.g., methamphetamine), diverted pharmaceuticals (oxycodone), and herbal products (marijuana). This review covers stimulants, hallucinogens, cannabinoids, and sedative-hypnotics. Figures show substances ranked according to weighted harm score on a normalized scale from 0 being no harm to 100 being extreme harm to self and others, a treatment algorithm for sympathomimetic toxicity, a treatment algorithm for sedative-hypnotic overdose, and a treatment algorithm for opioid overdose. Tables list commonly abused sympathomimetic agents, modern novel drugs of abuse, commonly abused sedative-hypnotic agents, commonly abused opiates, and pitfalls of the drug screen.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 89 references
- 19
Psychoactive Medications
- MARK J NEAVYN, MDDirector of Medical Toxicology, Department of Emergency Medicine, Hartford Hospital, Hartford, CT
- KAVITA BABU, MD, FACEP, FACMTFellowship Director, Division of Medical Toxicology, Associate Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
Purchase PDFPsychoactive medications are defined as medications that affect the central nervous system neurotransmitter pathways with the intention to modulate mood or consciousness. This broad category of medications includes sedative-hypnotic agents such as benzodiazepines and barbiturates, antidepressants, neuroleptics, and mood stabilizers. The principal source of exposure for these medications is through prescription drug use and misuse. This review discusses the principles of toxicity, immediate stabilization, diagnosis and definitive therapy, and disposition and outcomes related to sedative-hypnotics, antidepressants, neuroleptics, and lithium. Tables include common benzodiazepine and barbiturate compounds, dosing instructions for multidose activated charcoal, flumazenil dosing recommendations, commonly available tricyclic and atypical (noncyclic) antidepressants, dosing recommendations for sodium bicarbonate in serum alkalinization, benzodiazepine dosing recommendations in serotonin syndrome, dosing recommendations for cyproheptadine, signs and symptoms that differentiate neuroleptic malignant syndrome from serotonin syndrome, and indications for renal replacement therapy based on lithium concentration and clinical setting. Figures show action potentials in the His-Purkinje syndrome, an electrocardiogram tracing demonstrating a terminal R wave, and a QT interval nomogram.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 9 tables, and 101 references.
- 20
Pediatric Infectious Diarrhea and Dehydration
By John W. Martel, MD, PhD; Scott McCorvey, MD, MS
Purchase PDFPediatric Infectious Diarrhea and Dehydration
- JOHN W. MARTEL, MD, PHDAssistant Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, Tufts University School of Medicine, Maine Medical Center, Portland, ME
- SCOTT MCCORVEY, MD, MSResident, Department of Emergency Medicine, Maine Medical Center, Portland, ME
Purchase PDFDiarrhea is a common emergency department (ED) complaint, leading to more than 1.5 million outpatient visits and 200,000 hospital admissions in the United States alone. Although concomitant dehydration also exists in some cases, there are no standard clinical criteria to aid in identifying those children who merit intravenous resuscitation. Current pediatric volume repletion guidelines are based primarily on the estimated degree of volume depletion per the World Health Organization, Centers for Disease Control and Prevention, and American Academy of Pediatrics criteria. These practice guidelines stratify patients into mild (3 to 5% volume depletion), moderate (5 to 10% volume depletion), and severe (> 10% volume depletion).
This review contains 5 figures, 9 tables, and 64 references.
Key Words: Clostridium difficile, dehydration, diarrhea, gastroenteritis, hemolytic-uremic syndrome, pediatrics
- 21
Bioterrorism
- JEFFREY DUCHIN, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Allergy and Infectious Disease, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- JOHN D MALONE, MD, MPHAdjunct Professor of Medicine, Center for Disaster and Humanitarian Assistance Medicine, Uniformed Services University of the Health Sciences, Bethesda, MD; National Naval Medical Center, Bethesda, MD
- 22
Management of Poisoning and Drug Overdose
By Timothy J Wiegand, MD; Manish M Patel, MD; Kent R. Olson, MD, FACEP, FAACT, FACMT
Purchase PDFManagement of Poisoning and Drug Overdose
- TIMOTHY J WIEGAND, MDAssistant Adjunct Professor of Medicine, University of California, San Francisco, CA
- MANISH M PATEL, MDAssistant Professor, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- KENT R. OLSON, MD, FACEP, FAACT, FACMTClinical Professor of Medicine, Pediatrics and Pharmacy, University of California, San Francisco, San Francisco, CA
- 1
- Nephrology
- 1
Transplantation Immunobiology
- ILARIA GANDOLFINI, MDPostdoctoral fellow, Renal Division, Department of Medicine, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY, Renal fellow, Renal Division, Department of Medicine, University Hospital of Parma, Parma, Italy
- PAOLO CRAVEDI, MD, PHDAssistant Professor, Renal Division, Department of Medicine, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY
Purchase PDFThe immune system has evolved to clear the host of invading microorganisms and its own cells that have become altered in some way, such as infected cells or mutated tumorigenic cells. The immune system recognizes such cells as “foreign” based on their expression of different molecules (antigens). Similarly, when organs are transplanted between genetically disparate (allogeneic) individuals, the immune system recognizes and reacts against the foreign antigens of the other individual (alloantigens) to cause rejection. The immune response to a transplanted organ is the consequence of a complex interplay between the innate and adaptive immune systems. Early ischemia-reperfusion injury to the allograft triggers an innate immune response and contributes to the activation of recipient T cells that recognize donor major and minor histocompatibility alloantigens. Once activated, T cells migrate into the allograft, where they mediate rejection by imposing direct cytotoxicity on allogeneic cells, or by providing help to other cells of the immune system, such as macrophages, natural killer (NK) cells, and B lymphocytes, which differentiate into antibody-producing cells. These effector cells and factors then lead to allograft injury.2 This review outlines the elements involved in the innate and adaptive immune responses to a transplant and the mechanisms of rejection.
This review contains 6 figures, 13 tables, and 96 references.
Keywords: Transplant, immune system, autoimmunity, immunosuppression, immunomodulation, cytokines, chemokines, complement, innate immune system, human leukocyte antigen, alloantigen
- 2
Management of Cardiovascular Disease in Dialysis Patients
By John K. Roberts ; John P. Middleton
Purchase PDFManagement of Cardiovascular Disease in Dialysis Patients
- JOHN K. ROBERTS
- JOHN P. MIDDLETON
Purchase PDFCardiovascular disease is a common cause of death and disease in patients with end-stage renal disease (ESRD). Registry data show that 41% of deaths in ESRD patients are due to a variety of cardiovascular causes, such as acute myocardial infarction, congestive heart failure, arrhythmia/sudden cardiac death, and stroke. In the general population, each of these disease entities in isolation can be effectively managed according to evidence from large clinical trials and evidence-based guidelines. However, many of these trials did not include patients with ESRD, limiting the transferability of this evidence to the care of patients on dialysis. To complicate matters, cardiovascular events in ESRD patients are likely augmented from a unique interplay of cardiac risk due to both reduced kidney function and the necessity for artificial renal replacement therapies. In this light, the patient on dialysis is subjected to a series of unique factors: the continued presence of the metabolic perturbations of uremia and the peculiar environment of the dialysis treatment itself. Since the ESRD heart is under a considerable amount of strain due to chronic volume overload, rapid electrolyte and fluid shifts, and accelerated vascular calcification, management can be complex and outcomes multifactorial. In this review, we summarize the current evidence regarding management of acute myocardial infarction, heart failure, sudden cardiac death, and atrial fibrillation. We also address modifiable risk factors related to the dialysis procedure itself and highlight recent randomized controlled trials that included dialysis patients and measured important cardiovascular outcomes.
- 3
Hypertensive Disorders in Pregnancy
- KAVITHA VELLANKI, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension, Loyola University Medical Center, Maywood, IL.
- SUSAN HOU, MDProfessor of Medicine, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Loyola University Medical Center, Maywood, IL.
Purchase PDFHypertensive disorders are the second leading cause of maternal mortality in the United States. Hypertension in pregnancy is defined as blood pressure greater than or equal to 140 mm Hg systolic or greater than or equal to 90 mm Hg diastolic, measured on at least two separate occasions. Preeclampsia, as per the new guidelines, is characterized by the new onset of hypertension and either proteinuria or other end-organ dysfunction, more often after 20 weeks of gestation in a previously normotensive pregnant woman. New-onset proteinuria is not required for diagnosis of preeclampsia if there is evidence of other end-organ damage—a change from previous classifications. Although no screening test has yet proven accurate enough to predict preeclampsia, the use of a combination of the serologic factors seems promising. There are few data to support any specific blood pressure target in pregnancy. Although there is a general consensus on treating severe hypertension in pregnancy, there is a difference of opinion on treating mild to moderate hypertension in pregnancy. Avoiding uteroplacental ischemia and minimizing fetal exposure to adverse effects of medications are as important as avoiding maternal complications from high blood pressure during pregnancy.
This review contains 2 figures, 4 tables, and 73 references.
- 4
Metabolic Acidosis
- LISA COHEN
- DIPAL SAVLA
- SHUCHI ANAND
Purchase PDFMetabolic acidosis is a common clinical entity that can arise from a variety of disease states, medications, and toxic ingestions. This review covers the pathophysiology, diagnosis, and management of common presentations of metabolic acidosis. We have differentiated various causes of metabolic acidosis based on the presence of a normal or elevated anion gap (AG), the sum of serum anions unaccounted for by the measurement of plasma sodium, bicarbonate, and chloride levels. Normal AG metabolic acidosis, or non-AG metabolic acidosis, arises when there is excessive loss of bicarbonate from the gastrointestinal tract or in the urine. This review covers the development and diagnosis of non-AG metabolic acidosis, including a discussion of the spectrum of renal tubular acidosis subtypes. The treatment of non-AG metabolic acidosis is reviewed. Metabolic acidosis with an elevated AG, also called AG metabolic acidosis, develops when exogenous or endogenous nonchloride acid accumulates in the body. The most common causes of AG metabolic acidosis are lactic acidosis and ketoacidosis from starvation, heavy alcohol intake, or diabetes with total body insulin depletion. Medications, toxic substances, and uremia can also lead to AG acidosis. The mechanisms and management of these causes of metabolic acidosis with high AG are covered in detail.
Key words: anion-gap acidosis, diabetic ketoacidosis, lactic acidosis, non–anion gap acidosis
- 5
Approach to the Patient With Kidney Disease
By Ajay K Singh, MBBS, FRCP (UK), MBA; Jameela A. Kari, MD, FRCP (UK), FRCPCH
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With Kidney Disease
- AJAY K SINGH, MBBS, FRCP (UK), MBAAssociate Professor of Medicine, Associate Dean for Global Education and Continuing Education, Harvard Medical School, Director, Continuing Medical Education, Department of Medicine and Renal Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- JAMEELA A. KARI, MD, FRCP (UK), FRCPCHProfessor of Pediatrics and Consultant Pediatric Nephrologist, King Abdulaziz University, Jeddah, Saudi Arabia
Purchase PDFDiseases of the kidney can present with a variety of different clinical presentations. These presentations are best considered syndromically: prerenal, renal, and postrenal. Besides this commonly used framework, kidney disease can have the kidney as the prime mover, such as with a primary glomerular disease, versus the kidney as a target of a systemic process, for example, as in the hepatorenal syndrome, where the primary abnormality physiologically is with the liver. Therefore, the most important aspect when approaching patients with kidney disease is to use a systematic framework. This framework applies regardless of whether kidney disease occurs in adults or children. This review covers determination of disease duration, assessment of kidney function, measurement of kidney function, staging of kidney disease, imaging techniques for the genitourinary system, major syndromes of kidney disease, and asymptomatic urinary sediment abnormalities. Figures show an approach to the patient with renal disease, components of urinary sediment, and an approach to the patient with hematuria. Tables list considerations for referral to nephrology, the National Kidney Foundation classification of chronic kidney disease, categories of proteinuria, correlation between dipstick positivity for protein and protein concentration in urine, causes of hematuria, and causes of hematuria by age and gender.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 26 references.
- 6
Drug Dosing in Acute Kidney Injury
By Steven Gabardi, PharmD, BCPS, FAST, FCCP; Marjan Sadegh, PharmD, BCPS; Jamil Azzi, MD; Craig A Stevens, PharmD, BCPS
Purchase PDFDrug Dosing in Acute Kidney Injury
- STEVEN GABARDI, PHARMD, BCPS, FAST, FCCP
- MARJAN SADEGH, PHARMD, BCPS
- JAMIL AZZI, MD
- CRAIG A STEVENS, PHARMD, BCPS
Purchase PDFThe prevalence of acute kidney injury (AKI) among hospitalized patients has increased sharply over the past 10 to 20 years. One complicating factor in this population is that many pharmacologic agents that are administered to these patients are handled, to some degree, by the kidneys. These medications may experience altered pharmacokinetic and pharmacodynamic profiles in patients with renal dysfunction, increasing the chances of drug misadventures. Historically, drug dosing in patients with AKI has been approached in the same manner as in patients with chronic renal insufficiency (CRI). The majority of dosing recommendations for AKI have been extrapolated from studies performed in patients with stable CRI. Renal drug clearance, composed of glomerular filtration, tubular secretion, and renal drug metabolism, is affected by renal dysfunction. It is clear that there is a reduction in renal clearance of drugs and toxins in both AKI and CRI. However, the type of renal dysfunction may affect other parameters of drug handling. Thus, dosing stratagems extrapolated from patients with CRI may result in subtherapeutic drug concentrations and ineffective treatment. Achieving a balance between under- and overdosing requires rigorous monitoring and individualized dosing.
Key words: acute kidney injury, drug dosing, pharmacokinetics
- 7
Disorders of Acid-base and Potassium Balance
- STUART L LINAS, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, University of Colorado Denver, Denver, CO
Purchase PDFWater accounts for approximately half of an adult human's body weight. Two thirds of body water is intracellular, and the remaining one third is contained in the extracellular fluid compartment, which includes intravascular (plasma) and interstitial fluid. Small amounts of water are also contained in bone, dense connective tissue, digestive secretions, and cerebrospinal fluid. To maintain stability of the internal milieu, body fluids are processed by the kidney, guided by intricate physiologic control systems that regulate fluid volume and composition. This chapter reviews the principles of body fluid hemostasis and discusses disorders of water excess (hyponatremia), water deficiency (hypernatremia), water conservation (diabetes insipidus), saltwater excess (edematous states), and saltwater deficiency (volume depletion). Figures illustrate the relation between the plasma hydrogen ion concentration and the blood pH, proximal tubular bicarbonate reabsorption, renal secretion of hydrogen ions, renal glutamine metabolism and ammonia diffusion, metabolic alkalosis, and the electrocardiographic changes in and approach to causes of hypokalemia and hyperkalemia. Tables describe causes of metabolic acidosis with a high and a normal ion gap; causes of type 1 renal tubular acidosis; causes of type 4 renal tubular acidosis and aldosterone resistance; causes of metabolic alkalosis, respiratory acidosis, and respiratory alkalosis; evaluation of the renal defect in hyperkalemia; and treatment of hyperkalemia.
This chapter contains 10 figures, 12 tables, and 53 references.
- 8
Kidney Disease in Pregnancy
- KAVITHA VELLANKI, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension, Loyola University Medical Center, Maywood, IL.
- SUSAN HOU, MDProfessor of Medicine, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension, Department of Nephrology and Hypertension, Loyola University Medical Center, Maywood, IL.
Purchase PDFPregnancy-induced changes in renal hemodynamics play an important role in favorable maternal and fetal outcomes. Renal plasma flow and glomerular filtration rate (GFR) increase by approximately 50% in normal pregnancy, leading to a decrease in both blood urea nitrogen and serum creatinine when compared with prepregnancy levels. Hence, serum creatinine–based formulas are not accurate in calculating estimated GFR in pregnant patients. The most compelling risk for pregnant women with moderate to severe chronic kidney disease is the risk of rapid progression of underlying kidney disease; the mechanisms for such decline are yet to be elucidated. The rule of kidney disease not progressing when serum creatinine is less than 1.4 mg/dL does not apply to women with lupus nephritis. New-onset lupus is an indication for kidney biopsy during pregnancy because diffuse proliferative lupus nephritis requires prompt treatment and first-line treatments are teratogenic. Infertility is common in women on dialysis and is usually reversed after successful kidney transplantation. Pregnancy outcomes have improved over the years with increasing intensity of hemodialysis in end-stage kidney disease patients. Pregnancy post–kidney transplantation should be planned and teratogenic medications discontinued before conception.
Key words: glomerular filtration rate, proliferative lupus nephritis, serum creatinine, pregnancy post–kidney transplantation, end-stage kidney disease, infertility, kidney biopsy
- 9
Acute Kidney Injury in the Cancer Patient
By Shveta Motwani, MD, MMSc, FASN; Albert Q. Lam, MD
Purchase PDFAcute Kidney Injury in the Cancer Patient
- SHVETA MOTWANI, MD, MMSC, FASNOnco-Nephrologist, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Associate Physician, Division of Renal Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Instructor in Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA.
- ALBERT Q. LAM, MDOnco-Nephrologist, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Associate Physician, Division of Renal Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA.
Purchase PDFAcute kidney injury (AKI) is a problem frequently encountered in patients with cancer that significantly impacts their well-being and outcomes. In addition to the usual prerenal, intrarenal, and postrenal etiologies of AKI, patients with cancer experience unique causes of AKI. Nephrologists caring for this population must be able to identify and manage these conditions, which often require distinguishing between causes resulting from the cancer itself and those related to chemotherapeutic or other concurrent treatment, to institute appropriate preventive or therapeutic strategies. In this review, we present a suggested systematic approach to the diagnosis of AKI in patients with cancer and discuss common clinical scenarios specific to this patient population, with a special emphasis on tumor infiltration of the kidney parenchyma, myeloma-related AKI, tumor lysis syndrome, thrombotic microangiopathy, AKI in the patient with hematopoietic stem cell transplantation, and renal disease in patients with renal cell carcinoma. We cover the latest evidence-based strategies for management of these disorders in this evolving field. In addition, we provide an updated table of potentially nephrotoxic chemotherapeutic agents with their associated mechanisms of kidney injury as a reference for clinicians to build on as they encounter the ever-expanding list of oncologic agents in practice. As the subspecialty of onconephrology continues to evolve, it will be increasingly important for clinicians to have the skills to effectively diagnose and treat AKI in cancer patients to minimize morbidity and mortality, decrease the incidence of subsequent chronic kidney disease, and maintain chemotherapeutic options for these patients.
This review contains 5 figures, 5 tables, and 61 references.
Key words: acute kidney injury, cancer, chemotherapy, onconephrology, renal failure
- 10
Glomerular Diseases - Part I
- RAMON G.B. BONEGIO, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Renal Section, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- DAVID J. SALANT, MDProfessor of Medicine, Boston University School of Medicine, Chief of Nephrology Section, Boston Medical Center, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFSome disease processes that affect the glomerulus are acute and self-limited, whereas others lead to progressive loss of renal function. Glomerular diseases cause more than half the cases of chronic kidney disease. This chapter first briefly reviews normal glomerular structure and function, clinical classifications, terminology, diagnosis, and epidemiology of glomerular disease. Pathogenesis of glomerular injury is discussed, and then more detailed approaches to diagnosis. General principles in the management of glomerular diseases are presented. Specific glomerular diseases and their management, discussed at length, are divided into nephritic, nephrotic, and nephritic-nephrotic syndromes. Figures illustrate the pathogenesis and findings on light microscopy, electron microscopy, and immunostaining of a variety of glomerular diseases, including poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis, IgA nephropathy, anti–glomerular basement membrane disease, focal and segmental glomerulosclerosis (FSGS), membranous nephropathy, and membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis (MPGN).
This review contains 9 figures, 25 tables, and 68 references
Keywords: Glomerulonephritis, nephritic syndrome, nephrotic syndrome, microscopy, urinalysis, proteinuria, hematuria, nephropathy, Henoch-Schönlein purpura, nephritis
- 11
Tubulointerstitial Diseases
By Gerald B. Appel, MD, FACP, FASN; Premila Bhat, MD; Pietro Canetta, MD
Purchase PDFTubulointerstitial Diseases
- GERALD B. APPEL, MD, FACP, FASNProfessor of Clinical Medicine, Division of Nephrology, Columbia University Medical Center, New York, NY
- PREMILA BHAT, MDAtlantic Dialysis Management Services, L.L.C
- PIETRO CANETTA, MDClinical Fellow, Division of Nephrology, Columbia University Medical Center, New York, NY
Purchase PDFTubulointerstitial diseases predominantly involve the tubules and the interstitium (the space between the tubules). They may be acute or chronic. Drug-induced acute interstitial nephritis (AIN) can be caused by antibiotics or nonsteroidal anti-inflammatory drugs. Drug-induced chronic interstitial nephritis can be caused by analgesic agents, lithium, antineoplastic agents, and cyclosporine. Physical factors causing interstitial damage are obstructive nephropathy, reflux nephropathy, and radiation nephritis. Discussions of infectious tubulointerstitial nephritis, metabolic and toxic tubulointerstitial nephritis, interstitial disease associated with vascular damage, tubulointerstitial disease caused by dysproteinemias and other tumors, and cystic disease of the kidney are also included. There are 13 figures, including micrographs, CT scans, pyelograms, and photographs of gross specimens, that illustrate the clinical findings of these diseases. Tables list the etiologies of tubulointerstitial diseases and drugs associated with AIN. This chapter has 161 references.
- 12
Acute Kidney Injury - Part I
- PAUL W SANDERS, MD, FACPProfessor and Director, Nephrology Research and Training Center, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Chief, Renal Section, Birmingham Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Birmingham, AL
- ANUPAM AGARWAL, MD, FASNProfessor and Director, Division of Nephrology, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFAcute renal failure (ARF) has been defined as a syndrome in which an abrupt decrease in renal function produces retention of nitrogenous waste products. Translating this abstract description into a clinically useful, accurate, and widely accepted definition has been challenging, in large part because of the focus on serum creatinine concentration, which is easily obtained but has the inherent limitation of poor detection of rapid or subtle, but clinically important, changes in the glomerular filtration rate (GFR). In recent years, therefore, the term acute kidney injury (AKI) has replaced ARF because AKI denotes the entire clinical spectrum from mild increases in serum creatinine to overt renal failure. AKI is defined by the Risk-Injury-Failure-Loss-ESRD (RIFLE) criteria, based on serum creatinine concentration and urine flow rate. The Acute Kidney Injury Network (AKIN) subsequently modified the definition further and divided AKI into three stages. This chapter includes discussions of the etiology and diagnosis of AKI in hospitalized patients and community-acquired AKI. The specific causes, management, and complications of AKI are also discussed. Figures illustrate the pathophysiologic classification of AKI and the effect of hyperkalemia on cardiac conduction—electrocardiogram (ECG) changes. A worksheet for following patients with AKI is provided.
This review contains 3 figures, 21 tables, and 46 references
Keywords:Acute kidney injury, dialysis, contrast, rhabdomyolysis, nephropathy, urinalysis, multiple myeloma, ethylene glycol, sepsis, hepatorenal syndrome
- 13
Management of Chronic Kidney Disease and Its Complications
By Joshua S. Hundert, MD; Ajay K Singh, MBBS, FRCP (UK), MBA
Purchase PDFManagement of Chronic Kidney Disease and Its Complications
- JOSHUA S. HUNDERT, MDClinical Fellow, Department of Medicine, Division of Nephrology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- AJAY K SINGH, MBBS, FRCP (UK), MBAAssociate Professor of Medicine, Associate Dean for Global Education and Continuing Education, Harvard Medical School, Director, Continuing Medical Education, Department of Medicine and Renal Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFManagement of early renal failure helps in the reduction or prevention of end-stage renal disease. The monitoring of renal function is discussed, and the chapter includes a table that shows commonly used methods for monitoring. Risk factors for chronic renal failure include stroke and cardiac disease. Risk factors for renal disease progression are diabetes mellitus, hypertension, proteinuria, smoking, protein intake, and hyperlipidemia. Complications of chronic renal failure that are addressed include sodium and water imbalance, potassium imbalance, acidosis, calcium and phosphorus imbalance, and anemia. There is also a section that discusses the case for early referral to a nephrologist. Tables present the equations used to estimate the glomerular filtration rate (GFR); stages of chronic kidney disease and the appropriate steps in their management; risk factors for chronic kidney disease in which the testing of proteinuria and estimation of GFR are indicated; appropriate diet for patients who have chronic kidney disease; and guidelines for diagnosing and treating anemia resulting from chronic kidney disease. An algorithm outlines the steps in management of calcium and phosphate in patients with kidney disease.
This review contains 3 figures, 10 tables and 50 references
Key Words End-stage renal disease, chronic kidney disease, glomerular filtration rate, Modification of Diet in Renal Disease, Proteinuric renal disease, Hyperuricemia
- 14
Chronic Kidney Failure and Dialysis
- RAGHU V DURVASULA, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Nephrology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- JONATHAN HIMMELFARB, MDDepartment of Medicine, Division of Nephrology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFChronic kidney disease (CKD) is a clinical syndrome arising from progressive kidney injury, formerly known as chronic renal failure, chronic renal disease, and chronic renal insufficiency. It is classified into five stages based primarily on glomerular filtration rate (GFR). This article discusses the epidemiology of CKD and end-stage renal disease (ESRD), as well as etiology and genetics, pathophysiology, and pathogenesis. The section on diagnosis looks at clinical manifestations and physical findings, laboratory (and other) tests, imaging studies, and biopsy. A short section on differential diagnosis is followed by a discussion of treatment, including hemodialysis and peritoneal dialysis. Long-term complications of patients on dialysis include cardiovascular disease, renal osteodystrophy, dialysis-related amyloidosis, and acquired cystic disease (renal cell carcinoma). The final section addresses prognosis and socioeconomic burden. Figures include the classification system for CKD, prevalence of CKD in the United States, rising prevalence, risk of, and leading causes of ESRD in the United States, plus the changing prevalence of ESRD over time, clinical manifestations of uremia, and an overview of hemodialysis circuit. Tables look at the burden of CKD relative to other chronic disorders, the specific hereditary causes of kidney disease, and situations when serum creatinine does not accurately predict GFR. Other tables list equations for estimating GFR, the causes of CKD without shrunken kidneys, and clinical features distinguishing chronic kidney disease from acute kidney injury. ESRD and indications for initiation of dialysis are presented, as well as typical composition of dialysate and reasons for failure of peritoneal dialysis.
This review contains 8 figures, 17 tables and 77 references
Keywords: Renal disease, chronic kidney disease, hemodialysis, peritoneal dialysis, end-stage renal disease, glomerular filtration rate, mineral bone disease
- 15
Pharmacologic Approach to Renal Insufficiency
By Ali J. Olyaei, PharmD; William M. Bennett, MD
Purchase PDFPharmacologic Approach to Renal Insufficiency
- ALI J. OLYAEI, PHARMD
- WILLIAM M. BENNETT, MDMedical Director, Legacy Transplant Services, Professor of Pharmacy Practice, Legacy Good Samaritan Medical Center, Oregon State University, Portland, OR
Purchase PDFPrescribing drugs in patients with kidney disease is complex: drug dosing needs to be adjusted by the stage of kidney disease (whether chronic kidney disease [CKD] stages 1 through 5 or acute kidney injury [AKI] stages 1 through 3); because potential interactions with other agents that are being used need to be considered; and because of the possibility of extracorporeal treatment that might need to be used (e.g., continuous renal replacement therapy [CRRT], peritoneal dialysis [PD], or hemodialysis [HD]). Besides this complexity, there has been an explosion in the classes of new agents and the routes of delivery of these agents. The purpose of this chapter is to review the basic pharmacokinetic and pharmacologic principles that should guide therapy and to summarize basic recommendations for patients with CKD and AKI. The general principles for drug dosing in CKD and AKI include pharmacokinetics in renal failure; bioavailability; volume of distribution; protein binding; and biotransformation. A stepwise approach to dosage adjustment is described and created as an algorithmic approach. Drug dosing considerations in dialysis patients and in AKI patients are covered as well.
This chapter contains 2 algorithms, 7 tables, 25 references, 5 Board-styled MCQs, and 1 Teaching Slide Set. - 16
Nephrolithiasis
- JOSÉ LUIZ NISHIURA, MD, PHDAssociate Researcher, Nephrology Division, Federal University of São Paulo, São Paulo, Brazil.
- ITA PFEFERMAN HEILBERG, MD, PHDAssociate Professor, Nephrology Division, Federal University of São Paulo, São Paulo, Brazil.
Purchase PDFNephrolithiasis is a highly prevalent condition, but its incidence varies depending on race, gender, and geographic location. Approximately half of patients form at least one recurrent stone within 10 years of the first episode. Renal stones are usually composed of calcium salts (calcium oxalate monohydrate or dihydrate, calcium phosphate), uric acid, or, less frequently, cystine and struvite (magnesium, ammonium, and phosphate). Calcium oxalate stones, the most commonly encountered ones, may result from urinary calcium oxalate precipitation on the Randall plaque, which is a hydroxyapatite deposit in the interstitium of the kidney medulla. Uric acid nephrolithiasis, which is common among patients with metabolic syndrome or diabetes mellitus, is caused by an excessively acidic urinary pH as a renal manifestation of insulin resistance. The medical evaluation of the kidney stone patient must be focused on identifying anatomic abnormalities of the urinary tract, associated systemic diseases, use of lithogenic drugs or supplements, and, mostly, urinary risk factors such as low urine volume, hypercalciuria, hyperuricosuria, hypocitraturia, hyperoxaluria, and abnormalities in urine pH that can be affected by dietary habits, environmental factors, and genetic traits. Metabolic evaluation requires a urinalysis, stone analysis (if available), serum chemistry, and urinary parameters, preferably obtained by two nonconsecutive 24-hour urine collections under a random diet. Targeted medication and dietary advice are effective to reduce the risk of recurrence. Clinical, radiologic, and laboratory follow-ups are needed to prevent stone growth and new stone formation, to assess treatment adherence or effectiveness to dietary recommendations, and to allow adjustment of pharmacologic treatment.
This review contains 5 figures, 3 tables, and 107 references.
- 17
Vascular Diseases of the Kidney
By Ronald J. Falk, MD, FACP; Julieanne G McGregor, MD; Vimal K Derebail, MD, MPH; Abhijit V. Kshirsagar, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFVascular Diseases of the Kidney
- RONALD J. FALK, MD, FACPAllan Brewster Distinguished Professor of Medicine; Chief, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension; Director, UNC Kidney Center, Department of Medicine, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, NC
- JULIEANNE G MCGREGOR, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Medicine, Division of Nephrologyand Hypertension, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, NC
- VIMAL K DEREBAIL, MD, MPHAssistant Professor, Department of Medicine, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, NC
- ABHIJIT V. KSHIRSAGAR, MD, MPHAssociate Professor, Department of Medicine, Division of Nephrology and Hypertension, University of North Carolina at Chapel Hill School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, NC
Purchase PDFA number of local and systemic disease processes affect the renal vascular tree. Although the underlying mechanisms may differ, vascular diseases of the kidney all characteristically cause varying degrees of vessel obstruction, eventually leading to an impairment of renal blood flow. Acute impairment in renal function occurs in most vascular diseases of the kidney. This chapter discusses the major vascular diseases of the kidney, categorized according to the size of the affected vessel. Large-vessel diseases described are renal artery stenosis from atherosclerosis and fibromuscular dysplasia, Takayasu arteritis, and renal vein thrombosis. Medium-size-vessel diseases described are polyarteritis nodosa and Kawasaki disease. Small-vessel diseases described are those traditionally associated with glomerulopathy, including rapidly progressive glomerulonephritis and Henoch-Schönlein purpura; thrombotic microangiopathy, including thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura, hemolytic-uremic syndrome, preeclampsia, antiphospholipid syndrome, systemic sclerosis, and malignant hypertension; sickle cell disease; and atheroembolic disease. Tables describe the American College of Rheumatology classification criteria for Takayasu arteritis and induction therapy for rapidly progressive glomerulonephritis. Figures show an overview of vascular disease of the kidney; an arteriogram of renal artery stenosis demonstrating an ostial lesion; light microscopy showing typical crescentic glomerulonephritis; purpuric eruptions in small vessel vasculitides, Henoch-Schönlein purpura, hypersensitivity vasculitis, and antineutrophil cytoplasmic autoantibody–associated disease; light microscopy showing the characteristic onion-skin lesion in scleroderma renal crisis; electron microscopy showing a glomerular capillary with thrombotic thrombocytopenic purpura; injection microradioangiograms comparing the vasa recta of a normal kidney with that in a patient with sickle cell disease; and a light microscopy that reveals an atheroembolus lodged in a small renal artery and occlusion of the vascular lumen. This chapter contains 151 references.
- 18
Benign Prostatic Hyperplasia
- MICHAEL J BARRY, MD, FACPPhysician Medical Services, Massachusetts General Hospital, Clinical Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFBenign prostatic hyperplasia (BPH) is a common cause of morbidity in older men in developed countries. BPH causes lower urinary tract symptoms (LUTS) and occasionally results in such complications as acute urinary retention (AUR), urinary tract infection, and even obstructive uropathy. Although the development of medical treatments has reduced the role of surgery, prostatectomy remains a widely performed procedure. Epidemiology, risk factors, and pathophysiology are discussed. Diagnosis includes clinical features, history, physical examination, and laboratory testing. Management can include watchful waiting, medical treatment, surgery, and minimally invasive treatment. Management of AUR is also addressed.
This review contains 4 figures, 10 tables, and 58 references.
Keywords: Benign prostatic hyperplasia, lower urinary tract symptoms, urinary retention, incontinence, alpha blocker, 5α-reductase inhibitor, cystoscopy, transurethral intervention
- 19
Cardiovascular Disease in Patients With Kidney Disease
By Ernest I Mandel, MD; David M. Charytan, MD, MSc
Purchase PDFCardiovascular Disease in Patients With Kidney Disease
- ERNEST I MANDEL, MDClinical Fellow in Medicine, Harvard Medical School and Renal Division, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- DAVID M. CHARYTAN, MD, MSCAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associate Staff Physician, Renal Division, Brigham & Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFCardiovascular disease (CVD) is prevalent in patients with chronic kidney disease (CKD) and is the leading cause of morbidity and mortality in dialysis patients. Clinical practice guidelines established by the National Kidney Foundation identify five stages of CKD defined by estimated glomerular filtration rate (eGFR) as determined by the abbreviated Modification of Diet in Renal Disease (MDRD) study equation. The National Health and Nutrition Epidemiology Survey (NHANES III) estimated that 13% of adults in the United States have CKD. An estimated 5 to 10% of the world's population—a staggering 300 to 600 million people—have CKD. This chapter covers the epidemiology, clinical spectrum, pathogenesis, and management of CVD in patients who have CKD. The clinical spectrum of CVD in patients with CKD is divided into four major categories: arterial disease, myocardial disease, disorders of cardiac rhythm, and valvular disease. Sections discuss some or all of the following: epidemiology/pathophysiology, diagnosis, management, risk factors, intervention, prevention. The chapter includes 4 tables and 6 figures. Figures present age-standardized rates of death, Kaplan–Meier estimates of rates of death, mortality by stage of CKD, hazard ratios and 95% confidence intervals for all-cause and cardiovascular mortality, cardio-renal syndrome pathophysiology, and ratios for actual to expected number of occurrences of sudden death. Tables list the five stages of CKD, types of CVD associated with CKD, risk factors for CVD in patients with CKD/end-stage renal disease (ESRD), and factors contributing to platelet dysfunction and enhanced bleeding risk in CKD/ESRD. This chapter contains 191 references.
- 20
Kidney Transplantation 1: an Overview--recipient Evaluation and Immunosuppression
By Belinda T. Lee, MD; Anil Chandraker, MD; Jamil Azzi, MD; Martina M McGrath, MB, BCh
Purchase PDFKidney Transplantation 1: an Overview--recipient Evaluation and Immunosuppression
- BELINDA T. LEE, MDCharles Bernard Carpenter Transplant Fellow, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- ANIL CHANDRAKER, MDMedical Director of Kidney and Pancreas Transplantation, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- JAMIL AZZI, MD
- MARTINA M MCGRATH, MB, BCHInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFKidney transplantation remains the optimal renal replacement therapy for patients with end-stage renal disease (ESRD). A timely referral to kidney transplantation and a thorough pretransplantation evaluation ensure improvement in the morbidity and mortality of ESRD patients. Basic knowledge of immune biology and an in-depth understanding of the different induction and maintenance therapies used post kidney transplantation are imperative for optimal patient management. In this review, we discuss the multidisciplinary process of pretransplantation evaluation of kidney transplant recipients. We also discuss state-of–the-art early management post kidney transplantation with the different immunosuppressive therapies currently available.
This review contains 3 figures, 8 tables, and 108 references.
Key words: crossmatch, donor-specific antibody, immunosuppression, human leukocyte antigen, immunosuppression, induction, maintenance, medical evaluation, transplantation
- 21
Kidney Transplantation 2: Care of the Kidney Transplant Recipient
By Jamil Azzi, MD; Belinda T. Lee, MD; Anil Chandraker, MD; Martina M McGrath, MB, BCh
Purchase PDFKidney Transplantation 2: Care of the Kidney Transplant Recipient
- JAMIL AZZI, MDInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- BELINDA T. LEE, MDCharles Bernard Carpenter Transplant Fellow, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- ANIL CHANDRAKER, MDMedical Director of Kidney and Pancreas Transplantation, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- MARTINA M MCGRATH, MB, BCHInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFRenal transplantation is the preferred therapy for patients with end-stage kidney disease, leading to increased life expectancy, improved quality of life, and reduced health care resource use. Owing to their preexisting burden of disease, caring for renal transplant recipients is complex. Patient management following successful renal transplantation involves a multifactorial approach to cardiovascular risk factor management, along with titration of immunosuppression, management of complications related to immunosuppression, and active monitoring of allograft function. Recent advances in immunosuppressive management hold promise for improved long-term allograft survival. Finally, immune monitoring of transplant recipients is an area of considerable research, with the ultimate aim of individualized management of immunosuppression and the ability to induce transplant-specific tolerance.
This review contains 7 figures, 11 tables, and 119 references.
Key words: cardiovascular disease, drug interactions, immunosuppression, infection, interstitial fibrosis and tubular atrophy, malignancy, rejection, tolerance
- 22
Kidney Disease in the Cancer Patient
By Colm Magee, MD, MPH, FRCPI; Lynn Redahan, MD, MRCPI
Purchase PDFKidney Disease in the Cancer Patient
- COLM MAGEE, MD, MPH, FRCPIDepartment of Nephrology, Consultant Nephrologist and Lynn Redahan, MRCPI, Senior Registrar in Nephrology, Beaumont Hospital, Beaumont, Dublin, Ireland
- LYNN REDAHAN, MD, MRCPIDepartment of Nephrology, Consultant Nephrologist and Lynn Redahan, MRCPI, Senior Registrar in Nephrology, Beaumont Hospital, Beaumont, Dublin, Ireland
Purchase PDFThe spectrum of kidney disease in the cancer patient is wide. Kidney dysfunction can result from the cancer itself or its treatment. The presentation in this population is varied and may manifest as acute kidney injury (AKI) or chronic kidney disease. In addition, other manifestations of kidney disease can include proteinuria, hypertension, and electrolyte disturbances. As new cancer treatments emerge, the range of therapy-associated renal syndromes increases. This chapter deals predominantly with causes and management of renal dysfunction that are specific to the cancer patient, including those caused by hypercalcemia; hepatorenal syndrome; the use of interleukin-2 (IL-2) and bisphosphonate; glomerular, tubular, interstitial, and vascular diseases; multiple myeloma (MM); and tumor infiltration. The chapter also examines postrenal causes of AKI, electrolyte disorders, and hematopoietic stem cell transplantation (HSCT). Tables provide the features of kidney disease in the cancer patient, the pathogenesis of hypercalcemia, strategies for preventing and managing AKI with IL-2 therapy, laboratory findings with hemolytic-uremic syndrome/thrombocytopenic purpura, the causes of acute tubular necrosis in MM, a summary of electrolyte disturbances in the cancer patient, indications for HSCT, and a summary of the management of patients with post-HSCT AKI. The chapter is also enhanced by ultrasound and computed tomographic scans, histology images, and an illustration of tumor lysis syndrome.
This chapter contains 105 references, 8 tables, 4 highly rendered figures, and 5 MCQs.
- 23
Urinalysis
By Gautam Kishore Valecha , MBBS; Rafeel Syed, MD; Amina Rehman, MBBS; Suzanne El-Sayegh, MD
Purchase PDFUrinalysis
- GAUTAM KISHORE VALECHA , MBBSResident, Department of Medicine, Staten Island University Hospital, Staten Island, NY
- RAFEEL SYED, MDFellow, Department of Nephrology, Staten Island University Hospital, Staten Island, NY
- AMINA REHMAN, MBBSClinical Research Volunteer, Department of Medicine, Staten Island University Hospital, Staten Island, NY
- SUZANNE EL-SAYEGH, MDProgram Director, Department of Medicine, Staten Island University Hospital, Staten Island, NY
Purchase PDFUrinalysis comprises physical, chemical, and microscopic examination of urine. Although widely available, this test is often underused and misinterpreted. Urinalysis can provide helpful clues in the assessment of a variety of clinical conditions, but one must be aware of their limitations. On proper collection, the sample must be analyzed ideally within 2 hours. Dipstick urinalysis is convenient and commonly performed but provides qualitative or semiquantitative assessment only, and its results can be affected by urine discoloration and the presence of various other substances. Finally, urine microscopy is an important component of urinalysis used to identify various structures such as crystals, cells, microorganisms, and casts, which in turn helps in the assessment of the underlying disease. In this review, we discuss the clinical implications of various findings on urinalysis. Additionally, we also highlight the importance of proper sample collection and examination techniques to optimize the diagnostic yield of this invaluable test.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 5 tables, and 53 references.
- 24
Hematologic Abnormalities in Chronic Kidney Disease
By Michael Auerbach, MD, FACP; John Anderson, MD; Khalid Al Talib, MD
Purchase PDFHematologic Abnormalities in Chronic Kidney Disease
- MICHAEL AUERBACH, MD, FACPClinical Professor of Medicine, Georgetown University School of Medicine, Washington, DC
- JOHN ANDERSON, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, retired, Johns Hopkins School of Medicine, Baltimore, MD.
- KHALID AL TALIB, MDMedStar Franklin Square Medical Center, Clinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Maryland School of Medicine, Baltimore, MD.
Purchase PDFThe focus of this review is on information practical to the practicing nephrologist and internists managing patients with chronic kidney disease (CKD), with an emphasis on the quantitative aspects of risk, diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis. Consequently, anemia associated with non–dialysis-associated CKD is emphasized, with special attention to the role of erythropoiesis-stimulating agents and intravenous (IV) iron in treating the anemia of CKD, as well as sections on uremic bleeding and anticoagulation in CKD patients. Figures show a patient before and after a minor infusion reaction, an algorithm outlining grading and management of acute hypersensitivity reactions to IV iron infusions, and an algorithm for the management of uremic platelet dysfunction. Tables list Food and Drug Administration-recommended dose adjustments for novel oral anticoagulant (NOACs) in CKD patients, evidence for preprocedural withholding of NOACs, and management guidelines for anticoagulation in nonvalvular atrial fibrillation and venous thromboembolism.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 101 references.
Key words: Chronic kidney disease; CKD; Anemia of chronic kidney disease; Anemia of CKD; Uremic bleeding; Anticoagulation in CKD; Novel oral anticoagulants in CKD; NOAC CKD
- 25
Respiratory Acidosis and Alkalosis
- HORACIO J ADROGUÉ, MD
- NICOLAOS E MADIAS, MD
Purchase PDFRespiratory acid-base disorders are those disturbances in acid-base equilibrium that are expressed by a primary change in CO2 tension (Pco2) and reflect primary changes in the body’s CO2 stores (i.e., carbonic acid). A primary increase in Pco2 (and a primary increase in the body’s CO2 stores) defines respiratory acidosis or primary hypercapnia and is characterized by acidification of the body fluids. By contrast, a primary decrease in Pco2 (and a primary decrease in the body’s CO2 stores) defines respiratory alkalosis or primary hypocapnia and is characterized by alkalinization of the body fluids. Primary changes in Pco2 elicit secondary physiologic changes in plasma [HCO3ˉ] that are directional and proportional to the primary changes and tend to minimize the impact on acidity. This review presents the pathophysiology, secondary physiologic response, causes, clinical manifestations, diagnosis, and therapeutic principles of respiratory acidosis and respiratory alkalosis.
This review contains 4 figures, 3 tables, and 59 references.
Key words: Respiratory acidosis, respiratory alkalosis, primary hypercapnia, primary hypocapnia, hypoxemia, pseudorespiratory alkalosis
- 26
Acute Graft Dysfunction
By Oluwafisayo Adebiyi, MD; Alexander C. Wiseman, MD; James E. Cooper, MD
Purchase PDFAcute Graft Dysfunction
- OLUWAFISAYO ADEBIYI, MDTransplant Nephrology Fellow, Division of Renal Disease and Hypertension, Transplant Center, University of Colorado, Denver, CO
- ALEXANDER C. WISEMAN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Division of Renal Disease and Hypertension, Transplant Center, University of Colorado, Denver, CO
- JAMES E. COOPER, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Renal Disease and Hypertension, Transplant Center, University of Colorado, Denver, CO
Purchase PDFAcute renal allograft dysfunction represents a spectrum of abnormalities that may be seen from the time of transplant surgery to eventual organ failure. Although renal allografts are often plagued by similar conditions as seen in native kidneys, they are also at risk for unique abnormalities specific to the transplant setting, such as delayed graft function (DGF), acute and chronic graft rejection, post-transplantation infections, and perinephric fluid collections.
This review contains 5 figures, 10 tables, and 94 references.
Keywords: Acute renal allograft dysfunction, delayed graft function, acute graft rejection, chronic graft rejection, perinephric fluid collections, post-transplantation infections
- 27
Disorders of Water Balance
By Richard H Sterns, MD, FACP; Stephen M. Silver, MD; John K. Hix, MD; Jonathan W. Bress, MD
Purchase PDFDisorders of Water Balance
- RICHARD H STERNS, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, University of Rochester School of Medicine and Dentistry, Chief of Medicine, Rochester General Hospital and the Genesee Hospital, Rochester, NY
- STEPHEN M. SILVER, MD
- JOHN K. HIX, MD
- JONATHAN W. BRESS, MD
Purchase PDFGuided by the hypothalamic antidiuretic hormone vasopressin, the kidney’s ability to conserve electrolyte–free water when it is needed and to excrete large volumes of water when there is too much of it normally prevents the serum sodium concentration from straying outside its normal range. The serum sodium concentration determines plasma tonicity and affects cell volume: a low concentration makes cells swell, and a high concentration makes them shrink. An extremely large water intake, impaired water excretion, or both can cause hyponatremia. A combination of too little water intake with too much salt, impaired water conservation, or excess extrarenal water losses will result in hypernatremia. Because sodium does not readily cross the blood-brain barrier, an abnormal serum sodium concentration alters brain water content and composition and can cause serious neurologic complications. Because bone is a reservoir for much of the body’s sodium, prolonged hyponatremia can also result in severe osteoporosis and fractures. An understanding of the physiologic mechanisms that control water balance will help the clinician determine the cause of impaired water conservation or excretion; it will also guide appropriate therapy that can avoid the life-threatening consequences of hyponatremia and hypernatremia.
- 28
Plasmapheresis
- FRANÇOIS MADORE, MD, MSC
Purchase PDFPlasmapheresis has been applied over the last several decades as primary or adjunctive treatment for a number of primary renal diseases and systemic conditions with renal involvement. The present review discusses renal conditions for which plasmapheresis may be attempted with recommendations based on evidence from the literature. Other indications of special interest for renal physicians (e.g., sepsis and multiple organ failure, drug overdose, and poisoning) are also discussed. In addition, the present text reviews general apheresis principles, technical considerations for optimal plasmapheresis prescription, and possible complications of plasmapheresis. Knowledge of disease mechanisms and plasmapheresis principles is invaluable in applying a plasmapheresis treatment regimen appropriately.
- 29
Rapidly Progressive Glomerulonephritis
By Stephen P McAdoo, MRCP PhD; Charles D. Pusey , FRCP DSc
Purchase PDFRapidly Progressive Glomerulonephritis
- STEPHEN P MCADOO, MRCP PHDClinical Lecturer, Renal Section, Division of Medicine, Imperial College London, Hammersmith Hospital, London, UK
- CHARLES D. PUSEY , FRCP DSCProfessor of Medicine, Renal Section, Division of Medicine, Imperial College London, Hammersmith Hospital, London, UK
- 30
Approach to Acid-base Disorders
- HORACIO J ADROGUÉ, MD
- NICOLAOS E MADIAS, MD
Purchase PDFThis review on the approach to acid-base disorders uses the physiologic approach to assessing acid-base status, namely that based on the H2CO3/[HCO3–] buffer pair. A simple acid-base disorder is characterized by a primary abnormality in either carbon dioxide tension (Pco2) or serum [HCO3–] accompanied by the appropriate secondary response in the other component. The four cardinal, simple acid-base disorders are categorized into respiratory disorders and metabolic disorders. Respiratory disorders are expressed as primary changes in Pco2 and include respiratory acidosis or primary hypercapnia (primary increase in Pco2) and respiratory alkalosis or primary hypocapnia (primary decrease in Pco2). Metabolic disorders are expressed as primary changes in serum [HCO3–]) and include metabolic acidosis (primary decrease in serum [HCO3–]) and metabolic alkalosis (primary increase in serum [HCO3–]). A mixed acid-base disorder denotes the simultaneous occurrence of two or more simple acid-base disorders. Arriving at an accurate acid-base diagnosis rests with assessment of the accuracy of the acid-base variables, calculation of the serum anion gap, and identification of the dominant acid-base disorder and whether a simple or mixed disorder is present. Identifying the cause of the acid-base disorder depends on a detailed history and physical examination as well as obtaining additional testing, as appropriate.
Key words: acid-base disorders; simple disorders; mixed disorders; anion gap; physiologic approach; physicochemical approach; base-excess approach
- 31
Epidemiology of Acute Kidney Injury
By Verônica Torres Costa e Silva, MD, PhD; Renato Antunes Caires, MD; Elerson Carlos Costalonga, MD; Emmanuel A. Burdmann, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFEpidemiology of Acute Kidney Injury
- VERÔNICA TORRES COSTA E SILVA, MD, PHD
- RENATO ANTUNES CAIRES, MD
- ELERSON CARLOS COSTALONGA, MD
- EMMANUEL A. BURDMANN, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFThe worldwide incidence of acute kidney injury (AKI) is increasing. Recent surveys demonstrated that AKI occurs in 21% of hospital admissions. In low-income countries, AKI has a bimodal presentation. In large urban centers, the pattern of AKI is very similar to that found in high and upper middle-income countries, with a predominance of hospital-acquired AKI, occurring mostly in older, critically ill, multiorgan failure patients with comorbidities. At the same time, in regional hospitals in small urban communities and rural areas, AKI is usually a community-acquired disease (related to diarrheal and infectious diseases, animal venom, and septic abortion). Although AKI mortality seems to be decreasing, it remains extremely high, varying from 23.9 to 60% in recent series. The most important risk factors for short-term mortality (in hospital or < 90 days) in AKI are the primary diagnosis (sepsis) and the severity of the acute illness, expressed by the presence of nonrenal organ dysfunction. New biomarkers, such as urinary neutrophil gelatinase-associated lipocalin, cystatin C, and interleukin-18 measurements, have been able to identify patients with AKI who are at risk for a less favorable prognosis, such as the likelihood of the need for renal replacement therapy, nonrecovery of kidney function, and higher mortality. Several studies have demonstrated an association between hospital-associated AKI and postdischarge mortality in a variety of contexts, and the most important risk factors for this late lethality are older age, preexisting comorbid disease (chronic kidney disease [CKD], cardiovascular disease, or malignancy), and incomplete organ recovery with ongoing residual disease. AKI is associated with de novo end-stage renal disease (ESRD) (CKD, progression of preexisting CKD) and the occurrence of ESRD in the long term. Herein, it is suggested that high-risk patients recovering from an AKI episode, such as those with baseline CKD, diabetes mellitus, or heart failure and those dialyzed for AKI, should likely be followed by a nephrologist.
- 32
Global Aspects of Chronic Kidney Disease
- GOPESH K MODISamarpan Kidney Hospital & Research Center, Bhopal, India
- VIVEKANAND JHAProfessor, George Institute for Global Health, New Delhi, India, Fortis Escorts Kidney Institute, New Delhi, India, University of Oxford, Oxford, United Kingdom
Purchase PDFChronic kidney disease has a high prevalence and a high mortality rate worldwide. Although diabetes and hypertension are common, unique causes of kidney disease may occur driven by infections, exposures, or genetic susceptibilities. Certain agricultural areas in particular have a high incidence of tubulointerstitial kidney disease of unclear etiology. Risk factors may include heat stress, pesticides, heavy metals, and other environmental toxins. Furthermore, countries have disproportionately different prevalence of renal replacement therapy, which seems to correlate in part to the type of health coverage. The future challenges for the nephrology community worldwide will be dealing with the growing number of patients with end-stage kidney disease, the fragmented healthcare in some countries, shortage of kidney transplantation programs, and deficient registries to appropriately assess the prevalence of kidney disease.
This review contains 4 figures, 3 tables, and 54 references.
Key Words: acute kidney injury, chronic kidney disease, end-stage renal disease, epidemiology, ethnic background, HIV-associated nephropathy, noncommunicable diseases, renal replacement therapy, screening, socioeconomic status
- 33
Glomerular Diseases - Part II
- DAVID J. SALANT, MDProfessor of Medicine, Boston University School of Medicine, Chief of Nephrology Section, Boston Medical Center, Boston, MA
- RAMON G.B. BONEGIO, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Renal Section, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFSome disease processes that affect the glomerulus are acute and self-limited, whereas others lead to progressive loss of renal function. Glomerular diseases cause more than half the cases of chronic kidney disease. This chapter first briefly reviews normal glomerular structure and function, clinical classifications, terminology, diagnosis, and epidemiology of glomerular disease. Pathogenesis of glomerular injury is discussed, and then more detailed approaches to diagnosis. General principles in the management of glomerular diseases are presented. Specific glomerular diseases and their management, discussed at length, are divided into nephritic, nephrotic, and nephritic-nephrotic syndromes. Figures illustrate the pathogenesis and findings on light microscopy, electron microscopy, and immunostaining of a variety of glomerular diseases, including poststreptococcal glomerulonephritis, IgA nephropathy, anti–glomerular basement membrane disease, focal and segmental glomerulosclerosis (FSGS), membranous nephropathy, and membranoproliferative glomerulonephritis (MPGN).
This review contains 7 figures, 18 tables, and 70 references.
Keywords: Glomerulonephritis, nephritic syndrome, nephrotic syndrome, microscopy, urinalysis, proteinuria, hematuria, nephropathy, Henoch-Schönlein purpura, nephritis
- 34
Reflux Nephropathy
- ISA F. ASHOOR, MDPediatric Nephrologist, Department of Pediatrics, Division of Nephrology, Children’s Hospital, New Orleans, Assistant Professor of Clinical Pediatrics, LSU Health Sciences Center New Orleans, LA
- MICHAEL J.G. SOMERS, MDDirector, Clinical Services, Division of Nephrology, Boston Children’s Hospital, Associate Professor of Pediatrics, Harvard Medical School Boston, MA
Purchase PDFMinimally invasive surgical techniques including robotic-assisted laparoscopic ureteral reimplantation and endoscopic transurethral injection are becoming increasingly prevalent. They are associated with a high success rate, shorter hospital stay, and an excellent safety profile.
This review contains 6 figures, 5 tables, 1 video, and 90 references.
Key words: congenital reflux nephropathy, acquired reflux nephropathy, robotic-assisted laparoscopic ureteral reimplantation, reflux nephropathy, primary vesicoureteral reflux, urinary tract infection
- 35
Acute Kidney Injury - Part II: Special Situations
By Paul W Sanders, MD, FACP; Anupam Agarwal, MD, FASN
Purchase PDFAcute Kidney Injury - Part II: Special Situations
- PAUL W SANDERS, MD, FACPProfessor and Director, Nephrology Research and Training Center, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Chief, Renal Section, Birmingham Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Birmingham, AL
- ANUPAM AGARWAL, MD, FASNProfessor and Director, Division of Nephrology, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFAcute renal failure (ARF) has been defined as a syndrome in which an abrupt decrease in renal function produces retention of nitrogenous waste products. Translating this abstract description into a clinically useful, accurate, and widely accepted definition has been challenging, in large part because of the focus on serum creatinine concentration, which is easily obtained but has the inherent limitation of poor detection of rapid or subtle, but clinically important, changes in the glomerular filtration rate (GFR). In recent years, therefore, the term acute kidney injury (AKI) has replaced ARF because AKI denotes the entire clinical spectrum from mild increases in serum creatinine to overt renal failure. AKI is defined by the Risk-Injury-Failure-Loss-ESRD (RIFLE) criteria, based on serum creatinine concentration and urine flow rate. The Acute Kidney Injury Network (AKIN) subsequently modified the definition further and divided AKI into three stages. This part of the AKI review specifically discusses special situations: rhabdomyolysis, aristolochic acid nephropathy, acute urate nephropathy, acute phosphate nephropathy, AKI in multiple myeloma, ehytlene glycol poisoning, contrast-induced nephropathy, AKI in sepsis, hepatorenal syndrome, and AKI in pregnancy.
This review contains 10 tables, and 47 references.
Keywords:Acute kidney injury, dialysis, contrast, rhabdomyolysis, nephropathy, urinalysis, multiple myeloma, ethylene glycol, sepsis, hepatorenal syndrome
- 36
Disorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hyponatremia
By Danilea M. Carmona Matos, MS; Herbert Chen, MD, FACS
Purchase PDFDisorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hyponatremia
- DANILEA M. CARMONA MATOS, MSMedical Student, San Juan Bautista School of Medicine, Caguas, PR
- HERBERT CHEN, MD, FACSChairman, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham School of Medicine, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFDisorders of water and sodium balance are common in clinical practice. To better assess them, we must have a clear understanding of water-electrolyte homeostasis and renal function. The following review goes over practical equations necessary for electrolyte balance analysis as well as the foundations of renal physiology. Emphasis is placed on the understanding of sodium transport and its physiologic and pharmacologic regulation. In addition, we explore the most common electrolyte imbalance affecting up to 28% of hospitalized patients: hyponatremia (ie, low sodium concentration). Hyponatremia has been found in several acute and chronic clinical scenarios including postoperative, drug-induced, and exercise-associated hyponatremia. However, it is not uncommon to find this disorder coexisting with other diseases such as syndrome of inappropriate secretion of antidiuretic hormone (SIADH), acquired immunodeficiency syndrome (AIDS), cancer, and in rare cases, hypothyroidism. To better understand this disorder, the etiology, diagnosis with clinical manifestations and laboratory values, and treatment options are explored.
This review contains 9 figures, 9 tables, and 53 references
Keywords: aldosterone, antidiuretic hormone, body fluids, electrolyte balance, hyponatremia, hypovolemia, osmolality, sodium transport, vasopressin
- 37
Disorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hypernatremia
By Danilea M. Carmona Matos, MS; Herbert Chen, MD, FACS
Purchase PDFDisorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hypernatremia
- DANILEA M. CARMONA MATOS, MSMedical Student, San Juan Bautista School of Medicine, Caguas, PR
- HERBERT CHEN, MD, FACSChairman, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham School of Medicine, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFHypernatremia is an electrolyte disorder most prevalent in the elderly and the critically ill, with over 60% of cases developing over the course of an inpatient stay. Characterized by elevated serum sodium concentrations, this disorder is manifested either by pure-water loss without replacement, or excessive sodium intake without appropriate water balance. Left untreated it may lead to seizures and coma. General treatment in the case of severe hypernatremia is infusion of isotonic saline followed by pure-water after the patient is stabilized. Further treatment of the underlying cause may involve diuretics, thiazides, and a variety of other medications in conjunction with dietary and lifestyle modifications. This review offers an overview of various disorders of water balance: diabetes insipidus, nephrotic syndrome, cirrhosis, idiopathic edema, and volume depletion, as well as their clinical presentations, lab tests, and management.
This review contains 1 figure, 5 tables, and 26 references
Keywords: Hypernatremia, Edematous States , Diabetes insipidus, Volume Depletion, Cirrhosis, Diuretics
- 38
Peritoneal Dialysis
- KARLIEN FRANÇOIS, MDDivision of Nephrology, Universitair Ziekenhuis Brussel, Vrije Universiteit Brussel, Brussels, Belgium
- JOANNE M. BARGMAN, MD, FRCPCDivision of Nephrology, University Health Network, University of Toronto, Toronto, Ontario, Canada
Purchase PDFIn peritoneal dialysis (PD), the peritoneum serves as a biological dialyzing membrane. The endothelium of the vast capillary network perfusing the peritoneum functions as a semipermeable membrane and allows bidirectional solute and water transfer between the intravascular space and dialysate fluid dwelling in the peritoneal cavity. PD is a renal replacement strategy for patients presenting with end-stage renal disease. It can also be offered for ultrafiltration in patients with diuretic-resistant fluid overload even in those without advanced renal failure. PD can also be used for patients with acute kidney injury, although in the developed world this occurs rarely compared to the use of extracorporeal therapies.
This review contains 9 videos, 8 figures, 4 tables, and 73 references.
Keywords: peritoneal dialysis, peritoneal cavity, catheter, dialysis fluid, ultrafiltration, tunnel infection, osmotic pressure, renal failure
- 39
Transplantation Immunobiology
- ILARIA GANDOLFINI, MDPostdoctoral fellow, Renal Division, Department of Medicine, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY, Renal fellow, Renal Division, Department of Medicine, University Hospital of Parma, Parma, Italy
- PAOLO CRAVEDI, MD, PHDAssistant Professor, Renal Division, Department of Medicine, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY
- 40
Disorders of Acid-base and Potassium Balance
- STUART L LINAS, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, University of Colorado Denver, Denver, CO
- 41
Nephrolithiasis
- JOSÉ LUIZ NISHIURA, MD, PHDAssociate Researcher, Nephrology Division, Federal University of São Paulo, São Paulo, Brazil.
- ITA PFEFERMAN HEILBERG, MD, PHDAssociate Professor, Nephrology Division, Federal University of São Paulo, São Paulo, Brazil.
- 42
Acute Kidney Injury - Part I
- PAUL W SANDERS, MD, FACPProfessor and Director, Nephrology Research and Training Center, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Chief, Renal Section, Birmingham Veterans Affairs Medical Center, Birmingham, AL
- ANUPAM AGARWAL, MD, FASNProfessor and Director, Division of Nephrology, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- 43
Kidney Transplantation 1: an Overview--recipient Evaluation and Immunosuppression
By Jamil Azzi, MD; Belinda T. Lee, MD; Anil Chandraker, MD; Martina M McGrath, MB, BCh
Purchase PDFKidney Transplantation 1: an Overview--recipient Evaluation and Immunosuppression
- JAMIL AZZI, MDInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- BELINDA T. LEE, MDCharles Bernard Carpenter Transplant Fellow, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- ANIL CHANDRAKER, MDMedical Director of Kidney and Pancreas Transplantation, Associate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- MARTINA M MCGRATH, MB, BCHInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 44
Chronic Kidney Failure and Dialysis
- RAGHU V DURVASULA, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Division of Nephrology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- JONATHAN HIMMELFARB, MDDepartment of Medicine, Division of Nephrology, University of Washington School of Medicine, Seattle, WA
- 45
Glomerular Diseases - Part I
- RAMON G.B. BONEGIO, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Renal Section, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- DAVID J. SALANT, MDProfessor of Medicine, Boston University School of Medicine, Chief of Nephrology Section, Boston Medical Center, Boston, MA
- 46
Glomerular Diseases - Part II
- RAMON G.B. BONEGIO, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Renal Section, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- DAVID J. SALANT, MDProfessor of Medicine, Boston University School of Medicine, Chief of Nephrology Section, Boston Medical Center, Boston, MA
- 47
Disorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hyponatremia
By Danilea M. Carmona Matos, MS; Herbert Chen, MD, FACS
Purchase PDFDisorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hyponatremia
- DANILEA M. CARMONA MATOS, MSMedical Student, San Juan Bautista School of Medicine, Caguas, PR
- HERBERT CHEN, MD, FACSChairman, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham School of Medicine, Birmingham, AL
- 48
Disorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hypernatremia
By Danilea M. Carmona Matos, MS; Herbert Chen, MD, FACS
Purchase PDFDisorders of Water and Sodium Balance: Hypernatremia
- DANILEA M. CARMONA MATOS, MSMedical Student, San Juan Bautista School of Medicine, Caguas, PR
- HERBERT CHEN, MD, FACSChairman, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham School of Medicine, Birmingham, AL
- 1
- Neurology
- Neurologic Symptoms
- 1
Dizziness
- KEVIN A. KERBER, MD, MSAssistant Professor, Department of Neurology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
- ROBERT W. BALOH, MDProfessor, Departments of Neurology and Surgery (Head and Neck), UCLA Medical Center, Reed Neurological Research Center, Los Angeles, CA
Purchase PDFDizziness is the quintessential symptom presentation in all of clinical medicine. It is a common reason that patients present to a physician. This chapter provides background information about the vestibular system, then reviews key aspects of history-taking and examination of the patient, then discusses specific disorders and common presentation types. Throughout the chapter the focus is on neurologic and vestibular disorders. Normal vestibular anatomy and physiology are discussed, followed by recommendations for history-taking and the physical examination. Specific disorders that cause dizziness are explored, along with common causes of non-specific dizziness. Common presentations are discussed, including acute severe dizziness, recurrent attacks, and recurrent positional vertigo. Finally, the chapter looks at laboratory investigations in diagnosis and management. Figures include population prevalence of dizziness symptoms, the anatomy of inner structures, primary afferent vestibular nerve activity, the head thrust test, the Dix-Hallpike maneuver, the supine positional test, the canalith repositioning procedure, and the barbecue roll maneuver. Tables list physiologic properties and clinical features of the components of the peripheral vestibular system, information to be acquired from history of the present illness, common symptoms patients report as dizziness, examination components, distinguishing among common peripheral and central vertigo syndromes, common causes of nonspecific dizziness, types of dizziness presentations, relevant imaging abnormalities on neuroimaging studies, vestibular testing components, and medical therapy for symptomatic dizziness.
This review contains 8 highly rendered figures, 11 tables, and 69 references.
- 2
Headache and Facial Pain
- ELIZABETH W. LODER, MD, MPHAssociate Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Chief, Division of Headache and Pain, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHeadaches are a near-universal experience, with a 1-year prevalence of 90% and a lifetime prevalence of 99%. Headaches and pain to the head account for roughly 3% of visits to US emergency departments annually, making them the fourth most common reason for seeking emergency care. There are numerous types of headaches, and although the majority are benign, types exist that may result from serious and potentially life-threatening causes. As such, it is important for the physician to consider a broad differential diagnosis for every headache patient. This review discusses the classification of headaches, identifies pain-sensitive structures in the head, discusses the history and examination in patients with headache, and describes many of the primary and secondary headaches. Figures show the areas of the brain sensitive to pain; 1-year prevalence of migraine in men, women, and children; frequency of attacks in migraineurs; prevalence of headaches by age group and in patients with cerebrovascular disorders; and symptoms of idiopathic intracranial hypertension. Tables list the major categories of headache disorders, key elements of the headache history, helpful questions to ask, features of selected primary and secondary headaches, reasons to consider neuroimaging, efficacy of selected over-the-counter medications, triptans available in the United States, medication options for urgent or emergency treatment of migraine, selected preventive medications for migraine, generally accepted indications for preventive treatment, general principles for the use of preventive medications, titration schedules for preventive medication, interval or short-term preventive treatment of menstrual migraine, strategies for managing increase in migraines in patients starting estrogen replacement therapy, transition medications for rapid, temporary suppression of headaches, medications possibly effective for cluster and hypnic headaches, differential diagnosis of the acute, severe, new-onset headache, and etiologies of papilledema and headache.
This review contains 6 figures, 23 tables, and 115 references.
- 3
Pain Syndromes Other Than Headache
- EDGAR L. ROSS, MD
Purchase PDFChronic pain is very common in the United States. Although effective treatments are available, pain remains poorly managed in many patients. This review covers how to assess a patient with pain; the management of acute and chronic pain; and peripheral neuropathy, complex regional pain syndrome (CRPS), fibromyalgia, myofascial pain, back and spine pain, and cancer pain. Figures show how pain transducers (nociceptors) monitor and influence tissue conditions, sensory processing in the spinal cord dorsal horn, and classification of chronic pain syndromes. Tables list the International Association for the Study of Pain’s definitions for the management of pain; differences between acute and chronic pain; physiologic mechanisms sustaining pain; pain descriptors and types of pain; distinguishing hyperalgesia and allodynia; patient classifications and group characteristics; treatments and medication classes used for acute pain as well as chronic pain; two categories of chronic pain, differences between nociceptive and neuropathic pain; behavioral and rehabilitative therapies used for chronic pain; the Budapest diagnostic criteria for CRPS; diagnostic approaches to CRPS; signs and symptoms of fibromyalgia; conditions that can mimic myofascial pain; clinical presentation of myofascial pain; differences between myofascial pain and fibromyalgia; trigger-point examination; myofascial pain treatment; diagnostic categories of spinal pain; spinal pain red flags; the Waddell criteria; and cancer pain syndromes, characteristics, treatment options, and side-effect management options.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 31 tables, and 82 references.
- 4
Migraine Epidemiology, Impact, and Pathogenesis
- AMY A GELFAND, MDDirector, Pediatric Headache, Division of Child Neurology, Department of Neurology, UCSF Benioff Children’s Hospital, San Francisco, CA
- DAWN C BUSE, PHDAssociate Professor, Department of Neurology, Albert Einstein College of Medicine of Yeshiva University, Assistant Professor, Clinical Health Psychology Doctoral Program, Ferkauf Graduate School of Psychology of Yeshiva University, Director of Behavioral Medicine, Montefiore Headache Center Bronx, NY
Purchase PDFMigraine is a common and often disabling neurologic disorder. No longer thought of as neurovascular in etiology, migraine is now known to be a complex disorder of the brain with strong genetic underpinnings. The impact of migraine may extend beyond the affected individual to also impact partners and children. Although many patients search to identify “triggers” of migraine, teasing out such relationships can be remarkably complex. The premonitory phase of a migraine attacks can include symptoms such as food cravings, photophobia, and increased yawning—symptoms that could, for example, lead a person to mistakenly conclude that the migraine attacks are “triggered” by eating chocolate, bright lights, or being tired. We review current evidence on the epidemiology, impact, and pathophysiology of migraine.
This review contains 9 tables, and 94 references.
Key words: Epidemiology, impact, migraine, pathophysiology, socioeconomic status, gender
- 5
Nerve Blocks and Neurostimulation in the Treatment of Migraine
By Matthew S Robbins, MD
Purchase PDFNerve Blocks and Neurostimulation in the Treatment of Migraine
- MATTHEW S ROBBINS, MDAssociate Professor of Clinical Neurology, Albert Einstein College of Medicine, Chief of Neurology, Jack D. Weiler Hospital, Montefiore Medical Center, Director of Inpatient Services, Montefiore Headache Center, Associate Program Director, Neurology Residency, Bronx, NY
Purchase PDFPeripheral nerve and sphenopalatine ganglion blocks are a safe, effective treatment option for headache disorders, although, despite a wealth of anecdotal experience, the evidence is conflicting for efficacy in chronic migraine prophylaxis. Neurostimulation has emerged as an effective treatment modality for migraine with both noninvasive and minimally invasive options available. Such options include transcutaneous supraorbital nerve stimulation for prophylaxis and single-pulse transcranial magnetic stimulation for the acute treatment of migraine with aura. Although occipital nerve stimulation may be effective for some patients with intractable chronic migraine, the evidence is mixed and procedure-related complications are common. Emerging treatment modalities for acute and preventive treatment of migraine include noninvasive vagus nerve stimulation and implanted sphenopalatine ganglion stimulation.
This review contains 5 figures, 7 tables, and 108 references
Keywords: headache, migraine, neurostimulation, nerve block, pain
- 6
Migraine: Behavioral Treatment
- ELIZABETH K SENG, PHDAssistant Professor, Ferkauf Graduate School of Psychology, Yeshiva University, New York, NY
Purchase PDFBehavior change is an essential component of any migraine management plan. Behavioral migraine treatments are interventions designed to change a patient’s behavior with the result of a reduction in migraine symptoms and migraine-related disability. Behavioral treatments commonly target medication adherence, behavioral and psychosocial factors known to precipitate migraine (including stress, sleep, and skipping meals), maladaptive cognitive patterns, and comorbid psychiatric symptoms (most commonly depression and anxiety). Guidelines and evidence from randomized clinical trials indicate that biofeedback, relaxation treatments, and cognitive-behavioral therapy are effective preventive migraine treatments. Patient education and self-monitoring are foundational components to any behavioral intervention for migraine. Portable personal technology is increasingly becoming an essential part of migraine patient care and provides another avenue for supporting adherence to medication and behavioral migraine management.
This review contains 6 figures, 10 tables, and 52 references.
Key words: Anxiety; behavior; biofeedback; cognitive-behavioral therapy; depression; migraine; psychology; relaxation; sleep; stress; breathing exercises
- 7
Difficult to Treat (refractory) Chronic Migraine: Outpatient Approaches
By Lawrence Robbins, MD, (retired)
Purchase PDFDifficult to Treat (refractory) Chronic Migraine: Outpatient Approaches
- LAWRENCE ROBBINS, MD, (RETIRED) Assistant Professor of Neurology, Dept. of Neurology, University of Illinois; (retired) Assistant Professor of Neurology, Dept. of Neurology, Rush Medical College, Chicago, Il
Purchase PDFThis comprehensive review addresses the many challenges in treating refractory migraine. Issues relating to pathophysiology are covered. A unique “refractory scale for migraine patients” is introduced. The definition and role of medication overuse headache are presented with a much different perspective than is usually found. Issues outside of medication that are covered include active coping, acceptance, resilience, and catastrophizing. A number of outpatient treatments are thoroughly discussed. These include the role of onabotulinum toxin, the application of polypharmacy, when to employ sphenopalatine ganglion blocks, the role of occipital and trigger-point injections, the implementation of long-acting opioids, the advantages of stimulants, and the possible use of monoamine oxidase inhibitors. Miscellaneous approaches include muscle relaxants, nasal or intravenous ketamine, transcranial magnetic stimulation, memantine, and ergonovine. Finally, many cutting-edge “refractory clinical pearls” are listed.
This review contains 8 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 25 references.
Key Words: Headache, migraine, chronic, refractory, medication overuse, alternative, treatments
- 8
Migraine: Psychiatric Comorbidities
By Todd A Smitherman, PhD; Anna Katherine Black, MA; A Brooke Walters Pellegrino, PhD
Purchase PDFMigraine: Psychiatric Comorbidities
- TODD A SMITHERMAN, PHDAssociate Professor of Psychology, Department of Psychology, University of Mississippi, Oxford, MS
- ANNA KATHERINE BLACK, MAGraduate Student, Clinical Psychology, Department of Psychology, University of Mississippi, Oxford, MS
- A BROOKE WALTERS PELLEGRINO, PHDDirector of Behavioral Medicine, Hartford Healthcare Headache Center, West Hartford, CT
Purchase PDFPsychiatric disorders often co-occur with migraine, and these comorbid conditions compound disability and are risk factors for medication overuse and migraine progression. For these reasons, attention to psychiatric comorbidities in clinical practice is of paramount importance. Assessment of depression, anxiety, and sleep disorders is recommended, focusing on the core cognitive and emotional symptoms of the comorbidities and using measures validated among medical patients. Pharmacologic treatment of migraine and comorbid psychiatric conditions is challenging owing to a lack of agents with proven efficacy for both conditions, side effect profiles that may exacerbate one condition, and potential drug interactions. Existing data suggest that migraineurs with psychiatric symptomatology can obtain positive outcomes with appropriate preventive medications, behavioral interventions for headache or the comorbid condition, or a combination thereof.
Keywords: anxiety, comorbidity, depression, insomnia, migraine, pharmacotherapy, relaxation, stress management
- 9
Migraine: Behavioral Treatment
- ELIZABETH K SENG, PHDAssistant Professor, Ferkauf Graduate School of Psychology, Yeshiva University, New York, NY
- 10
Migraine Epidemiology, Impact, and Pathogenesis - High Yield
By Amy A Gelfand, MD; Dawn C Buse, PhD
Purchase PDFMigraine Epidemiology, Impact, and Pathogenesis - High Yield
- AMY A GELFAND, MDDirector, Pediatric Headache, Division of Child Neurology, Department of Neurology, UCSF Benioff Children’s Hospital, San Francisco, CA
- DAWN C BUSE, PHDAssociate Professor, Department of Neurology, Albert Einstein College of Medicine of Yeshiva University, Assistant Professor, Clinical Health Psychology Doctoral Program, Ferkauf Graduate School of Psychology of Yeshiva University, Director of Behavioral Medicine, Montefiore Headache Center Bronx, NY
- 11
Headache and Facial Pain
- ELIZABETH W. LODER, MD, MPHAssociate Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Chief, Division of Headache and Pain, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 12
Nerve Blocks and Neurostimulation in the Treatment of Migraine
By Matthew S Robbins, MD
Purchase PDFNerve Blocks and Neurostimulation in the Treatment of Migraine
- MATTHEW S ROBBINS, MDAssociate Professor of Clinical Neurology, Albert Einstein College of Medicine, Chief of Neurology, Jack D. Weiler Hospital, Montefiore Medical Center, Director of Inpatient Services, Montefiore Headache Center, Associate Program Director, Neurology Residency, Bronx, NY
- 1
- Categories of Neurologic Diseases
- Cognitive and Behavioral Neurology
- 1
Clinical Aspects of Alzheimer Disease
- DAVID KNOPMAN, MDProfessor of Neurology, Department of Neurology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFThe clinical diagnosis of Alzheimer disease (AD) has been well established, but there is a widespread misunderstanding about the relationship between dementia (a syndrome) and AD (a cause of dementia). AD is the most common etiology that causes dementia in mid- and late life. The prototypical clinical presentation is that of a gradually worsening problem with learning new information, that is, a short-term memory deficit, accompanied by cognitive impairment in other domains, including language, spatial cognition, and executive functioning, as well as changes in personality and behavior. A key element of the diagnosis of dementia is that daily functioning is impaired. The concept of mild cognitive impairment (MCI) as the earliest symptomatic presentation of a dementing illness is now widely accepted. MCI due to AD typically presents with isolated problems with learning and memory without substantial loss of ability to function in daily life. Less common variants of AD are now recognized and include a disorder in which spatial and visual cognitive dysfunction occurs or in which word-finding problems predominate at the onset of symptoms. Although AD as a cause of dementia is the most common among etiologies, AD often co-occurs with other neurodegenerative diseases and with cerebrovascular disease. The presence of multietiology dementia in which AD is a contributor is particularly common in the eighth decade of life and beyond.
This review contains 1 figure, 3 tables, and 28 references
Keywords: Alzheimer disease, cognitive impairment, dementia, mild cognitive impairment
- 2
Pathophysiology of Alzheimer Disease
- DAVID KNOPMAN, MDProfessor of Neurology, Department of Neurology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFGenetic discoveries coupled with neuropathologic investigations initially established the central role for β-amyloidosis in Alzheimer disease (AD). Three dominantly inherited genes (APP, PSEN1, and PSEN2) and one common allelic variant with lower penetrance (APOE) account for the majority of the genetic basis for AD. PET biomarkers for AD have been developed in the past decade and are fundamentally altering our view of the disease. The availability of PET tracers, first for amyloid and now for tau, has enabled researchers to develop a model of AD that begins long before people become symptomatic. In persons destined to develop dementia due to AD, brain β-amyloid levels begin to rise 10 to 20 years earlier. Other imaging changes that might precede symptomatic disease include (1) reductions in brain metabolic activity in a group of temporal and parietal cortical association areas that can be demonstrated by [18F]fluorodeoxyglucose-PET scanning; (2) losses of hippocampal volume as measured on structural magnetic resonance imaging; and (3) loss of cortical thickness or cortical volume in temporal and parietal cortical association areas. All of these changes are greatly accentuated once people become symptomatic. Although mild elevations in tau PET abnormalities can also be seen in presymptomatic individuals, it is only when persons become symptomatic that marked elevations in these abnormalities begin to occur in those same temporal and parietal cortical association areas. Cerebrospinal fluid (CSF) biomarkers provide a complementary view, with CSF β-amyloid levels falling (presumably due to aggregation within the cortex) even before amyloid PET abnormalities are visible. CSF total tau and phospho-tau levels begin to rise when persons are much closer to being symptomatic. The sum of these observations has allowed researchers to gain a far more insightful antemortem view of the pathophysiology of AD in humans than had previously been available from neuropathologic investigations.
Keywords: β-amyloid, cerebrospinal fluid β-amyloid, cerebrospinal fluid phospho-tau, cortical thickness, [18F]fluorodeoxyglucose–positron emission tomography, hippocampal atrophy, preclinical Alzheimer disease, tau protein
- 3
Clinical Aspects of Non-alzheimer Disease Dementias
- DAVID KNOPMAN, MDProfessor of Neurology, Department of Neurology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFThere are a relatively small number of disorders that account for the majority of dementia in the elderly that is not Alzheimer disease (AD): cerebrovascular disease, Lewy body disease (α-synucleinopathies), and the frontotemporal lobar degenerations. Cerebrovascular disease and Lewy body disease account for most non-AD dementia among persons in the eighth decade of life and beyond. These two frequently co-occur with AD but can occur in their pure forms rarely (in the case of dementia associated with cerebrovascular disease) or more commonly (in the case of Lewy body disease). There is no one cognitive or behavioral syndrome associated with cerebrovascular disease; however, attempts to isolate a common theme suggest that cognitive slowing is typical of cerebrovascular contributions to cognitive impairment. Cerebrovascular pathology relevant to cognitive impairment accumulates subclinically more commonly than it causes acute, strokelike declines in cognition. Dementia with Lewy bodies is a multidimensional disorder that includes a nonamnestic dementia, Parkinson disease or at least some parkinsonian features, a disorder of sleep and wakefulness, autonomic disturbances, and depression. The disorders of sleep prominently include rapid eye movement sleep behavior disorder, excessive daytime sleepiness, visual hallucinations, and marked fluctuations in level of alertness. The frontotemporal lobar degenerations are nearly as common as causes of dementia in persons under age 65 as is AD. The group of disorders includes two cognitive syndromes (primary progressive aphasia and behavior variant frontotemporal dementia) and two neuropathologic subtypes (tauopathy and TDP43 proteinopathy) and is associated with three major autosomal dominant genetic mutations (in MAPT, GRN,and C9ORF72).
Key words: dementia with Lewy bodies, frontotemporal lobar degenerations, vascular cognitive impairment
- 4
Management and Therapeutic Issues in the Dementias
- DAVID KNOPMAN, MDProfessor of Neurology, Department of Neurology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFAs of 2016, treatment of Alzheimer disease (AD) dementia and the principal non-AD dementias is entirely palliative. Although there are several drugs approved for the treatment of mild to moderate AD dementia, these drugs—the cholinesterase inhibitors and memantine—have rather modest benefits. In general, nonpharmacologic approaches to the management of patients with dementia emphasize support for the caregiver, attention to safety, and providing a supportive and socially enriched environment for the patient. Depression is common in dementias of diverse etiology; lower doses of later-generation antidepressants are effective in controlling depressive symptoms in patients with dementia. Agitation is not a ubiquitous occurrence in patients with dementia, but physically aggressive behavior, hallucinations, and delusions affect a sizable fraction of patients with dementia. There is much controversy regarding the appropriate medication classes to use in cases of agitation, but the antipsychotic agent quetiapine is often effective and unique among its class in not causing parkinsonism or tardive dyskinesia.
Key words: antidepressants, antipsychotic agents, caregiver support, cholinesterase inhibitors
- 5
Cognitive Disorders Other Than Alzheimer Disease
By Seth A Gale, MD; Kirk R. Daffner, MD, FAAN
Purchase PDFCognitive Disorders Other Than Alzheimer Disease
- SETH A GALE, MDAssociate Neurologist, Division of Cognitive and Behavioral Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, and Instructor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- KIRK R. DAFFNER, MD, FAANChief, Division of Cognitive and Behavioral Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, J. David and Virginia Wimberly Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHigher cognitive functions, such as abstract reasoning, complex decision making, and language, are the mental faculties that separate our species from other animals. When these faculties become impaired as a result of neurologic disease, striking and devastating behavioral changes result. Many neurologic diseases are associated with impaired cognition and behavior, and their etiologies are as varied as their clinical presentations. In this review, the focus is on dementia with Lewy bodies (DLB), the frontotemporal dementias (FTDs), and vascular cognitive impairment (VCI). The review covers the epidemiology and diagnosis of DBB, FTDs, and VCIs, as well as the etiology and genetics. Figures show neuroimaging in DLB, management of DLB, FTLD clinical syndromes, FTLD clinicopathologic correlations: approximate distribution of pathotypes for behavioral-variant FTD and primary progressive aphasia (PPA) variants, PPA-semantic subtype, PPA-logopenic subtype, post-stroke VCI, and subcortical ischemic vascular disease subtype of VCI. Tables list diagnostic criteria for DLB; FTD genetics: gene/protein relationship, clinical syndrome, salient gestures; VCI: clinical and pathologic features of the main subtypes; summary guidance based on VCI prevention studies; and summary guidance based on VCI treatment studies.
This review contains 8 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 254 references.
- 6
Stroke and Other Cerebrovascular Diseases
By Scott E. Kasner, MD, MSCE, FAHA, FAAN; Christina A Wilson, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFStroke and Other Cerebrovascular Diseases
- SCOTT E. KASNER, MD, MSCE, FAHA, FAANProfessor, Department of Neurology, Perelman School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Director, Comprehensive Stroke Center, University of Pennsylvania Health System, Philadelphia, PA
- CHRISTINA A WILSON, MD, PHDAssistant Professor, Department of Neurology, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL
Purchase PDFStroke is a leading cause of neurologic morbidity and mortality, and rapid treatment is key for a good outcome. This review addresses the epidemiology, common presenting symptoms, causes, and treatment of ischemic stroke, intracerebral hemorrhage, and subarachnoid hemorrhage. Current recommendations for the emergent evaluation and treatment of an acute ischemic stroke are highlighted, including recently updated indications and contraindications for intravenous recombinant tissue plasminogen activator administration and recent guidelines for the expanded role of endovascular mechanical embolectomy for stroke due to acute large vessel occlusion. An algorithm of diagnostic evaluations to assist with identification of the cause of ischemic stroke is offered. Evidence-based primary and secondary stroke prevention is discussed, including the ideal choice of antithrombotic based on identified stroke mechanism and optimal risk factor management. Best practice supportive measures for the post-stroke patient are highlighted, including recent guidelines for the management of elevated intracranial pressure. Management of uncommon causes of ischemic stroke is also addressed.
This review contains 7 figures, 9 tables, and 84 references.
Key Words:Intracerebral hemorrhage, ischemic stroke, recombinant tissue plasminogen activator, subarachnoid hemorrhage, antiplatelet therapy, endovascular therapy
- 7
Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
- IMOIGELE P AISIKU, MD, MBAAssistant Professor, Chief Division of Emergency Critical Care, Department of Emergency Medicine, Harvard University, Brigham and Women’s Hospital
Purchase PDFSubarachnoid hemorrhage (SAH) represents a small portion of cerebrovascular disease but a disproportionally large percentage of the morbidity and mortality. The overall prognosis depends on the volume of the initial bleeding, rebleeding, and the degree of delayed cerebral ischemia. The presence of cardiac manifestations and neurogenic pulmonary edema at the initial presentation indicates a higher degree of severity and systemic complications. This review covers the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, diagnosis and treatment, and disposition and outcomes of SAH. Figures show common saccular aneurysm locations, a noncontrast head computed tomographic scan of an SAH, an angiogram and surgical clipping of a broad-based anterior communicating aneurysm, and a three-dimensional reconstruction angiogram of a complex anterior communicating aneurysm with additional imaging of endoscopic stent-assisted coiling of the same aneurysm. Tables list the natural history of unruptured aneurysms and the annual risk of rupture, common clinical features and syndromes related to aneurysm location, the World Federation of Neurologic Surgeons grading system, the Hunt and Hess grading systems, and the Fisher scale.
This review contains 4 figures, 7 tables, and 145 references
Keywords: aneurysm rupture, cerebral aneurysm, cerebral vasospasm, Fisher scale, Glasgow Coma Scale assessment, Hunt and Hess grading criteria, subarachnoid hemorrhage, World Federation of Neurologic Surgeons grading scale
- 8
Multiple Sclerosis and Related Disorders
- J WILLIAM LINDSEY, MDProfessor, Department of Neurology, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFMultiple sclerosis (MS) is a relatively common cause of neurologic symptoms and disability in young adults. The distinguishing pathologic features of MS are loss of myelin and inflammation in the central nervous system (CNS). The myelin sheath is essential for rapid conduction of nerve signals along large-diameter axons. Oligodendrocytes produce and maintain myelin in the CNS, and Schwann cells produce and maintain myelin in the peripheral nerves. In addition to MS, there are a number of related disorders causing demyelination, inflammation, or both in the CNS. This chapter discusses MS and related disorders, including neuromyelitis optica, optic neuritis, acute disseminated encephalomyelitis, transverse myelitis, Behçet syndrome, neurosarcoidosis, inherited demyelinating diseases (leukodystrophies, cerebral autosomal dominant arteriopathy with subcortical infarcts and leukoencephalopathy [CADASIL]), and virus-induced demyelination (progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy, subacute sclerosing panencephalitis). The section on MS covers epidemiology, etiology/genetics, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, management, and prognosis. Figures include organization of the microenvironment of larger-diameter axons, typical magnetic resonance imaging findings in MS and neuromyelitis optica, postgadolinium images of the cervical spine in MS, and an approach to treatment of relapsing-remitting MS. Tables list MS and related disorders, distribution of neurologic deficits at the onset of MS, differential diagnosis of MS, disease-modifying therapies for relapsing-remitting MS, and selected leukodystrophies, as well as diagnostic criteria and selected symptomatic therapies for MS.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 82 references.
- 9
Traumatic Brain and Spinal Cord Injuries
By Geoffrey S.F. Ling, MD, PhD, FAAN; Mohit Datta, MD
Purchase PDFTraumatic Brain and Spinal Cord Injuries
- GEOFFREY S.F. LING, MD, PHD, FAANUniformed Services University of the Health Sciences, Bethesda, MD
- MOHIT DATTA, MD
Purchase PDFTraumatic brain and spinal cord injuries are significant causes of permanent disability and death. In 2010, 823,000 traumatic brain injuries were reported in the United States alone; in fact, the actual number is likely considerably higher because mild traumatic brain injuries and concussions are underreported. The number of new traumatic spinal cord injuries has been estimated at 12,000 annually. Survival from these injuries has increased due to improvements in medical care. This review covers mild traumatic brain injury and concussion, moderate to severe traumatic brain injury, and traumatic spinal cord injury. Figures include computed tomography scans showing a frontal contusion, diffuse cerebral edema and intracranial air from a gunshot wound, a subdural hematoma, an epidural hematoma, a skull fracture with epidural hematoma, and a spinal fracture from a gunshot wound. Tables list requirements for players with concussion, key guidelines for prehospital management of moderate to severe traumatic brain injury, key guidelines for management of moderate to severe traumatic brain injury, brain herniation brain code, key clinical practice guidelines for managing cervical spine and spinal cord injury, and the American Spinal Injury Association’s neurologic classification of spinal cord injury.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 12 tables, and 55 references.
- 10
Epilepsy and Related Disorders
- BARBARA DWORETZKY, MDAssociate Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Chief, Division of Epilepsy, EEG, and Sleep Neurology, Director, The Edward B. Bromfield Epilepsy Program, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- JONG WOO LEE, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Director, ICU EEG Monitoring, The Edward B. Bromfield Epilepsy Program, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFEpilepsy is a chronic disorder of the brain characterized by recurrent unprovoked seizures. A seizure is a sudden change in behavior that is accompanied by electrical discharges in the brain. Many patients presenting with a first-ever seizure are surprised to find that it is a very common event. A reversible or avoidable seizure precipitant, such as alcohol, argues against underlying epilepsy and therefore against treatment with medication. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, etiology, and classification of epilepsy and provides detailed descriptions of neonatal syndromes, syndromes of infancy and early childhood, and syndromes of late childhood and adolescence. The pathophysiology, diagnosis, and differential diagnosis are described, as are syncope, migraine, and psychogenic nonepileptic seizures. Two case histories are provided, as are sections on treatment (polytherapy, brand-name versus generic drugs, surgery, stimulation therapy, dietary treatments), complications of epilepsy and related disorders, prognosis, and quality measures. Special topics discussed are women?s issues and the elderly. Figures illustrate a left midtemporal epileptic discharge, wave activity during drowsiness, cortical dysplasias, convulsive syncope, rhythmic theta activity, right hippocamal sclerosis, and right temporal hypometabolism. Tables describe international classifications of epileptic seizures and of epilepsies, epilepsy syndromes and related seizure disorders, differential diagnosis of seizure, differentiating epileptic versus nonepileptic seizures, antiepileptic drugs, status epilepticus protocol for treatment, when to consider referral to a specialist, and quality measures in epilepsy.
This review contains 7 figures, 17 tables and 38 references
Keywords: Seizures, focal (partial)seizure, generalized seizures, Myoclonic seizures, Atonic seizures, Concurrent electromyographyTonic-clonic (grand mal) seizures
- 11
Encephalopathy and Delirium
- ALLIYA S. QAZI, MDSurgical Critical Care Fellow, Department of Surgery, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA
- JULIANA BARR, MD, FCCMAssociate Professor, Department of Anesthesiology, Perioperative, and Pain Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, and Staff Intensivist and Anesthesiologist, Anesthesiology, Perioperative, and Pain Medicine Service, VA Palo Alto Health Care System, Palo Alto, CA.
Purchase PDFDelirium occurs commonly in critically ill patients. ICU delirium is associated with increased short-term and long-term mortality, increased ICU length of stay, and long-term cognitive deficits in these patients. There are significant health-care costs associated with ICU delirium. Delirium is often overlooked in patients when assessed by clinicians based on clinical judgment alone. The use of a validated delirium assessment tool increases delirium detection rates in patients. ICU delirium is a multifactorial process. Nonmodifiable risk factors include age, dementia, prior coma, emergency surgery or trauma, and a high severity of illness. Modifiable risk factors include benzodiazepine use and blood transfusions. There is no evidence to support the use of any pharmacologic agent for either the prevention or treatment of ICU delirium. Antipsychotics should only be used for symptom management in ICU patients with delirium, and then discontinued when no longer needed. The mainstay of delirium management should be a multi-component, non-pharmacologic strategy aimed at minimizing risk factors. One such multimodal strategy, the ABCDEF Bundle, can significantly decrease the incidence of ICU delirium. Additional research is needed to better understand the pathophysiology and management of ICU delirium.
This review contains 5 figures, 7 tables, and 51 references
Keywords: Delirium, Encephalopathy, Intensive Care, Outcomes, ABCDEF Bundle, ICU Liberation.
- 12
Stroke and Other Cerebrovascular Diseases
By Scott E. Kasner, MD, MSCE, FAHA, FAAN; Christina A Wilson, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFStroke and Other Cerebrovascular Diseases
- SCOTT E. KASNER, MD, MSCE, FAHA, FAANProfessor, Department of Neurology, Perelman School of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Director, Comprehensive Stroke Center, University of Pennsylvania Health System, Philadelphia, PA
- CHRISTINA A WILSON, MD, PHDAssistant Professor, Department of Neurology, University of Florida, Gainesville, FL
- 13
Encephalopathy and Delirium
- ALLIYA S. QAZI, MDSurgical Critical Care Fellow, Department of Surgery, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA
- JULIANA BARR, MD, FCCMAssociate Professor, Department of Anesthesiology, Perioperative, and Pain Medicine, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA, and Staff Intensivist and Anesthesiologist, Anesthesiology, Perioperative, and Pain Medicine Service, VA Palo Alto Health Care System, Palo Alto, CA.
- 14
Epilepsy and Related Disorders
- BARBARA DWORETZKY, MDAssociate Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Chief, Division of Epilepsy, EEG, and Sleep Neurology, Director, The Edward B. Bromfield Epilepsy Program, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- JONG WOO LEE, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Director, ICU EEG Monitoring, The Edward B. Bromfield Epilepsy Program, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 15
Subarachnoid Hemorrhage
- IMOIGELE P AISIKU, MD, MBAAssistant Professor, Chief Division of Emergency Critical Care, Department of Emergency Medicine, Harvard University, Brigham and Women’s Hospital
- 1
- Neuromuscular Diseases
- 1
Motor Neuron Diseases
By Elena Ratti, MD; Merit E. Cudkowicz, MD, MSc; James D Berry, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFMotor Neuron Diseases
- ELENA RATTI, MDClinical Research Fellow, Neurological Clinical Research Institute, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- MERIT E. CUDKOWICZ, MD, MSCChief of Neurology, Massachusetts General Hospital, Julieanne Dorn Professor of Neurology Harvard Medical School, Neurological Clinical Research Institute, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- JAMES D BERRY, MD, MPHAssistant Professor of Neurology, Neurological Clinical Research Institute, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe motor neuron diseases (MNDs) are a family of diseases commonly categorized by their propensity to affect upper or lower motor neurons and by their mode of inheritance. The chapter provides some content on infectious MNDs caused by viral infections affecting the motor neurons in the anterior horn of the spinal cord. However, the chapter devotes most of its attention to the inherited and sporadically occurring MNDs. The majority of research into adult MND focuses on amyotrophic lateral sclerosis (ALS) due to its high prevalence, rapid progression, and phenotypical similarities between its inherited form and its sporadic form. As our knowledge of genetic mechanisms underlying ALS pathology has grown, common themes have emerged. These include abnormalities in RNA biology, axonal transport, protein folding, and inflammatory responses. These themes currently drive much of the direction in ALS experimental therapy development. It is clear that MND is complex and involves several different molecular pathways. Given this complexity, ALS might not be a single disease entity, and if this is the case, treatment approaches may need to be targeted to specific pathologies rather than all ALS patients on a broad scale. Chapter content is enhanced by tables outlining the types of MNDs, criteria for supporting a diagnosis, first-line workup, the genes associated with ALS, ALS efficacy outcome measures, symptom management of ALS, and spinal muscular atrophy classification. Mechanisms of ALS are illustrated, and clinical photographs demonstrate symptoms.
This review contains 5 figures, 14 tables and 253 references
Keywords: motor neuron disease, amyotrophic lateral sclerosis, electromyography, Guillain-Barré syndrome
- 2
Radiculopathies and Neuropathies
- KATHY CHUANG, MDClinical Fellow in Neuromuscular Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital and Brigham and Women’s Hospital, 165 Cambridge Street, Suite 820, Boston, MA 02114
- WILLIAM S DAVID, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Director of the EMG Laboratory and Neuromuscular Diagnostic Center, Massachusetts General Hospital, 165 Cambridge Street, Suite 820, Boston, MA 02114
Purchase PDF“Radiculopathies” are disorders of nerve roots, whereas “neuropathies” are disorders of the peripheral nerve. These disorders may involve single roots or nerves, multiple roots or nerves, and even other aspects of the nervous system. This chapter reviews the anatomy and pathophysiology of the peripheral nervous system; the general approach to radiculopathies and neuropathies, including clinical manifestations and localization, diagnostic studies, and treatment; radiculopathies, including anatomy, cervical radiculopathy, lumbosacral radiculopathy, thoracic radiculopathy, and cauda equina syndrome; and neuropathies, including mononeuropathies and polyneuropathies. Tables describe the innervation of select nerve roots and peripheral nerves, differences between root and nerve lesions, commonly used neuropathic pain medications, distinctive patterns of neuropathy with limited differential diagnoses, differential diagnosis of demyelinating polyneuropathy, drugs that may cause polyneuropathy, and neuropathies associated with diabetes mellitus. Figures show the anatomy of a spinal segment, nerve fascicles, ultrasound images of the median nerve, magnetic resonance imaging of the lumbosacral spine, the Spurling maneuver, and physical examination maneuvers for lumbosacral radiculopathies.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 8 tables, and 77 references.
- 3
Neuromuscular Junction Disorders
- ANTHONY A AMATO, MDChief, Division of Neuromuscular Disease, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- MOHAMMAD KIAN SALAJEGHEH, MDDirector, Peripheral Nerve Clinic, Associate Neurologist, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe three main components of the neuromuscular junction (NMJ) include the presynaptic region, the synaptic cleft, and the postsynaptic region. The NMJ acts as an interface between the motor nerve and muscle by converting the motor nerve electric currents into chemical signals and then back into electric currents in the muscle. This chapter reviews electrodiagnostic testing in NMJ disorders, including repetitive nerve stimulation and single-fiber electromyography. Myasthenia gravis, congenital myasthenic syndromes, Lambert-Eaton myasthenic syndrome, botulism, and organophosphate poisoning and other toxins are discussed, including epidemiology, etiology/genetics, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis. Tables include an overview of neuromuscular disorders, drugs with adverse effects on the NMJ, common immunomodulatory agents used for treatment of myasthenia gravis, congenital myasthenic syndromes, and toxins and venoms. Figures illustrate the NMJ structure and function, structure of the presynaptic and postsynaptic regions, electrodiagnostic studies in NMJ disorders, and dysfunction of the NMJ in acetylcholine receptor myasthenia gravis.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 65 references.
- 4
Myopathies
- THOMAS I. COCHRANE, MD, MBAAssociate Neurologist, Division of Neuromuscular Disease, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- ANTHONY A AMATO, MDChief, Division of Neuromuscular Disease, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFMuscle disease (myopathy) can be acquired or hereditary. Symptoms include skeletal muscle weakness, atrophy, muscle cramps or myalgias, and impaired function of respiratory, pharyngeal, facial, or ocular muscles. Clinicians must identify treatable myopathies and initiate therapy before permanent weakness occurs. For patients with untreatable disorders, proper supportive care, rehabilitation, genetic counseling, and psychological support are critical. This chapter covers common myopathies, including muscular dystrophies; malignant hyperthermia; metabolic myopathies; mitochondrial myopathies and encephalopathies; ion channelopathies, periodic paralyses, and nondystrophic myotonias; and drug-induced myopathies. Clinical presentation, diagnosis, pathogenesis, and therapy are emphasized. Tables describe genetic classification of the limb-girdle and distal muscular dystrophies; proteins involved in myofibrillar myopathy; other distal myopathies; and antirheumatic, antiinflammatory, and immunosuppressive drug-induced myopathy. Figures show the sarcolemmal membrane and enzymatic proteins associated with muscular dystrophies, sarcomeric and nuclear proteins associated with muscular dystrophies, and major metabolic pathways used by muscle.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 107 references.
- 1
- Movement Disorders
- 1
Hyperkinetic Movement Disorders
- DEVIN MACKAY, MDClinical Fellow in Neurology, Massachusetts General Hospital and Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- EDISON MIYAWAKI, MD, PHDAssociate Neurologist, Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe hyperkinetic movement disorders include heterogeneous diseases and syndromes, all characterized by one or a variety of excessive, involuntary movements. The hyperkinetic movement disorders are heterogeneous in clinical presentation, but a rational and practical approach to diagnosis exists based on new genetic correlations and targeted laboratory investigations. Treatments informed by a still-developing picture of motor pathophysiology offer significant benefit for these disorders. This chapter discusses choreiform disorders, including patterns in choreiform diagnosis; tremor disorders; paroxysmal disorders, including tics and myoclonus; dystonias, including monogenic primary dystonias; and pathophysiology and treatment in the hyperkinetic movement disorders. Figures include clinical photos, computed tomography scans, and an algorithm representing cortical-subcortical circuitry. Tables delineate definitions, distinguishing clinical features, medications, genetics, protein products, and treatments associated with various disorders.
This review contains 6 figures, 12 tables, and 145 references.
- 2
Myoclonus
- HIROSHI SHIBASAKI, MD, PHDEmeritus Professor, Department of Neurology and Human Brain Research Center, Kyoto University School of Medicine, Kyoto, Japan
- MARINA A J KONING-TIJSSEN, MD, PHDProfessor, Department of Neurology, University Medical Center Groningen, Groningen, The Netherlands
Purchase PDFMyoclonus is defined as sudden, brief, jerky, shocklike, involuntary movements involving the extremities, face, and trunk, without loss of consciousness. Myoclonus is one of the most commonly encountered involuntary movements, and it can be seen in association with a variety of conditions. This review covers the epidemiology, classification, and diagnosis of myoclonus, as well as a thorough discussion of cortical myoclonus, myoclonus of brainstem origin, myoclonus of spinal cord origin, and myoclonus of undetermined origin. Figures show the principle of jerk-locked back-averaging, example data of jerk-lock averaging, schematic diagrams of cortical reflex myoclonus and spontaneous cortical myoclonus, a polygraphic electromyogram (EMG) recorded from a patient with postanoxic, reticular reflex myoclonus, surface negative slow electroencephalographic (EEG) potentials recorded before psychogenic jerks and voluntary movements mimicking the jerks in a patient with a diagnosis of psychogenic truncal movements, and an EEG-EMG polygraph in a patient with Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease. Tables list the classification of myoclonus based on the estimated site of origin, causes of cortical myoclonus, and causes of progressive myoclonus epilepsy and gene abnormalities.
This review contains 6 figures, 6 tables, and 66 references.
Key words: cortical myoclonus, EEG-EMG polygraph, epilepsy syndromes, involuntary movements, myoclonus
- 3
Ataxias
- HÉLIO A G TEIVE, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Neurology, Internal Medicine Department, Neurology Service, Ataxia Unit, Universidade Federal do Paraná
- ORLANDO G P BARSOTTINI, MD, PHDAdjunct Professor of Neurology, Department of Neurology and Neurosurgery, Division of General Neurology and Ataxia Unit, Universidade Federal de São Paulo
Purchase PDFAtaxia is a disorder of balance and coordination. The most common forms are cerebellar ataxia and afferent/sensory ataxia. Ataxias can be classified as primary or secondary, as well as hereditary, nonhereditary degenerative, and sporadic. This review covers the primary (congenital, hereditary, and nonhereditary degenerative ataxias) and secondary cerebellar ataxias and afferent/sensory ataxias. Hereditary ataxias are classified as autosomal recessive cerebellar ataxias (such as Friedreich ataxia and ataxia-telangiectasia), autosomal dominant cerebellar ataxias (currently known as spinocerebellar ataxias, such as spinocerebellar ataxia type 3 or Machado-Joseph disease), episodic ataxias, X-linked cerebellar ataxias, and mitochondrial ataxias. Idiopathic degenerative cerebellar ataxias include the cerebellar form of multiple system atrophy (MSA-C) and idiopathic late-onset cerebellar ataxias. Secondary cerebellar ataxias or acquired ataxias include ataxias due to exogenous or endogenous nongenetic causes, such as toxic, paraneoplastic, immune mediated, nutritional, infectious, and secondary to focal injury to the cerebellum. Afferent/sensory ataxia represents a special group of ataxias with many possible causes and is associated with peripheral neuropathies, dorsal root ganglionopathies, sensory nerve root involvement, and posterior spinal column involvement. Figures show several clinical and radiologic (magnetic resonance imaging) signs of autosomal recessive, autosomal dominant ataxias, and multiple system atrophy (type C). Tables list the most common neurologic signs of cerebellar and afferent/sensory ataxias, the main forms of autosomal recessive and autosomal dominant cerebellar ataxias, and the most common causes of secondary cerebellar and afferent/sensory ataxias.
This review contains 5 figures, 11 tables, and 98 references.
Key words: afferent/sensory ataxias, ataxias, autosomal recessive cerebellar ataxias, congenital ataxias, nonhereditary degenerative ataxias, secondary cerebellar ataxias, spinocerebellar ataxias
- 4
Tremors
- ALFONSO FASANO, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Neurology, University of Toronto, Morton and Gloria Shulman Movement Disorders Clinic and the Edmond J. Safra Program in Parkinson’s Disease, Toronto Western Hospital, Toronto, ON, Canada
- GÜNTHER DEUSCHL, MD, PHDProfessor of Neurology, Department of Neurology, Christian-Albrechts-University, University-Hospital Schleswig-Holstein, Kiel, Germany
Purchase PDFTremor is the most common movement disorder and denotes a rhythmic and involuntary movement of one or several regions of the body. This review covers disease definition, essential tremor, enhanced physiologic tremor, parkinsonian tremor, dystonic tremor, orthostatic tremor, cerebellar tremor, Holmes tremor, neuropathic tremor, palatal tremor, drug-induced and toxic tremors, functional tremor, rare tremor syndromes, tremorlike conditions, and treatment of tremor. Figures show action tremor assessment, the central nervous system circuits of tremor, magnetic resonance imaging findings in specific tremor conditions, general management of tremor patients, an algorithm for the treatment of parkinsonian tremor, and an algorithm for the treatment of dystonic tremor and primary writing tremor. Tables list types of tremor according to the condition of activation, tremor conditions in newborns and during childhood, clinical features of the most common tremor syndromes, motor signs other than tremor and nonmotor features of essential tremor patients, Movement Disorder Society consensus criteria for the diagnosis of essential tremor, genetic and environmental causes of essential tremor, causes of enhanced physiologic tremor, drugs and toxins known to cause tremor, paroxysmal tremors, pseudorhythmic myoclonus in the differential diagnosis of tremor, and pharmacologic management of essential tremor.
This review contains 6 figures, 7 videos, 15 tables, and 167 references.
Key words: essential tremor, movement disorder, pathologic tremor, physiologic tremor, tremor
- 5
Chorea: Classification, Differential Diagnosis, and Treatment
By James P Battista, MD; Ruth H Walker, MB, ChB, PhD
Purchase PDFChorea: Classification, Differential Diagnosis, and Treatment
- JAMES P BATTISTA, MDMovement Disorders Division, Department of Neurology, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY
- RUTH H WALKER, MB, CHB, PHDMovement Disorders Clinic, Department of Neurology, James J. Peters VAMC, Bronx, NY; Movement Disorders Division, Department of Neurology, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY
Purchase PDFChorea is a common hyperkinetic movement disorder that can have a large differential diagnosis. Causes can include genetic and sporadic etiologies, including metabolic abnormalities, autoimmune, structural, paraneoplastic, psychogenic, and iatrogenic causes. The workup can be challenging due to this large number of possible causes, and can include basic metabolic and specialized blood analysis such as genetic testing, in addition to imaging studies and cerebrospinal fluid analysis. Treatment of symptoms outside the realm of reversible causes can be challenging, and is a major focus of current research. This review covers sporadic causes, genetic causes, and management. Figures show a flowchart for evaluation of patients with chorea, a computed tomography scan of a Huntington disease patient showing caudate head atrophy, brain computed tomography scan showing calcification, and acanthocytosis. Videos show mild and moderate Huntington disease, Huntington disease-like 2, and chorea-acanthocytosis. Tables list metabolic abnormalities that can manifest as chorea, paraneoplastic and nonparaneoplastic syndromes associated with chorea, and reported successful therapies for chorea.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 4 videos, 3 tables, and 108 references.
- 6
Atypical Parkinsonian Syndromes: Tauopathies
By Hee Kyung Park, MD, PhD; Irene Litvan, MD
Purchase PDFAtypical Parkinsonian Syndromes: Tauopathies
- HEE KYUNG PARK, MD, PHDAssistant professor in the Department of Neurology, Inje University Ilsan-Paik Hospital, Goyang, Republic of Korea.
- IRENE LITVAN, MDTasch Endowed Professor in Parkinson Disease Research in the Department of Neurosciences, University of California San Diego, San Diego, CA
Purchase PDFAtypical parkinsonian disorders, which include two common proteinopathies, tauopathies and α-synucleinopathies, are clinically characterized by a progressive parkinsonism that typically does not respond to levodopa therapy and usually associates with early postural instability, falls, and other atypical features not observed in Parkinson disease. Tauopathies refer to neurodegenerative diseases in which there is an abnormal accumulation of hyperphosphorylated tau. The most frequent tauopathies are progressive supranuclear palsy and corticobasal degeneration. Better recognition of the expanding phenotypes of these disorders has led to the development of new diagnostic criteria. Furthermore, better knowledge about the pathogenesis (cell-to-cell transmission of pathologic tau) has resulted in advances in novel disease-modifying therapies that target tau. This review addresses the basic concepts of and recent issues in tauopathies, including their clinical phenotypes, genetic features, biomarkers, and novel experimental therapies.
Key words: atypical parkinsonian disorders, corticobasal degeneration, progressive supranuclear palsy, proteinopathies, tauopathies
- 7
Huntington Disease and Other Genetic Causes of Choreas
By Ainhi Ha, MBBS, PhD, FRACP; Débora Maia, MD; Victor S C Fung, PhD, FRACP; Francisco Cardoso , MD, PhD, FAAN
Purchase PDFHuntington Disease and Other Genetic Causes of Choreas
- AINHI HA, MBBS, PHD, FRACPStaff Specialist Neurologist, Department of Neurology, Westmead Hospital, Westmead, Australia
- DÉBORA MAIA, MDConsultant, Movement Disorders Unit, Neurology Service, The Federal University of Minas Gerais, Belo Horizonte, MG, Brazil
- VICTOR S C FUNG, PHD, FRACPClinical Associate Professor, Sydney Medical School, University of Sydney, & Director, Movement Disorders Unit, Department of Neurology, Westmead Hospital, Sydney, Australia
- FRANCISCO CARDOSO , MD, PHD, FAANProfessor of Neurology, Movement Disorders Unit, Neurology Service, The Federal University of Minas Gerais, Belo Horizonte, MG, Brazil
Purchase PDFThe aim of this review is to provide an overview of Huntington disease (HD) and other genetic choreas with an emphasis on clinical presentation, diagnosis, treatment, and expected outcome. Chorea is a syndrome characterized by brief, abrupt, involuntary movements resulting from a continuous flow of random muscle contractions. The first step in approaching a subject with chorea is to define the underlying etiology because the natural history and management vary accordingly. Age at onset, body distribution, other neurologic features, and family history are important in establishing the cause of chorea. HD is the most common etiology of genetic choreas worldwide. It is a progressive neurodegenerative disorder transmitted as an autosomal dominant trait characterized by a combination of movement disorders, cognitive decline, and behavioral abnormalities that causes progressive disability and death. When an HD phenotype test is negative for this condition, other causes, such as neuroacanthocytosis; spinocerebellar ataxia 17; Huntington disease–like syndrome 2, 3, or 4; benign hereditary chorea; and dentatorubral-pallidoluysian atrophy, as well as others, should be investigated.
This review contains 2 figures, 5 tables, and 112 references.
Key words: Huntington, movement disorders, genetic choreas, neurodegenerative disorder
- 8
Tics
- JUSTYNA R SARNA, MD, PHD Clinical Assistant Professor, Division of Neurology, Department of Clinical Neurosciences, Hotchkiss Brain Institute, University of Calgary, Calgary, AB
- TAMARA PRINGSHEIM, MD, MSC Assistant Professor, Division of Neurology, Department of Clinical Neurosciences, Hotchkiss Brain Institute, University of Calgary, Calgary, AB
Purchase PDFTourette syndrome (TS) was originally described and conceptualized by Gilles de la Tourette in 1885. Since then, our understanding of tic disorders has grown immensely and continues to evolve at a rapid pace. Tics are abrupt, usually brief and repetitive, nonrhythmic movements (motor tics) and sounds (vocal tics). Motor tics can be further subdivided into simple and complex motor tics. Simple tics are sudden, meaningless movements most commonly involving eye blinking, facial grimacing, mouth gestures, and shoulder shrugs. Complex motor tics typically involve a series of stereotyped movements that may appear to be purposeful. Vocal (also called phonic) tics are similarly subdivided into simple and complex types. This review covers disease definition/subclassification, epidemiology, etiology/genetics, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment of tic disorders. Figures show a risperidone safety monitoring template for children, an aripiprazole safety monitoring template for children, and adult antipsychotic safety monitoring recommendations. The video shows how to perform the extrapyramidal symptom rating scale. Tables list classification of tic disorders, medication dosing suggestions, and TS deep brain stimulation guidelines.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 1 video, 3 tables, and 115 references.
- 9
Dystonia
By Carolina Candelaria Ramírez Gómez, MD; Cristian Calandra, MD; Federico Micheli, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFDystonia
- CAROLINA CANDELARIA RAMÍREZ GÓMEZ, MDParkinson Disease and Movement Disorders Unit Hospital de Clínicas “José de San Martín” University of Buenos Aires Buenos Aires, Argentina
- CRISTIAN CALANDRA, MDParkinson Disease and Movement Disorders Unit Hospital de Clínicas “José de San Martín” University of Buenos Aires Buenos Aires, Argentina
- FEDERICO MICHELI, MD, PHD Parkinson Disease and Movement Disorders Unit Hospital de Clínicas “José de San Martín” University of Buenos Aires Buenos Aires, Argentina
Purchase PDFDiagnosing dystonia requires a solid understanding of the phenomenology of this movement disorder as well as successful classification and a systematic search for the etiology. We describe the current definition, classification, and methodology for reaching an accurate diagnosis. This review covers the most relevant clinical features of disorders where dystonia is present, emphasizing the affected genes most recently identified, as well as other pathophysiologic factors involved in the generation of this condition. Finally, advances in medical treatment and surgery for dystonia are discussed.
Key words: antipsychotics, botulinum toxin, combined, deep brain stimulation, dopa-responsive dystonia, dystonia, focal, isolated, neurodegenerative, phenomenology, specific task, triggers
- 10
Parkinsonism and Related Disorders
- ELIZABETH J. SLOW, MD, PHDAssistant Professor, Morton and Gloria Shulman Movement Disorders Clinic and The Edmond J. Safra Program in Parkinson’s Disease, Toronto Western Hospital, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON
- ANTHONY E. LANG, MDProfessor, Morton and Gloria Shulman Movement Disorders Clinic and The Edmond J. Safra Program in Parkinson’s Disease, Toronto Western Hospital, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON
Purchase PDFParkinsonism describes the core clinical criteria of tremor, bradykinesia, rigidity, and postural instability. There is a large differential diagnosis, but the most common cause of parkinsonism is due to Parkinson disease. This review details the epidemiology, etiology/genetics, pathogenesis, diagnosis and differential diagnosis, management, and prognosis of Parkinson disease, dementia with Lewy bodies, progressive supranuclear palsy, corticobasal degeneration, vascular parkinsonism, normal pressure hydrocephalus, and drug-induced parkinsonism.
This review contains 8 figures, 32 tables, and 73 references.
Keywords: Parkinson disease, parkinsonism, levodopa, cogwheel ridigity, multiple system atrophy, dementia, substantia nigra, palsy, neurodegenerative disease, hydrocephalus, Lewy body, Lewy neurite
- 11
Ataxias
- HÉLIO A G TEIVE, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Neurology, Internal Medicine Department, Neurology Service, Ataxia Unit, Universidade Federal do Paraná
- ORLANDO G P BARSOTTINI, MD, PHDAdjunct Professor of Neurology, Department of Neurology and Neurosurgery, Division of General Neurology and Ataxia Unit, Universidade Federal de São Paulo
- 12
Myoclonus
- HIROSHI SHIBASAKI, MD, PHDEmeritus Professor, Department of Neurology and Human Brain Research Center, Kyoto University School of Medicine, Kyoto, Japan
- MARINA A J KONING-TIJSSEN, MD, PHDProfessor, Department of Neurology, University Medical Center Groningen, Groningen, The Netherlands
- 13
Huntington Disease and Other Genetic Causes of Choreas
By Ainhi Ha, MBBS, PhD, FRACP; Débora Maia, MD; Victor S C Fung, PhD, FRACP; Francisco Cardoso , MD, PhD, FAAN
Purchase PDFHuntington Disease and Other Genetic Causes of Choreas
- AINHI HA, MBBS, PHD, FRACPStaff Specialist Neurologist, Department of Neurology, Westmead Hospital, Westmead, Australia
- DÉBORA MAIA, MDConsultant, Movement Disorders Unit, Neurology Service, The Federal University of Minas Gerais, Belo Horizonte, MG, Brazil
- VICTOR S C FUNG, PHD, FRACPClinical Associate Professor, Sydney Medical School, University of Sydney, & Director, Movement Disorders Unit, Department of Neurology, Westmead Hospital, Sydney, Australia
- FRANCISCO CARDOSO , MD, PHD, FAANProfessor of Neurology, Movement Disorders Unit, Neurology Service, The Federal University of Minas Gerais, Belo Horizonte, MG, Brazil
- 14
Tremors
- ALFONSO FASANO, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Neurology, University of Toronto, Morton and Gloria Shulman Movement Disorders Clinic and the Edmond J. Safra Program in Parkinson’s Disease, Toronto Western Hospital, Toronto, ON, Canada
- GÜNTHER DEUSCHL, MD, PHDProfessor of Neurology, Department of Neurology, Christian-Albrechts-University, University-Hospital Schleswig-Holstein, Kiel, Germany
- 1
- Cognitive and Behavioral Neurology
- Neurology in General Medicine and Surgery
- 1
Neurologic Complications of Cancer
By Soma Sengupta, MD, PhD; Eudocia Q Lee, MD, MPH; Patrick Y Wen, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFNeurologic Complications of Cancer
- SOMA SENGUPTA, MD, PHDNeuro-Oncology Fellow, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA
- EUDOCIA Q LEE, MD, MPHInstructor in Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Center for Neuro-Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, and Division of Neurology, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- PATRICK Y WEN, MD, PHDProfessor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Director, Center for Neuro-Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, and Division of Neuro-Oncology, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFNeurologic complications from cancer and its therapies can significantly impact mortality and morbidity. Early recognition and intervention are key to preventing permanent neurologic injury. This review discusses common and uncommon neurologic complications of cancer, including central nervous system metastases, treatment-related neurotoxicities (including immunotherapies), and paraneoplastic syndromes. Workup and management of these neurologic complications are also addressed.
Key words: cancer, chemotherapy, metastases, nervous system complications, paraneoplastic syndromes
- 2
Metabolic Encephalopathy - Part I
By Rick Gill, MD; Matthew McCoyd, MD; Sean Ruland, DO; José Biller, MD, FACP, FAAN, FANA, FAHA
Purchase PDFMetabolic Encephalopathy - Part I
- RICK GILL, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
- MATTHEW MCCOYD, MDAssociate Professor, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
- SEAN RULAND, DOProfessor, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
- JOSÉ BILLER, MD, FACP, FAAN, FANA, FAHAProfessor and Chair, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
Purchase PDFEncephalopathy can range from the acute confusional state to frank coma, and is broadly defined as a constellation of symptoms and signs reflecting diffuse cerebral dysfunction. The potential causes of encephalopathy are vast requiring a thorough initial assessment and systematic diagnostic approach. Obtaining a comprehensive history may be challenging and ancillary sources of information are often helpful in narrowing the differential diagnosis. The general examination may provide hints as to the cause of encephalopathy and the neurologic examination can guide both acute management and focus the diagnostic investigations on specific etiologies which fit the clinical presentation. The systemic manifestations of infection and toxic exposures are common causes of encephalopathy. In sepsis, not only is brain perfusion compromised, multi system dysfunction is common and additional factors related to the specific infection such as hypoxia in pneumonia or secondary CNS involvement can complicate management. An understanding of the common physical examination findings of toxic exposures can aid in the diagnosis and rapid treatment of reversible toxic encephalopathies such as narcotics, benzodiazepines or environmental toxins. Cardiopulmonary dysfunction can lead to hypoxic-ischemic encephalopathy and advances in critical care, and particularly targeted temperature management following cardiac arrest, have improved the neurologic outcome in these patients.
This review contains 2 figures, 3 tables, and 25 references.
Key words: encephalopathy, delirium, ascending reticular activating system, acute confusional state, subclinical seizures, Glasgow Coma Scale, Full Outline of Unresponsiveness (FOUR) Score , hypoxic-ischemic encephalopathy, neuroleptic malignant syndrome, serum neuron-specific enolase
- 3
Uroneurology
By Jai H Seth, MBBS, MRCS, BSc, MSc; Jalesh N. Panicker, MBBS, MD, DM, MRCP
Purchase PDFUroneurology
- JAI H SETH, MBBS, MRCS, BSC, MSCSpecialist Registrar and Research Fellow in Urology, Department of Uro-Neurology, National Hospital for Neurology and Neurosurgery, Institute of Neurology, London, United Kingdom
- JALESH N. PANICKER, MBBS, MD, DM, MRCPConsultant in Uro-Neurology, Department of Uro-Neurology, National Hospital for Neurology and Neurosurgery, Institute of Neurology, London, United Kingdom
Purchase PDFThe function of the pelvic organs, including the lower urinary tract (LUT), is controlled by a complex network of nerves. This leaves patients with neurologic disease vulnerable to LUT and pelvic organ dysfunction. Physicians often come across urogenital complaints in their patients with neurologic disease, the symptoms of which can result in significant distress and loss of dignity and quality of life. Due to the health and economic burden that accompanies neurogenic pelvic organ dysfunction, it is important for clinicians to understand the common forms of dysfunction, essential investigations, and modes of management. This chapter covers bladder dysfunction from a physician’s perspective. Topics include neurologic control of the LUT, large bowel, and sexual functions; male and female sexual response; neurogenic bladder dysfunction and its management; diagnostic evaluation; management of neurogenic sexual dysfunction; management of erectile dysfunction; ejaculatory dysfunction; sexual dysfunction in women; and fecal incontinence. Figures illustrate efferent innervation of the LUT, neurologic detrusor overactivity, a urethral pressure profile in a patient with Fowler syndrome, an example bladder diary, an example bladder scan, and normal and obstructed flow patterns. Tables list common causes of injury at the suprapontine, suprasacral, and infrasacral levels and storage and voiding systems.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 53 references.
- 4
Metabolic Encephalopathy - Part II
By Rick Gill, MD; Matthew McCoyd, MD; Sean Ruland, DO; José Biller, MD, FACP, FAAN, FANA, FAHA
Purchase PDFMetabolic Encephalopathy - Part II
- RICK GILL, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
- MATTHEW MCCOYD, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
- SEAN RULAND, DOAssociate Professor, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
- JOSÉ BILLER, MD, FACP, FAAN, FANA, FAHAProfessor and Chair, Department of Neurology, Loyola University Chicago, Stritch School of Medicine, Maywood, IL
Purchase PDFNormal neurologic function requires a constantly balanced environment of electrolytes. Normal hepatic and renal function is critical in maintaining this balance while removing toxins, maintaining a physiologic pH and regulating the excretion of electrolytes. Nutritional intake provides essential nutrients but deficiencies can lead to characteristic syndromes such as Wernicke's encephalopathy and pellagra and exposure to neurotoxic substances such as heavy metals can lead to encephalopathy. Thyroid and adrenal dysfunction are common endocrine causes of encephalopathy and symptoms can often improve rapidly with treatment. A subset of idiopathic encephalopathy is increasingly being recognized as having an autoimmune basis, often presenting as a paraneoplastic process, and having a constellation of symptoms which can aide in the diagnosis. Timely recognition and treatment of the autoantibodies which target neural structures, with immunosuppressive therapy, can improve outcome in these patients.
This review contains 4 figures, 3 tables, and 42 references.
Key words: osmotic demyelination syndrome,hepatic encephalopathy, renal failure, triphasic waves, dialysis disequilibrium syndrome, Wernicke encephalopathy, Korsakoff syndrome, myxedema coma, Hashimoto encephalopathy
- 5
Injuries to the Neck
- IAN E BROWN , MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Surgery, Division of Trauma, Acute Care Surgery and Surgical Critical Care, Department of Surgery, University of California, Davis, Sacramento, CA
- JOSEPH M. GALANTE, MDAssociate Professor of Surgery, Division of Trauma, Acute Care Surgery and Surgical Critical Care, Department of Surgery, University of California, Davis, Sacramento, CA
- Neurologic Infectious Diseases
- 1
Encephalitis
- SHAMIK BHATTACHARYYA, MDDivision of Neurological Infections, Department of Neurology Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Harvard Medical School Boston, MA
- JENNIFER L. LYONS, MDDivision of Neurological Infections, Department of Neurology Brigham and Women’s Hospital and Harvard Medical School Boston, MA
Purchase PDFIn 2013, the International Encephalitis Consortium proposed clinical criteria for acute encephalitis consisting of 24 hours of altered level of consciousness, lethargy, or personality change and at least three additional supportive features. Although viruses are the most common cause of acute encephalitis, not all encephalitides are acute, viral, or even infectious. Chronic encephalitis can be pathologically similar to acute encephalitis, but the causative agents and clinical manifestations vary. Management of encephalitis is largely supportive; however, for many common encephalitides primary preventive approaches exist. This module reviews the epidemiology, manifestations, diagnosis, management, and prevention of various encephalitides, including herpes family encephalitis (herpes simplex virus, varicella-zoster virus, cytomegalovirus, human herpesvirus 6), arbovirus encephalitis (West Nile virus, eastern equine encephalitis virus, tick-borne encephalitis virus, Japanese encephalitis virus), other encephalitides associated with viruses (influenza virus, human immunodeficiency virus, John Cunningham virus, rabies virus), encephalitides associated with bacteria (Mycoplasma pneumonia, Listeria monocytogenes), and autoimmune encephalitis (acute disseminated encephalomyelitis, paraneoplastic and other autoimmune encephalitides, immune reconstitution inflammatory syndrome). Tables include the International Encephalitis Consortium’s supportive feature of encephalitis, differential diagnosis for magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) findings in the patient with suspected encephalitis, diagnostic considerations for triaging workup of infection-associated encephalitis, differential diagnosis of arboviral infections by location of travel or residence, and preventive strategies for select infectious encephalitis. Figures include MRIs showing patients with herpes simplex encephalitis, varicella-zoster virus, eastern equine encephalitis, HIV, Listeria monocytogenes, acute disseminated encephalomyelitis, acute hemorrhagic leukoencephalitis, and immune reconstitution inflammatory syndrome.
This review contains 8 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 78 references.
- 2
Acute Bacterial Meningitis
- KAREN L. ROOS, MDJohn and Nancy Nelson Professor of Neurology and Professor of Neurological Surgery, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, IN
Purchase PDFAcute bacterial meningitis is a life-threatening infection. By definition, meningitis is an infection of the meninges and the subarachnoid space. Bacterial meningitis is associated with an inflammatory response that involves the meninges, the subarachnoid space, the brain parenchyma, and the cerebral arteries and veins. As such, bacterial meningoencephalitis is the more accurate descriptive term. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, complications, and prognosis of the disease. The discussion of diagnosis covers clinical manifestations, physical examination findings, laboratory tests, and imaging studies. The discussion of treatment covers empirical therapy, specific antimicrobial therapy, and dexamethasone therapy. Graphs compare causative organisms and clinical manifestations of community-acquired meningitis. Illustrations depict proper patient positioning for detecting nuchal rigidity, Kernig sign, Brudzinski sign, and lumbar puncture, as well as a sagittal view of a lumbar puncture needle as it is advanced into the subarachnoid space. An algorithm delineates the approach to the patient with symptoms and signs of bacterial meningitis. Tables outline bacterial pathogens based on predisposing and associated conditions, cerebrospinal fluid diagnostic studies for meningitis, the appearance of the organism on a Gram stain, empirical antimicrobial therapy based on predisposing and associated conditions, recommendations for specific antibiotic therapy in bacterial meningitis, and recommended doses for antibiotics commonly used in the treatment of bacterial meningitis.
This chapter contains 8 figures, 13 tables, 78 references
Keywords: Bacterial meningitis, antibiotics, Kernig sign, Brudzinski sign, nuchal rigidity, headache
- 3
Brain and Spinal Abscesses
- ALLAN R TUNKEL, MD, PHDProfessor of Medicine, Drexel University College of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA, Chair, Department of Medicine, Monmouth Medical Center, Long Branch, NJ
- W MICHAEL SCHELD, MDProfessor of Medicine and Neurosurgery, University of Virginia School of Medicine, Charlottesville, VA
Purchase PDFBrain and spinal abscesses are often devastating infections that can lead to substantial morbidity and mortality if not recognized and treated in a timely manner. The clinical presentation depends upon the route of spread of infection to the central nervous system, location of the lesion, and severity of increased intracranial pressure. Brain abscess is defined as a focal intracranial infection that is initiated as an area of cerebritis and evolves into a collection of pus that is surrounded by a vascularized capsule; patients most often develop brain abscess by contiguous spread, hematogenous dissemination, or trauma. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, management, and prognosis for brain abscess. Also examined are epidemiology and pathogenesis, etiology, diagnosis, management, and prognosis for both cranial subdural empyema and epidural abscess and spinal epidural abscess and subdural empyema. Tables list predisposing conditions and likely etiologic agents in brain abscess; histopathologic findings in the stages of brain abscess formation; presenting symptoms and signs in patients with brain abscess; antimicrobial therapy of brain abscess based on isolated pathogen; predisposing conditions and empirical antimicrobial therapy in patients with presumed bacterial brain abscess; recommended dosages of antimicrobial agents in adults with brain abscess; and normal renal and hepatic function. Figures in this chapter are images of intra-axial fluid collection; a subdural fluid collection; a ring-enhancing subdural empyema; an epidural abscess; a large epidural fluid collection with midline shift; a dorsal epidural collection; and loculated ring enhancement suggesting an epidural abscess. This chapter contains 6 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, 167 references, 5 MCQs.
- 4
Central Nervous System Diseases Due to Slow Viruses and Prions
By Francisco González-Scarano, MD
Purchase PDFCentral Nervous System Diseases Due to Slow Viruses and Prions
- FRANCISCO GONZÁLEZ-SCARANO, MD
Purchase PDFSeveral central nervous system diseases whose common elements include a long incubation period and a progressive clinical course were once called slow virus infections, because most of them are in fact caused by viruses. However, one group of these CNS diseases is now believed to be caused by abnormally configured proteins known as prions; rather than an etiologic designation, therefore, on the whole these diseases are better characterized by their chronicity, their transmissibility, and at this point, their inexorably deteriorating natural history. This chapter reviews the more common of these: HIV-associated dementia (HAD or HIVD), human T cell lymphotropic virus type 1 (HTLV-1)-associated myelopathy, Creutzfeldt-Jakob disease (CJD), progressive multifocal leukoencephalopathy (PML), and subacute sclerosing encephalitis (SSPE), which is associated with a variant of measles virus. Figures illustrate the pathogenesis and the pathology of HIV dementia, propagation of scrapie prion protein (PrP) in brain neurons, and spongiform brain changes of CJD. Tables list the stages of HAD and the clinical and pathologic characteristics distinguishing classic CJD and varient CJD.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 57 references.
- 5
Primary and Metastatic Central Nervous System Malignancies
By Fabio M. Iwamoto, MD; Howard A. Fine, MD
Purchase PDFPrimary and Metastatic Central Nervous System Malignancies
- FABIO M. IWAMOTO, MDAssistant Clinical Investigator, Neuro-Oncology Branch, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD
- HOWARD A. FINE, MDSenior Investigator and Chief, Neuro-Oncology Branch, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD
Purchase PDFAbout 13,000 deaths each year in the United States are attributed to primary central nervous system (CNS) malignancies. An estimated 20% of patients with cancer eventually develop clinically apparent CNS metastases, and an estimated 170,000 cases of brain metastases are diagnosed in the United States yearly. Autopsy studies suggest that as many as 50% of patients dying from advanced cancer may have metastasis to the CNS. This chapter provides an overview of primary and metastatic CNS malignancies with in-depth discussion of gliomas, primary CNS lymphoma, meningioma, brain metastases, leptomeningeal metastases, and metastatic epidural spinal cord compression. Discussions cover epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, and treatment of gliomas, including surgery, radiotherapy, and chemotherapy for both newly diagnosed gliomas and recurrent gliomas. The epidemiology, diagnosis, treatment and prognosis for primary CNS lymphomas are reviewed, as well as the epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis for meningiomas. Epidemiology, diagnosis, and prognosis for brain metastases are briefly discussed, and the section on treatment includes surgery, stereotactic radiosurgery, and whole-brain radiotherapy for patients with three or fewer brain metastases. The sections on leptomeningeal metastases and metastatic epidural spinal cord compression cover diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis. This chapter contains 126 references.
- 6
Acute Bacterial Meningitis
- KAREN L. ROOS, MDJohn and Nancy Nelson Professor of Neurology and Professor of Neurological Surgery, Indiana University School of Medicine, Indianapolis, IN
- 1
- 1
- Special Topics in Neurology
- 1
Women's Neurology
- M. ANGELA O’NEAL, MDDirector of Women’s Neurology, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis review details some of the features important to consider in women with neurologic disease, including medication and disease effects on both reproductive health and pregnancy/fetal development, as well as hormonal effects on neurologic disease. A case-based approach is used to discuss diseases that affect women throughout their life cycle (multiple sclerosis [MS] and epilepsy), disorders that affect only women (eclampsia), and those that affect women preferentially (migraine, cerebral venous thrombosis, reversible cerebral vasospasm, and Alzheimer disease). The epidemiology, differential diagnosis, pathophysiology, management, and prognosis are reviewed for each disorder. Tables include US Food and Drug Administration pharmaceutical pregnancy categories, learning objectives, migraine with aura, alternative diagnostic criteria for migraine without aura, migraine aura versus transient ischemic attacks, red flags to secondary headache, abortive headache therapy in pregnancy, migraine preventive medications and pregnancy, MS therapies in pregnancy, pregnancy consulting points for MS patients on a disease-modifying therapy, and general recommendations for women with epilepsy and pregnancy. Figures show fluid-attenuated inversion recovery and gradient echo magnetic resonance images of the right anterior parietal region; a magnetic resonance venogram demonstrating occlusion in the superior sagittal sinus; posterior reversible encephalopathy syndrome; and computed tomographic (CT) images of a hemorrhage in the left parietal region, left frontal subarachnoid bleeding, and left middle cerebral beading.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 11 tables, and 29 references.
- 2
The Neurologic Examination
- NICHOLAS J BEIMER, MDClinical Instructor, Department of Neurology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
- DOUGLAS J GELB, MD, PHDProfessor, Department of Neurology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFAll physicians, regardless of their medical specialty or the setting in which they treat patients, must be able to perform a neurologic examination. In the outpatient office, up to 9 to 10% of all symptoms suggest the possibility of neurologic disease and up to 5% of emergency department visits are due to primary neurologic disease. The neurologic examination is critical in triaging these patients, selecting diagnostic tests, and indicating management. This review covers how to think about the neurologic examination, the screening examination, and diagnosis-focused neurologic examinations with an emphasis on stroke, epilepsy, encephalopathy and coma, neurodegenerative diseases, neuromuscular disease, and functional disorders. The figure shows a conceptual approach to the neurologic examination. The tables list components of the screening neurologic examination, neurologic examination focus points for suspected stroke and suspected epilepsy, lateralization and localization of common seizure semiologies, and neurologic examination focus points for encephalopathy/coma, suspected neurodegenerative disease, suspected neuromuscular disease, and suspected functional neurologic disorders.
This review contains 1 figure, 13 tables, and 14 references
Keywords: Neurologic examination, neurodegenerative disease, neuromuscular disease, neurologic screening
- 3
Neuroimaging for the Clinician
- JOSHUA P KLEIN, MD, PHDChief, Division of Hospital Neurology, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, and Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFModern neuroimaging has revolutionized the practice of neurology by allowing visualization and monitoring of evolving pathophysiologic processes. High-resolution magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) can now resolve structural abnormalities on a near-cellular level. Advances in functional imaging can assess the in vivo metabolic, vascular, and functional states of neuronal and glial populations in real time. Given the high density of data obtained from neuroimaging studies, it is essential for the clinician to take an active role in understanding the nature and significance of imaging abnormalities. This chapter reviews computed tomography and MRI techniques (including angiography and advanced sequences), specialized protocols for investigating specific diagnoses, risks associated with imaging, disease-specific imaging findings with general strategies for interpretation, and incidental findings and artifacts. Figures include computed tomography, T1- and T2-weighted signal intensity, diffusion-weighted magnetic resonance imaging, magnetic resonance spectroscopy, imaging in epilepsy and dementia, extra-axial versus intra-axial lesions, typical lesions of multiple sclerosis, spinal imaging, spinal pathology, vascular pathology, intracranial hemorrhage, and common imaging artifacts. Tables list Hounsfield units, patterns of enhancement from imaging, advanced techniques in imaging, magnetic resonance imaging sequences, and the evolution of cerebral infarction and intraparenchymal hemorrhage on magnetic resonance imaging.
This chapter contains 12 figures, 13 tables and 216 references
Keywords: computed tomography, magnetic resonance imaging, angiography, intracranial hemorrhage, embolism, neuroimaging, multiple sclerosis, spinal imaging
- 4
Principles of Neurologic Ethics
- MATTHEW S. SIKET, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Providence, RI
- JAY M. BARUCH, MDAssociate Professor, Department of Emergency Medicine, Alpert Medical School of Brown University, Providence, RI
Purchase PDFNeuroethics refers to the branch of applied bioethics pertaining to the neurosciences and emerging technologies that impact our ability to understand or enhance a human mind. In the setting of emergency medicine, the clinician will encounter neuroethical dilemmas pertaining to the acutely brain injured or impaired; similar to other ethical decisions encountered in emergency medicine, such neuroethical dilemmas are often complicated by insufficient information regarding the patient’s wishes and preferences and a short time frame in which to obtain this information. This review examines the basis of neuroethics in emergency medicine; neuroethical inquiry; the neuroscience of ethics and intuition; issues regarding autonomy, informed consent, paternalism, and persuasion; shared decision making; situations in which decision-making capacity is in question; beneficence/nonmaleficence; incidental findings and their implications; risk predictions; and issues of justice. The figure shows the use of tissue plasminogen activator (t-PA) for cerebral ischemia within 3 hours of onset and changes in outcome due to treatment. Tables list common ethical theories, virtues/values of an acute care provider, components of informed consent discussion unique to t-PA in acute ischemic stroke, models of the physician-patient relationship, eight ways to promote effective shared decision making, components of capacity assessment, and emergency department assessment of futility.
This review contains 1 figure, 9 tables, and 90 references.
Keywords: Ethics, autonomy, shared decision-making, moral dilemmas, framing, decision-making capacity, beneficence and nonmaleficence
- 5
Neuroimaging for the Clinician
- JOSHUA P KLEIN, MD, PHDChief, Division of Hospital Neurology, Department of Neurology, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, and Assistant Professor of Neurology, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 1
- Neurologic Symptoms
- Oncology
- 1
Head and Neck Cancer
- EVERETT E VOKES, MDChairman, Department of Medicine, Deputy Director, Cancer Research Center, John E. Ultmann Professor of Medicine Radiation and Cellular Oncology, University of Chicago, Chicago, Illinois
- KEVIN C. WOOD, MDFellow, Department of Medicine, Section of Hematology/Oncology, University of Chicago, Chicago, IL
Purchase PDFThe most common histology of non-thyroid head and neck cancer is squamous cell carcinoma. Common risk factors for head and neck malignancies include tobacco and alcohol abuse and viruses, including Epstein-Barr Virus (EBV) and Human Papillomavirus (HPV). Early stage disease is often treated with surgery or radiation therapy alone, while more advanced disease often requires a multi-modality approach including systemic chemotherapy, radiation, and surgical resection. In the curative setting, current clinical trials are evaluating the de-escalation of therapy in HPV-releated head and neck cancer. In the metastatic setting, clinical trials have focused on using immunotherapy agents to improve outcomes. This review chapter will discuss the etiology and common presentations of head and neck cancer, and also analyze recent advancements in the treatment of the disease.
Key words: chemoradiation, head and neck cancer, human papillomavirus, immunotherapy, oropharynx, squamous cell carcinoma, treatment deescalation
- 2
Lung Cancer - Part I
- JEFFREY CRAWFORD, MDGeorge Barth Geller Professor for Research in Cancer, Chief, Division of Medical Oncology, Department of Medicine, Duke University Medical Center, NC 27710
- JOHN STRICKLER, MDFellow, Divisions of Hematology, Medical Oncology, and Cellular Therapy, Department of Medicine, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC 27710
Purchase PDFIn the United States, lung cancer is the second most common cancer, surpassed only by prostate cancer in men and breast cancer in women. But lung cancer is the leading cause of cancer deaths, accounting for 29% and 26% of all cancer-related deaths in men and women, respectively. The four major pathologic cell types of lung cancer are small cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, and large cell carcinoma. Because they have overlapping clinical behaviors and responses to treatment, adenocarcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, and large cell carcinoma are generally grouped together in the category of non–small cell lung cancer (NSCLC). This review discusses both NSCLC and small cell lung cancer (SCLC), including lung cancer in those who have never smoked, prevention of lung cancer, with sections on diagnosis, biomarkers, treatment, and supportive care.
This review contains 7 figures, 10 tables, and 81 references.
Keywords: lung cancer, mediastinoscopy, chemoradiotherapy, TNM staging system, pulmonary parenchyma, segmentectomy
- 3
Cervical Cancer Prevention and Screening
- CAROLYN D. RUNOWICZ, MDAssociate Dean for Women’s Affairs, Professor of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Florida International University, Herbert Wertheim College of Medicine, 11200 S.W. 8 Street, AHC2 693, Miami, FL
- ANDREW QUINN, MDResident, PGY-1, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, New York Hospital, New York, NY
Purchase PDFWith the advent of HPV DNA testing and the availability of HPV vaccinations, the recommendations and rationale for screening and prevention of cervical cancer and its precursors have undergone revision, reflecting this new knowledge and understanding of cervical intra-epithelial neoplasia and the role of HPV. This review incorporates the new guidelines and rationale for current screening guidelines for cervical cancer and in the management of patients with atypical or unsatisfactory cervical cytology.
This review contains 4 figures, 4 tables, and 71 references
Keywords: Cervical cancer, Gynecological cancer, HPV, HPV testing, HPV vaccine, Pap smear, HPV DNA, Human papillomavirus
- 4
Pediatric Hematologic and Oncologic Emergencies
By Rebecca Milligan, MD; Jenny Mendelson, MD
Purchase PDFPediatric Hematologic and Oncologic Emergencies
- REBECCA MILLIGAN, MD
- JENNY MENDELSON, MD
Purchase PDFHematologic and oncologic emergencies that afflict children and adolescents are important for emergency medicine physicians to recognize. Pediatric patients can present with a previous formal diagnosis and have a complication related to their disease or with new symptoms that suggest a hematologic or oncologic process. Oncologic treatments can also lead to life-threatening complications. Recognizing these emergencies is very important for emergency physicians to prevent further morbidity. This review covers common patient presentations, diagnosis, and treatments for hematologic and oncologic emergencies.
This review contains 6 figures, 9 tables and 66 references
Keywords: hematology, oncology, tumor lysis syndrome, hemophilia, pediatrics, von Willebrand Disease, sickle cell disease
- 5
Lung Cancer Part II
- JEFFREY CRAWFORD, MDGeorge Barth Geller Professor for Research in Cancer, Chief, Division of Medical Oncology, Department of Medicine, Duke University Medical Center, NC 27710
Purchase PDFIn the United States, lung cancer is the second most common cancer, surpassed only by prostate cancer in men and breast cancer in women. But lung cancer is the leading cause of cancer deaths, accounting for 29% and 26% of all cancer-related deaths in men and women, respectively. The four major pathologic cell types of lung cancer are small cell carcinoma, adenocarcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, and large cell carcinoma. Because they have overlapping clinical behaviors and responses to treatment, adenocarcinoma, squamous cell carcinoma, and large cell carcinoma are generally grouped together in the category of non–small cell lung cancer (NSCLC). This review discusses treatment of both NSCLC and small cell lung cancer (SCLC).
This review contains 2 figures, 20 tables, and 95 references.
Keywords: lung cancer, mediastinoscopy, chemoradiotherapy, TNM staging system, pulmonary parenchyma, segmentectomy
- 6
Cervical Cancer Prevention and Screening
- CAROLYN D. RUNOWICZ, MDAssociate Dean for Women’s Affairs, Professor of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Florida International University, Herbert Wertheim College of Medicine, 11200 S.W. 8 Street, AHC2 693, Miami, FL
- ANDREW QUINN, MDResident, PGY-1, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, New York Hospital, New York, NY
- 7
Pediatric Hematologic and Oncologic Emergencies
By Rebecca Milligan, MD; Jenny Mendelson, MD
Purchase PDF - Principles of Oncology
- 1
Cancer Epidemiology and Prevention
- ALFRED I. NEUGUT, MD, PHD, FACPMyron Studner Professor of Cancer Research, Professor of Medicine and Public Health, Columbia University Medical Center, New York, NY
- DAVID P WU, MDPostdoctoral Clinical Fellow in Hematology Oncology, Columbia University Medical Center, New York, NY
Purchase PDFRecently surpassing heart disease, cancer is now the leading cause of death (one in four) in the United States. Worldwide, cancer control is becoming increasingly important as life expectancy improves because of lower infant mortality and fewer deaths from infectious diseases. Morbidity and mortality from many forms of cancer can be controlled through primary or secondary prevention. Primary prevention can be defined as risk modification to lower cancer occurrence. Secondary prevention refers to the use of screening tests to detect cancers at early stages. Environmental carcinogens, inherited factors that predispose to cancer, and screening and early detection are covered in major sections. Also included are discussions of infectious agents, occupational carcinogens, iatrogenic causes, carcinogens affecting the reproductive system, and miscellaneous environmental causes. Tables outline established causes of human cancer, common hereditary cancers and syndromes attributable to germline mutations in predisposing genes, and the American Cancer Society’s recommendations for early detection of cancer. This chapter contains 138 references.
- 2
Molecular Genetics of Cancer
- LEIF W. ELLISEN, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe uncontrolled clonal expansion of a cell, which often leads to invasion of surrounding tissues and metastatic spread, produces cancer. A clear histologic and molecular genetic evolution from precancerous lesions to frankly malignant and invasive cancer has been defined for some tumors (e.g., colon and bladder cancers). In rare cases, mutations may occur and be passed on in the germline, resulting in genetic predisposition to cancer (i.e., familial cancer syndromes). Environmental factors are also thought to contribute to the development of cancer. Interactions between environmental factors and subtle germline genetic variations that distinguish individuals may in some cases constitute an important determinant of cancer risk within the general population. Finally, viral infection has been linked to the development of specific cancers. Oncogenes and proto-oncogenes, and germline genetic analysis and cancer risk assessment are covered. Also discussed are genetic alterations and abnormalities, tumor suppressor genes, tumor progression, genetic mechanisms of treatment sensitivity and resistance, and emerging trends in cancer genomics and risk assessment. Figures illustrate activation of proto-oncogenes, the Knudsen two-hit model of tumor initiation, allelic losses in tumors, the retinoblastoma gene (RB1) cell cycle pathway, the p53 cellular stress and DNA damage response pathway, microsatellite instability and DNA mismatch repair, multiple oncogenes and tumor suppressors, tumor progression, cellular senescence and telomerase activation, tumor angiogenesis, chemotherapy drug resistance, targeting of oncogenic proteins by imatinib mesylate, analysis of expression profiles using high-density microarrays, and the spectrum of risk alleles for breast cancer predisposition. Tables outline oncogene and tumor suppressor gene mutations.
This chapter contains 15 figures, 5 tables and 119 references
Keywords: Carcinoma, pathogenesis, molecular biology, tumorigenesis, proto-oncogene, tumor suppressor gene
- 3
Principles of Cancer Treatment
- ERIC H. RUBIN, MDTherapeutic Area Head, Merck Research Laboratories, North Wales
- WILLIAM N HAIT, MD, PHDOrtho Biotech Oncology Senior Vice President and Worldwide Head, Oncology Research and Development, Johnson & Johnson, Raritan, NJ
Purchase PDFThis review is divided into three primary sections dealing with management of cancer patients, the specific basis of cancer treatment, and specific chemotherapeutic agents. The first section outlines the diagnosis, staging, performance status, and treatment of cancer. The discussion of the specific basis of cancer treatment describes cancer biology (including its transformation and proliferation, cell viability and cell death, and invasion and metastases) and the principles of cancer pharmacology. The discussion on pharmacology details dose response and schedule, drug resistance, combination chemotherapy, common toxicities, and pharmacokinetics and pharmacogenetics. Among the specific chemotherapeutic agents discussed are drugs that alter nucleic acid synthesis or function (including DNA alkylating and cross-linking agents, inhibitors of nucleic acid synthesis, and DNA topoisomerase inhibitors); antimicrotubule drugs (eg, vinca alkaloids, taxanes, and estramustine); drugs that affect growth factors, receptors, and signal transduction pathways; drugs that inhibit metastases or angiogenesis; gene-based therapies; and immunotherapies. Tables describe the World Health Organization Performance Scale and chemotherapeutic agents, and figures illustrate targets for new cancer therapeutics and mechanisms of chemotherapeutic drug resistance.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 90 references.
- 4
Emergencies in Hematology and Oncology
By Thorvardur R. Halfdanarson, MD; William J Hogan, MBBCH; Timothy J Moynihan, MD
Purchase PDFEmergencies in Hematology and Oncology
- THORVARDUR R. HALFDANARSON, MDAssistant Professor, University of Iowa Hospitals and Clinics, Department of Internal Medicine, Division of Hemtology, Oncology and Blood & Marrow Transplantation, Iowa City, IA
- WILLIAM J HOGAN, MBBCHAssistant Professor, Division of Hematology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
- TIMOTHY J MOYNIHAN, MDDepartment of Oncology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFWith the rising incidence of malignancies and expanding treatment options, clinicians must learn to recognize and treat emergencies associated with them. Oncologic emergencies can be broadly classified according to organ systems, which can facilitate recognition and management. Pathophysiology, presentation, diagnosis, and treatment are discussed for complications categorized by metabolic emergencies (hypercalcemia of malignancy, tumor lysis syndrome, lactic acidosis), neurologic emergencies (malignant spinal cord compression, brain metastases, and increased intracranial pressure), cardiovascular emergencies (malignant pericardial effusion and tamponade, superior vena cava syndrome), hematologic emergencies (hyperviscosity due to monoclonal proteins, hyperleukocytosis and leukostasis), infectious emergencies (neutropenic fever, neutropenic enterocolitis, fever associated with splenectomy or functional asplenia), and pulmonary emergencies (acute airway obstruction, acute airway hemorrhage). Figures illustrate spinal cord compression, brain metastases, electrical alternans, malignant pericardial effusion, superior vena cava syndrome, hyperleukocytosis, and an algorithm for initial management of fever and neutropenia. Tables cover management of hypercalcemia of malignancy; the Cairo-Bishop definition of laboratory and clinical tumor lysis; grading, risk stratification, and management of tumor lysis syndrome; management of intracranial hypertension and seizures; infection in patients with neutropenic fever; the Multinational Association for Supportive Care in Cancer Risk Index; and indications for the addition of a gram-positive antibiotic to the initial empirical regimen. This chapter contains 181 references.
- 5
Tumor Immunology
By Rachel L Maus, PhD; Haidong Dong, MD, PhD; Svetomir N Markovic, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFTumor Immunology
- RACHEL L MAUS, PHDResearch Fellow, Department of Immunology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
- HAIDONG DONG, MD, PHDConsultant, Associate Professor of Immunology, Departments of Urology and Immunology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
- SVETOMIR N MARKOVIC, MD, PHDConsultant, Professor of Medicine and Oncology, Departments of Oncology, Immunology and Hematology, Mayo Clinic, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFThe immune system has effectively evolved to protect the host against foreign invaders, including bacterial, viral, and parasitic infiltrates. Less clear has been the interaction and the protective effects the immune system mounts against its own infiltrates: cancer cells. Here we consider the dynamic interactions between cancer and the associated host immune response by highlighting the key players involved in engaging an effective antitumor immune response and the mechanisms responsible for enabling the evolution of cancer cells to escape immunosurveillance. By developing an appreciation for the dual function of the immune system in the setting of cancer biology, we also consider the clever strategies that have been employed to uncover tumor targets, including tumor-associated antigens and the mechanisms for enhancing or reengaging the immune system to mount an effective antitumor immune response. Finally, we incorporate these key findings into the context of immunotherapy, a rapidly evolving field aimed at combating tumor escape by enabling the host immune system to regain its tumor-eradicating functions.
This review contains 5 figures, 9 tables and 60 references
Key words: adoptive T cell therapy, checkpoint inhibitors, cytokine therapy, immunotherapy, neutralizing antibodies, tumor immunity, tumor microenvironment, vaccines
- 6
Molecular Genetics of Cancer
- LEIF W. ELLISEN, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 1
- Respiratory Tract Malignancies
- Gastrointestinal Malignancies
- 1
Colorectal Cancer
- CATHY ENG, MD, FACPAssociate Professor, Associate Director of the Colorectal Center, The University of Texas M.D. Anderson Cancer Center, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFColorectal cancer is the third most common cancer and the second leading cause of cancer death in the United States. Although environmental factors, including diet and lifestyle, clearly play a role in the etiology of colorectal cancer, as many as 25% of patients with colorectal cancer have a family history of the disease, which suggests the involvement of a genetic factor. Inherited colon cancers can be divided into two main types: the well-studied but rare familial adenomatous polyposis (FAP) syndrome, and the increasingly well-characterized, more common hereditary nonpolyposis colorectal cancer (HNPCC, a.k.a. Lynch Syndrome). The prevention, screening, diagnosis, and treatment of cancers of the colon and rectum are covered in this chapter. Figures illustrate various forms of adenomatous polyps, the tumor, node, metastasis (TNM) staging system for colorectal cancer, and the five-year survival rate in patients with colorectal carcinoma. Tables describe risk factors; possible chemopreventive agents; evidence supporting the effectiveness of screening tests; features and usage issues with different fecal occult blood tests; recommendations for early detection, screening, and surveillance for patients at different levels of risk; colorectal cancer staging systems; indicators of poor prognosis; and chemotherapeutic and biologic agents in the treatment of colorectal cancer. This chapter contains 197 references.
- 2
Pancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
By Davendra Sohal, MD, MPH; Weijing Sun, MD; Daniel Haller, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
- DAVENDRA SOHAL, MD, MPHFellow, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Abramson Cancer Center, Philadelphia, PA
- WEIJING SUN, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- DANIEL HALLER, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFAccording to 2009 estimates from the American Cancer Society, cancers originating in the gastrointestinal tract rank second in both incidence and cancer-related deaths. One in four deaths in the United States is caused by cancer, with 25% of cancer-related deaths caused by gastrointestinal (GI) malignancies; more than 50% of these deaths are caused by cancer of the pancreas, stomach, esophagus, liver, or biliary tract. Recent advances in molecular biology, medical genetics, and imaging and endoscopic techniques, as well as the development of antitumor agents, have significantly altered the approaches to the prevention, diagnosis, and treatment of GI cancers. The chapter covers esophageal, gastric, pancreatic, hepatocellular, biliary tract, and anal cancers, as well as GI stromal tumors and gastric lymphoma. Coverage of all cancers includes diagnosis and treatment; various sections include information on epidemiology, etiology, risk factors, screening and prevention, molecular mutations, pathogenesis, and/or metastatic disease. Figures depict a barium esophagogram showing squamous cell carcinoma; imaging of esophageal cancer, gastric cancer, and pancreatic cancer; a pedigree of a family with inactivation of germline mutation of E-cadherin; hereditary gastric cancer; gastric cancer survival rates after gastrectomy; axial T1-weighted magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) showing cancer of the pancreatic head; and T1- and T2-weighted MRIs of intrahepatic bile duct carcinoma. Tables provide information on new cases and mortality from GI cancer in 2009; guidelines for diagnosis and surveillance of Barrett esophagus; the declining incidence of gastric cancer in Japan, Slovenia, and the United States; TNM staging of gastric cancer, pancreatic cancer, and hepatocellular carcinoma; the incidence of familial pancreatic carcinoma; molecular mutations involved in pancreatic cancer; staging of pancreatic intraepithelial neoplasia; and the Chinese University Prognostic Index.
This review contains 9 figures, 39 tables, and 173 references.
Keywords: biliary cancer, carcinoma, endoscopic, esophageal, gastric, hepatic, lesions, lymphoma, malignant, mutations
- 3
Pancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
By Davendra Sohal, MD, MPH; Weijing Sun, MD; Daniel Haller, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPancreatic, Gastric, and Other Gastrointestinal Cancers
- DAVENDRA SOHAL, MD, MPHFellow, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Abramson Cancer Center, Philadelphia, PA
- WEIJING SUN, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- DANIEL HALLER, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Hematology-Oncology, Department of Medicine, Abramson Cancer Center, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- 1
- Breast, Gynecologic, and Genitourinary Malignancies
- 1
Breast Cancer
- NANCY E DAVIDSON, MDDirector, University of Pittsburgh Cancer Institute and UPMC Cancer Center, Hillman Professor of Oncology, University of Pittsburgh, Pittsburgh, PA
Purchase PDFInvasive breast cancer, the most common nonskin cancer in women in the United States, will be diagnosed in 235,000 women in this country in 2013 and is expected to result in approximately 40,000 deaths. Incidence and mortality reached a plateau and appear to be dropping in both the United States and parts of western Europe. This decline has been attributed to several factors, such as early detection through the use of screening mammography and appropriate use of systemic adjuvant therapy, as well as decreased use of hormone replacement therapy. However, the global burden of breast cancer remains great, and global breast cancer incidence increased from 641,000 in 1980 to 1,643,000 in 2010, an annual rate of increase of 3.1%. This chapter examines the etiology, epidemiology, prevention, screening, staging, and prognosis of breast cancer. The diagnoses and treatments of the four stages of breast cancer are also included. Figures include algorithms used for the systemic treatment of stage IV breast cancer and hormone therapy for women with stage IV breast cancer. Tables describe selected outcomes from the National Surgical Adjuvant Breast and Bowel Project (NSABP) P-1 and P-2 chemoprevention trials, tamoxifen chemoprevention trials for breast cancer, the TNM staging system and stage groupings for breast cancer, some commonly used adjuvant chemotherapy regimens, an algorithm for suggested treatment for patients with operable breast cancer from the 2011 St. Gallen consensus conference, guidelines for surveillance of asymptomatic early breast cancer survivors from the American Society of Clinical Oncology, and newer agents for metastatic breast cancer commercially available in the United States.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 8 tables, and 108 references.
- 2
Gynecologic Cancer
- STEPHEN A CANNISTRA, MDProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Director, Gynecologic Medical Oncology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- CHRISTINA I HEROLD, MDInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Gynecologic Medical Oncology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis chapter focuses on the three types of gynecologic cancer—epithelial cancer of the ovary, cancer of the uterine cervix, and cancer of the endometrium (uterine cancer)—and reviews their epidemiology, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, surgical features, and staging, as well as their risk factors and clinical features. Also discussed are methods of treatment and the management of relapse. Epithelial ovarian cancer occurs at a mean age of 60 years in the United States and is the most lethal of gynecologic tract tumors. However, a recent trial has demonstrated a survival advantage through the use of intraperitoneal chemotherapy for appropriate patients with optimally debulked ovarian cancer.
Invasive cervical cancer is uncommon in developed countries, partly because of the effectiveness of Pap smear screening. Nevertheless, cancer of the uterine cervix is the third most common gynecologic cancer diagnosis and cause of death among gynecologic cancers in the United States. However, for women with early-stage cervical cancer, data from several randomized trials indicate an improvement in response rate and survival through the use of combination platinum-based regimens for platinum-sensitive relapse. Also noted is an improvement in survival using combined-modality chemoradiation in appropriate patients with locally advanced cervical cancer.
Endometrial cancer is the most frequent tumor of the gynecologic tract; it is estimated that it occurred in over 46,000 women and caused more than 8,000 deaths in the United States in 2011. Recent data indicate improvement in survival using adjuvant platinum-based chemotherapy in appropriate patients with high-risk endometrial cancer.
Tables in this chapter review the common histologic types of epithelial ovarian cancer, selected signs and symptoms of ovarian cancer, the International Federation of Gynecology and Obstetrics (FIGO) staging system for epithelial ovarian cancer, differential diagnosis of a complex cyst detected by transvaginal sonography, selected adverse prognostic factors in epithelial ovarian cancer, common chemotherapy agents used in the treatment of epithelial ovarian cancer, the FIGO surgical staging of endometrial cancer, and postoperative management considerations for patients with uterine cancer. Figures illustrate the four histologic subtypes of epithelial ovarian cancer, the intraoperative appearance of stage III epithelial ovarian cancer, and FIGO staging of cervical cancer.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 8 tables, and 150 references.
- 3
Prostate Cancer
- JONATHAN E. ROSENBERG, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- PHILIP W KANTOFF, MDProfessor of Medicine, Dana-Faber Cancer Institute, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFProstate cancer is the most commonly diagnosed noncutaneous malignancy in men in the United States. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, pathogenesis, and diagnosis of prostate cancer, as well as risk factors, the use of digital rectal examination and prostate-specific antigen measurement for screening, and staging for the disease. Also reviewed are the natural history of untreated prostate cancer; the treatment of localized and advanced prostate cancer, including prostatectomy, radiation therapy, and androgen deprivation therapy; and the prevention of prostate cancer. Figures illustrate the incidence rates of prostate cancer by race, age-adjusted and/or age-specific cancer of the prostate, the risk of a diagnosis in 20 years (based on being cancer free at certain ages), the 5-year survival rate, and the overall survival in patients with early prostate cancer treated with observation or radical prostatectomy. Tables in this chapter review the clinical staging definitions and the combined-modality staging approach to prostate cancer.
This chapter contains 6 figures, 8 tables and 104 references
Keywords: Prostate cancer, digital rectal exam, PSA, prostatectomy, men's health, prostate cancer screening
- 4
Management of Bladder Cancer
- JOAQUIM BELLMUNT, MD, PHDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Lank Center for Genitourinary Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute/Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- ROSA NADAL, MD, PHDClinical Fellow Genitourinary Oncology, The Sidney Kimmel Comprehensive Cancer Center at Johns Hopkins, Baltimore, MD
Purchase PDFBladder cancer is the fourth most common cancer in men and the tenth most common in women. Patients commonly present with painless hematuria. Urinary frequency, urinary tract infection, upper tract obstruction, and pain are also possible; however, the physical examination of the patients is often unremarkable. Clinical diagnosis depends on urine cytology, bladder ultrasonography, and office cystoscopy. This review describes the epidemiology, pathology and natural history, clinical presentation and workup, staging and grading, non–muscle-invasive bladder cancer, bladder preservation strategies, nontraditional approaches, chemotherapy for metastatic disease, immunotherapy, and predictive factors of response to chemotherapy for bladder cancer. Figures show representative images of urothelial cell carcinoma, diagrams showing a cystoscopy for a man and bladder cancer staging, urinary diversion, and computed tomographic scans of a patient with hepatic metastases from bladder cancer before and after treatment with gemcitabine-cisplatin. Tables list the tumor-node-metastasis staging system for bladder cancer, the histologic classification of tumors of the urinary tract (WHO 1973 versus WHO 2004), risk group stratification based on the European Organization for Research and Treatment of Cancer Scoring System, types of bacillus Calmette-Guérin failure/recurrence and treatment recommendations, unfavorable factors for bladder preservation chemoradiation, consensus criteria for patients unfit for cisplatin-based regimens, and first-line combination chemotherapy regimens.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 80 references.
- 5
Clinical Management of Renal Cell Carcinoma
By Rana R. McKay, MD; Marina D Kaymakcalan, PharmD; Guillermo De Velasco, MD; Suzanne S Mickey, BS; Andre P Fay, MD; Toni K. Choueiri, MD
Purchase PDFClinical Management of Renal Cell Carcinoma
- RANA R. MCKAY, MDDepartment of Medical Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, 450 Brookline Avenue, Boston, MA
- MARINA D KAYMAKCALAN, PHARMDDepartment of Medical Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, 450 Brookline Avenue, Boston, MA
- GUILLERMO DE VELASCO, MDDepartment of Medical Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, 450 Brookline Avenue, Boston, MA
- SUZANNE S MICKEY, BSDepartment of Medical Oncology, Dana Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA
- ANDRE P FAY, MDDepartment of Medical Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, 450 Brookline Avenue, Boston, MA
- TONI K. CHOUEIRI, MDDepartment of Medical Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, 450 Brookline Avenue, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFRenal cell carcinoma (RCC) is the most common type of kidney cancer, and its incidence has continued to increase in the United States. Well-defined risk factors include smoking, obesity, and hypertension. There have been significant developments in the management of RCC over the past decade, pertaining to both patients with localized disease and those with advanced disease. In particular, agents targeting the vascular endothelial growth factor and mammalian target of rapamycin pathways have considerably improved survival for patients with metastatic disease. This review covers the epidemiology and pathogenesis of RCC, management of both localized and advanced disease, selection and sequencing of systemic therapy, non–clear cell RCC, and new targets and future directions for RCC. Figures show the morphologic features of RCC, the pathogenesis of RCC, and a huge primary RCC occupying a substantial part of the abdominal cavity. Tables include a summary of clinical and molecular characteristics of hereditary RCC syndromes and randomized phase III trials of approved first-line treatments in metastatic RCC.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 59 references.
- 6
Late Stage Prostate Cancer
- KARTHIK GIRIDHAR, MDOncology Fellow, Mayo Clinic, Division of Medical Oncology, Rochester, MN
- MANISH KOHLI, MDProfessor of Oncology, Mayo Clinic, Division of Medical Oncology, Rochester, MN
Purchase PDFProstate cancer remains the second leading cause of cancer death in men and encapsulates a wide spectrum of disease. This review describes recent advances in genomic sciences and summarizes the impact of emerging molecular profiling–based clinical applications in the diagnosis and management of early and advanced prostate cancer. It addresses the controversial guidelines surrounding prostate-specific antigen–based screening for prostate cancer and summarizes the recommendations from six different agencies. This review highlights landmark clinical trials in metastatic prostate cancer, focusing on developments within the last 5 years. It also summarizes the rationale for earlier use of chemotherapy for newly diagnosed prostate cancer (chemohormonal therapy) and gives an overview of ongoing research into the development of novel genome-based therapeutics.
This review contains 4 figures, 7 tables, and 53 references.
Key words: castration resistant, molecular profiling, prostate cancer, screening guidelines, treatment options
- 7
Prostate Cancer
- JONATHAN E. ROSENBERG, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- PHILIP W KANTOFF, MDProfessor of Medicine, Dana-Faber Cancer Institute, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 1
- Other Solid Tumors
- 1
Sarcomas of Soft Tissue and Bone
By Adam Lerner, MD; Huihong Xu, MD; Karen H Antman, MD
Purchase PDFSarcomas of Soft Tissue and Bone
- ADAM LERNER, MDProfessor of Medicine and Pathology, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- HUIHONG XU, MDAssistant Professor of Pathology, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- KAREN H ANTMAN, MDDean, Boston University School of Medicine, Provost, Boston University Medical School Campus, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFSarcomas originate from bone or soft tissue. The most common bone sarcomas are osteosarcomas, Ewing sarcomas, and chondrosarcomas. Soft tissue sarcomas develop in fibrous tissue, fat, muscle, blood vessels, and nerves. Historically, soft tissue sarcomas of the trunk and extremities were reported separately from those of visceral organs (e.g., gastrointestinal and gynecologic sarcomas). This chapter discusses the classification, epidemiology, diagnosis, staging, and treatment of sarcomas of bone and cartilage, and classic soft tissue sarcomas. Management of Kaposi sarcoma, gastrointestinal stromal tumors (GISTs), mesothelioma, and rhabdomyosarcoma is also described. Figures include images of patients with osteosarcoma, liposarcoma, uterine leiomyosarcoma, GIST, and osteosarcoma in a patient with Paget disease of bone. Tables list epidemiologic features of sarcomas, a summary of sarcomas by histology, familial syndromes associated with increased risk of sarcoma, survival rates in sarcoma patients, staging of soft tissue sarcomas, and results of a meta-analysis of doxorubicin-based adjuvant chemotherapy for localized resectable soft tissue sarcoma. This chapter contains 126 references.
- 2
Management of Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors
By César Serrano, MD, PhD; Suzanne George, MD
Purchase PDFManagement of Gastrointestinal Stromal Tumors
- CÉSAR SERRANO, MD, PHDHead, Sarcoma Translational Research Laboratory and Sarcoma Unit, Oncology Department, Vall d’Hebron Institute of Oncology, Vall d’Hebron University Hospital, Barcelona, Spain
- SUZANNE GEORGE, MDClinical Director, Center for Sarcoma and Bone Oncology, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute/Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFGastrointestinal stromal tumors (GISTs) are the most common tumors of mesenchymal origin in the gastrointestinal tract. These tumors are believed to arise from the interstitial cells of Cajal. The oncogenic activation of KIT or platelet-derived growth factor receptor–α is common to these tumors, and GISTS are considered to be a successful model for rational development of personalized treatments against oncogenic driver mutations in cancer. This review covers the epidemiology, etiology and genetics, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, complications, and prognosis of GISTs. Figures show KIT primary and secondary mutations, the clinical and molecular progression of GISTs, a contrast-enhanced computed tomographic scan showing a gastric GIST presenting as a huge abdominal mass, a magnetic resonance image showing a rectal GIST at baseline and responding to neoadjuvant imatinib after 8 months of treatment, and hematoxylin-eosin stain of a fusocellular and an epithelioid GIST. Tables list demographics and clinical characteristics, associated genetic syndromes, relevant differential diagnosis, risk stratification systems used in GIST, and the comparative activity of approved regimens for GIST.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 74 references.
- 3
Primary and Metastatic Central Nervous System Malignancies
By Fabio M. Iwamoto, MD; Howard A. Fine, MD
Purchase PDFPrimary and Metastatic Central Nervous System Malignancies
- FABIO M. IWAMOTO, MDAssistant Clinical Investigator, Neuro-Oncology Branch, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD
- HOWARD A. FINE, MDSenior Investigator and Chief, Neuro-Oncology Branch, National Cancer Institute, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD
Purchase PDFAbout 13,000 deaths each year in the United States are attributed to primary central nervous system (CNS) malignancies. An estimated 20% of patients with cancer eventually develop clinically apparent CNS metastases, and an estimated 170,000 cases of brain metastases are diagnosed in the United States yearly. Autopsy studies suggest that as many as 50% of patients dying from advanced cancer may have metastasis to the CNS. This chapter provides an overview of primary and metastatic CNS malignancies with in-depth discussion of gliomas, primary CNS lymphoma, meningioma, brain metastases, leptomeningeal metastases, and metastatic epidural spinal cord compression. Discussions cover epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, and treatment of gliomas, including surgery, radiotherapy, and chemotherapy for both newly diagnosed gliomas and recurrent gliomas. The epidemiology, diagnosis, treatment and prognosis for primary CNS lymphomas are reviewed, as well as the epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis for meningiomas. Epidemiology, diagnosis, and prognosis for brain metastases are briefly discussed, and the section on treatment includes surgery, stereotactic radiosurgery, and whole-brain radiotherapy for patients with three or fewer brain metastases. The sections on leptomeningeal metastases and metastatic epidural spinal cord compression cover diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis. This chapter contains 126 references.
- 1
- 1
- Organ Systems: Anatomy & Physiology
- 1
Cardiac System
- DAVID C MAUCHLEY, MD
Purchase PDFThe circulatory system, which consists of the heart, arterial system, venous system, and lymphatics, constitutes a complicated network of vessels and ducts that are responsible for the delivery of oxygenated blood to the body and return of deoxygenated blood to the heart and lungs. The heart is at the center of the circulatory system, and its pumping mechanism provides energy and nutrition to all organs in the body. This review focuses on the anatomy and physiology of the heart and describes anatomic details that are important to the planning of many common cardiac operations.
This review contains 28 figures, and 25 references.
Key words: aortic root, aortic valve, atrial septum, atrioventricular node, coronary artery, fibrous skeleton of heart, mitral valve, myocardium, pericardium, pulmonic valve, sinoatrial node, tricuspid valve, ventricular septum
- 2
The Renal System
- JAYME E. LOCKE, MD, MPH, FACSAssistant Professor of Surgery, Division of Transplantation, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- JOHN T KILLIAN JR, MDResident, General Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFThis updated review on the renal system provides a concise overview of the topics most important to the general surgeon. Anatomic topics have been expanded to also include variant anatomy and surgical approaches. There is a new focus on the accuracy and utility of equations for estimating the glomerular filtration rate, as well as supplementation and pharmacology for the general surgeon with discussions of vitamin D and erythropoietin. Acute kidney injury is defined; its pathophysiology is discussed; and its management is outlined, highlighting evidence-based practice. Finally, urologic surgery is addressed with a focus on donor nephrectomy and its consequences, as well as the management of iatrogenic ureteral injuries.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 68 references.
Key words: acute kidney injury; contrast nephropathy; erythropoiesis-stimulating agents; estimated glomerular filtration rate; iatrogenic ureteral injury; laparoscopic donor nephrectomy; renal surgical anatomy; vitamin D supplementation
- 3
The Esophagus
- BENJAMIN WEI, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Cardiothoracic Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- MICHAEL FRANK GLEASON, MDGeneral Surgery Resident, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama-Birmingham Medical Center, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFThe esophagus is a tubular structure spanning from the posterior pharynx, through the thorax, and terminating in the stomach. It arises from endodermal foregut tissue. Its submucosal muscular layers are initially striated, transitioning to smooth muscle in more distal areas. Due to the distance in the body it traverses, the esophagus derives its blood and nerve supply from several structures. The role as a conduit from mouth to stomach necessitates secretory and barrier functions, as well as sphincters for protection from anterograde flow. Various modalities of esophageal test exist, ranging from fluoroscopy, to invasive endoscopy capable of obtaining tissue samples, to probes that detect pH and muscle tone, all of which play roles in identifying various pathologic processes.
This review contains 12 figures, and 22 references.
Key words: abdomen, endoscopy, esophagography, esophagus, impedance, lower sphincter, manometry, upper sphincter
- 4
The Endocrine System: Thyroid and Parathyroid
By Samantha J. Baker, MD; John R. Porterfield Jr, MD, FACS
Purchase PDFThe Endocrine System: Thyroid and Parathyroid
- SAMANTHA J. BAKER, MDGeneral Surgery Resident, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- JOHN R. PORTERFIELD JR, MD, FACSAssociate Professor, Section of Endocrine Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFIn the adult, the thyroid gland is located in the central compartment of the neck on the anterolateral aspect of the cervical trachea between the carotid sheaths. Patients with thyroid disorders require attentive care, and safe, successful surgery of the thyroid is dependent on an intimate knowledge of the anatomy and physiology of the gland. This review discusses nerve branches and function; arterial and venous blood supply; lymphatic drainage; histology; physiology; and thyroid hormone synthesis, secretion, and regulation. Nerve injuries and postoperative complications are summarized, as are functions of thyroid hormones. A thorough understanding of these relationships is imperative for proper medical recommendations, surgical procedure selection, and meticulous surgical technique to avoid complications. To provide safe care of patients with thyroid disorders, treating physicians must embrace the intricate details of the anatomy and physiology of this unique gland to avoid potentially devastating complications.
This review contains 5 figures, 3 tables, and 29 references.
Key Words: brachial cleft, lymphatic zones, recurrent laryngeal nerve, superior laryngeal nerve, nerve injury, thyroglossal duct cysts, thyroid, thyroidectomy
- 5
The Liver and Portal System
- JARED A WHITE, MD, FACSAssociate Professor, Department of Surgery, Liver Transplant Program, Surgical Director, Medical University of South Carolina
Purchase PDFUnderstanding of the anatomy and physiology of the liver and techniques for safe anatomic and nonanatomic liver resections has evolved over the past several decades. The liver is composed of a complex arterial and portal venous inflow, which has several important variants that are crucial for the surgeon to understand when planning hepatic resections, both anatomic and nonanatomic. In addition, intra- and extrahepatic biliary configurations may be encountered, and variants must be recognized to prevent complications during common surgical procedures, such as cholecystectomy and liver resection. The liver is responsible for numerous metabolic, homeostatic, and immunologic processes throughout the body. It is crucial for the practicing physician and surgeon to have a fundamental understanding of hepatic anatomy and physiology when treating patients with derangements in liver structure and function.
Key words: bile duct, bilirubin, bilirubin metabolism, hepatic artery, hepatic blood flow, hepatic parenchyma microstructure, liver anatomy, portal hypertension, portal vein
- 6
Gallbladder and Biliary Tree
- STEPHEN GRAY, MD, MSPH
Purchase PDFUnderstanding gallbladder and biliary anatomy is paramount to the surgeon. A comprehensive understanding of the gallbladder and biliary tree is necessary to properly treat a variety of surgical pathologies. Understanding the usual anatomy and the variations will help prevent iatrogenic biliary injuries. Moreover, anatomic consideration dictates oncologic therapies for gallbladder and biliary tract malignancies.
Key words: bile duct, bile salts, biliary tree, cholecystectomy, gallbladder
- 7
Anatomy and Physiology of the Pancreas
- JOHN A. WINDSOR, MBCHB, MD, FRACS, FACSProfessor of Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Auckland, Auckland, New Zealand
Purchase PDFThe pancreas is the body’s largest digestive gland, situated in the center of the body, on either side of the transpyloric plane. It is notable for its complex anatomy and the co-location of exocrine and endocrine organs. Pancreatic surgery requires a detailed understanding of the anatomy of the pancreas and its relation to adjacent vital structures. This review describes the morphology of the pancreas, its ductal system, the major duodenal papilla, arterial anatomy, venous anatomy, lymphatic draining, and nerve supply. Because managing patients with pancreatic diseases requires a detailed understanding of the physiology of the exocrine and the endocrine pancreas, both are discussed here.
This review contains 16 highly rendered figures and 15 references.
- 8
The Spleen
- DONALD P. LESSLIE III, DOAssistant Professor, Department of Surgery, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, Houston, TX
- LILLIAN S. KAO, MD, MSAssociate Professor, Department of Surgery, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFThe structure of the spleen allows it to carry out its major functions, which can be categorized as hematologic and immunologic. The importance of the spleen in the immunologic response is evidenced by the increased risk of infection in patients with congenital absence of splenic dysfunction and in splenectomized patients. The presence of one or more accessory spleens is the most common congenital abnormality related to splenic development. This review covers the history, embryology, congenital anomalies, anatomy, and histology/pathophysiology of the spleen. It is important for the student and general surgeon to understand the anatomy and physiology of the spleen to perform operative procedures on the spleen, to avoid intraoperative complications during splenectomy as well as procedures such as mobilization of the splenic flexure and distal pancreatectomy, and to care for the postoperative splenectomized patient.
This review contains 7 highly rendered figures and 17 references.
- 9
The Stomach
- CARLA N HOLCOMB, MD, MSPHResident, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- BRITNEY L COREY, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFThis review discusses the anatomy and physiology of the stomach. The embryologic origins of the foregut are described, as well as how malformations in development lead to pathology. Color illustrations are included detailing the stomach and its surrounding attachments. The neurohormonal pathways involved in the mechanics of gastric motility and gastric acid secretion are described in detail. The biochemistry involved in the digestion of fats, carbohydrates, and proteins is explained, and a summary table of gut hormones and their source and function has been provided. Additionally, an update on how the knowledge of hormonal pathways governing appetite is being used in pharmaceuticals and bariatric surgery to treat obesity is included.
Key words: acid suppression, digestion, foregut, ghrelin, leptin, motility, obesity, stomach, vagus nerve
- 10
The Duodenum
- SEAN RONNEKLEIV-KELLY, MDSurgical Resident, Section of Colon and Rectal Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Wisconsin, Madison, WI
- RICHARD A BURKHART, MD
Purchase PDFThe duodenum is the first part of the small intestine that arises from the embryologic foregut and midgut. With maturation, it lies mostly retroperitoneal and is intimately associated with nearby structures such as the pancreas, hepatoduodenal ligament, and transverse colon mesentery. It is well vascularized with a rich lymphatic network and supports digestive, absorptive, immune, and endocrine functions. The duodenum receives food bolus from the stomach and releases various hormones important for regulating motility and gastric acid secretion. In the duodenum, food content mixes with bile and pancreatic enzymes to continue digestion of and initiate absorption for fats, carbohydrates, proteins, and vitamins and minerals. The duodenum experiences substantial exposure to the external environment and therefore contains an extensive immune barrier, including mucosa-associated lymphoid tissue. Additionally, there is a significant neuroendocrine network within the duodenum and small intestine that possesses a variety of endocrine functions, including regulation of acid secretion, motility, pancreatic function, bile flow, and mucosal cell growth. These enterochromaffin cells are the source duodenal neuroendocrine tumors (carcinoid) and can be classified according to subtype or grade. The duodenum is a diverse component of the small intestine that is uniquely suited to its numerous functions.
Key words: absorption, acid secretion, anatomy, digestion, duodenum, intestinal immune system, microstructure, motility, mucosa-associated lymphoid tissue, neuroendocrine
- 11
Small Bowel
- VINCENT E MORTELLARO, MDAssistant Professor, Division of Pediatric Surgery, Department of General Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFThe small intestine is where multiple cell types combine to achieve the complex interaction between our bodies and ingested material from the outside world. As a highly specialized organ, the small intestine has a role in digestion, absorption of nutrients and electrolytes, and innate immunity to thwart exogenous pathogens and as host to a symbiotic environment where our immune system successfully interacts with a resident microbiome. This review covers the embryology, gross and microscopic anatomy, physiology of nutritional absorption, immune function, and advances in examining new discoveries in the interplay between the host and the resident microbiome.
Key words: duodenum, ileum, jejunum, microbiota, midgut, migrating motor complex, nutritional absorption, villi
- 12
Human Adult Reproductive System
By Patrick Guthrie, MD; Johanna Von Hofe, MD; Rachael B Lancaster, MD
Purchase PDFHuman Adult Reproductive System
- PATRICK GUTHRIE, MD
- JOHANNA VON HOFE, MD
- RACHAEL B LANCASTER, MD
Purchase PDFThe human reproductive system is a unique combination of organs and endocrine components that is extremely complex and adaptive. The reproductive organs are distinct between males and females, and sexual differentiation is a result of genotype, gonadal type, and phenotype. The anatomic and physiologic system of each sex is composed with a set purpose: to propagate the human species. Linked closely to the reproductive system is the endocrine system, which provides the messengers and feedback mechanisms that allow the development, maintenance, and function of the reproductive organs. The gonads have both endocrine and exocrine functions, namely steroidogenesis and gametogenesis. This review focuses on the components of the endocrine system as well as male and female anatomy and physiology to fully grasp the human reproductive system.
Key words: fertility, hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal axis, reproductive anatomy, sexual aging, sexual physiology
- 13
The Colon, Appendix, Rectum, and Anus
- DANIEL I. CHU, MDAssistant Professor of Surgery, Section of Gastrointestinal Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- MARGARET M ROMINE, MD, MS
Purchase PDFThe colon, appendix, rectum, and anus have unique anatomic features, both structural and functional, that contribute to normal and pathologic states. Structural features discussed in this review include the layers of the intestinal wall, vascular anatomy, lymphatic drainage, and innervation. Functional features highlighted include the role(s) each organ plays in immunity, nutrient absorption, electrolyte secretion, water absorption, continence, and elimination of waste. A clear understanding of these structural and functional details is the foundation on which surgical techniques and treatment strategies are based when addressing surgical pathology.
This review contains 7 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 58 references.
Key words: anus, appendix, colon, colorectal pathology, colorectal surgery, rectum
- 14
The Parathyroids
- COURTNEY J. BALENTINE, MD, MPHAssistant Professor, Section of Gastrointestinal and Endocrine Surgery, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
- C TAYLOR GERALDSON, MDResident Physician, Department of Surgery, University of Alabama at Birmingham, Birmingham, AL
Purchase PDFSuccessful surgery of the parathyroid glands depends on a thorough knowledge of their anatomic and developmental relations. This knowledge is crucial for locating ectopic parathyroids or preventing injury to the recurrent laryngeal nerve. In addition, the surgeon should understand the physiology and function of these glands. Unlike other conditions a surgeon might treat, physiology, and not anatomy alone, often dictates the timing and course of parathyroid procedures. This surgeon-oriented, focused review covers the development, histology, anatomy, physiology, and pathophysiology of the parathyroid. Figures show the location and frequencies of ectopic upper and lower parathyroid glands, and regulation of calcium homeostasis.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, and 16 references
Key words: calcitonin; hypercalcemia; hyperparathyroidism; multiple endocrine neoplasia; parathyroid; parathyroid hormone; primary hyperparathyroidism; secondary hyperparathyroidism; tertiary hyperparathyroidism
- 15
The Endocrine System: Adrenal Glands
- ABBAS AL-KURD, MDClinical Instructor, Department of Surgery, Hadassah-Hebrew University Medical Center, Mount Scopus, Jerusalem, Israel
- HAGGI MAZEH, MD, FACSAssociate Professor, Department of Surgery, Hadassah-Hebrew University Medical Center, Mount Scopus, Jerusalem, Israel
Purchase PDFThe adrenal glands represent an essential component of the endocrine system, and their failure can have catastrophic consequences to several aspects of bodily homeostasis. Each adrenal gland can be divided into two different endocrine components, the cortex and the medulla, each with distinct functions. This in-depth review of normal adrenal embryology, anatomy, and physiology also emphasizes the clinical relevance of various irregularities in adrenal functioning. Every surgeon attempting to manage adrenal diseases is expected to be familiar with the detailed pathophysiology of these conditions because such an understanding is essential for sound preoperative evaluation and perioperative management of this potentially complicated patient group.
This review contains 4 figures, 1 table, and 70 references.
Key words: adrenal, adrenal glands, adrenal pathophysiology, adrenal physiology, anatomy of adrenal glands, cortex, embryology, endocrine system, medulla
- 16
The Endocrine System: Pituitary Gland
By Omer Doron, MD; Jose E Cohen, MD; Iddo Paldor, MD
Purchase PDFThe Endocrine System: Pituitary Gland
- OMER DORON, MDResident , Department of Neurosurgery, Hadassah University Medical Center, Jerusalem, Israel
- JOSE E COHEN, MDHead, Invasive Neuro-Radiology Unit, Department of Neurosurgery, Hadassah University Medical Center, Jerusalem, Israel
- IDDO PALDOR, MDSenior Neurosurgeon, Department of Neurosurgery, Hadassah University Medical Center, Jerusalem, Israel
Purchase PDFThe pituitary gland is the main point where the neural and endocrine systems function in continuity, maintaining homeostasis of many functional elements of the human body. Located inside the sella turcica, it is separated from the rest of the central nervous system (CNS); however, it plays a crucial part in the regulation of the fundamental endocrine profile, inhibiting or promoting CNS signaling to the rest of the human body. Made up of two distinct tissue subtypes, this gland is fed by a complex vascular network, which enables communication beyond the blood-brain barrier. Lying in close proximity to both important neural and vascular structure, changes in gland size and function result in significant clinical impact. The pituitary gland controls many processes, among which are thermoregulation; metabolism and metabolic rate; glucose, solute, and water balance; growth and development; blood pressure; and sexual drive, pregnancy, childbearing, birth, and breast-feeding. The devastating effects of pituitary dysfunction underscore the importance of the pituitary gland in maintenance of the various functions that underlie normal everyday human activity. This review covers the basic aspects of pituitary gland development, anatomy, and physiologic function.
This review contains 3 figures, and 38 references,
Key words: adenohypophysis, neurohypophysis, pituitary-hypothalamic axis, pituitary portal system, sella turcica
- 1
- Palliative Medicine
- 1
Principles and Practice of Palliative Care
By Kristen G Schaefer, MD; Rachelle E Bernacki, MD, MS
Purchase PDFPrinciples and Practice of Palliative Care
- KRISTEN G SCHAEFER, MDDirector of Medical Student and Resident Education, Division of Adult Palliative Care, Department of Psychosocial Oncology and Palliative Care, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Center for Palliative Care, Harvard Medical School, Division of General Internal Medicine, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- RACHELLE E BERNACKI, MD, MSDirector of Quality Initiatives, Division of Adult Palliative Care, Department of Psychosocial Oncology and Palliative Care, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Center for Palliative Care, Harvard Medical School, Division of Aging, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe trajectories of serious illness and dying have changed in the last century; in the past, patients lived shorter lives and often died quickly of infectious disease, whereas patients in the 21st century live longer and often with prolonged debility in the advanced stages of illness. As a result, patients with serious illness can suffer undertreated symptoms and often feel poorly prepared for the final stages of disease. With more options for advanced life support and other aggressive interventions at the end of life, patients and families face increasingly complex medical decisions in the terminal phase of illness, and the treatments they receive do not always align with their goals and values. Emerging evidence suggests that integrating palliative care into the treatment of advanced illness can improve outcomes, decrease costs, and improve both patient and family satisfaction. Consequently, patient access to high-quality specialty-level palliative care is becoming standard of care at most academic cancer centers and more available in the community. This chapter describes the practice and principles of specialty-level palliative care and outlines specific "generalist" palliative care competencies essential for all physicians caring for patients with serious illness, including prognostication, patient-centered communication, and the navigation of ethical dilemmas in the field of palliative care. Tables outline the philosophy of palliative care, domains of suffering, location of death of hospice patients, the palliative performance scale, median survival times for cancer syndromes, indicators associated with a poorer prognosis in congestive heart failure, the NURSE mnemonic for accepting and responding to emotion, palliative care communication competencies in the intensive care unit, and the SPIKES mnemonic for breaking bad news. Figures depict causes of death in 1900 versus 2010, palliative care through the trajectory of serious illness, theoretical trajectories of disease, life expectancies for women and men, mortality at 1 year post discharge, and a model for patient-centered communication.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 9 tables, and 169 references.
- 2
Symptom Management in Palliative Medicine
- KATHY J SELVAGGI, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Director, Intensive Palliative Care Unit, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- JANET L ABRAHM, MDProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Division Chief, Adult Palliative Care, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute and Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFPalliative care is an interdisciplinary specialty focused on providing comfort, communication, and support for patients, families, and professional caregivers throughout the course of a life-limiting illness. This chapter discusses assessment and treatment of symptoms and disorders that commonly contribute to patient distress during these illnesses: pain, disorders of the respiratory and gastrointestinal systems, skin disorders, hot flashes, fatigue, pruritis, insomnia, and delirium. This chapter reviews care of the imminently dying patient, discusses methods for assessing patients' symptoms, and provides two examples of valid and reliable symptom measurement systems: the Edmonton Symptom Assessment Scale and the Memorial Symptom Assessment Scale. Achieving symptom control requires the physician to assess patient suffering in all dimensions: physical, psychological, social, and spiritual. The extent of the assessment may be modified, however, based on patients’ prognosis as well as their goals and the burden and benefit of the diagnostic intervention. A 10-step protocol for terminal wean is presented. Signs that patients are entering their final days and symptom management in the last hours of a patient's life are discussed. Tables list the modified Edmonton Symptom Assessment Scale; the Memorial Symptom Assessment Scale; the DOLOPLUS-2 scale (behavioral pain assessment in the elderly); relative potencies of commonly used opioids; conversions between the transdermal fentanyl patch and morphine; symptomatic treatment for dyspnea, cough, and hiccups; pharmacologic treatment of nausea and vomiting; a progressive bowel regimen for patients receiving opioid therapy; treatments for constipation; etiology-based treatment for oral problems; risk factors for pressure ulcers; and applicable medications for physical and psychological sources of distress near the end of life. This chapter contains 12 tables, 120 references, 5 MCQs.
- 3
Management of Psychosocial Issues in Terminal Illness
By Jane DeLima Thomas, MD; Eva Reitschuler-Cross, MD; Susan D Block, MD
Purchase PDFManagement of Psychosocial Issues in Terminal Illness
- JANE DELIMA THOMAS, MDAttending Physician, Department of Psychosocial Oncology and Palliative Care, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute and Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Instructor in Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- EVA REITSCHULER-CROSS, MDClinical Assistant Professor of Medicine, University of Pittsburgh, Section of Palliative Care and Medical Ethics, University of Pittsburgh Medical Center, Pittsburgh, PA
- SUSAN D BLOCK, MDChair, Department of Psychosocial Oncology and Palliative Care, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute and Brigham and Women’s Hospital Co-Director, HMS Center for Palliative Care, Professor of Psychiatry and Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFPatients facing serious or life-threatening illness experience challenges to their psychological, social, and spiritual lives as well as to their physical function and comfort. Physicians may be accustomed to focusing on the biomedical aspects of illness, but they have a critical role in assessing the patient's psychosocial issues to identify sources of distress and help implement a plan for mitigating them. An appropriate psychosocial assessment requires a methodical and rigorous approach and includes assessment of any psychosocial issue affected by or affecting a patient's experience of illness. This chapter outlines a structured approach to addressing psychosocial issues by discussing (1) the doctor-patient relationship; (2) coping with illness; (3) family dynamics and caregiving; (4) ethnic and cultural issues; (5) religious, spiritual, and existential issues; (6) mental health issues, including adjustment disorder, depression, anxiety, personality disorders, aberrant drug behaviors, and major mental health issues; and (7) grief and bereavement. Tables outline psychosocial assessment questions, factors predisposing patients with serious illness to depression, risk factors for suicide in patients with terminal illness, and classes of antidepressants, anxiolytics, and sedatives. The Alcohol Use Disorders Identification Test-Consumption (AUDIT-C) questionnaire is provided, as well as a list of Web sites with further resources about psychosocial issues in serious illness.
This chapter contains 1 highly rendered figure, 6 tables, 216 references, and 5 MCQs. - 4
Communication of Bad News
- PAUL K MOHABIR, MDClinical Professor, Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine
- PREETHI BALAKRISHNAN, MDCritical Care Medicine Fellow, Stanford Hospital, Stanford, CA
Purchase PDFDelivering bad news is a critical part of the patient-physician relationship. Historically, physicians have withheld or incompletely related the diagnosis and prognosis of a patient’s disease. However, the trajectory of medical practice and patient expectations mandates a change in communicating bad news. Poor communication of bad news also affects physician job satisfaction and increases burnout. Empathy is crucial to communicating bad news well. It is a very complex emotion that requires the physician to identify the patient’s reaction to the news being delivered and to react to the patient in a supportive manner. Patients do not find it helpful when the physician underplays the bad part of the news. Emerging research shows that patients prefer pairing of bad news with hope to provide anchors in the overwhelming conversation but not to take away from the gravity of the news. Family and friends can help ameliorate or, unfortunately, augment patient anxiety. Physicians have to be cognizant of the dynamics family and friends bring to the interaction as well. A patient-centered approach—a combination of evidence-based medicine and patient goal-oriented medicine—to delivering bad news is most likely to benefit the patient-physician relationship and decision-making process. The SPIKES and the Expanded Four Habits Model can be used as guidelines for communicating bad news.
This review contains 1 figure and 38 references.
Key words: communicating bad news, empathy, Expanded Four Habits Model, patient-centered care, SPIKES
- 1
- Psychiatry
- 1
Mood Disorders
- HASAN A BALOCH, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Psychiatry, Medical Director, Pediatric Bipolar Program, CERT-BD, UNC School of Medicine, Chapel Hill, NC
- JAIR C. SOARES, MDDepartment of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, McGovern Medical School, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFAffective disorders are among the most common disorders in psychiatry. They are generally classified according to the persistence and extent of symptoms and by the polarity of these symptoms. The two poles of the affective spectrum are mania and depression. Bipolar disorder is characterized by the presence of the mania or hypomania and often depression. Unipolar depression is defined by depression in the absence of a lifetime history of mania or hypomania. These differences are not merely categorical but have important implications for the prognosis and treatment of these conditions. Bipolar disorder, for example, is better treated using mood-stabilizing medication, whereas unipolar depression responds optimally to antidepressant medications. In addition, prognostically, unipolar depression may sometimes be limited to one episode in a lifetime, whereas bipolar disorder is typically a lifelong condition. The course of both conditions, however, is often chronic, and frequently patients can present with unipolar depression only to later develop manic symptoms. A thorough understanding of both conditions is therefore required to treat patients presenting with affective symptomatology. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, etiology and genetics, pathogenesis, diagnosis, and treatment of unipolar depression and bipolar disorder. Figures illustrate gray matter differences with lithium use and the bipolar spectrum. Tables list the pharmacokinetics of commonly used antidepressants and medications commonly used in the treatment of bipolar disorder.
This review contains 2 figures, 2 tables, and 136 references.
- 2
Adjustment Disorders
- JAMES J STRAIN, MDProfessor of Psychiatry, Ichan School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY
- MATTHEW FRIEDMAN, MD, PHDNational Center for PTSD, US. Department of Veterans Affairs, Dartmouth Medical School, VA Medical Center, White River Junction
Purchase PDFThe adjustment disorder (AD) diagnosis has clinical appeal to both doctors and patients. The idea of temporary emotional symptoms resulting directly from a stressful life event is viewed as a more normal human reaction than an idiopathic pathologic psychiatric state and is therefore less stigmatizing. Additionally, the disorder's more benign course (especially in adults) encourages a clinician to be more prognostically optimistic. This chapter discusses the prevalence, epidemiology, course and prognosis, and etiology of ADs. Also reviewed are AD subtypes proposed but not accepted for the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, fifth edition (DSM-5), including the acute stress disorder/posttraumatic stress disorder subtype and the bereavement-related subtype. Treatment options are covered, including psychotherapy, pharmacotherapy, and primary care. Tables outline diagnostic criteria for ADs in DSM-IV, stress-related disorders in DSM-5, DSM classifications, ADs in mental illness and medical settings, and subtypes of DSM-IV, text revision adjustment disorders. Graphs categorize patients diagnosed with ADs according to type of illness and the prognosis for recovery from ADs in adolescents and adults.
This chapter contains 2 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, 109 references, and 5 MCQs. - 3
Management of Somatic Symptoms
- ANDREAS SCHRÖDER, MD, PHDConsultant in Psychiatry, The Research Clinic for Functional Disorders, Aarhus University Hospital, Aarhus, Denmark
- JOEL E DIMSDALE, MDDistinguished Professor of Psychiatry Emeritus, Department of Psychiatry, University of California, San Diego, La Jolla, CA
Purchase PDFSomatic symptoms that cannot be attributed to organic disease account for 15 to 20% of primary care consultations and up to 50% in specialized settings. About 6% of the general population has chronic somatic symptoms that affect functioning and quality of life. This chapter focuses on the recognition and effective management of patients with excessive and disabling somatic symptoms. The clinical presentation of somatic symptoms is categorized into three groups of patients: those with multiple somatic symptoms, those with health anxiety, and those with conversion disorder. The chapter provides information to assist with making a diagnosis and differential diagnosis. Management includes ways to improve the physician–patient interaction that will benefit the patient, a step-care model based on illness severity and complexity, and psychological and pharmacologic treatment. The chapter is enhanced by figures and tables that summarize health anxiety, symptoms, differential diagnoses, and management strategies, as well as by case studies and examples.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 10 tables, and 235 references.
- 4
Male Sexual Dysfunction
- MICHAEL EISENBERG, MDDirector, Male Reproductive Medicine and Surgery, Assistant Professor, Departments of Urology and Obstetrics & Gynecology, Stanford University, Stanford, California
- KATHLEEN HWANG, MDDepartment of Urology, Brown University, Providence, Rhode Island
Purchase PDFNormal male sexual function requires complex interactions among psychological, neurologic, hormonal, and vascular systems. Under the influence of proper stimulation, the acquisition and maintenance of a penile erection occur. Male sexual dysfunction includes erectile dysfunction (ED), impaired libido, and abnormal ejaculation, which occur due to aberrations in normal male sexual response. Estimates suggest a prevalence of approximately 10 to 20% in the adult male population. Thus, sexual dysfunction is a common problem in this country. This chapter focuses on several key, common components of male sexual dysfunction: namely, ED, premature ejaculation (PE), and Peyronie disease (PD). Figures include management algorithms, a graph depicting distribution of intravaginal ejaculation latency time values in a random cohort of men, and a Sexual Health Inventory for Men (SHIM). Tables list medications associated with ED, oral therapies for the treatment of PD, intralesional therapies for PD, indications for surgical correction of PD, recommended questions to establish the diagnosis of PE, treatment options for PE, and causes of delayed ejaculation, anejaculation, and anorgasmia.
This chapter contains 5 highly rendered figures, 8 tables, 116 references, 1 teaching slide set, and 5 MCQs. - 5
Personality Disorders
By Yosefa A. Ehrlich, BS; Amir Garakani, MD; Stephanie R Pavlos, MA; Larry Siever, MD
Purchase PDFPersonality Disorders
- YOSEFA A. EHRLICH, BSDoctoral Student in Clinical Psychology, City University of New York Graduate Center, New York, NY
- AMIR GARAKANI, MDAssistant Clinical Professor of Psychiatry, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY
- STEPHANIE R PAVLOS, MADoctoral Student in Clinical Psychology, St. Johns University, Queens, NY
- LARRY SIEVER, MDProfessor of Psychiatry, Icahn School of Medicine at Mount Sinai, New York, NY
Purchase PDFPersonality can be defined as an organizational system of self that shapes the manner in which a person interacts with his or her environment. Personality traits develop in adolescence or early adulthood and are thought to be shaped by early childhood experiences and enduring throughout a lifetime. Personality traits that prevent an individual from being able to function in society or that cause significant distress are diagnosed as personality disorders. A thorough history is needed to rule out other psychiatric and medical disorders. This chapter reviews the diagnostic criteria, differential diagnosis, comorbidity, prevalence, etiology (including genetics and neurobiology), prognosis, and treatment of paranoid, schizoid, schizotypal, borderline, antisocial, narcissistic, histrionic, avoidant, obsessive-compulsive, and dependent personality disorders. A discussion of the relevance of personality disorders to primary care practices and approaches to managing such patients is also included. Tables describe the diagnostic criteria of each personality disorder. Figures illustrate the prevalence of personality disorders in the general and psychiatric populations; schizotypal personality disorder in the community, general population, and clinical population; childhood trauma in individuals with personality disorder; and comorbid disorders in individuals with borderline personality disorder. A model of brain processing in borderline personality disorder is also featured.
This chapter contains 5 highly rendered figures, 10 tables, 230 references, and 5 MCQs.
- 6
Sleep Disorders
- SUDHANSU CHOKROVERTY, MD, FRCP, FACPProfessor and Director of Sleep Research, Medical Director of Devry Technology Training Program, Co-Chair Emeritus of Neurology, Department of Neurology, JFK Neuroscience Institute, Edison, NJ, Professor of Neuroscience, Seton Hall University, South Orange, NJ, Clinical Professor of Neurology, Robert Wood Johnson Medical School, New Brunswick, NJ
Purchase PDFRecent research has generated an enormous fund of knowledge about the neurobiology of sleep and wakefulness. Sleeping and waking brain circuits can now be studied by sophisticated neuroimaging techniques that map different areas of the brain during different sleep states and stages. Although the exact biologic functions of sleep are not known, sleep is essential, and sleep deprivation leads to impaired attention and decreased performance. Sleep is also believed to have restorative, conservative, adaptive, thermoregulatory, and consolidative functions. This review discusses the physiology of sleep, including its two independent states, rapid eye movement (REM) and non–rapid eye movement (NREM) sleep, as well as functional neuroanatomy, physiologic changes during sleep, and circadian rhythms. The classification and diagnosis of sleep disorders are discussed generally. The diagnosis and treatment of the following disorders are described: obstructive sleep apnea syndrome, narcolepsy-cataplexy sydrome, idiopathic hypersomnia, restless legs syndrome (RLS) and periodic limb movements in sleep, circadian rhythm sleep disorders, insomnias, nocturnal frontal lobe epilepsy, and parasomnias. Sleep-related movement disorders and the relationship between sleep and psychiatric disorders are also discussed. Tables describe behavioral and physiologic characteristics of states of awareness, the international classification of sleep disorders, common sleep complaints, comorbid insomnia disorders, causes of excessive daytime somnolence, laboratory tests to assess sleep disorders, essential diagnostic criteria for RLS and Willis-Ekbom disease, and drug therapy for insomnia. Figures include polysomnographic recording showing wakefulness in an adult; stage 1, 2, and 3 NREM sleep in an adult; REM sleep in an adult; a patient with sleep apnea syndrome; a patient with Cheyne-Stokes breathing; a patient with RLS; and a patient with dream-enacting behavior; schematic sagittal section of the brainstem of the cat; schematic diagram of the McCarley-Hobson model of REM sleep mechanism; the Lu-Saper “flip-flop” model; the Luppi model to explain REM sleep mechanism; and a wrist actigraph from a man with bipolar disorder.
This review contains 14 figures, 20 tables, 124 references
Keywords: sleep disorder, rapid eye movement, non-rapid eye movement, insomnia, narcolepsy, circardian rhythm sleep disorder, restless legs syndrome, parasomnia
- 7
Acute Psychosis
- JAMES KIMO TAKAYESU, MD, MSAssistant Residency Director, Department of Emergency Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
- SUZANNE BIRD, MDAcute Psychiatric Service, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFAcute psychosis can be a true emergency, and the primary goal in the evaluation of an acutely psychotic patient should be to maintain safety and prevent harm to the patient and staff. The defining symptoms of psychosis include hallucinations, delusions, disorganized thought or speech, abnormal motor behavior, and negative symptoms. This review covers the approach to the patient, and definitive treatment, disposition and outcomes for patients experiencing acute psychosis. The figure shows an interview setting in a triangular arrangement, allowing for safe egress. Tables list goals in the evaluation of the acutely psychotic patient; causes of secondary psychosis; common medication classes causing mental status change; four key questions for assessing psychotic behavior; screening assessment for psychosis; clinical features of dementia, delirium, and psychiatric illness; brief mental status examination; common medications for the treatment of acute psychosis and chemical sedation; QT-prolonging effects of commonly used antipsychotic medications; and documentation required in the use of chemical and/or physical restraints.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure, 10 tables, and 57 references.
- 8
Overview of Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders
By James A. Wilcox, MD, PhD; Donald W. Black, MD
Purchase PDFOverview of Schizophrenia and Other Psychotic Disorders
- JAMES A. WILCOX, MD, PHD
- DONALD W. BLACK, MD
Purchase PDFPsychotic disorders are among the most disabling conditions and constitute a major public health problem. Described throughout recorded time, they affect as many as 5% of the population and cause a disproportionate amount of suffering and loss to society. In the chapter on schizophrenia spectrum and other psychotic disorders, the DSM-5 lists delusional disorder, brief psychotic disorder, schizophreniform disorder, schizophrenia, and schizoaffective disorder, as well as categories for substance- or medically induced psychotic disorders. The term psychosis indicates that the individual has a severe inability to interpret the surrounding environment in a realistic way. Symptoms include hallucinations, delusions, and bizarre behavior. Psychotic disorders are associated with premature death, mostly attributable to suicide. The pathophysiology and etiology of psychotic disorders are only now beginning to be understood, and treatment for these conditions remains suboptimal. Researchers are currently refining the cause of these symptoms and developing more effective treatments.
This review contains 6 tables, and 37 references
Key words: Brief psychotic disorder, delusions, hallucinations, psychosis, schizoaffective disorder, schizophrenia, schizophreniform disorder
- 9
Adjustment Disorder and Its Clinical Management
By Mauro Giovanni Carta, MD; Antonio Preti, MD
Purchase PDFAdjustment Disorder and Its Clinical Management
- MAURO GIOVANNI CARTA, MDProfessor and Chair of Quality of Care, University of Cagliari, Head, Liaison Psychiatry and Psychosomatics Unit, University Hospital, University of Cagliari, Cagliari, Italy
- ANTONIO PRETI, MDConsultant in Psychiatry, Liaison Psychiatry and Psychosomatics Unit, University Hospital, University of Cagliari, Cagliari, Italy
Purchase PDFAdjustment disorder is a condition of subjective emotional distress triggered as a consequence of a meaningful change in life. The diagnosis of adjustment disorder is hindered by the difficult operational definition of stress and of its related concept of “vulnerability,” by the problem of disentangling symptoms of adjustment disorder from those attributable to comorbid anxiety and mood disorders, and by the poor boundaries of the disorder with other stress-related conditions on the one hand and with common adaptation to life events on the other. Despite the high frequency of its diagnosis in clinical settings, there has been relatively little research on the adjustment disorder and, consequently, very few hints about its treatments. Several psychotherapies have been developed to deal with patients diagnosed with adjustment disorder, with inconclusive evidence on their effectiveness. Antidepressants may abate the symptoms and help patients reacquire occupational and social functioning. The medium-term outcome of adjustment disorder is good, with 70 to 80% of those diagnosed with it showing no evidence of psychopathology when reassessed 5 years from the episode. However, when comorbid with a personality disorder or a substance use disorder, the short-term risk of suicide may be increased. The long-term outcome of adjustment disorder seems to be worse in children and adolescents than in adults. In particular, adolescents diagnosed with adjustment disorder were more likely than adults to have received a diagnosis of a severe mental disorder at the 5-year follow-up, including schizophrenia, schizoaffective disorder, and bipolar disorder.
This review contains 1 figure, 6 tables, and 52 references.
Key words: adaptation, adjustment disorder, anxiety, depression, stress, trauma, treatment, vulnerability
- 10
Major Neurocognitive Disorders
By Rajesh R Tampi, MD, MS, DFAPA; Deena J Tampi, MSN, MBA-HCA, RN
Purchase PDFMajor Neurocognitive Disorders
- RAJESH R TAMPI, MD, MS, DFAPAProfessor of psychiatry at Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine and vice chairman for education and faculty development and program director in the Psychiatry Residency, Department of Psychiatry, MetroHealth, Cleveland, OH
- DEENA J TAMPI, MSN, MBA-HCA, RNExecutive director of Behavioral Health Services, Saint Francis Hospital and Medical Center, Hartford, CT.
Purchase PDFMajor neurocognitive disorder is the most common neurodegenerative condition in the world and the leading cause of dependence and disability among older adults worldwide. There are numerous etiologies for major neurocognitive disorder, of which Alzheimer disease (AD) is the most common. Available evidence indicates that the risk factors for major neurocognitive disorder include older age, female sex, lower educational attainment, obesity, and vascular risk factors, including smoking, hypertension, diabetes mellitus, and hyperlipidemia. Certain etiologies for major neurocognitive disorder are heritable, especially those due to AD and frontotemporal lobar degeneration. The pathophysiologic changes associated with the various etiologies of major neurocognitive disorder include neuronal loss, senile plaques, neurofibrillary tangles, vascular pathology, and α-synuclein neuronal inclusions. Major neurocognitive disorder remains a clinical diagnosis with a thorough history, appropriate laboratory tests, and standardized rating scales assisting in determining the etiology and severity of the condition. In older adults, major neurocognitive disorder must be differentiated from depression and delirium as these three conditions may have similar clinical presentations or may coexist. Current data indicate that approximately a third of the cases of major neurocognitive disorder, especially those due to AD, may be prevented by controlling potentially modifiable risk factors, including diabetes, depression, smoking, physical inactivity, midlife hypertension, midlife obesity, and low educational attainment. Currently, the only Food and Drug Administration–approved medications are acetylcholinesterase inhibitors and memantine for use in major neurocognitive disorder due to AD and rivastigmine (an acetylcholinesterase inhibitor) for major neurocognitive disorder due to Parkinson disease.
This review contains 5 figures, 13 tables, and 63 references.
Key words: acetylcholinesterase inhibitors, Alzheimer disease, amyloid precursor protein, frontotemporal lobar degeneration, Lewy body disease, major neurocognitive disorder, memantine, Parkinson disease, tau proteins, vascular disease
- 11
Overview of Anxiety Disorders
- JON E GRANT, JD, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFAnxiety disorders are the most common psychiatric disorders among adults in the United States. Although anxiety disorders generally result in significant psychosocial impairment, most adults do not seek treatment until many years after the onset of the anxiety disorder. The treatment literature for anxiety disorder has grown tremendously since the 1980s, and both psychotherapy and medications may prove beneficial for people with anxiety disorders. This review presents a general overview of the anxiety disorders.
This review contains 10 tables, and 36 references.
Key words: agoraphobia, anxiety disorder, generalized anxiety disorder, panic disorder, separation anxiety disorder, social anxiety disorder, specific phobia, treatment of anxiety
- 12
Clinical Management of Anxiety Disorders
- SHONA VAS, PHDAssociate Professor, Department of Psychiatry & Behavioral Neuroscience, The University of Chicago
- POOJA N DAVE, PHDPostdoctoral Fellow, Department of Psychiatry & Behavioral Neuroscience, The University of Chicago, Chicago, IL
Purchase PDFAnxiety disorders are characterized by excessive fear and anxiety accompanied by associated behavioral disturbances that cause significant impairment in social and occupational functioning. Anxiety is a complex mood state that involves physiologic, cognitive, and behavioral components. This review describes the five anxiety disorders most commonly diagnosed in adults: social anxiety disorder, panic disorder, agoraphobia, generalized anxiety disorder, and specific phobia. Diagnostic criteria for these disorders are presented along with empirically supported psychological and pharmacologic treatment approaches. Decades of evidence have indicated that for anxiety disorders of mild to moderate severity, cognitive-behavioral therapy (CBT) should be first-line treatment. CBT interventions for anxiety, including psychoeducation, cognitive restructuring, exposure, applied relaxation/breathing retraining, and skills training, are presented with descriptions of how they may be adapted to particular diagnoses, along with data for their efficacy. Data suggest that selective serotonin and norepinephrine reuptake inhibitors are pharmacologic treatments of choice for anxiety and may be used in combination with CBT for moderate to severe symptoms. d-Cycloserine is an emerging treatment that may enhance outcomes in anxiety disorders by optimizing exposure therapy through the facilitation of fear extinction.
This review contains 7 figures, 12 tables, and 105 references.
Key words: agoraphobia, anxiety, generalized anxiety disorder, panic disorder, phobias, social anxiety disorder
- 13
Alcohol and Drug Withdrawal Syndromes and Their Clinical Management
By Alexander Thompson, MD, MBA, MPH; Andrea Weber, MD, MME
Purchase PDFAlcohol and Drug Withdrawal Syndromes and Their Clinical Management
- ALEXANDER THOMPSON, MD, MBA, MPH
- ANDREA WEBER, MD, MMEFifth-Year Medicine-Psychiatry Resident, Department of Psychiatry, University of Iowa Carver College of Medicine, Iowa City, IA
Purchase PDFWithdrawal syndromes are clusters of signs and symptoms that occur with cessation or decrease in use of a substance. All substance withdrawal syndromes are classified and diagnosed based on criteria published in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, fifth edition (DSM-5). All withdrawal syndromes range in their ability to cause significant medical and/or psychiatric consequences. Alcohol withdrawal remains a medically serious syndrome that can occur within hours to days of decreased use and result in hallucinations, delirium, seizures, and death. Despite increasing research into the type, frequency, dose, and route of administration, benzodiazepines remain the first-line treatment in preventing alcohol withdrawal complications. Although typically not medically severe, opioid withdrawal is often associated with relapse even after successful detoxification. Opioid-agonist therapy, including methadone and buprenorphine, remains the treatment of choice for both opioid withdrawal and relapse prevention. Stimulant withdrawal from cocaine or amphetamines can cause significant psychiatric symptoms within minutes to hours of cessation and may require psychiatric hospitalization for suicidal ideation or attempts. There are no current medications approved by the Food and Drug Administration (FDA) for treatment of stimulant withdrawal. Cannabis withdrawal, although not medically dangerous, has recently been adopted as a discrete syndrome in the DSM-5. Its severity correlates significantly with the amount of cannabis used, functional impairment, and ability to achieve sustained remission. There are no current medications approved by the FDA for treatment of cannabis withdrawal.
This review contains 6 figures, 13 tables, and 101 references.
Key words: alcohol, amphetamine, benzodiazepines, buprenorphine, cannabis, clonidine, cocaine, dexmedetomidine, methadone, opioid, phenobarbital, stimulant, withdrawal
- 14
Clinical Management of Drug Use Disorders
By Alexander Thompson, MD, MBA, MPH; Timothy Ando, MD; James Jackson, MD
Purchase PDFClinical Management of Drug Use Disorders
- ALEXANDER THOMPSON, MD, MBA, MPH
- TIMOTHY ANDO, MDPsychiatry Resident, Department of Psychiatry, Stanford University School of Medicine, Stanford, CA
- JAMES JACKSON, MD
Purchase PDFDespite mammoth efforts toward the treatment and prevention of substance use disorders in the United States over the past 30 years, they remain a significant public health concern and an all-too-common comorbidity among people with other forms of mental illness. Continued research into genetics, pharmacotherapies, psychotherapies, and epidemiology for substance use disorders results in huge amounts of new information for clinicians to assimilate each year. This review summarizes current diagnostic and categorical standards in substance use disorders, epidemiology, genetic and physiologic factors in addiction for each class, clinically relevant laboratory testing, evidence-based treatments, and prognostic considerations in substance use disorders. Specifically, sections cover cannabinoids, hallucinogens, opioids, sedatives, and stimulants.
This review contains 3 figures, 6 tables and 60 references
Key words: benzodiazepines, cannabis, drug dependence, hallucinogens, MDMA, substance abuse, substance dependence, synthetic cannabinoids
- 15
Delirium in the Emergency Department: Diagnosis, Evaluation, and Management
By Maura Kennedy, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFDelirium in the Emergency Department: Diagnosis, Evaluation, and Management
- MAURA KENNEDY, MD, MPHDivision Chief, Geriatric Emergency Medicine, Department of Emergency Medicine, Massachusetts General Hospital; Assistant Professor of Emergency Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFDelirium, an acute confusional state characterized by disturbances in attention, cognition, and arousal, is present in 7 to 10% of older emergency department (ED) patients, underdiagnosed in the ED setting, and associated with increased short-term mortality. Delirium is typically precipitated by a physiologic stressor, such as an acute medical illness, a new medication, or a change in environment. The keys to the care and management of delirious patients are timely diagnosis of delirium and identification and treatment of the precipitating cause. The medical evaluation should include a formal delirium assessment that includes tests of attention and targeted diagnostic tests to identify the underlying etiology, such as infection, metabolic derangement, neurologic emergencies, new medications, and/or toxidromes. Pharmacologic treatment of delirium should be limited to patients who are severely agitated and at risk for substantial harm to self and/or others and patients with delirium secondary to alcohol withdrawal. Typical and atypical psychotics at low doses are first line for use in severely agitated patients. Benzodiazepines may worsen delirium and should be reserved for treatment of patients with delirium secondary to alcohol withdrawal or if sedation is required for critical imaging and/or procedures. ED physicians should also be conscious of and strive to minimize iatrogenic precipitants of delirium.
This review contains 2 figures, 10 tables and 53 references
Key words: aged, agitation, arousal attention, confusion, delirium, delirium/diagnosis, delirium/etiology, delirium/therapy, dementia complications, geriatrics, risk factors
- 16
Depressive Disorders: Update on Diagnosis, Etiology, and Treatment
By Isabelle E. Bauer, PhD; Antonio L Teixeira, MD, PhD; Marsal Sanches, MD, PhD; Jair C. Soares, MD
Purchase PDFDepressive Disorders: Update on Diagnosis, Etiology, and Treatment
- ISABELLE E. BAUER, PHDDepartment of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, McGovern Medical School, Houston, TX
- ANTONIO L TEIXEIRA, MD, PHDDepartment of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, McGovern Medical School, Houston, TX
- MARSAL SANCHES, MD, PHDDepartment of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, McGovern Medical School, Houston, TX
- JAIR C. SOARES, MDDepartment of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, McGovern Medical School, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFThis review discusses the changes in the diagnostic criteria for depressive disorders as outlined in the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, fifth edition (DSM-5), and recent findings exploring the etiology of and treatment strategies for these disorders. Depressive disorders are typically characterized by depression in the absence of a lifetime history of mania or hypomania. New developments in the DSM-5 include the recognition of new types of depressive disorders, such as disruptive mood dysregulation disorder, persistent depressive disorder, premenstrual dysphoric disorder, and the addition of catatonic features as a specifier for persistent depressive disorder. These diagnostic changes have important implications for the prognosis and treatment of this condition. A thorough understanding of both the clinical phenotype and the biosignature of these conditions is essential to provide individualized, long-term, effective treatments to affected individuals.
This review contains 1 table and 52 references
Key words: brain volumes, depressive disorders, DSM-5, hormones, inflammation, neuropeptides, somatic therapy, stress
- 17
Substance Use Disorders
- F GERARD MOELLER, MDDirector, Center for Neurobehavioral Research on Addictions, Professor, Department of Psychiatry, University of Texas Health Science Center at Houston, Houston, TX
Purchase PDFThere is a consistent body of evidence showing that substance abuse and dependence can worsen preexisting medical conditions, can temporarily mimic medical and psychiatric disorders, and can themselves cause medical problems, including life-threatening overdose. Substance use disorders are common in young and middle-aged persons: the lifetime prevalence of these syndromes, including alcoholism, is over 20% for men and about 15% for women. This chapter discusses dependence, abuse, substance use disorder, and substance-induced disorders involving depressants, stimulants, opioids, cannabinoids, hallucinogens, N-methyl-D-aspartate (NMDA) receptor channel blockers, and inhalants. Epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology, diagnosis (including clinical assessment and laboratory tests), and treatment are reviewed. Treatment of intoxication, overdose, withdrawal, and rehabilitation is discussed. A figure illustrates the neurocircuitry of addiction. Tables describe the Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, 4th Edition (DSM-IV) diagnostic criteria for abuse and dependence; frequently misused drugs; neural effects of commonly abused drugs; the natural history of drug dependence; conditions affecting the outcome of urinary drug tests; and pharmacologic options for treatment of drug overdose. This chapter contains 112 references.
- 18
Overview of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
- DANA DOWNS, MA, MSWClinical Research Manager (Retired), Department of Psychiatry, The University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
- CAROL NORTH, MD, MPEMedical Director, The Altshuler Center for Education & Research at Metrocare Services, The Nancy and Ray L. Hunt Chair in Crisis Psychiatry and Professor of Psychiatry, The University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
Purchase PDFPosttraumatic stress disorder (PTSD) is a psychiatric disorder that may follow exposure to trauma. The experience of trauma has potential personal implications. Some individuals develop PTSD after trauma; others may be more resilient, experiencing distress but not succumbing to psychopathology; and yet others may emerge from the experience with new strength and direction.
This review contains 1 figure, 7 tables, and 48 references
Keyword: Posttraumatic stress disorder, transcranial magnetic stimulation (TMS), deep brain stimulation, vagal nerve stimulation, transcranial direct current stimulation, Diagnostic and Statistical Manual of Mental Disorders, hypothalamic-pituitary-adrenal (HPA) axis
- 19
Bipolar Disorders and Their Clinical Management, Part I: Epidemiology, Etiology, Genetics, and Neurobiology
By Vladimir Maletic, MD; Bernadette DeMuri-Maletic, MD
Purchase PDFBipolar Disorders and Their Clinical Management, Part I: Epidemiology, Etiology, Genetics, and Neurobiology
- VLADIMIR MALETIC, MD
- BERNADETTE DEMURI-MALETIC, MDClinical Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Mental Health Sciences, Medical College of Wisconsin, Milwaukee, WI
Purchase PDFThe concept of bipolar disorders has undergone a substantial evolution over the course of the past two decades. Emerging scientific research no longer supports the notion of bipolar disorder as a discrete neurobiologic entity. Most likely, there are a number of different biotypes with similar phenotypical manifestations. Advancements in genetic research suggest that bipolar disorders have a polygenetic pattern of inheritance, sharing common genetic underpinnings with a number of other psychiatric disorders, including schizophrenia, autistic spectrum disorder, and major depressive disorder. Contemporary etiological theories are discussed in some detail, inclusive of the role of immune disturbances, oxidative stress, and changes in neuroplasticity and neurotransmission, which underpin functional and structural brain changes associated with bipolar disorders. Contemporary epidemiologic research and understanding of disease evolution are discussed from the perspective of its clinical relevance. Our review provides a succinct summary of relevant literature.
This review contains 4 figures, 2 tables, and 80 references.
Key Words: bipolar disorders, endocrine disturbances, epidemiology, genetics, glia, immunity, neurobiology, neuroplasticity, neurotransmitters
- 20
Bipolar Disorders and Their Clinical Management, Part II: Diagnosis, Differential Diagnosis, and Treatment
By Bernadette DeMuri-Maletic, MD; Vladimir Maletic, MD, MS
Purchase PDFBipolar Disorders and Their Clinical Management, Part II: Diagnosis, Differential Diagnosis, and Treatment
- BERNADETTE DEMURI-MALETIC, MDClinical Assistant Professor of Psychiatry and Mental Health Sciences, Medical College of Wisconsin, Milwaukee, WI
- VLADIMIR MALETIC, MD, MSClinical Professor of Psychiatry and Behavioral Sciences, University of South Carolina School of Medicine, Greenville, SC
Purchase PDFBipolar disorder is a biologically and phenotypically diverse disorder and its diagnosis and treatment provides a significant challenge to even the most seasoned clinician. We provide an update on the diagnosis and differential diagnosis of bipolar disorder, reflecting recent changes in DSM-5. Our review provides a succinct summary of the treatment literature, encompassing pharmacologic and psychosocial interventions for bipolar depression, mania/hypomania, mixed states, and prevention of disease recurrence. We provide a brief critical review of emerging treatment modalities, including those used in treatment resistance. Challenges involved in maintaining adherence are further discussed. Additionally, we review common treatment adverse effects and provide recommendations for proper side effect monitoring. There is evidence of significant functional impairment in patients with bipolar disorder and we conclude with a discussion of the impact of impairment on prognosis and quality of life.
This review contains 4 figures, 8 tables, and 45 references.
Key Words: bipolar disorders, differential diagnosis, maintenance pharmacotherapy, prognosis, psychosocial interventions, treatment, quality of life
- 21
Unhealthy Alcohol Use
- STEPHEN R HOLT, MD, MSCAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
- JOSEPH H. DONROE, MD, MPH Assistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
Purchase PDFUnhealthy alcohol use refers to a spectrum of alcohol consumption ranging from at-risk drinking to alcohol use disorder. It is associated with both a high cost to society and to individuals. Globally, alcohol is a leading cause of death and disability, and despite the high prevalence of unhealthy alcohol use, diagnosis, and treatment of alcohol use disorder remains disproportionately low. Risk for unhealthy alcohol use and alcohol related harms is multifactorial and includes genetic factors, gender, age, socioeconomic status, cultural and societal norms, and policies regulating alcohol consumption among others. Excessive alcohol use is associated with a myriad of poor physical and mental health outcomes, and screening for unhealthy alcohol use is universally recommended and effective.
This review contains 1 figures, 2 tables, and 76 references.
Key Words: addiction, alcohol, cancer, diagnosis, drinking, liver disease, screening, stigma, use disorder
Important Advances - 22
Treatment of Unhealthy Alcohol Use
- STEPHEN R HOLT, MD, MSCAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Internal Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
- DAVID A FIELLIN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Investigative Medicine and Public Health, Department of Medicine, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
Purchase PDFUnhealthy alcohol use represents the fifth leading cause of morbidity and mortality globally, and the first leading cause among persons 18 to 45 years of age. Despite the global impact of unhealthy alcohol use, the adoption of evidence-based treatments has been sluggish. Behavioral strategies for lower level drinking include the brief motivational interview, designed to be within the scope of any healthcare provider, and more specialist-driven approaches for those with alcohol use disorder (AUD) such as cognitive behavioral therapy and motivational enhancement therapy. Benzodiazepines remain the mainstay treatment for inpatient alcohol withdrawal treatment, whereas other medications have similar efficacy in managing patients in the outpatient setting with milder forms of withdrawal. For maintenance treatment of AUD, four FDA-approved medications exist, with efficacy in treating AUD, as well as several non–FDA-approved medications that have been found to be effective in promoting abstinence and reducing drinking. The use of medication to treat many patients with AUD falls within the scope of primary care providers.
This review contains 6 tables and 54 references.
Key Words: addiction, alcohol, counseling, drinking, pharmacotherapy, primary care, psychotherapy, relapse, treatment
- 23
Clinical Management of Feeding and Eating Disorders
By Patricia Westmoreland, MD; Anne Marie O’Melia , MD
Purchase PDFClinical Management of Feeding and Eating Disorders
- PATRICIA WESTMORELAND, MDAttending Psychiatrist, Eating Recovery Center, Denver, CO Consultant, ACUTE, Denver Health, Denver CO Adjunct Assistant Professor, University of Colorado, Denver, CO Forensic Psychiatrist, Denver, CO
- ANNE MARIE O’MELIA , MD
Purchase PDFEating disorders are diverse in etiology and presentation and are best treated by a multidisciplinary treatment team (physicians, nurses, dietitians, and psychotherapists). Effective treatment includes combinations of behavioral management, psychotherapy, and psychiatric medication. Pica and rumination disorder are typically treated with behavioral management. Treatment of avoidant/restrictive food intake disorder and restricting or binge/purge anorexia nervosa usually requires nutritional and medical management before patients are able to benefit from psychotherapy or psychiatric medication management. There are currently only two medications FDA approved for treatment in eating disorders. Fluoxetine is FDA approved for the treatment of bulimia. Lisdexamfetamine was recently approved for the treatment of binge eating disorder. Novel therapies, such as deep brain stimulation, repetitive transcranial magnetic stimulation, and transcranial direct current stimulation, are being studied for the treatment of severe and enduring forms of anorexia nervosa.
This review contains 5 tables and 58 referencesKey words: behavioral management, diversity, FDA approval, fluoxetine, lisdexamfetamine, multidisciplinary team, novel therapies, psychotherapy, psychotropics
- 24
Feeding and Eating Disorders
- PATRICIA WESTMORELAND, MDAttending Psychiatrist, Eating Recovery Center, Denver, CO Consultant, ACUTE, Denver Health, Denver CO Adjunct Assistant Professor, University of Colorado, Denver, CO Forensic Psychiatrist, Denver, CO
- PHILLIP S MEHLER, MD
Purchase PDFFeeding and eating disorders are defined by persistent disturbance of eating (or behaviors related to eating) with subsequent changes in consumption or absorption of nutrition that are detrimental to physical health and social functioning. The following eating disorders are described in the DSM-5: anorexia nervosa, bulimia nervosa, binge eating disorder, pica, rumination disorder, avoidant/restrictive food intake disorder (ARFID), other specified feeding or eating disorder (OSFED), and unspecified feeding or eating disorder (USFED). ARFID, OSFED, USFED, rumination disorder, and binge eating disorder are new additions to the manual and are first described in the DSM-5. The DSM-5 also provides severity specifiers—mild, moderate, severe, and extreme—for the diagnoses of bulimia nervosa and anorexia nervosa. This review describes the eating disorders enumerated in the DSM-5 and provides information regarding their genesis and course.
This review contains 11 tables and 82 references
Key words: avoidant/restrictive eating disorder, binge eating disorder, DSM-5, eating disorder, other specified feeding or eating disorder, pharmacotherapy, pica rumination, psychotherapy, unspecified feeding or eating disorder
- 25
Overview of Posttraumatic Stress Disorder
- DANA DOWNS, MA, MSWClinical Research Manager (Retired), Department of Psychiatry, The University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
- CAROL NORTH, MD, MPEMedical Director, The Altshuler Center for Education & Research at Metrocare Services, The Nancy and Ray L. Hunt Chair in Crisis Psychiatry and Professor of Psychiatry, The University of Texas Southwestern Medical Center, Dallas, TX
- 26
Feeding and Eating Disorders
- PATRICIA WESTMORELAND, MDAttending Psychiatrist, Eating Recovery Center, Denver, CO Consultant, ACUTE, Denver Health, Denver CO Adjunct Assistant Professor, University of Colorado, Denver, CO Forensic Psychiatrist, Denver, CO
- PHILLIP S MEHLER, MD
- 27
Major Neurocognitive Disorders
By Rajesh R Tampi, MD, MS, DFAPA; Deena J Tampi, MSN, MBA-HCA, RN
Purchase PDFMajor Neurocognitive Disorders
- RAJESH R TAMPI, MD, MS, DFAPAProfessor of psychiatry at Case Western Reserve University School of Medicine and vice chairman for education and faculty development and program director in the Psychiatry Residency, Department of Psychiatry, MetroHealth, Cleveland, OH
- DEENA J TAMPI, MSN, MBA-HCA, RNExecutive director of Behavioral Health Services, Saint Francis Hospital and Medical Center, Hartford, CT.
- 28
Delirium
- SARAH WAGNER, DOResident Psychiatrist, Geisinger Medical Center, Danville, PA
- ROBERT GERSTMAN, DOStaff Psychiatrist, Geisinger Medical Center, Danville, PA
Purchase PDFDelirium is a disturbance of attention and awareness, which develops over a short period of time. It is a change in a person’s baseline and fluctuates throughout the course of the day. Delirium can accompany almost any serious medical illness. It is an independent risk factor for increasing a person’s morbidity and mortality. Delirium is associated with an increased length of hospital stay and an increase in health care cost. There is growing literature to assist in the diagnosing and treatment of patients with delirium. This article dives into the recent research addressing the pharmacologic and nonpharmacologic methods to treat delirium. Various pharmacologic interventions have been studied over the past several years including the use of melatonin, ramelteon, dexmedetomidine, and antipsychotics.1,2
This review contains 5 tables and 20 references
Key Words: acute brain failure, altered mental status, Confusion Assessment Method, critical care, delirium, encephalopathy, ICU, RASS, Richmond Agitation-Sedation Scale
- 29
Delirium
- SARAH WAGNER, DOResident Psychiatrist, Geisinger Medical Center, Danville, PA
- ROBERT GERSTMAN, DOStaff Psychiatrist, Geisinger Medical Center, Danville, PA
- 30
Sleep Disorders
- SUDHANSU CHOKROVERTY, MD, FRCP, FACPProfessor and Director of Sleep Research, Medical Director of Devry Technology Training Program, Co-Chair Emeritus of Neurology, Department of Neurology, JFK Neuroscience Institute, Edison, NJ, Professor of Neuroscience, Seton Hall University, South Orange, NJ, Clinical Professor of Neurology, Robert Wood Johnson Medical School, New Brunswick, NJ
- 1
- Pulmonary & Critical Care Medicine
- 1
Imaging of Lung Disease, Part I: Focal and Diffuse Parenchymal Lung Diseases
By Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP; Eugene A Berkowitz, MD, PhD; Adam Bernheim, MD
Purchase PDFImaging of Lung Disease, Part I: Focal and Diffuse Parenchymal Lung Diseases
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- EUGENE A BERKOWITZ, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Radiology, Emory University School of Medicine, Grady Health System, Department of Radiology and Imaging Sciences, Atlanta, GA
- ADAM BERNHEIM, MD
Purchase PDFParenchymal lung disease often presents on imaging with particular patterns that allow for recognition of certain clinical entities that may form the basis for an imaging differential diagnosis. Focal pulmonary opacities and multi-focal pulmonary opacities may be due to an infectious or neoplastic etiology, amongst other possibilities. Segmental/lobar opacities are also associated with a set of differential diagnoses. Diffuse parenchymal disease, while also associated with some infections and neoplasms, can additionally be seen in the setting of pneumoconioses and several idiopathic interstitial pneumonias. Combining clinical information including laboratory results with the imaging findings on chest radiography and computed tomography (CT) allows the physician to formulate an appropriate differential diagnosis or reach one specific diagnosis.
This review contains 16 figures, 4 tables and 32 references
Keywords: Pulmonary Opacity, Pulmonary Infection, Eosinophilic Pneumonia, Lipoid Pneumonia, Pulmonary Tuberculosis, Organizing Pneumonia, Lung Cancer, Diffuse Lung Disease, Pneumoconiosis, Idiopathic Interstitial Pneumonia
- 2
Imaging of Lung Disease, Part II: cavities, Cysts, Nodules, and Masses
By Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP; Eugene A Berkowitz, MD, PhD; Adam Bernheim, MD
Purchase PDFImaging of Lung Disease, Part II: cavities, Cysts, Nodules, and Masses
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- EUGENE A BERKOWITZ, MD, PHDAssistant Professor of Radiology, Emory University School of Medicine, Grady Health System, Department of Radiology and Imaging Sciences, Atlanta, GA
- ADAM BERNHEIM, MD
Purchase PDFCavitary lesions may occur in the setting of pulmonary infection, neoplasm, or vasculitis. Cystic lung disease must be differentiated from emphysema and is seen in lymphangioleiomyomatosis, Langerhans cell histiocytosis (LCH), and lymphoid interstitial pneumonia (LIP). Pulmonary nodules are routinely encountered on chest imaging and may be due to benign or malignant etiologies. There are follow-up algorithms that provide recommendations for solid and sub-solid nodules in certain clinical scenarios. Nodules characteristics (such as size, morphology, and number [solitary versus multiple]) and patient characteristics (including age, oncology history, and cigarette smoking status) are important to consider in formulating a differential diagnosis and follow-up plan. Lung cancer screening computed tomography (CT) is now a recommended screening test for high-risk patients who meet certain eligibility requirements, and should be reported according to the Lung Imaging Reporting and Data System (Lung-RADS).
This review contains 28 figures, 3 tables and 26 references
Keywords: Cavitary Lung Disease, Granulomatosis with Polyangiitis, Cystic Lung Disease, Lymphoid Interstitial Pneumonia, Pulmonary Emphysema, Pulmonary Nodules, Pulmonary Granulomatous Disease, Arteriovenous Malformation, Lung Cancer Screening, Pulmonary Fungal Infection
- 3
Central Sleep Apnea
- DIANE C LIM, MD, MTRAssistant Professor, Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- RICHARD J SCHWAB, MDProfessor, Medicine University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFAs part 3 of the three chapters on sleep-disordered breathing, this chapter reviews central sleep apnea (CSA). CSA is defined as recurrent apneic events during sleep in the absence of respiratory muscle effort and loss of neuronal output to respiratory muscles. The most common cause of CSA is compromised cardiac function. In patients with CSA whose ejection fraction is less than or equal to 45%, adaptive servo-ventilation (ASV) has been shown to increase mortality. With the abuse of opioids reaching epidemic proportions, it has been estimated that 30 to 75% of patients on chronic opioid therapy have a significant increased incidence of CSA. Opioid-induced sleep-disordered breathing can be treated with ASV.
This review contains 1 figure, and 37 references.
Key Words: adaptive servo-ventilation, central sleep apnea, Cheyne-Stokes respiration, congenital central hypoventilation syndrome, impaired central ventilatory drive, opioid abuse, PHOX2B gene, supplemental oxygen
- 4
Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Diagnosis and Management
By Diane C Lim, MD, MTR; Richard J Schwab, MD
Purchase PDFObstructive Sleep Apnea: Diagnosis and Management
- DIANE C LIM, MD, MTRAssistant Professor, Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- RICHARD J SCHWAB, MDProfessor, Medicine University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFAs part 2 of three chapters on sleep disordered breathing, this chapter reviews obstructive sleep apnea (OSA) diagnosis and management. OSA should be considered in all patients who have loud habitual snoring, excessive daytime sleepiness, and witnessed apneas. On physical examination, craniofacial abnormalities that can lead to sleep apnea include retrognathia, micrognathia, a narrow hard palate, nasal obstruction, an overjet, and an overbite. Enlargement of the upper airway soft tissue structures (the tongue, soft palate, lateral walls, and parapharyngeal fat pads) also increases the risk of OSA. The gold standard for making the diagnosis of OSA is overnight polysomnography, but home sleep apnea tests (HSAT) are rapidly gaining acceptance, especially in patients with a high probability of OSA. The first line of therapy for OSA remains positive airway pressure (PAP), with the second line of therapy being oral appliances. Another alternative to PAP therapy is hypoglossal nerve stimulation, which has been shown to decrease the Apnea-Hypopnea index by 67.4%.
This review contains 6 figures, 3 tables, and 52 references.
Key Words: craniofacial abnormalities, Epworth Sleepiness Scale, home sleep apnea test, hypoglossal nerve stimulation, obstructive sleep apnea, oral appliances, oral pharyngeal crowding, polysomnography, positive airway pressure, STOP-BANG
- 5
Obstructive Sleep Apnea: Epidemiology, Causes, and Consequences
By Diane C Lim, MD, MTR; Richard J Schwab, MD
Purchase PDFObstructive Sleep Apnea: Epidemiology, Causes, and Consequences
- DIANE C LIM, MD, MTRAssistant Professor, Medicine, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
- RICHARD J SCHWAB, MDProfessor, Medicine University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFAs part one of the three chapters on sleep-disordered breathing, this chapter reviews obstructive sleep apnea (OSA) epidemiology, causes, and consequences. When comparing OSA prevalence between 1988 to 1994 and 2007 to 2010, we observe that OSA is rapidly on the rise, paralleling increasing rates in obesity. Global epidemiologic studies indicate that there are differences specific to ethnicity with Asians presenting with OSA at a lower body mass index than Caucasians. We have learned that structural and physiologic factors increase the risk of OSA and both can be influenced by genetics. Structural risk factors include craniofacial bony restriction, changes in fat distribution, and the size of the upper airway muscles. Physiologic risk factors include airway collapsibility, loop gain, pharyngeal muscle responsiveness, and arousal threshold. The consequences of OSA include daytime sleepiness and exacerbation of many underlying diseases. OSA has been associated with cardiovascular diseases including hypertension, coronary heart disease, stroke, atrial fibrillation, and other cardiac arrhythmias; pulmonary hypertension; metabolic disorders such as type 2 diabetes, hypothyroidism, acromegaly, Cushing syndrome, and polycystic ovarian syndrome; mild cognitive impairment or dementia; and cancer.
This review contains 4 figures, 1 table and 48 references.
Key Words: cardiac consequences, craniofacial bony restriction, epidemiology, fat distribution, metabolic disease, neurodegeneration, obesity, obstructive sleep apnea
- Pulmonary
- 1
Approach to the Patient With Cough
- CHRISTOPHER H. FANTA, MDDirector, Partners Asthma Center; Member, Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine Division, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital; and Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe cough reflex is critically important in the clearance of abnormal airway secretions and protection of the lower respiratory tract from aspirated foreign matter. A weak or ineffective cough can lead to respiratory compromise from even a relatively minor bronchial infection. Persistent cough is often one of a constellation of symptoms indicative of respiratory disease—a potential clue in the differential diagnosis of the patient’s illness. Given the widespread distribution of sensory nerve endings of the cough reflex throughout the upper and lower respiratory tract, it is not surprising that myriad respiratory diseases, involving lung parenchyma and airways, can manifest with cough. Sometimes cough is the sole or predominant symptom in a patient who is otherwise well. Evaluating and treating the patient with persistent cough who has few, if any, other respiratory symptoms is a common challenge for the practicing physician. This review covers the normal cough mechanism, impaired cough, pathologic cough, cough suppressant therapy, and new developments. Figures show a flow-volume loop during cough, a posteroanterior chest x-ray in a patient presenting with chronic cough, flow-volume curves and spirograms documenting expiratory airflow obstruction, and the approach to the patient with chronic cough. The table lists selected examples of extrapulmonary physical findings of potential importance in the assessment of cough.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 1 table, and 94 references.
- 2
Approach to the Patient With Dyspnea
- ROZA BADR ESLAM, MDPulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Department of Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA, Division of Cardiology, Department of Internal Medicine II, Medical University of Vienna, Vienna, Austria
- AARON B WAXMAN, MD, PHDPulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Director, Pulmonary Vascular Disease Program, Executive Director, Center for Pulmonary-Heart Diseases, Brigham and Women’s Hospital Heart and Vascular Center, Associate Professor of Medicine/Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFDyspnea is a common, distressing symptom of cardiopulmonary and neuromuscular disease. In a consensus statement, the American Thoracic Society defined dyspnea as “a subjective experience of breathing discomfort that consists of qualitatively distinct sensations that vary in intensity.” Dyspnea is a nonspecific complaint and is one of the most frequent patient complaints. This review discusses the definition, epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology, peripheral mechanisms, and evaluation of dyspnea. Figures depict cellular metabolism and exercise physiology, and an invasive cardiopulmonary exercise testing (iCPET) flow diagram. Tables list the common causes of dyspnea, invasive cardiopulmonary exercise testing (iCPET) diagnosis, and iCPET characteristics of pulmonary hypertension.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 51 references.
- 3
Pulmonary Function Testing
- MARYL KREIDER, MD, MSAssistant Professor of Medicine, University of Pennsylvania School of Medicine, Medical Director, Pulmonary Diagnostics Laboratory, Hospital of the University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFIntelligent management of pulmonary disease requires a fundamental understanding of the complex interrelationships between multiple elements that interact to maintain homeostasis in the respiratory system. This chapter discusses the physiologic basis for pulmonary function testing and the use of these tests to diagnose disease, quantitate functional impairments, and follow the effects of treatment. Figures illustrate the relationships between lung volume, airway conductance, and airway resistance; the relationship between forced expiratory volume and time (spirogram); the relationship between spirometry and maximum expiratory flow volume; dynamic airway compression; patterns of abnormalities seen on flow-volume curves; lung volumes and capacities; pressure-volume relationships in health and disease; and the clinical assessment of lung function. Tables list the capacities and volumes of gas contained in the lungs during various breathing maneuvers, conditions associated with alterations in diffusing capacity, and recommendations for tests for various clinical scenarios.
This review contains 7 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 86 references.
- 4
Invasive Diagnostic and Therapeutic Techniques in Lung Disease
By Raphael Bueno, MD; Abby White, DO
Purchase PDFInvasive Diagnostic and Therapeutic Techniques in Lung Disease
- RAPHAEL BUENO, MDAssociate Chief, Division of Thoracic Surgery, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- ABBY WHITE, DOInstructor, Department of Surgery, Harvard Medical School, Associate Surgeon, Division of Thoracic Surgery, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Consultant Surgeon, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis review encompasses the diagnosis and management of primary lung diseases. Although every encounter with a patient with suspected primary lung disease begins with a history and physical examination, many patients present with imaging abnormalities. It is therefore essential to have a thorough understanding of chest radiography, computed tomography (CT), magnetic resonance imaging (MRI), and ultrasonography (US). Many patients are simply followed with chest CT to monitor disease progression, stability, or regression before proceeding with invasive methods, the subject of this review. This review discusses flexible and rigid bronchoscopies, and open and video-assisted surgeries.
This review contains 21 figures, 9 tables, and 40 references.
Keywords: Lung, transplant, bronchoscopy, thoracotomy, video-assisted thoracoscopic surgery, ablation, electrocautery, cryotherapy, stent, thoracentesis, mediastinoscopy
- 5
Asthma
- HAITHAM NSOUR, MBBSAssistant Professor, Department of Medicine, University of Vermont College of Medicine, Fletcher Allen Health Care, Burlington, VT
- ANNE E. DIXON, MA, BMBCHProfessor, Department of Medicine, University of Vermont College of Medicine, Fletcher Allen Health Care, Burlington, VT
Purchase PDFAsthma is one of the most common diseases in developed nations. A pathognomonic feature of asthma is episodic aggravations of the disease; these exacerbations can be life-threatening and contribute to a significant proportion of the public health burden of asthma. In the emergency department, successful management of asthma exacerbations requires early recognition and intervention before they become severe and potentially fatal. This review summarizes the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, diagnosis and treatment, and disposition and outcomes for asthma. Figures show the management of asthma exacerbations in the emergency department and hospital, pooled odds ratio comparing inhaled corticosteroids and oral corticosteroids with oral corticosteroids alone following emergency department discharge, and an asthma discharge plan at the emergency department. Tables list current asthma prevalence among selected demographic groups in the United States, risk factors for fatal asthma exacerbations, differential diagnosis of asthma exacerbations, and dosages of drugs for asthma exacerbations.
This review contains 3 figures, 16 tables, and 88 references.
Key Words: Asthma, allergic bronchopulmonary aspergillosis, gastroesophageal reflux disease, sinus disease, breathlessness, shortness of breath
- 6
Chronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
By Andrew J Schissler, MD; George Washko, MD; Carolyn E. Come, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFChronic Obstructive Pulmonary Disease
- ANDREW J SCHISSLER, MDClinical and Research Fellow, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- GEORGE WASHKO, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- CAROLYN E. COME, MD, MPHInstructor in Medicine, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFChronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD) is a leading cause of disability and death worldwide. This edition reviews the epidemiology and etiologies of COPD, including the gender effects, racial differences, and more recently identified genetic factors associated with this condition. It details the many pathogenetic mechanisms thought to be associated with this disease state, such as increased airway inflammation and turnover of extracellular matrix. There is a detailed discussion about diagnosis, classification, and the therapeutic options available for both stable disease and acute exacerbations. The recent evidence supporting various treatments, such as vaccinations, inhaled bronchodilators, inhaled corticosteroids, oral corticosteroids, antibiotics, supplemental oxygen, pulmonary rehabilitation, and surgery, is reviewed in depth. There is further evaluation of experimental approaches, such as bronchoscopic lung reduction procedures and the use of extracorporeal carbon dioxide removal for hypercapnic respiratory failure. The many complications associated with COPD are described, acknowledging that evidence continues to suggest that COPD has a significant systemic component associated with increased rates of psychiatric illness, cardiovascular disease, osteoporosis, and skeletal muscle dysfunction along with lung cancer. Overall this text serves as an excellent evidence-based guide to better understand, diagnose, and manage COPD and its array of associated complications.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 241 references
Key words: chronic obstructive pulmonary disease (COPD), COPD complications, COPD diagnosis, COPD management, COPD pathophysiology, Global Initiative for Chronic Obstructive Lung Disease (GOLD)
- 7
Sarcoidosis
- ROBERT P BAUGHMAN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Cincinnati Medical Center Cincinnati, OH
- MARY BETH SCHOLAND, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, UT
Purchase PDFSarcoidosis is a systemic disease characterized by the presence of noncaseating granulomas, which accumulate in affected organs. The incidence, organ involvement, and disease severity depend on environmental exposures and host factors. The cause of sarcoidosis remains unknown. Any organ can be affected; however, involvement of the lung, heart, and nervous system contributes most to morbidity and mortality. This review discusses the epidemiology, etiology, genetics, pathogenesis, diagnosis (including clinical manifestations), differential diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis of sarcoidosis. Figures depict the pathogenesis of sarcoidosis, radiographic stages of sarcoidosis, contrast-enhanced magnetic resonance imaging of a patient with neurosarcoidosis, noncaseating granuloma from a tissue biopsy of a patient with sarcoidosis, various manifestations of sarcoidosis, approach to the use of anti-inflammatory therapy for sarcoidosis, and an algorithm for symptomatic disease.
This review contains 7 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 127 references
Keywords: cardiac sarcoidosis, hilar lymphadenopathy, Löfgren syndrome, neurosarcoidosis, noncaseating granuloma, sarcoidosis, uveitis
- 8
Cystic Fibrosis and Non-cystic Fibrosis Bronchiectasis
- MICHAEL J STEPHEN, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Drexel University School of Medicine, Philadelphia, PA
Purchase PDFCystic fibrosis (CF) is an autosomal recessive disease characterized by an elevated sweat chloride level, diffuse bronchiectasis, and pancreatic exocrine deficiency. It is the most common lethal inherited disease in whites. Most patients present at birth or early childhood, although later diagnoses are not infrequent. Once CF was uniformly fatal at an early age, but advances in nutrition, airway clearance, and infection management have led to an average survival of 37 years. The newest aspect of care is the advent of protein modulators, which may increase life expectancy even further. This chapter discusses the epidemiology, genetics, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment of CF. The definition, epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, management, and prognosis of non-CF bronchiectasis are also covered. Figures illustrate normal and abnormal CF transmembrane conductance regulators, the vicious cycle hypothesis of lung injury, rates of respiratory germs by age, the diagnosis of CF, the therapeutics pipeline for CF, forced expiratory volume in 1 second lung function percent predicted versus body mass index, and the median predicted survival age of patients with CF. A chest x-ray and chest computed tomographic scan of CF are also provided. Tables outline the most common CF mutations in 2011, class mutations of CF, a mnemonic for acute exacerbations of CF, the diagnosis of CF-related diabetes in a stable patient, sweat test values, and the differential diagnosis of bronchiectasis.
This chapter contains 9 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, 143 references, 1 teaching slide set, and 5 MCQs. - 9
Idiopathic Pulmonary Fibrosis
By Lawrence A Ho, MD; Bridget F Collins, MD; Ganesh Raghu, MD
Purchase PDFIdiopathic Pulmonary Fibrosis
- LAWRENCE A HO, MDClinical Assistant Professor, Center for Interstitial Lung Disease, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- BRIDGET F COLLINS, MDClinical Assistant Professor, Center for Interstitial Lung Disease, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- GANESH RAGHU, MDProfessor of Medicine & Lab Medicine, Center for Interstitial Lung Disease, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFIdiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF), also known as cryptogenic fibrosing alveolitis, is a chronic and progressive fibrosing interstitial pneumonia of unknown cause that typically manifests after the fifth to sixth decade of life. The fibrosis is limited to the lung, and clinical features include progressive dyspnea and a restrictive pulmonary physiology. IPF is characterized by a usual interstitial pneumonia (UIP) pattern on high-resolution computed tomography (HRCT) and histopathology. This review discusses the definition, epidemiology, etiology/genetics, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis of IPF. Figures depict the pathogenesis of IPF, a chest x-ray in a patient with IPF, HRCT scans, and histopathologic features of UIP. Tables list HRCT criteria for UIP patterns, the elements required for IPF diagnosis, and the GAP model for IPF prognosis.
This review contains 8 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 108 references.
- 10
Idiopathic Lung Diseases Other Than Pulmonary Fibrosis
By Lawrence A Ho, MD; Bridget F Collins, MD; Ganesh Raghu, MD
Purchase PDFIdiopathic Lung Diseases Other Than Pulmonary Fibrosis
- LAWRENCE A HO, MDClinical Assistant Professor, Center for Interstitial Lung Disease, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- BRIDGET F COLLINS, MDClinical Assistant Professor, Center for Interstitial Lung Disease, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- GANESH RAGHU, MDProfessor of Medicine & Lab Medicine, Center for Interstitial Lung Disease, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFIdiopathic lung diseases are diffuse parenchymal lung diseases that are grouped under the term interstitial lung disease (ILD). The term interstitial (or interstitium) is, however, misleading as the term interstitium refers to the microscopic anatomic space between the basement membranes of the endothelial and epithelial cells. The pathologic processes involved in these diseases, however, are not limited to the interstitium and can affect other elements of the gas exchange units as well as bronchiolar lumen, terminal bronchioles, pulmonary parenchyma, and pleural and vascular spaces. Since there are potentially hundreds of agents and clinical situations that are associated with ILD, a simplified grouping scheme includes seven main entities: ILD associated with (1) occupational and environmental factors (inhalation cause), (2) collagen vascular diseases, (3) granulomatous lung disease of known and unknown causes (eg, hypersensitivity pneumonitis [HP], sarcoidosis), (4) inherited diseases, (5) iatrogenic/drug induced, (6) certain specific entities (eg, pulmonary Langerhans cell histiocytosis [PLCH], lymphangioleimyomatosis, and (7) idiopathic interstitial pneumonia (IIP). As idiopathic pulmonary fibrosis (IPF) is a subgroup of IIP, this review focuses on the clinical features and management of the major IIPs, and IPF is discussed more in the review, “Idiopathic Pulmonary Fibrosis,” found elsewhere in this publication. This review also focuses on HP as it is a key disease in the differential diagnosis of the IIPs. Figures depict chest radiographs, high resolution computed topography (HRCT) scans, and histopathologic features of various ILDs. Tables list the American Thoracic Society (ATS) and the European Respiratory Society (ERS) classification of IIPs, and common antigens associated with HP and their potential sources.
This review contains 22 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 156 references.
- 11
Occupational and Environmental Lung Diseases: Diagnosis and Prevention
By Cora S Sack, MD ; Sverre Vedal, MSc, MD; Joel D Kaufman, MPH, MD
Purchase PDFOccupational and Environmental Lung Diseases: Diagnosis and Prevention
- CORA S SACK, MD Department of Environmental and Occupational Health Sciences, University of Washington, Seattle, WA, Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- SVERRE VEDAL, MSC, MDDepartment of Environmental and Occupational Health Sciences, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- JOEL D KAUFMAN, MPH, MDDepartment of Environmental and Occupational Health Sciences, University of Washington, Seattle, WA, Department of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA, Department of Epidemiology, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFEnvironmental and occupational lung diseases encompass a diverse group of lung diseases caused by the inhalation of potentially harmful substances. Although workplace regulations and the changing economy in the United States have significantly decreased incidence, these diseases remain both common and associated with significant morbidity. In addition, novel exposures continue to be recognized as new causes of disease. This review provides the medical student and clinician with a framework for approaching and categorizing environmental and occupational lung disease. It also presents an in-depth discussion of the epidemiology, biological mechanisms, diagnosis, and clinical care of some of the more commonly encountered diseases. Occupational lung diseases that affect the airways, such as work-related asthma and chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, and malignant neoplasms are covered. This review concludes with general strategies to help prevent disease incidence and progression.
This review contains 1 figure, 5 tables, and 56 references.
Key words: bronchiolitis obliterans, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, irritant-induced occupational asthma, mesothelioma, occupational asthma, occupational lung disease, occupational lung neoplasm, work-related asthma
- 12
Pulmonary Hypertension, Cor Pulmonale, and Other Pulmonary Vascular Conditions
By Matthew Moll, MD; Mayank Sardana, MBBS; Harrison W. Farber, MD, FAHA, FCCP
Purchase PDFPulmonary Hypertension, Cor Pulmonale, and Other Pulmonary Vascular Conditions
- MATTHEW MOLL, MDResident, Department of Internal Medicine, Boston Medical Center, Boston, MA
- MAYANK SARDANA, MBBSFellow, Division of Cardiology, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
- HARRISON W. FARBER, MD, FAHA, FCCPProfessor of Medicine, Pulmonary Center, Boston University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis review covers the diseases that affect the pulmonary vasculature directly. These conditions include pulmonary hypertension; pulmonary arterial hypertension; chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension; pulmonary hypertension attributed to left heart disease, lung disease and/or hypoxemia, and other disorders; cor pulmonale; pulmonary atriovenous malformations; and pulmonary aneurysms. Figures show changes in the pulmonary vasculature in pulmonary hypertension, pathways involved in the development of pulmonary hypertension, general guidelines for the evaluation of suspected pulmonary hypertension, enlarged proximal pulmonary arteries with pruning of distal pulmonary vasculature (typical of advanced pulmonary arterial hypertension), the remodeling of the heart and continuous-wave Doppler study results observed with chronic pulmonary hypertension, ventilation and perfusion scans of the lungs with results typical of chronic thromboembolic pulmonary hypertension, and a general approach to the treatment of patients with pulmonary arterial hypertension. Tables list the revised nomenclature and classification of pulmonary hypertension, the World Health Organization classification of functional capacity in patients with pulmonary hypertension, advanced vascular medications for pulmonary artery hypertension, and perioperative management of pulmonary arterial hypertension.
This review contains 8 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 118 references.
- 13
Disorders of the Pleura, Mediastinum, and Hilum
By Andrew D Lerner, MD; David Feller-Kopman, MD
Purchase PDFDisorders of the Pleura, Mediastinum, and Hilum
- ANDREW D LERNER, MDAssistant in Medicine, Interventional Pulmonology, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Johns Hopkins Hospital, Baltimore, MD
- DAVID FELLER-KOPMAN, MDDirector, Bronchoscopy and Interventional Pulmonology, Associate Professor of Medicine, Otolaryngology–Head and Neck Surgery, Interventional Pulmonology, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, Johns Hopkins Hospital, Baltimore, MD
Purchase PDFThe pleura are a composition of two serous membranes: the visceral pleura lining the lungs and the parietal pleura lining the inner chest wall, diaphragm, and mediastinum. The pulmonary hilum is composed of blood vessels, airways, nerves, and lymph nodes and denotes the meeting point between the mediastinum and the pleural cavities. This review covers disorders of the pleura, mediastinum, and hilum. Figures show a schematic diagram of normal filtration/resorption of fluid in the pleural space; comparison of a simultaneously obtained chest x-ray (CXR) and a chest computed tomographic (CT) scan of the same patient; an algorithm for evaluation of patients with pleural effusion (PE); a three-compartment model of mediastinal anatomy; photographs of a resected, well-encapsulated thymoma and a benign, multiloculated thymic cyst that were completely removed by sternotomy, a resected esophageal duplication cyst, and an esophageal leiomyoma being removed by means of a right thoracotomy; CT scans demonstrating the characteristic appearance of an invasive thymoma, an extragonadal germ cell tumor, a primary mediastinal B cell lymphoma, a goiter with extension behind the trachea, right paratracheal adenopathy in the middle mediastinal compartment, a middle mediastinal cystic mass, a large subcarinal bronchogenic cyst, a tracheal chondrosarcoma, gas in the mediastinum due to esophageal perforation, and mediastinal fibrosis; coronal imaging showing a large, smooth muscle tumor associated with the distal esophagus; a barium swallow showing a large esophageal perforation that resulted in soilage of the middle mediastinum; and posteroanterior and lateral CXRs of a posterior mediastinal neurogenic tumor accompanied by a CT scan showing the posterior mediastinal neurogenic tumor visualized in the posteroanterior radiograph.
This review contains 19 figures, 51 tables, and 83 references.
Keywords: Mediastinum, mediastinitis, pleural effusion, empyema, congestive heart failure, adenopathy, thymoma, esophageal perforation
- 14
Chest Wall and Neuromuscular Disease
- BAŞAK ÇORUH, MDSenior Fellow, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- JOSHUA O BENDITT, MDProfessor, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFChest wall and neuromuscular diseases encompass a broad spectrum of illnesses that affect the mechanics of breathing. This chapter reviews the physiology of the respiratory system and the impact of these diseases. A brief discussion of various chest wall and neuromuscular diseases is included. The approach to the evaluation of a patient with suspected chest wall or neuromuscular disease, including key aspects of the history, physical examination, and diagnostic testing, is discussed. Respiratory care, including ventilation, cough, swallowing, and sleep, is described. Tables outline neuromuscular diseases affecting the respiratory system, causes of diaphragm weakness and paralysis, and a comprehensive approach to respiratory care in chest wall and neuromuscular disease. Figures include illustrations of the anatomy of the respiratory system and contraction of the diaphragm, pressure measures above and below the diaphragm, radiographic images of chest wall diseases and measurement of the Cobb angle, a computed tomographic scan of a patient with pectus excavatum, a graph showing patterns of pulmonary function testing in chest wall and neuromuscular disease, and photos of mouthpiece ventilation and a mechanical insufflator-exsufflator device. Videos show a fluoroscopic sniff test demonstrating unilateral diaphragm paralysis and the use of a mechanical insufflator-exsufflator device.
This review contains 9 figures, 2 videos, 22 tables, and 51 references.
- 15
Lung Transplantation 1: an Overview - Recipient Evaluation and Procedures
By Hilary J Goldberg, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFLung Transplantation 1: an Overview - Recipient Evaluation and Procedures
- HILARY J GOLDBERG, MD, MPHProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFLung transplantation is a potential therapeutic option for select candidates with advanced lung disease who have exhausted other therapeutic interventions and in whom survival and/or quality of life are threatened by the progression of disease. Although lung transplantation may confer substantial benefits on recipients, the median survival after lung transplantation according to the most recent registry data is only 5.7 years, substantially shorter than that for other solid-organ transplant cohorts. As a result, the available prognostic data for potential recipients in the absence of lung transplantation, the risks of transplantation, and the potential benefits in terms of survival and quality of life should be reviewed in detail when considering this intervention. This review discusses candidates for lung transplantation, timing of transplantation, organ donors and donor-recipient matching, transplantation procedures, and transplantation outcomes.
This review contains 4 figures, 7 tables, and 70 references.
Keyword: Lung transplant, recipient, donor, brain-dead donor, cadaver, cystic fibrosis, bronchiectasis
- 16
Lung Transplantation 2: Care of the Lung Transplant Recipient
By Hilary J Goldberg, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFLung Transplantation 2: Care of the Lung Transplant Recipient
- HILARY J GOLDBERG, MD, MPHProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFLung transplantation is a potential therapeutic option for select candidates with advanced lung disease who have exhausted other therapeutic interventions and in whom survival and/or quality of life are threatened by the progression of disease. Although lung transplantation may confer substantial benefits on recipients, the median survival after lung transplantation according to the most recent registry data is only 5.7 years,1 substantially shorter than that for other solid-organ transplant cohort. This review discusses posttransplantation management, transplantation outcomes, and posttransplanation complications.
This review contains 5 figures, 6 tables, and 38 references.
Keywords: Lung transplant, postoperative period, immunosuppression, survival, complications, allograft rejection, infection, bronchiolitis obliterans syndrome, lung infection
- 17
Occupational and Environmental Lung Diseases Selected Pneumoconiosis
By Cora S Sack, MD ; Sverre Vedal, MSc, MD; Joel D Kaufman, MPH, MD
Purchase PDFOccupational and Environmental Lung Diseases Selected Pneumoconiosis
- CORA S SACK, MD Department of Environmental and Occupational Health Sciences, University of Washington, Seattle, WA, Department of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- SVERRE VEDAL, MSC, MDDepartment of Environmental and Occupational Health Sciences, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- JOEL D KAUFMAN, MPH, MDDepartment of Environmental and Occupational Health Sciences, University of Washington, Seattle, WA, Department of Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA, Department of Epidemiology, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFEnvironmental and occupational lung diseases encompass a diverse group of lung diseases caused by the inhalation of potentially harmful substances. This review provides an in-depth discussion of the pneumoconioses, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, chronic beryllium disease, and other occupational lung diseases that affect the parenchyma. For each disease, the review presents the epidemiology, biologic mechanisms when known, diagnosis, and clinical care. The review includes tables with different pneumoconioses, occupations and industries associated with silicosis and asbestosis, and some selected causes of hypersensitivity pneumonitis, as well as chest radiographs, computed tomographic scans, and/or pathologic slides of some selected diseases.
This review contains 9 figures, 4 tables, and 68 references.
Key words: asbestosis, asbestos-related pleural plaque, coal worker’s pneumoconiosis, chronic beryllium disease, hard metal pneumoconiosis, hypersensitivity pneumonitis, pneumoconiosis, progressive massive fibrosis, silicosis
- 18
Pulmonary Edema I: Cardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
By Annette Esper, MD; Greg S Martin, MD, MSc, FACP; Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPulmonary Edema I: Cardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
- ANNETTE ESPER, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GREG S MARTIN, MD, MSC, FACPAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
Purchase PDFThere are two categories of pulmonary edema: edema caused by increased capillary pressure (hydrostatic or cardiogenic edema) and edema caused by increased capillary permeability (noncardiogenic pulmonary edema, or acute respiratory distress syndrome). This review focuses on cardiogenic pulmonary edema and describes the general approach to patients with suspected cardiogenic pulmonary edema. The pathogenesis, diagnosis, treatment, and outcome of cardiogenic pulmonary edema are reviewed. Figures include chest scans showing pulmonary edema and noncardiogenic pulmonary edema, an illustration of the differences between cardiogenic and noncardiogenic edema, and a chart comparing lung mechanics and other variables in experimental models of cardiogenic pulmonary edema and noncardiogenic edema. Tables show clinical characteristics of patients with cardiogenic pulmonary edema and treatment options.
This review contains 3 figures, 4 tables, and 29 references
Keywords: cardiogenic pulmonary edema, congestive heart failure, pulmonary edema, Starling’s law
- 19
Pulmonary Edema II: Noncardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
By Annette Esper, MD; Greg S Martin, MD, MSc, FACP; Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPulmonary Edema II: Noncardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
- ANNETTE ESPER, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GREG S MARTIN, MD, MSC, FACPAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
Purchase PDFThere are two categories of pulmonary edema: edema caused by increased capillary pressure (hydrostatic or cardiogenic edema) and edema caused by increased capillary permeability (noncardiogenic pulmonary edema, or acute respiratory distress syndrome [ARDS]). This review focuses on noncardiogenic pulmonary edema and describes the general approach to patients with suspected pulmonary edema. The pathogenesis, diagnosis, treatment, and outcome of noncardiogenic pulmonary edema are reviewed. Miscellaneous causes of pulmonary edema are discussed, including neurologic insults, exposure to high altitude, reexpansion of a collapsed lung, lung transplantation, upper airway obstruction, drugs, and lung resection. Figures include chest scans showing pulmonary edema and noncardiogenic pulmonary edema, an illustration of the differences between cardiogenic and noncardiogenic edema, and a chart comparing lung mechanics and other variables in experimental models of cardiogenic pulmonary edema and noncardiogenic edema. Tables show clinical characteristics of patients with noncardiogenic pulmonary edema, the definition of ARDS, causes of ARDS, and treatments for ARDS that do not involve ventilation.
This review contains 3 figures, 9 tables, and 64 references
Keywords: acute respiratory distress syndrome, diffuse alveolar damage, noncardiogenic pulmonary edema, pulmonary edema
- 20
The Respiratory System: Physiology
By John Yerxa, MD; Cory J Vatsaas, MD; Suresh Agarwal, MD, FACS, FCCM
Purchase PDFThe Respiratory System: Physiology
- JOHN YERXA, MDResident in General Surgery, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
- CORY J VATSAAS, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
- SURESH AGARWAL, MD, FACS, FCCMChief, Division of Trauma and Critical Care Surgery, Professor, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFRespiratory system uses an elegant physiologic mechanism to support the metabolic demands of the body through oxygenation and ventilation. Oxygen must be absorbed and delivered to the tissues to sustain oxidative metabolism, whereas carbon dioxide must be expelled in a delicate balance to maintain an acid-base equilibrium. Complete understanding of oxygen content, delivery, consumption, and carbon dioxide elimination is essential as a provider caring for the critically ill patient.
This review contains 13 figures and 25 references.
Key Words: oxygenation, respiratory system, ventilation, gas exchange, haemoglobin, respiratory physiology, respiratory anatomy, oxidative metabolism, dead space.
- 21
The Respiratory System: Physiologic Assessment and Real-world Application
By Joshua Watson, MD; Cory Vatsaas, MD; Suresh Agarwal, MD, FACS, FCCM
Purchase PDFThe Respiratory System: Physiologic Assessment and Real-world Application
- JOSHUA WATSON, MDResident in General Surgery, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
- CORY VATSAAS, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
- SURESH AGARWAL, MD, FACS, FCCMChief, Division of Trauma and Critical Care Surgery, Professor, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFThe respiratory system is an elegant physiologic mechanism that provides the most basic support of the body, oxygenation and ventilation. Oxygen must be absorbed and delivered to the tissues to continue with oxidative metabolism while the byproduct of carbon dioxide must be expelled in a delicate balance to maintain an acid/base equilibrium. Complete understanding of oxygen content, delivery, and consumption is essential as a provider caring for the critically ill patient. The respiratory system can be closely monitored through a variety of helpful adjuncts including pulse oximetry, capnometry, and pulmonary function testing. These additional data points are useful for assessing a patient’s clinical condition in conjunction with the patient’s overall pulmonary status, underlying pathology, and environmental factors. A thorough understanding of the respiratory system guided by diagnostic testing and an assessment of patient factors are helpful in mitigating risk of pulmonary complications in the perioperative environment.
This review contains 2 figures, 2 tables, and 54 references.
Key Words: capnometry, pulse oximetry, respiratory system, oxygenation, ventilation pulmonary, pulmonary function testing, pulmonary complications, preoperative pulmonary optimization, smoking cessation
- 22
Respiratory System: Physiology of Mechanical Ventilation
By John Yerxa, MD; Cory J Vatsaas, MD; Suresh Agarwal, MD, FACS, FCCM
Purchase PDFRespiratory System: Physiology of Mechanical Ventilation
- JOHN YERXA, MDResident in General Surgery, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
- CORY J VATSAAS, MDAssistant Professor, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
- SURESH AGARWAL, MD, FACS, FCCMChief, Division of Trauma and Critical Care Surgery, Professor, Department of Surgery, Duke University, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFAirway and ventilatory management are mandatory skills for the critical care surgeon. Identifying and correctly managing a patient’s airway is the first step followed by correcting any oxygenation or ventilation deliver deficits. Mechanical ventilation with positive pressure has multiple physiologic effects that must be completely understood in a complex critically ill patient. Invasive and non-invasive modalities may be used to aid in achieving these goals. Further strategies such as using low tidal volume, adequate PEEP, and rescue strategies are important in patients with ARDS. Weaning from the ventilator as soon as able is an important consideration to improve outcomes, The subsequent chapter reviews airway management and the physiologic aspects of mechanical ventilation to aid in decision-making when caring for the critically ill patient with deficits in oxygenation or ventilation.
This review 5 figures, 2 tables, and 41 references.
Key Words: airway management, mechanical ventilation, invasive ventilation, non-invasive ventilation, tracheostomy, Acute Respiratory Distress Syndrome (ARDS), positive pressure ventilation, oxygenation
- 23
Invasive Diagnostic and Therapeutic Techniques in Lung Disease
By Raphael Bueno, MD; Abby White, DO
Purchase PDFInvasive Diagnostic and Therapeutic Techniques in Lung Disease
- RAPHAEL BUENO, MDAssociate Chief, Division of Thoracic Surgery, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- ABBY WHITE, DOInstructor, Department of Surgery, Harvard Medical School, Associate Surgeon, Division of Thoracic Surgery, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Consultant Surgeon, Dana-Farber Cancer Institute, Boston, MA
- 24
Lung Transplantation 1: an Overview - Recipient Evaluation and Procedures
By Hilary J Goldberg, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFLung Transplantation 1: an Overview - Recipient Evaluation and Procedures
- HILARY J GOLDBERG, MD, MPHProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 25
Lung Transplantation 2: Care of the Lung Transplant Recipient
By Hilary J Goldberg, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFLung Transplantation 2: Care of the Lung Transplant Recipient
- HILARY J GOLDBERG, MD, MPHProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- 26
Sarcoidosis
- ROBERT P BAUGHMAN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Cincinnati Medical Center Cincinnati, OH
- MARY BETH SCHOLAND, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Utah, Salt Lake City, UT
- 27
Asthma
- HAITHAM NSOUR, MBBSAssistant Professor, Department of Medicine, University of Vermont College of Medicine, Fletcher Allen Health Care, Burlington, VT
- ANNE E. DIXON, MA, BMBCHProfessor, Department of Medicine, University of Vermont College of Medicine, Fletcher Allen Health Care, Burlington, VT
- 28
Chest Wall and Neuromuscular Disease
- BAŞAK ÇORUH, MDSenior Fellow, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- JOSHUA O BENDITT, MDProfessor, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- 29
Pulmonary Edema I: Cardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
By Annette Esper, MD; Greg S Martin, MD, MSc, FACP; Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPulmonary Edema I: Cardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
- ANNETTE ESPER, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GREG S MARTIN, MD, MSC, FACPAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- 30
Pulmonary Edema II: Noncardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
By Annette Esper, MD; Greg S Martin, MD, MSc, FACP; Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP
Purchase PDFPulmonary Edema II: Noncardiogenic Pulmonary Edema
- ANNETTE ESPER, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GREG S MARTIN, MD, MSC, FACPAssociate Professor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, 615 Michael Street, Whitehead Building 205, Atlanta, GA 30322
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- 1
- Critical Care
- 1
Approach to the Patient With Shock
- DAVID C MACKENZIE, MD, CMDirector of Emergency Ultrasound, Maine Medicine Medical Center, Portland ME, Assistant Professor of Emergency Medicine, Tufts University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThere are four main categories of shock: hypovolemic, distributive, cardiogenic, and obstructive. Although the main end point (i.e., inadequate delivery of oxygenated blood to the body’s tissues and organs) of each of these categories of shock is the same, the pathophysiologic mechanisms differ. This review covers the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, diagnosis and treatment, and disposition and outcomes for patients with shock. Figures show the Frank-Starling relationship illustrating changes in distributive and cardiogenic shock, the FAST examination, lung ultrasonography in pulmonary edema, pericardial effusion, apical four-chamber view of the heart with right ventricular enlargement, and a parasternal short-axis view of the heart.
This review contains 6 figures, 25 tables, and 30 references.
Keywords: Hemorrhagic shock, volume loss, third spacing, anaphylactic shock, cardiogenic shock, obstructive shock, septic shock, sepsis, resuscitation
- 2
Approach to the Patient With Acute Respiratory Failure
By Eddy Fan, MD; Alice Vendramin, MD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With Acute Respiratory Failure
- EDDY FAN, MDAssistant Professor, Interdepartmental Division of Critical Care Medicine, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON, Canada
- ALICE VENDRAMIN, MDFellow, Interdepartmental Division of Critical Care Medicine, University of Toronto, Toronto, ON, Canada
Purchase PDFAcute respiratory failure (ARF) is a common reason for admission to the intensive care unit (ICU), and is associated with significant morbidity and mortality. Failure of one or more components of the respiratory system can lead to hypoxemia, hypercabia, or both. Initial evaluation of patients with ARF should include physical examination, chest imaging, and arterial blood gases (ABG) sampling. As ARF is often a life-threatening emergency, a patient’s oxygenation and ventilation will need to be supported at the same time that diagnostic and therapeutic interventions are planned. The priorities for early treatment are essentially those of basic life support: airway and breathing. The first step is to assess a patient’s airway and ascertain that it is patent. This is followed by efforts to support both oxygenation and ventilation. This can include non-invasive or invasive mechanical ventilatory support. As with all interventions, there are risks inherent in the use of mechanical ventilation, which may be minimized by the use of lung protective ventilation (i.e., with low tidal volumes and airway pressures). Finally, due to the potential complications associated with mechanical ventilation, it is important to regularly assess whether a patient continues to require the assistance of the ventilator, and to liberate patients from mechanical ventilation at the earliest opportunity when clinically safe and feasible to do so. Figures depict pressure-time curve. Tables list the clinical causes of hypoxemic respiratory failure, oxygen delivery devices, indications for noninvasive positive pressure support, common causes of abnormal respiratory mechanics, and common causes of acute respiratory distress syndrome (ARDS).
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 86 references.
- 3
Hemodynamic Monitoring in the ICU
- SUNNY LIM, MDSenior Fellow, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- ANDREW M LUKS, MDAssociate Professor, Division of Pulmonary and Critical Care Medicine, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFThis review examines the most commonly used hemodynamic monitoring devices in the intensive care unit. After a brief review of some important issues in hemodynamic monitoring, a variety of monitoring systems are considered, including arterial catheters, pulmonary artery catheters (PACs), less invasive hemodynamic monitors, central venous oxygen saturation (ScvO2) monitors, and point-of-care (POC) echocardiography. For each system, the basic operating principles, indications and limitations of use, complications, key issues in data interpretation, and evidence regarding utility in patient care are reviewed. Figures depict the distinction between correlation and agreement, a representative Bland-Altman plot, a square wave test, PAC waveforms, principles of pulmonary artery occlusion pressure measurement, measuring pulmonary artery occlusion pressure at end-exhalation, right atrial and ventricular pressure waveform, pulmonary artery pressure waveform, potential pulmonary artery occlusion waveforms, west zones of the lung and the pulmonary artery occlusion pressure measurements, and POC echocardiography. Tables outline landmarks during insertion of the PAC from the internal jugular and subclavian vein insertion sites; indications, contraindications, and complications of PAC insertion; a comparison of less invasive hemodynamic monitors; reasons for decreased mixed or ScvO2; and indications and contraindications for transesophageal echocardiography.
This review contains 12 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 95 references.
- 4
Cardiac Arrest and Resuscitation
- CHARLES N. POZNER, MDMedical Director, Neil and Elise Wallace STRATUS Center for Medical Simulation, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Associate Professor of Medicine (Emergency Medicine), Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JENNIFER L MARTINDALE, MDHarvard Affiliated Emergency Medicine Residency Program, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe most effective treatment for cardiac arrest is the administration of high-quality chest compressions and early defibrillation; once spontaneous circulation is restored, post–cardiac arrest care is essential to support full return of neurologic function. This review summarizes the pathophysiology, stabilization and assessment, diagnosis and treatment, and disposition and outcomes of cardiac arrest and resuscitation. Figures show the foundations of cardiac resuscitation, ventricular arrhythmias, coronary perfusion pressure as a function of time, an algorithm for initial treatment of cardiac arrest, sample capnographs, and the electrocardiographic appearance of varying degrees of hyperkalemia. Tables include components of suboptimal cardiac resuscitation and corrective actions, recommended doses of medications commonly used in cardiac resuscitation, causes of pulseless electrical activity/asystolic arrest to consider, immediate post–return of spontaneous circulation checklist, and resuscitation goals during post–cardiac arrest care.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 142 references.
- 5
Sleep Disordered Breathing
Purchase PDFSleep Disordered Breathing
Purchase PDF - 6
Diagnostic Imaging Techniques
By Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP; Phuong-Anh T. Duong, MD
Purchase PDFDiagnostic Imaging Techniques
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- PHUONG-ANH T. DUONG, MDAssistant Professor of Radiology, Emory University School of Medicine, Grady Health System, Department of Radiology and Imaging Sciences, Atlanta, GA
Purchase PDFChest imaging techniques are evolving with recent advances in computed tomography, magnetic resonance imaging, and ultrasonography. While conventional radiography remains an important screening tool because of its low relative cost, ease of acquisition, general availability, and familiarity, physicians must understand all techniques so as to provide patients with the most appropriate diagnostic imaging. Consultation with radiologists, use of online clinical decision support, and adherence to national guidelines such as the American College of Radiology Appropriateness Criteria®, can help clinicians make imaging decisions, especially in light of medical imaging risks that are of concern in the medical community and the general population. Choosing appropriate imaging, including whether or not to image, requires careful consideration.
This review contains 6 figures, 7 tables, and 20 references.
Key Words: Chest Radiographs, Dual-Energy Chest Radiographs, Computed Tomography, High-Resolution Chest Computed Tomography, Multidetector Row Computed Tomography, Computed Tomographic Angiography for Pulmonary Embolism, Magnetic Resonance Imaging, Single-Photon Emission Tomography (SPECT), Ultrasonography
- 7
Approach to the Patient With Shock
- DAVID C MACKENZIE, MD, CMDirector of Emergency Ultrasound, Maine Medicine Medical Center, Portland ME, Assistant Professor of Emergency Medicine, Tufts University School of Medicine, Boston, MA
- 8
Diagnostic Imaging Techniques
By Gerald W. Staton Jr, MD, FACP; Phuong-Anh T. Duong, MD
Purchase PDFDiagnostic Imaging Techniques
- GERALD W. STATON JR, MD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Division of Pulmonary, Allergy and Critical Care, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- PHUONG-ANH T. DUONG, MDAssistant Professor of Radiology, Emory University School of Medicine, Grady Health System, Department of Radiology and Imaging Sciences, Atlanta, GA
- 1
- 1
- Rheumatology
- 1
Introduction to the Patient With Rheumatic Disease
- DAVID A. FOX, MDProfessor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School and Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFThe rheumatic diseases encompass a broad spectrum of conditions that include inflammatory, metabolic, and structural diseases of the joints and adjacent musculoskeletal structures, chronic musculoskeletal pain syndromes, and a wide range of systemic autoimmune and autoinflammatory diseases that may or may not have articular manifestations.
This review contains 4 figures, 13 tables, and 28 references.
Key Words osteoarthritis, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic lupus erythematosus, fibromyalgia, acute monoarthritis, Ankylosing spondylitis, nonradiographic axial spondyloarthritis, gouty arthritis, lupus nephritis
- 2
Rheumatoid Arthritis: Etiology and Pathogenesis
By Gary S. Firestein, MD; Anna-Karin H. Ekwall, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFRheumatoid Arthritis: Etiology and Pathogenesis
- GARY S. FIRESTEIN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Dean and Associate Vice Chancellor of Translational Medicine, UC San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, California
- ANNA-KARIN H. EKWALL, MD, PHDSpecialist in Rheumatology, University of California San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, CA, Researcher/Postdoc, The Sahlgrenska Academy at Gothenburg University, Gothenburg, Sweden
Purchase PDFRheumatoid arthritis (RA) is among the most common forms of chronic inflammatory arthritis. It affects approximately 1% of adults and is two to three times more prevalent in women than in men. There are no specific laboratory tests for RA; diagnosis depends on a constellation of signs and symptoms that can be supported by serology and radiographs. The disease evolves over many years as a consequence of repeated environmental stress causing inflammation and immune activation followed by a breakdown of tolerance in individuals with a specific genetic background. This review describes the definition of RA; its etiology, including genetics, infections, the role of smoking and citrullination of proteins, and epigenetic mechanisms; and its pathogenesis, including synovial histopathology, bone and cartilage damage, adaptive and innate immunity, and the role of cytokines and intracellular signaling. Tables include the 1987 American Rheumatism Association criteria for the classification of RA and the 2010 American College of Rheumatology/European League Against Rheumatism classification for RA. Figures show citrullinated proteins in airway cells, a section of a proliferative synovium from a patient with a classic RA, and scalloped regions of erosion at the junction between a proliferative inflamed rheumatoid synovium and the bone.
This review contains 3 highly rendered figures, 2 tables, and 71 references.
- 3
Rheumatoid Arthritis: Clinical Manifestations and Diagnosis
By Gary S. Firestein, MD; Anna-Karin H. Ekwall, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFRheumatoid Arthritis: Clinical Manifestations and Diagnosis
- GARY S. FIRESTEIN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Dean and Associate Vice Chancellor of Translational Medicine, UC San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, California
- ANNA-KARIN H. EKWALL, MD, PHDSpecialist in Rheumatology, University of California San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, CA, Researcher/Postdoc, The Sahlgrenska Academy at Gothenburg University, Gothenburg, Sweden
Purchase PDFThe onset and course of rheumatoid arthritis (RA) can be highly variable, and the lack of a specific biologic marker can make diagnosis difficult in early disease. A careful history and physical examination and the integration of clinical and laboratory data are often required. The presence of anti-citrullinated peptide antibodies (ACPAs) is one of the best predictors of progression to establish RA. This review describes the clinical manifestations used to diagnose RA, such as physical examination of the hands and wrists, elbows and shoulders, hips, knees, ankles and feet, and cervical spine. Extra-articular manifestations related to rheumatoid nodules, eyes, lungs, heart, blood and blood vessels, and neuromuscular involvement are reviewed. Laboratory tests and differential diagnosis are also discussed. Figures show synovitis in the hand and wrist, rheumatoid nodules near the extensor surface of the elbow, a pelvic radiograph of a patient with classic seropositive RA, erosions in the metatarsal heads and phalanges of the foot of a patient with classic seropositive RA, the anterior edge of the odontoid process, and a typical rheumatoid nodule.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures and 20 references.
- 4
Rheumatoid Arthritis: Treatment
By Gary S. Firestein, MD; Anna-Karin H. Ekwall, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFRheumatoid Arthritis: Treatment
- GARY S. FIRESTEIN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Dean and Associate Vice Chancellor of Translational Medicine, UC San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, California
- ANNA-KARIN H. EKWALL, MD, PHDSpecialist in Rheumatology, University of California San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, CA, Researcher/Postdoc, The Sahlgrenska Academy at Gothenburg University, Gothenburg, Sweden
Purchase PDFThe main goal of treatment of rheumatoid arthritis (RA) has evolved from modest improvement to low disease activity and will soon be complete remission. To reach this goal, the rheumatologist and patient should define the goal and treatment strategy together. Disease activity should be measured regularly using validated composite measures such as disease activity score, simple disease activity index, and clinical disease activity index. Management involves efforts to relieve pain and discomfort, preserve strength and joint function, and prevent structural deformities. Surgical intervention is important for replacing destroyed joints and for restoring function and preventing further damage. This review discusses the role of drug therapy, including nonsteroidal antiinflammatory drugs, methotrexate, antimalarial drugs, sulfasalazine, leflunomide, tofacitinib, biologic drugs, T cell– and B cell–targeted therapy, glucocorticoids, and other immunosuppressive agents. Nonmedical therapy, surgery, and prognosis are also detailed.
This review contains 2 figures, 16 tables, and 40 references.
Keywords: Autoimmune, rheumatoid arthritis, T cell therapy, B cell therapy, methotrexate, joint disease, tofacitinib
- 5
Seronegative Spondyloarthritis
By Walter P Maksymowych, MB, ChB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACP
Purchase PDFSeronegative Spondyloarthritis
- WALTER P MAKSYMOWYCH, MB, CHB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Alberta, Medical Scientist, Alberta Innovates-Health Solutions, Edmonton, AB
Purchase PDFThe term spondyloarthritis encompasses a family of clinically, epidemiologically, and genetically related inflammatory diseases that primarily affect spinal and peripheral joints. The prototypic disease known as ankylosing spondylitis is characterized by progressive ankylosis in the joints of the axial skeleton that is readily evident on radiography and culminates in a permanently stooped spinal posture. Disease may not progress to ankylosis and may initially affect the peripheral joints and entheses, so the term spondyloarthritis is now considered the more appropriate term for this group of arthritides. This review provides a comprehensive overview of the classification, epidemiology, pathogenesis (including genetic factors, effector cytokines, bacteria and intestinal inflammation, and the link between inflammation and spinal ankylosis), pathology, diagnosis, management (including patient education, physical modalities, symptom-modifying antirheumatic drugs, second-line agents, biologic therapies, antibiotics, and surgery), and prognosis of spondyloarthritis. Graphs, algorithms, illustrations, and radiographic images are provided. Tables outline the modified New York criteria for ankylosing spondylitis, disease associations with genes outside the HLA locus in ankylosing spondylitis and overlap with Crohn disease and psoriasis, Assessments in SpondyloArthritis international Society (ASAS)/European League against Rheumatism (EULAR) recommendations for the management of ankylosing spondylitis, 2010 recommendations for the use of anti–tumor necrosis factor agents in patients with axial spondyloarthritis, and the ASAS core set for clinical record keeping.
This review contains 15 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 176 references.
- 6
Scleroderma and Related Disorders
- KRISTINE PHILLIPS, MD, PHDScleroderma Program, Division of Rheumatology, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFScleroderma spectrum diseases are a heterogeneous group of disorders that are distinguished by abnormalities of the connective tissue in the skin and, in some cases, other organs. Each disorder may be characterized by the extent of cutaneous and internal involvement, as well as histopathologic features of skin biopsy. Scleroderma spectrum diseases include systemic scleroderma, localized scleroderma, and eosinophilic fasciitis. This chapter reviews the classification, epidemiology, etiology, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, outcome measures, management, and clinical course of scleroderma as well as the definition and classification, etiology/genetics, differential diagnosis, and treatment of localized scleroderma. Also discussed are the definition and classification, epidemiology, etiology/genetics/pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment of eosinophilic fasciitis. Tables review the classification of—and antinuclear antibodies in—scleroderma as well as the key assessments and interventions in scleroderma management. Figures illustrate the disease's presentation and clinical manifestations, including several images of scleroderma of the hands; face, palmar, and buccal telangiectasias in a patient with scleroderma; a radiograph demonstrating calcinosis of the elbow; Raynaud’s phenomenon; high-resolution computed tomographic images of diffuse cutaneous scleroderma, scleroderma and severe pulmonary hypertension, and limited cutaneous scleroderma; plus an esophagram demonstrating hypomotility.
This review contains 11 highly rendered figures, 3 tables, and 72 references.
- 7
Idiopathic Inflammatory Myopathies
By Frederick W Miller, MD, PhD; Adam Schiffenbauer, MD
Purchase PDFIdiopathic Inflammatory Myopathies
- FREDERICK W MILLER, MD, PHDChief, Environmental Autoimmunity Group, Office of Clinical Research, National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD
- ADAM SCHIFFENBAUER, MDStaff Clinician, Environmental Autoimmunity Group, Office of Clinical Research, National Institute of Environmental Health Sciences, National Institutes of Health, Bethesda, MD
Purchase PDFThe idiopathic inflammatory myopathies (IIMs), also known as myositis syndromes, are a collection of heterogeneous disorders that share the common feature of chronic muscle inflammation of unknown cause. These disorders may occur in adults or children and are sometimes associated with other connective tissue disorders and a variety of cancers. A combined clinical, laboratory, and pathologic evaluation is needed to establish the diagnosis of these acquired systemic connective tissue diseases to rule out the many disorders that mimic IIMs. This module reviews the classification of IIMs, including polymyositis, dermatomyositis, inclusion body myositis, myositis associated with other connective tissue diseases and cancer, and antisynthetase syndrome. The epidemiology; etiology, genetics, and environmental factors; pathophysiology and pathogenesis; diagnosis; differential diagnosis; treatment; and prognosis of IIMs are discussed. Tables describe the criteria for polymyositis, dermatomyositis, and inclusion body myositis; well-characterized subgroups of the IIMs in adults and children; presentation of polymyositis; differential diagnosis of muscle weakness or pain; features that assist in discriminating IIMs from other myopathies; goals for managing IIMs; and key factors for achieving adequate corticosteroid response in IIMs. Figures demonstrate skin findings in IIMs, muscle pathology of IIMs, magnetic resonance imaging of three patients with different IIMs, and treatment approaches to the management of myositis patients.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 8 tables, and 80 references.
- 8
Systemic Vasculitis Syndromes
By Alexandra Villa-Forte, MD, MPH; Brian F Mandell, MD, PhD, FACP
Purchase PDFSystemic Vasculitis Syndromes
- ALEXANDRA VILLA-FORTE, MD, MPHStaff Physician, Center for Vasculitis Care and Research, Orthopedic and Rheumatologic Institute, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH
- BRIAN F MANDELL, MD, PHD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Department of Rheumatic Immunologic Disease, Vice Chairman of Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Lerner College of Medicine, Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH
Purchase PDFVasculitis is defined by histologic evidence of inflammation that involves the blood vessels. The diagnosis of a specific primary vasculitic disorder depends on the pattern of organ involvement, the histopathology, the size of affected blood vessels, and the exclusion of diseases that can cause “secondary” vasculitis. This review presents an approach to the patient suspected of having vasculitis, and goes on to discuss small vessel vasculitis, granulomatosis with polyangiitis, eosinophilic granulomatosis with polyangiitis, microscopic polyangiitis, polyarteritis nodosa, Kawasaki disease, large vessel arteritis, and Behçet disease. Figures show classification of the systemic vasculitis syndromes, the relationships among the causes of small vessel (“hypersensitivity”) vasculitis, palpable purpura of the distal extremities, saddle nose deformity, the nodular infiltrates of the lung in granulomatosis with polyangiitis shown on plain radiograph as well as computed tomography, necrotizing scleritis, livedo reticularis, and angiograms of a patient with Takayasu arteritis. Tables list selected laboratory tests for patients with multisystem disease and possible vasculitis, practical comments on immunosuppressive therapies for vasculitis, features of vasculitis, diagnostic criteria for Kawasaki disease, and giant cell arteritis.
This review contains 8 figures, 15 tables, and 65 references
Keywords: Vasculitis, granulomatosis with polyangiitis, eosinophilic granulomatosis with polyangiitis, giant cell arteritis, Takayasu arteritis, polyarteritis nodosa, Kawasaki disease, Behçet disease, hypersensitivity
- 9
Crystal-induced Joint Disease
- N LAWRENCE EDWARDS, MD, FACP, FACRProfessor and Program Director, Vice Chairman, Department of Medicine, University of Florida College of Medicine, Gainesville, FL
Purchase PDFThe destructive potential of intracellular crystals has been recognized for over a century. The mechanisms by which crystals induce inflammation and bone and cartilage destruction have been elucidated over the past decade. The three most common crystal-induced arthropathies are caused by precipitation of monosodium urate monohydrate, calcium pyrophosphate dihydrate (CPP) and basic calcium phosphate. The definition, epidemiology, pathogenesis and etiology, diagnosis, and treatment of gout and CPP crystal deposition are reviewed, as well as the clinical stages of gout (i.e., acute gouty arthritis, intercritical gout, advanced gout, nonclassic presentations of gout, and other conditions associated with gout). Also reviewed are the clinical manifestations of calcium pyrophosphate dihydrate deposition disease (CPPD), such as asymptomatic CPPD, osteoarthritis with CPPD, acute CPP crystal arthritis, and chronic CPP crystal inflammatory arthritis. Figures illustrate renal transport of urate, monosodium urate crystals, acute gouty flare, advanced gouty arthritis, gouty synovial fluid, radiographic changes of advanced gout, ultrasound appearance of the femoral intercondylar cartilage, pharmacologic management of gout, the effect of gender and age on knee chondrocalcinosis, radiographs of chondrocalcinosis, and compensated polarized microscopy of CPPD. Tables present the major factors responsible for hyperuricemia, characteristics of classic gouty flares, antiinflammatory therapy for gout, and urate-lowering therapy. This chapter contains 90 references.
This review contains 11 figures, 12 tables, and 88 references.
Keywords: acute gouty arthritis, intercritical gout, advanced gout, asymptomatic CPPD, osteoarthritis with CPPD, acute CPP crystal arthritis, chronic CPP crystal inflammatory arthritis
- 10
Osteoarthritis
- CHRISTOPHER WISE, MD, FACPRobert Irby Professor of Medicine, Division of Rheumatology, Allergy, and Immunology, Department of Internal Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University, Medical College of Virginia, Richmond, VA
Purchase PDFOsteoarthritis is a common form of arthritis characterized by degeneration of articular cartilage and pathologic changes in surrounding bone and periarticular tissue. The disease process results in pain and dysfunction of affected joints and is a major cause of disability in the general population. Prognosis is variable; greater muscle strength, mental health, self-efficacy, social support, and aerobic exercise are associated with better outcomes. This review outlines the classification of osteoarthritis (primary and secondary) and its epidemiology and etiologic factors, including risk factors, normal articular cartilage, and pathologic changes. Diagnosis is reviewed in terms of general considerations and specific joint involvement and related complications. The differential diagnosis is discussed. Management of osteoarthritis includes nonpharmacologic measures, pharmacologic therapy, surgery, and disease-modifying or chondroprotective therapy.
This review contains 6 figures, 8 tables, and 84 references.
Keywords: Knee, hand, hip, osteoarthritis, joint pain, synovial fluid, inflammation, weight-bearing
- 11
Back Pain and Common Musculoskeletal Problems
By Christopher M. Wise, MD; Huzaefah Syed, MD
Purchase PDFBack Pain and Common Musculoskeletal Problems
- CHRISTOPHER M. WISE, MDW. Robert Irby Professor of Medicine, Division of Rheumatology, Allergy, and Immunology, Department of Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University Health System, Richmond, VA
- HUZAEFAH SYED, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Division of Rheumatology, Allergy, and Immunology, Department of Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University Health System, Richmond, VA
Purchase PDFKnowledge of the common nonarticular regional rheumatic disorders is important because of their high prevalence in primary care practice, the dependence on clinical findings for diagnosis, and the high cost that can result from unnecessary laboratory evaluations. The ability to recognize important patterns of pain and associated physical signs is essential to making a correct diagnosis; in most cases, radiographic and laboratory studies are not needed. This review covers the common causes of pain in the neck, back, shoulder, chest wall, elbow, hand and wrist, hip girdle, knee and lower leg, and ankle and foot.
This review contains 5 figures, 11 tables, and 96 references.
Key words Acute back pain, Chronic back pain, Lumbar stenosis, Shoulder pain, Chest wall pain, Elbow pain, Hand and wrist pain, Carpal Tunnel Syndrome, Hip girdle pain, Knee and lower leg pain, Ankle and foot pain
- 12
Fibromyalgia
- DANIEL JOSEPH CLAUW, MDProfessor of Anesthesiology, Medicine and Psychiatry, Director, Chronic Pain and Fatigue Research Center, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor, MI
Purchase PDFClinicians often encounter individuals who present with pain that they cannot adequately explain based on the degree of damage or inflammation noted in peripheral tissues. This typically prompts an evaluation looking for a cause of the pain. If no cause is found, these individuals are often given a diagnostic label that merely connotes that the patient has chronic pain in a region of the body, without an underlying mechanistic cause. Fibromyalgia (FM) is merely the current term for widespread musculoskeletal pain for which no alternative cause can be identified. This review covers the epidemiology, etiology/genetics, pathophysiology and pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and complications and prognosis of FM. Figures show underlying mechanisms that can cause chronic pain; an individual’s “set point” or “volume control setting” for pain as set by a variety of factors, including the levels of neurotransmitters that either facilitate pain or reduce pain transmission; the 2011 Fibromyalgia Survey Criteria; symptoms and syndromes frequently seen in individuals with FM; the distribution of the 2011 Fibromyalgia Survey scores in a large cohort of individuals undergoing joint replacement surgery; and an algorithm showing the importance of dually focused treatment for FM and other chronic pain conditions. Tables list clinical characteristics of centralized pain, pharmacologic therapies for FM, and nonpharmacologic therapies for FM.
This review contains 6 figures, 9 tables, and 78 references.
Keywords: Fibromyalgia, chronic low back pain, headache, temporomandibular joint disorder, gastrointestinal disorder, irritable bowel syndrome (IBS), nonulcer dyspepsia, or esophageal dysmotility, interstitial cystitis, chronic prostatitis, vulvodynia, vulvar vestibulitis, and endometriosis
- 13
Autoinflammatory Syndromes
- ARTURO DIAZ, MDInstructor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Division of Rheumatology, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThe autoinflammatory syndromes are a group of diseases characterized by apparently spontaneous episodes of fever and inflammatory manifestations in several organs. Some of these conditions, such as familial Mediterranean fever (FMF), have been known for over a century, but others have only recently been defined. The discovery of the genetic defects underlying the pathophysiology of these diseases has been critical for their understanding and eventual grouping in a new category of diseases. Despite their rarity, the monogenic autoinflammatory syndromes are relevant because identification of the causative genetic variants has greatly expanded our understanding of the inflammatory process and the innate immune system and defined new diseases and their treatment. In addition, the autoinflammatory syndromes have been incorporated in the differential diagnosis of fever of unknown origin. In this chapter, the following selected syndromes are reviewed: FMF; cryopyrin-associated periodic syndromes; tumor necrosis factor–associated periodic fever syndrome; hyper-IgD syndrome; pyogenic sterile arthritis, pyoderma gangrenosum, and acne (PAPA) syndrome; Blau syndrome; deficiency of the interleukin-1 receptor antagonist; Majeed syndrome; cherubism; joint contractures, muscular atrophy, macrocytic anemia, and panniculitis-associated lipodystrophy (JMP) syndrome; CANDLE syndrome; systemic-onset juvenile idiopathic arthritis; and adult-onset Still disease. Each syndrome is broken down by epidemiology, etiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, management, complications, and prognosis.
This review contains 4 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 96 references.
- 14
Primary Sjögren Syndrome
- E. WILLIAM ST. CLAIR, MDProfessor of Medicine and Immunology, Division of Rheumatology and Immunology, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC
- MELISSA A. WELLS, MDFellow, Division of Rheumatology and Immunology, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFThis review focuses on the primary category of Sjögren syndrome (SS), a chronic inflammatory condition that is defined by the presence of dry eyes (keratoconjunctivitis sicca) or dry mouth (xerostomia) in the absence of other rheumatologic diseases. SS may also have extraglandular manifestations in the form of pulmonary, renal, gastrointestinal, and neurologic diseases that can cause significant morbidity and increased mortality and is distinct from other connective tissue diseases.
Although the etiology of primary SS is unknown, genome-wide association studies are continuing to reveal that susceptibility to the disease is based on genetic predisposition; patients with primary SS have been identified with several non–major histocompatibility complex genetic polymorphisms that are statistically associated with increased disease susceptibility. In a recent study, blood CD4+ T cells from patients with primary SS were shown to differ in their patterns of DNA methylation compared with healthy controls and demonstrated that many genes involved in lymphocyte activation and the immune response were poised for transcription.
Treatment of primary SS mainly involves relief of symptoms and prevention of long-term disease complications. Although biologic therapies have been studied, the results so far have been either negative or inconclusive.
This review contains 5 highly rendered figures, 5 tables, and 89 references.
- 15
Septic Arthritis, Septic Bursitis, and Osteomyelitis
- CAMERON ASHBAUGH, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associate Physician, Division of Infectious Diseases, Brigham and Women's Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFInfections of joints and bones are important causes of morbidity due to the potential for permanent injury to structures necessary for mechanical support and useful motion. The spectrum of disease is broad, with host factors, pathogen, site of infection, and comorbidities all influencing outcome. In some cases of bone infection, cure may not be possible, and the therapeutic goal becomes control. This review details the epidemiology, pathogenesis, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, treatment, and prognosis of septic arthritis, septic bursitis, vertebral body osteomyelitis, pedal osteomyelitis in association with diabetes, and chronic posttraumatic osteomyelitis with union or malunion.
This review contains 13 highly rendered figures, 16 tables, and 192 references.
- 16
Axial Neck Pain
- VIKRAM B PATEL, MD, FIPP, DABIPPDirector, Phoenix Interventional Center for Advanced Learning Algonquin, IL
Purchase PDFNeck pain is one of the most common symptoms that we see in patients presenting to a pain center for treatment. The complex nature of pain generated by various elements in the neck as well as their radiation patterns sometimes makes it difficult to diagnose and treat a patient’s pain. A proper diagnosis is important for providing optimal management of neck pain. Axial neck pain mainly refers to the pain generated by the osseous elements and the intervertebral disks in the vertebral column. Neurologic pain presents differently from axial pain, exhibiting different characteristics and radiation patterns. The following review discusses the causes of axial neck pain, diagnoses, and available treatments.
This review contains 7 figures, 4 tables, and 26 references.
Keywords: Neck pain, range of motion, whiplash, subluxation, cervical spine, facet joints
- 17
Patients With Sacroiliac Joint Pain and Arthritis
- JIANGUO CHENG, MD, PHD, FIPPProfessor of Anesthesiology of Case Western Reserve University Cleveland Clinic Lerner College of Medicine, Vice President for Scientific Affairs, American Academy of Pain Medicine, Director, Cleveland Clinic Pain Medicine Fellowship Program, Departments of Pain Management and Neurosciences, Cleveland Clinic Anesthesiology Institute and Lerner Research Institute, Cleveland, OH
Purchase PDFChronic pain originating from the sacroiliac joint (SIJ) is common. Pathophysiology is often related to biomechanical derangement affecting the SIJ or traumatic, degenerative, arthritic, and idiopathic changes of the SIJ. Diagnosis of SIJ pain is suggested by typical patterns of distribution, pain characteristics, and a combination of provocative tests, confirmed by diagnostic block of the SIJ, and differentiated from several other causes of low back pain. Multimodal therapy includes educational, physical, pharmacologic, interventional, and surgical approaches and should be individualized. The efficacy and safety of radiofrequency denervation of the sacroiliac joint have been demonstrated in randomized controlled trials. Multiple modalities of radiofrequency treatment exist, and comparative effectiveness studies are required to determine the most efficacious and cost-effective treatment modality.
This review contains 1 highly rendered figure and 33 references.
- 18
The Patient With Complex Regional Pain Syndrome
By George C Chang Chien, DO; Charles A Odonkor, MD; Robert Norman Harden, MD
Purchase PDFThe Patient With Complex Regional Pain Syndrome
- GEORGE C CHANG CHIEN, DOMedical Director, Pain Management, Ventura County Medical Center, Director, Center for Regenerative Medicine, University of Southern California, CA
- CHARLES A ODONKOR, MDJohn Hopkins Medicine, Baltimore, MD
- ROBERT NORMAN HARDEN, MDProfessor Emeritus of Physical Medicine and Rehabilitation, Northwestern University Feinberg School of Medicine, Chicago, IL
Purchase PDFComplex regional pain syndrome (CRPS) is a multisymptom syndrome involving aberrant pathophysiology of the peripheral, autonomic, and/or central nervous systems. The central feature is severe, often debilitating pain. This is accompanied by a collection of sensory, motor, autonomic, skin, and/or bone abnormalities. A key feature is allodynia, where otherwise innocuous stimulation will cause pain and hyperalgesia. The patient will present with varying degrees of pain, allodynia, hyperalgesia, swelling, and color and temperature changes. There are often changes in motor function, such as muscle stiffness or even involuntary movements. Regional osteopenia, changes to hair and nail growth, and dystrophic cutaneous changes may occur. The Budapest criteria have been twice validated and are used to diagnose CRPS. A patient-centric clinical approach is important in the treatment of CRPS. Key domains to be addressed in the management of CRPS include rehabilitation and pain management with adjunct psychological therapy. It is important that these interventions happen concurrently within the continuum of care. With the guidance of a physician, physical therapist, occupational therapist, and neuropsychologist, rehabilitative training programs are designed to address motor, sensory, and cognitive deficits.
This review contains 2 highly rendered figures, 4 tables, and 110 references.
Key Words: Budapest criteria, complex regional pain syndrome, reflex sympathetic dystrophy, sympathetically mediated pain
- 19
Primary Sjogren Syndrome: Clinical Features and Management
By Stephanie L Giattino, MD; E William St. Clair, MD
Purchase PDFPrimary Sjogren Syndrome: Clinical Features and Management
- STEPHANIE L GIATTINO, MDFellow, Division of Rheumatology and Immunology, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC
- E WILLIAM ST. CLAIR, MDW. Lester Brooks, Jr. Professor of Medicine, Chief, Division of Rheumatology and Immunology, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFPrimary Sjögren syndrome (SS) is a chronic inflammatory disease affecting the lacrimal and salivary glands, resulting in dry eyes and dry mouth. It may also lead to systemic manifestations, including fatigue, arthritis, lung involvement, kidney disease, neuropathy, and vasculitis, and predisposes to B cell lymphoma. The diagnosis of primary SS is based on a composite of clinical, serologic, and pathologic features, namely, objective evidence of dry eyes and dry mouth and either a positive test for anti-SSA (Ro) antibodies or a positive labial salivary gland biopsy. Primary SS may be confused with other conditions affecting the lacrimal and salivary glands, such as chronic hepatitis C virus infection, sarcoidosis, and a new entity, IgG4-related disease. The management of patients with primary SS is largely symptomatic and consists of tear supplementation, regular dental hygiene, and liberal use of moisturizers. Cyclosporine 0.05% ophthalmic emulsion and lifitegrast 5% ophthalmic solution are approved agents for the treatment of dry eyes. Two oral secretagogues, pilocarpine and cevimeline, have been shown in trials to significantly reduce the symptoms of dry eyes and dry mouth. Although hydroxychloroquine may reduce fatigue and joint pain, the results of a randomized controlled trial failed to confirm its efficacy in this clinical setting. More serious organ system involvement may be managed with corticosteroids and other immunomodulatory drugs. Although no disease-modifying drugs are currently approved for the treatment of primary SS, a robust pipeline of promising therapies for this disease is currently in development.
This review contains 3 figures, 5 tables, and 69 references.
Key words: anti-Ro/SSA antibodies, B cell lymphoma, classification criteria, EULAR Sjögren’s syndrome Patient Reported Index (ESSPRI), EULAR Sjögren’s Syndrome Disease Activity Index (ESSDAI), hydroxychloroquine, keratoconjunctivitis sicca, rituximab, Sjögren syndrome
- 20
Primary Sjögren Syndrome: Etiology and Pathogenesis
By E. William St. Clair, MD; Stephanie L Giattino, MD
Purchase PDFPrimary Sjögren Syndrome: Etiology and Pathogenesis
- E. WILLIAM ST. CLAIR, MDProfessor of Medicine and Immunology, Division of Rheumatology and Immunology, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC
- STEPHANIE L GIATTINO, MDFellow, Division of Rheumatology and Immunology, Duke University Medical Center, Durham, NC
Purchase PDFPrimary Sjögren syndrome is a chronic inflammatory disorder of the lacrimal and salivary glands resulting in oral and ocular dryness. It also has extraglandular manifestations that may affect the lung, kidneys, nervous system, and other organs. The etiology and pathogenesis of primary Sjögren syndrome are incompletely understood. A working hypothesis considers the disease to be driven by a complex interplay of environmental, genetic, and epigenetic factors. Recent genome-wide association studies confirm the previously shown contribution of major histocompatibility (MHC) locus to disease susceptibility and illuminate several non-MHC loci, which add to disease risk. New gene expression studies of peripheral blood and salivary gland tissue provide further molecular detail about the role of innate and adaptive immune pathways involved in disease mechanisms. In particular, upregulated expression of interferon and B cell–activating factor appear to play key roles in this process. Despite their drawbacks, experimental animal models continue to stimulate new lines of research that are advancing our understanding of human disease. This knowledge has been translated into new therapeutic approaches currently under evaluation in clinical trials.
This review contains 5 figures, 2 tables, and 67 references.
Key words: adaptive immunity, animal models, epigenetics, genome-wide association studies, innate immunity, interferon signature, lymphoma pathogenesis, nucleic acid sensing, primary Sjögren syndrome
- 21
Seronegative Spondyloarthritis: Epidemiology, Pathogenesis, and Pathology
By Walter P Maksymowych, MB, ChB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACP
Purchase PDFSeronegative Spondyloarthritis: Epidemiology, Pathogenesis, and Pathology
- WALTER P MAKSYMOWYCH, MB, CHB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Alberta, Medical Scientist, Alberta Innovates-Health Solutions, Edmonton, AB
Purchase PDFClassification of spondyloarthritis (SpA) is aimed at including patients with radiographic evidence of sacroiliitis and those with early disease who do not yet meet radiographic criteria but have positive features on magnetic resonance imaging (MRI). Most studies report a prevalence of SpA of 0.1 to 0.6%. Human leukocyte antigen (HLA)-B27 contributes approximately 20% of the heritability of SpA, and non–major histocompatibility complex loci identified to date (n = 113) contribute another approximately 10%. To date, 160 subtypes of HLA-B*27 have been reported, although population-based disease association studies are limited to only a few subtypes. Subtypes HLA-B*27:05 and HLA-B*27:04 are examples of subtypes associated with disease, whereas HLA-B*27:06 and HLA-B*27:09 are nonassociated. Properties of the B27 molecule relevant to pathogenesis include antigen presentation, propensity to misfold, and formation of homodimers. Key pathways identified by genetic studies include the interleukin (IL)-23 and M1-aminopeptidase pathways. The latter pathway is involved in peptide trimming in the endoplasmic reticulum, changing both the length and amino acid composition of peptides available for HLA class I presentation. IL-23 is a key cytokine regulating expression of IL-17 in a specific T helper cell phenotype, Th17, and also a variety of cells of the innate immune system. The IL-23–IL-17 pathway has been directly implicated in inflammation at sites that are inflamed in SpA. Increasing evidence based on prospective clinical and imaging data supports a link between inflammation and ankylosis, especially if the resolution of inflammation is followed by the appearance of a particular type of reparative tissue, namely, fat metaplasia, on T1-weighted MRI.
This review contains 8 figures, 5 tables and 33 references
Key words: association, classification, genetics, heritability, innate immunity, prevalence, spondyloarthritis
- 22
Seronegative Spondyloarthritis: Diagnosis and Management
By Walter P Maksymowych, MB, ChB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACP
Purchase PDFSeronegative Spondyloarthritis: Diagnosis and Management
- WALTER P MAKSYMOWYCH, MB, CHB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Alberta, Medical Scientist, Alberta Innovates-Health Solutions, Edmonton, AB
Purchase PDFDiagnosis of spondyloarthritis is challenging in its early stages due to a lack of sensitivity and specificity of clinical and laboratory features. The advent of magnetic resonance imaging (MRI) has been transformational for diagnosis due to its ability to detect inflammation, reparative changes, and structural lesions far sooner than plain radiography. New guidelines for diagnostic evaluation now call for the early use of MRI in the setting of suspicious clinical features and where radiography of the sacroiliac joints is normal or equivocal rather than additional radiography or isotopic scanning. Standardized MRI evaluation should include a T1-weighted sequence to assess structural lesions and a water-sensitive sequence to detect inflammation. Earlier diagnosis has facilitated clinical trials of tumor necrosis factor inhibitors (TNFIs) in patients who have not yet developed full-blown radiographic sacroiliitis, and these have shown comparable efficacy to trials with TNFI agents in patients meeting the criteria for radiographic sacroiliitis. New treatment guidelines call for the use of these agents in patients with early, nonradiographic, axial disease after having failed at least two nonsteroidal antiinflammatory agents, especially in those with objective features of inflammation. Monoclonal antibody TNFIs are also beneficial for acute anterior uveitis, psoriasis, and colitis. Advances in the understanding of pathophysiology have also led to a successful trial of a biologic, secukinumab, targeting interleukin-17. Despite profound benefits for the signs and symptoms, it remains unclear whether any of these agents can prevent structural progression of disease.
This review contains 9 figures, 11 tables and 37 references
Key words: diagnosis, guidelines, magnetic resonance imaging, radiography, spondyloarthritis, treatment
- 23
Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
- KYRIAKOS A. KIROU, MDAssistant Professor of Clinical Medicine, Weill Medical College of Cornell University, Co-director, Mary Kirkland Center for Lupus Care, Hospital for Special Surgery
- MICHAEL D. LOCKSHIN , MDProfessor of Medicine and Obstetrics-Gynecology, Weill Medical College of Cornell University, Director, Barbara Volcker Center, Hospital for Special Surgery
Purchase PDFSystemic lupus erythematosus (SLE) is a chronic systemic autoimmune illness characterized by autoantibodies directed at nuclear antigens that cause clinical and laboratory abnormalities, such as rash, arthritis, leukopenia and thrombocytopenia, alopecia, fever, nephritis, and neurologic disease. Most or all of the symptoms of acute lupus are attributable to immunologic attack on the affected organs. Many complications of long-term disease are attributable to both the disease and its treatment. Intense sun exposure, drug reactions, and infections are circumstances that induce flare; the aim of treatment is to induce remission. This chapter is divided into sections dealing with SLE’s definitions; epidemiology; pathogenesis; disease classification, diagnosis, and differential diagnosis; and treatment.
This review contains 10 figures, 12 tables, and 97 references.
Key Words: Systemic lupus erythematosus, Dermatomyositis, Sjögren syndrome, rheumatoid arthritis, systemic sclerosis, Discoid lupus erythematosus, truncal psoriasiform, annular polycyclic rash
- 24
Axial Neck Pain
- VIKRAM B PATEL, MD, FIPP, DABIPPDirector, Phoenix Interventional Center for Advanced Learning Algonquin, IL
- 25
Osteoarthritis
- CHRISTOPHER WISE, MD, FACPRobert Irby Professor of Medicine, Division of Rheumatology, Allergy, and Immunology, Department of Internal Medicine, Virginia Commonwealth University, Medical College of Virginia, Richmond, VA
- 26
Introduction to the Patient With Rheumatic Disease
- DAVID A. FOX, MDProfessor, Division of Rheumatology, Department of Internal Medicine, University of Michigan Medical School and Health System, Ann Arbor, MI
- 27
Systemic Lupus Erythematosus
- KYRIAKOS A. KIROU, MDAssistant Professor of Clinical Medicine, Weill Medical College of Cornell University, Co-director, Mary Kirkland Center for Lupus Care, Hospital for Special Surgery, 535 E 70th street, New York, NY 10021, Tel: 212-606-1728; Fax: 212-606-1012
- MICHAEL D. LOCKSHIN, MDProfessor of Medicine and Obstetrics-Gynecology, Weill Medical College of Cornell University, Director, Barbara Volcker Center, Hospital for Special Surgery, 535 E 70th St, New York, NY 10021, Tel 212-606-1461; Fax 212-774-2374
- 28
Seronegative Spondyloarthritis: Diagnosis and Management
By Walter P Maksymowych, MB, ChB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACP
Purchase PDFSeronegative Spondyloarthritis: Diagnosis and Management
- WALTER P MAKSYMOWYCH, MB, CHB, FRCP (UK), FRCPC, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, University of Alberta, Medical Scientist, Alberta Innovates-Health Solutions, Edmonton, AB
- 29
Rheumatoid Arthritis: Treatment
By Gary S. Firestein, MD; Anna-Karin H. Ekwall, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFRheumatoid Arthritis: Treatment
- GARY S. FIRESTEIN, MDProfessor of Medicine, Dean and Associate Vice Chancellor of Translational Medicine, UC San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, California
- ANNA-KARIN H. EKWALL, MD, PHDSpecialist in Rheumatology, University of California San Diego School of Medicine, La Jolla, CA, Researcher/Postdoc, The Sahlgrenska Academy at Gothenburg University, Gothenburg, Sweden
- 30
Systemic Vasculitis Syndromes
By Alexandra Villa-Forte, MD, MPH; Brian F Mandell, MD, PhD, FACP
Purchase PDFSystemic Vasculitis Syndromes
- ALEXANDRA VILLA-FORTE, MD, MPHStaff Physician, Center for Vasculitis Care and Research, Orthopedic and Rheumatologic Institute, Cleveland Clinic, Cleveland, OH
- BRIAN F MANDELL, MD, PHD, FACPProfessor of Medicine, Department of Rheumatic Immunologic Disease, Vice Chairman of Medicine, Cleveland Clinic, Lerner College of Medicine, Case Western Reserve University, Cleveland, OH
- 1
- Women's Health
- 1
Primary and Preventive Care of Women
- JANET B. HENRICH, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine and Obstetrics and Gynecology, Yale University, New Haven, CT
Purchase PDFWomen’s health can be defined as diseases or conditions that are unique to women or that involve gender differences that are particularly important to women. This definition acknowledges the increasing scientific evidence supporting a focus on sex and gender and expands the concept of women’s health beyond the traditional focus on reproductive organs and their function. Over time, the definition has come to include an appreciation of wellness and prevention, the interdisciplinary and holistic nature of women’s health, the diversity of women and their health needs over the life span, and the central role of women as patients and as active participants in their health care. This broader interdisciplinary perspective has important implications for clinicians providing care to women. In addition to understanding basic female physiology and reproductive biology, clinicians need to appreciate the complex interaction between the environment and the biology and psychosocial development of women. When dealing with conditions that are not specific to women, clinicians need to be aware of those aspects of disease that are different in women or have important gender implications. The ability to apply this information requires that clinicians adopt attitudes and behavior that are culturally and gender sensitive. Figures visualize female life expectancy, age-adjusted death rates, female breast cancer incidence and death rates, trends in female cigarette smoking, and the U.S. Preventive Services Task Force guidelines for preventive primary care in women.
Keywords: endogenous hormone levels, screening, preventative, cancer, osteoporosis
This review contains 5 figures, 6 tables and 56 references. - 2
Stress Fractures and the Reproductive System in the Female Athlete
By Irfan M Asif, MD; Kimberly Harmon, MD; Mallory Shasteen, MD
Purchase PDFStress Fractures and the Reproductive System in the Female Athlete
- IRFAN M ASIF, MDDirector, Primary Care Sports Medicine Fellowship, Assistant Professor, Department of Family Medicine, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, TN
- KIMBERLY HARMON, MDDirector, Primary Care Sports Medicine Fellowship, Professor, Departments of Family Medicine and Orthopaedics and Sports Medicine, Team Physician, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- MALLORY SHASTEEN, MDEmergency Physician, Department of Emergency Medicine, Greenville Health System/University of South Carolina School of Medicine Greenville, Greenville, SC
Purchase PDFStress fractures are more common in the female athlete. Stress fractures of the pubic ramus and femoral neck are particularly more common in females than in males. Rib stress fractures are an important injury to consider in the female rower, whereas spondylolysis is a common cause of low back pain in female athletes who hyperextend their spines. The higher incidence of stress fractures in females is mainly due to the higher prevalence of disordered eating and subsequent energy imbalance, which leads to detrimental effects on bone. This review discusses stress fractures and unique issues related to exercise and the female reproductive system.
This review contains 6 figures, 5 tables and 49 references
Key words: amenorrhea, bone mineral density, disordered eating, female athlete triad, femoral neck, pregnancy, pubic ramus, rib, spondylolysis, stress fracture
- 3
Musculoskeletal Problems in the Female Athlete
By Irfan M Asif, MD; Kimberly Harmon, MD; Mallory Shasteen, MD
Purchase PDFMusculoskeletal Problems in the Female Athlete
- IRFAN M ASIF, MDDirector, Primary Care Sports Medicine Fellowship, Assistant Professor, Department of Family Medicine, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, TN
- KIMBERLY HARMON, MDDirector, Primary Care Sports Medicine Fellowship, Professor, Departments of Family Medicine and Orthopaedics and Sports Medicine, Team Physician, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
- MALLORY SHASTEEN, MDEmergency Physician, Department of Emergency Medicine, Greenville Health System/University of South Carolina School of Medicine Greenville, Greenville, SC
Purchase PDFMusculoskeletal injuries in the female athlete are, for the most part, similar to those in the male athlete. However, there are differences in the incidence of these injuries and in the sports in which they tend to occur. Female athletes have a higher rate of noncontact anterior cruciate ligament injuries than male athletes. Other musculoskeletal problems are also more common in females, such as multidirectional instability of the shoulder, adhesive capsulitis, and patellofemoral pain. This review addresses injuries that are seen commonly in female athletes and outlines current diagnosis and treatment options.
This review contains 3 figures and 32 references
Key words: ACL tear, adhesive capsulitis, atraumatic, female athlete, injection, knee, patellofemoral pain, shoulder
- 4
Health of Immigrant and Refugee Women
- ANIYIZHAI ANNAMALAI, MD
Purchase PDFProviders encounter increasingly diverse patient populations, as migration of people continues to increase worldwide. Health of migrant women is influenced by factors before migration as well as those affecting the migratory process and resettlement. Cultural factors influence patient beliefs and attitudes toward all facets of reproductive health including contraception. Providers may also encounter sequelae of traditional practices such as female genital cutting. Migrant women may be at a higher risk of violence both due to intimate partner violence and risks encountered during migration. They are also at risk for psychological sequelae resulting from stressors before and after displacement. Posttraumatic stress disorder prevalence is higher compared to local populations. Whereas migrants still carry a high burden of infectious disease, chronic health conditions are becoming increasingly common in many groups. Healthcare providers with an awareness of health issues faced by migrants can contribute to improving overall health of migrants and ease the process of resettlement for these people.
This review contains 53 references, 1 figure, and 10 tables.
Key Words: female genital cutting, immigrant, intestinal parasites, intimate partner violence, migration, nutrition, posttraumatic stress disorder, refugee, reproductive health, tuberculosis
- 5
Contraception
- SIRIPANTH NIPPITA, MD, MSBeth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- EVA LUO, MD, MBABeth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFMost individuals will wish to avoid pregnancy for some part of their reproductive years. A variety of hormonal and nonhormonal contraceptive methods are available, which have different characteristics related to systemic effects, bleeding patterns, and effort required on the user’s part. The goal of contraceptive counseling is to identify a method that is safe and compatible with the individual’s preferences. Clinicians may often be able to help patients initiate contraception on the day of the initial office visit. They should remain available and supportive to patients who wish to switch methods and provide comprehensive counseling for all available contraceptive methods as well as emergency contraception options.
This review contains 8 figures, 7 tables and 51 references
Keywords: birth control, contraception, emergency contraception, Essure, hysteroscopy, interval, laparoscopy, microinserts, postpartum, salpingectomy, sterilization
- 6
DEMO REVIEW - Menopause
- SUSAN D. REED, MD, MPHProfessor, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Department of Epidemiology, Director, Women’s Reproductive Health Research Program, University of Washington School of Medicine, Chief of Service, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Harborview Medical Center, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFThe female reproductive system matures in a continuous, natural process from menarche to menopause as the finite numbers of oocytes produced during fetal development are gradually lost to ovulation and senescence. Menopause is defined as the permanent cessation of menses; by convention, the diagnosis of menopause is not made until the individual has had 12 months of amenorrhea. Menopause is thus characterized by the menstrual changes that reflect oocyte depletion and subsequent changes in ovarian hormone production. However, hormonal changes, rather than the cessation of menstruation itself, cause the manifestations that occur around the time of menopause. Therefore, a woman who has undergone a hysterectomy but who retains her ovaries can experience normal menopausal symptoms as oocyte depletion leads to changes in estrogen levels, even though cessation of menstruation occurred with surgery. This review covers definitions, natural menopause, menopausal transition and postmenopausal symptom management, and premature ovarian insufficiency. Figures show stages of reproductive aging, serum concentrations of hormones during menopausal transition and postmenopause, hormonal changes associated with reproductive aging, symptoms of menopausal transition and menopause, treatment algorithm(s), and Women’s Health Initiative findings: risks and benefits of estrogen alone and estrogen plus progestin by age group: 50 to 59, 60 to 69, and 70 to 79 years. Tables list target tissues, physical manifestations, and menopausal symptoms; selective estrogen receptor modulators used in postmenopausal women;differential diagnosis and evaluation of common menopausal symptoms; estrogen doses; progestogen dosing for endometrial protection; nonhormonal pharmaceutical hot flash therapies; and pharmacologic therapy for genitourinary atrophy.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 7 tables, and 119 references.
- 7
Diseases of the Vulva
- HUMA FARID, MDClinical Instructor, Department of Obstetrics/Gynecology, Harvard Medical School, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
- CATHERINE NOSAL, MDPGY-4, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFVulvar symptoms are a common reason for a gynecologic visit. A variety of conditions impact the vulva, including dermatologic conditions, hormonal changes, vulvar pain, and sexually transmitted or other infections. History and physical exam, focused on the symptoms and the vulvovaginal area, are crucial to identifying the etiology of the symptoms. A full evaluation may include vulvar biopsies and testing for infections. The treatment of the symptoms depends on the etiology; therefore, an accurate and thorough determination of the cause of the patient’s symptoms is of primary importance. Treatment can include antibiotics, antifungals, steroids, antidepressants, hormones, and pelvic floor physical therapy. In this chapter, we summarize common conditions affecting the vulvar, their evaluation, and their treatment.
This review contains 7 figures, 10 tables, and 40 references.
Key Words: Bartholin gland, candidiasis, dermatitis, eczema, hidradenitis suppurativa, lichen planus, lichen sclerosus, sexually transmitted infections, vulva, vulvodynia, vulvovaginal atrophy
- 8
Delayed Puberty
- AMANDA FRENCH, MDBoston Children’s Hospital, Boston MA
Purchase PDFAlthough common, delayed puberty can be distressing to patients and families. Careful assessment is necessary to ensure appropriate physical and social development in patients that require intervention to reach pubertal milestones and achieve optimal growth. Most pubertal delay is from lack of activation of the hypothalamic-pituitary-gonadal axis which then results in a functional or physiologic GnRH deficiency. The delay may be temporary or permanent. Constitutional delay (CDGP), also referred to as self-limited delayed puberty (DP), describes children on the extreme end of normal pubertal timing and is the most common cause of delayed puberty, representing about one third of cases. Hypergonadotropic hypogonadism (primary hypogonadism) results from a failure of the gonad itself, and hypogonadotropic hypogonadism (secondary hypogonadism) results from a failure of the hypothalamic-pituitary axis, which is usually caused by another process, often systemic. Diagnosis is based on history and examination. Treatment is based on the underlying cause of pubertal delay and may include hormone replacement. Involving a pediatric endocrinologist should be considered. Appropriate counseling and ongoing support are important for all patients and families, regardless of underlying disease process.
This review contains 4 figures, 4 tables, and 32 references.
Keywords: puberty, delayed puberty, hypogonadism, hypogonadotropic hypogonadism, hypergonadotropic hypogonadism, menarche, thelarche, constitutional delay and growth in puberty, Turner syndrome
- 9
Primary and Preventive Care of Women
- JANET B. HENRICH, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine and Obstetrics and Gynecology, Yale University, New Haven, CT
- 10
Contraception
- SIRIPANTH NIPPITA, MD, MSBeth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- EVA LUO, MD, MBABeth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- Menses and Fertility
- 1
Normal and Abnormal Menstruation
- JANET E. HALL, MDProfessor of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Associate Chief, Reproductive Endocrine Unit, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFNormal reproductive function requires precise integration of hormonal events involving the hypothalamus, the pituitary, and the ovary, with the uterus, vagina, and breast acting as key end organs for ovarian steroid effects. This chapter discusses the physiology of the reproductive system in women; the assessment of reproductive function; and the epidemiology, etiology, diagnosis, and treatment of primary and secondary amenorrhea, abnormal vaginal bleeding—including menorrhagia, menometrorrhagia, and hypomenorrhea—and dysmenorrhea. Figures illustrate the relationship between the hypothalamus, pituitary, and ovaries in reproductive function and normal menstrual cycle function; an algorithm depicts the evaluation of amenorrhea. Tables list the relative frequency of the causes of amenorrhea and the neuroanatomic causes of hypogonadotropic hypogonadism. This chapter has 42 references.
- 2
Premenstrual Syndrome
- SARAH L BERGA, MDJames Robert McCord Professor and Chairman, Department of Gynecology and Obstetrics, Emory University School of Medicine, Atlanta, GA
- JESSICA B SPENCER, MD, MSCAssistant Professor, Department of Gynecology and Obstetrics, Emory University School of Medicine, Altlanta, GA
Purchase PDFPremenstrual syndrome (PMS) is a recurrent constellation of affective and physical symptoms that begin during the luteal phase of the menstrual cycle and resolve completely or almost completely during the follicular phase. Symptoms range in severity from mild to severe. The pathophysiology of PMS is discussed in this chapter, and potential causes are listed in a table. The diagnosis and differential diagnosis are reviewed. To warrant medical attention, evaluation, and intervention, premenstrual symptoms must be recurrent and sufficiently severe to interfere with daily work and social activities. Mild cases of PMS can be treated with lifestyle modification (e.g., good sleep patterns, regular exercise) and nonpharmacologic therapy (e.g., bright-light therapy, stress management, behavioral therapy). More severe cases warrant aggressive intervention, with pharmacologic therapy and even surgery in women who respond very well to a gonadotropin-releasing hormone (GnRH) agonist and have completed childbearing.
This review contains 1 figure, 5 tables and 51 references
Key Words: Premenstrual syndrome, premenstrual dysphoric disorder, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, anxiogenic progesterone metabolites, estrogen, progesterone.
- 3
Ectopic Pregnancy and Spontaneous Abortion
By Eric D. Levens, MD; Alan H. DeCherney, MD
Purchase PDFEctopic Pregnancy and Spontaneous Abortion
- ERIC D. LEVENS, MDShady Grove Fertility Reproductive Science Center, Rockville, MD
- ALAN H. DECHERNEY, MDChief, Program in Reproductive and Adult Endocrinology, Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, Bethesda, MD
Purchase PDFEctopic pregnancy, the implantation of an embryo outside the endometrial cavity, is the leading cause of morbidity and mortality in the first trimester. The embryo may be implanted in the fallopian tubes, ovaries, abdomen, or cervix, with the fallopian tubes being the site of implantation in 95% of cases. If left untreated, ectopic pregnancy can result in rupture of the fallopian tube, which can lead to hemorrhagic shock and death. The signs and symptoms of ectopic pregnancy and diagnosis and treatment are detailed in the chapter. Spontaneous abortion, defined as a natural termination of a pregnancy before 20 weeks’ gestation, occurs in almost 30% of known pregnancies and an estimated 50% of all conceptions. Causes include genetic, environmental, endocrine, and immunologic factors; anatomic abnormalities; antiphospholipid syndrome; and polycystic ovary syndrome.
This review contains 6 figures, 7 tables, and 42 references.
Keywords: Ectopic pregnancy, miscarriage, spontaneous abortion, early pregnancy loss, vaginal spotting
- 4
Medical Complications in Pregnancy
- ELLEN W. SEELY, MDDirector of Clinical Research, Division of Endocrinology, Diabetes, and Hypertension, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- JEFFREY L. ECKER, MDDirector, Fellowship in Maternal Fetal Medicine, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Massachusetts General Hospital, Professor, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFMedical complications and intercurrent disease have long presented challenges to obstetricians and other medical providers caring for pregnant women. Contemporary medical practice and treatments have only added to these challenges. Advances in disease management mean that patients with some conditions (e.g., cystic fibrosis) whose life expectancies in the past would have precluded pregnancy are now living to reproductive age. Furthermore, treatments to restore fertility allow the barrier of age, as well as anatomic and genetic barriers, to be surmounted. All of these advances emphasize the need for careful and considered collaboration between clinicians caring for women of reproductive age who are not pregnant and those who care for them during pregnancy. This review discusses pregnancy planning and counseling, principles of teratogenesis, physiologic changes in pregnancy, cardiovascular disease, diabetes mellitus, thyroid disease, thrombophilia, asthma, infectious diseases, renal disease, autoimmune diseases, cancer, neurologic diseases, substance use, intrahepatic cholestasis, and pregnancy-specific conditions. Tables list elements of preconception care and counseling, the Food and Drug Administration drug classification system for pregnancy, selected drugs with suspected or known teratogenic potential, and physiologic changes of pregnancy.
This review contains 15 tables and 83 references.
Key Words: Headache, maternal mortality, obstetric medicine, pregnancy, pulmonary embolism
- 5
Polycystic Ovary Syndrome
By Lubna Pal, MBBS, MRCOG (UK), MS, FACOG; Kimberly Keefe, MD
Purchase PDFPolycystic Ovary Syndrome
- LUBNA PAL, MBBS, MRCOG (UK), MS, FACOGAssociate Professor, Director, Program for Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome, Director, Menopause Program, Associate Chair for Education, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology & Reproductive Sciences, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
- KIMBERLY KEEFE, MDResident physician, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology, and Reproductive Sciences; Yale School of Medicine, New Haven, CT USA
Purchase PDFPolycystic ovary syndrome (PCOS) is a commonly encountered endocrine disorder that is characterized by a combination of hyperandrogenism, menstrual disturbances (predominantly oligomenorrhea), and a classic sonographic polycystic ovarian morphology. Additional sequelae associated with PCOS include infertility and enhanced risk of developing type 2 diabetes mellitus and cardiovascular disease. The prevalence of depressive disorders and obstructive sleep apnea is disproportionately higher in women with PCOS, and this population is at increased risk for endometrial hyperplasia and endometrial cancer. This chapter reviews the definition, epidemiology, etiology and genetics, pathophysiology, diagnosis (including history, physical examination, and laboratory tests), differential diagnosis, and management of PCOS. Syndromes and diseases associated with PCOS are discussed. Tables describe the three approaches to PCOS, conditions mimicking PCOS, diagnosis of the metabolic syndrome in women using the National Cholesterol Education Program criteria, workup for PCOS, comprehensive care for PCOS patients, and the multistep approach to treatment of PCOS-related anovulatory infertility. Figures include transvaginal ultrasound images of a normal ovary and a multifollicular ovary in a woman with PCOS, the Ferriman-Gallwey scoring system for quantifying hirsutism, acanthosis nigrans on the neck of a woman with PCOS and insulin resistance, the relationship between body mass index and basal luteinizing hormone levels, oral glucose challenge results in nonobese women with PCOS, and an algorithm for treatment decision making.
This review contains 6 highly rendered figures, 6 tables, and 120 references.
- 6
Hirsutism and Hyperandrogenism
By Deborah E. Ikhena, MD; Lubna Pal, MBBS, MRCOG (UK), MS, FACOG
Purchase PDFHirsutism and Hyperandrogenism
- DEBORAH E. IKHENA, MDResident Physician, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
- LUBNA PAL, MBBS, MRCOG (UK), MS, FACOGAssociate Professor, Director, Program for Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome, Director, Menopause Program, Associate Chair for Education, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology & Reproductive Sciences, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
Purchase PDFHirsutism is defined as the presence in females of terminal, or dark, coarse hairs that grow in a pattern normally seen in males. The presence of hirsutism is commonly associated with excess androgen production (hyperandrogenism) and warrants further evaluation. In addition to hirsutism, hyperandrogenism may also present clinically as acne, androgenetic alopecia, and menstrual irregularities. Regardless of the severity, hirsutism can be a very disconcerting problem for women and should be addressed with concern and sympathy by clinicians. This review discusses the epidemiology, etiology, physiology, diagnosis, differential diagnosis, and treatment of hirsutism.
This review contains 3 figures, 27 tables, and 128 References
Keywords: Hirsutism, androgen, hyperandrogenism, hair, depilation, epilation, nonclassic congenital adrenal hyperplasia
- 7
Endometriosis
- VALERIE A FLORES, MDFellow, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology, and Reproductive Sciences, Yale School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
- HUGH S TAYLOR, MDAnita O’Keeffe Young Professor and Chair, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology and Reproductive Sciences, Yale School of Medicine, New Haven, CT, Chief, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Yale-New Haven Hospital, New Haven, CT
Purchase PDFEndometriosis is a chronic, gynecologic disease affecting 6 to 10% of reproductive age women. Pelvic pain, dyspareunia, and infertility are the most common symptoms of endometriosis that can have a significant impact on patients’ lives. Although the etiology remains largely unknown, the role of estrogens in the development and growth of endometriosis is well characterized. Medical and surgical therapies are the two cornerstones of endometriosis management. Following diagnosis of endometriosis, treatment options will be dependent on patient preference (ie, seeking pain relief versus fertility treatment). Future research aimed at targeting altered molecular pathways in patients with endometriosis will hopefully help mitigate the burden of this debilitating disease.
This review contains 5 figures, 7 tables, and 75 references.
Key Words: aberrant gene expression, altered immunity, endometriosis, infertility, medical and surgical therapy, pelvic pain, retrograde menstruation, stem cells
- 8
Menopause
- SUSAN D. REED, MD, MPHProfessor, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Department of Epidemiology, Director, Women’s Reproductive Health Research Program, University of Washington School of Medicine, Chief of Service, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Harborview Medical Center, Seattle, WA
- ELIZA L. SUTTON, MD, FACPAssociate Professor, Department of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine Medical Director, Women's Health Care Center, University of Washington Medical Center Seattle Washington
Purchase PDFThe female reproductive system matures in a continuous, natural process from menarche to menopause as the finite numbers of oocytes produced during fetal development are gradually lost to ovulation and senescence. Menopause is defined as the permanent cessation of menses; by convention, the diagnosis of menopause is not made until the individual has had 12 months of amenorrhea. Menopause is thus characterized by the menstrual changes that reflect oocyte depletion and subsequent changes in ovarian hormone production. However, hormonal changes, rather than the cessation of menstruation itself, cause the manifestations that occur around the time of menopause. Therefore, a woman who has undergone a hysterectomy but who retains her ovaries can experience normal menopausal symptoms as oocyte depletion leads to changes in estrogen levels, even though cessation of menstruation occurred with surgery. This review covers definitions, natural menopause, menopausal transition and postmenopausal symptom management, and premature ovarian insufficiency. Figures show stages of reproductive aging, serum concentrations of hormones during menopausal transition and postmenopause, hormonal changes associated with reproductive aging, symptoms of menopausal transition and menopause, treatment algorithm(s), and Women’s Health Initiative findings: risks and benefits of estrogen alone and estrogen plus progestin by age group: 50 to 59, 60 to 69, and 70 to 79 years. Tables list target tissues, physical manifestations, and menopausal symptoms; selective estrogen receptor modulators used in postmenopausal women; differential diagnosis and evaluation of common menopausal symptoms; estrogen doses; progestogen dosing for endometrial protection; nonhormonal pharmaceutical hot flash therapies; and pharmacologic therapy for genitourinary atrophy.
This review contains 6 figures, 8 tables, and 122 references.
- 9
Infertility
- ERIC D. LEVENS, MDShady Grove Fertility Reproductive Science Center, Rockville, MD
- KATHERINE A GREEN, MDClinical Fellow, Program in Reproductive and Adult Endocrinology, Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, Bethesda, MD
- ALAN H. DECHERNEY, MDChief, Program in Reproductive and Adult Endocrinology, Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, Bethesda, MD
Purchase PDFInfertility affects 12 to 18% of couples in the United States and may be due to female factors, male factors, or both. A systematic evaluation of the common causes of infertility can identify conditions that may be treated by the obstetrician-gynecologist to help the couple achieve their family-building goals or those that require referral to a subspecialist. This review discusses current recommendations regarding the workup and treatment of the common causes of infertility, including tubal and pelvic factors, ovulatory disorders, and male factors. Advances in assisted reproductive technology are also discussed, including the use of genetic screening in in vitro fertilization and fertility preservation options for individuals facing gonadotoxic therapy.
This review contains 6 figures, 8 tables, and 53 references
Key words: anovulation, assisted reproductive technology, clomiphene citrate, infertility, letrozole, oocyte cryopreservation, ovulation induction, semen analysis, tubal factor, uterine factor
- 10
Menopause
- SUSAN D. REED, MD, MPHProfessor, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Department of Epidemiology, Director, Women’s Reproductive Health Research Program, University of Washington School of Medicine, Chief of Service, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Harborview Medical Center, Seattle, WA
- ELIZA L. SUTTON, MD, FACPAssociate Professor, Department of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine Medical Director, Women's Health Care Center, University of Washington Medical Center Seattle Washington
Purchase PDFThe female reproductive system matures in a continuous, natural process from menarche to menopause as the finite numbers of oocytes produced during fetal development are gradually lost to ovulation and senescence. Menopause is defined as the permanent cessation of menses; by convention, the diagnosis of menopause is not made until the individual has had 12 months of amenorrhea. Menopause is thus characterized by the menstrual changes that reflect oocyte depletion and subsequent changes in ovarian hormone production. However, hormonal changes, rather than the cessation of menstruation itself, cause the manifestations that occur around the time of menopause. Therefore, a woman who has undergone a hysterectomy but who retains her ovaries can experience normal menopausal symptoms as oocyte depletion leads to changes in estrogen levels, even though cessation of menstruation occurred with surgery. This review covers definitions, natural menopause, menopausal transition and postmenopausal symptom management, and premature ovarian insufficiency. Figures show stages of reproductive aging, serum concentrations of hormones during menopausal transition and postmenopause, hormonal changes associated with reproductive aging, symptoms of menopausal transition and menopause, treatment algorithm(s), and Women’s Health Initiative findings: risks and benefits of estrogen alone and estrogen plus progestin by age group: 50 to 59, 60 to 69, and 70 to 79 years. Tables list target tissues, physical manifestations, and menopausal symptoms; selective estrogen receptor modulators used in postmenopausal women; differential diagnosis and evaluation of common menopausal symptoms; estrogen doses; progestogen dosing for endometrial protection; nonhormonal pharmaceutical hot flash therapies; and pharmacologic therapy for genitourinary atrophy.
This review contains 6 figures, 8 tables, and 122 references.
- 11
Menopause
- SUSAN D. REED, MD, MPHProfessor, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Department of Epidemiology, Director, Women’s Reproductive Health Research Program, University of Washington School of Medicine, Chief of Service, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Harborview Medical Center, Seattle, WA
- ELIZA L. SUTTON, MD, FACPAssociate Professor, Department of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine Medical Director, Women's Health Care Center, University of Washington Medical Center Seattle Washington
- 12
Menopause
- SUSAN D. REED, MD, MPHProfessor, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Department of Epidemiology, Director, Women’s Reproductive Health Research Program, University of Washington School of Medicine, Chief of Service, Obstetrics and Gynecology, Harborview Medical Center, Seattle, WA
- ELIZA L. SUTTON, MD, FACPAssociate Professor, Department of Medicine, University of Washington School of Medicine Medical Director, Women's Health Care Center, University of Washington Medical Center Seattle Washington
- 13
Infertility
- ERIC D. LEVENS, MDShady Grove Fertility Reproductive Science Center, Rockville, MD
- KATHERINE A GREEN, MDClinical Fellow, Program in Reproductive and Adult Endocrinology, Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, Bethesda, MD
- ALAN H. DECHERNEY, MDChief, Program in Reproductive and Adult Endocrinology, Eunice Kennedy Shriver National Institute of Child Health and Human Development, Bethesda, MD
- 14
Hirsutism and Hyperandrogenism
By Deborah E. Ikhena, MD; Lubna Pal, MBBS, MRCOG (UK), MS, FACOG
Purchase PDFHirsutism and Hyperandrogenism
- DEBORAH E. IKHENA, MDResident Physician, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, University of Massachusetts Medical School, Worcester, MA
- LUBNA PAL, MBBS, MRCOG (UK), MS, FACOGAssociate Professor, Director, Program for Polycystic Ovarian Syndrome, Director, Menopause Program, Associate Chair for Education, Department of Obstetrics, Gynecology & Reproductive Sciences, Yale University School of Medicine, New Haven, CT
- 1
- Special Topics in Women's Health
- 1
Women With Disabilities
- LISA I. IEZZONI, MD, MSCProfessor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Director, Mongan Institute for Health Policy, Massachusetts General Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFWomen with disabilities face substantial barriers to obtaining health care services. They are more likely than nondisabled women to smoke cigarettes, to be obese or overweight, to be physically inactive, and to report depressive symptoms, anxiety, and fears. Women with disabilities are often stigmatized as being asexual and experience higher rates of domestic partner and in-home abuse. Physical, communication, and attitudinal barriers within the health care system may prevent women with disabilities from receiving the care they need. This module discusses the definition of disability, prevalence and demographics of disability among US women, health conditions and risk factors, and general considerations in caring for women with disabilities. Selected health issues in caring for women with disabilities, including reproductive and parental rights, menstruation and fertility, contraception, preconception counseling, and menopause, are also discussed. Tables review components of the International Classification of Functioning, Health and Disability, examples of disability definitions, disability indicators using National Health Interview Survey data, health conditions causing chronic mobility disability for women ages 18 to 49, comorbid health conditions reported among women with and without disability, mental health conditions reported by women with and without disability, examples of women’s experiences with inaccessible medical equipment, examples of communication accommodations, and accessible labeling of prescription drug containers. Figures include the International Classification of Functioning, Health and Disability model of disability and graphs showing the percentage of women with basic action difficulties (BADs); with one or more BADs; with complex action limitations; with BADs by racial and ethnic groups; with indicated level of education and income among women with and without BADs; with indicated level of self-reported overall health among women with BADs; by smoking status among women with and without BADs; in body mass index category among women with and without BADs; with indicated physical activity level among women with and without BADs; with indicated heath care service use and lacking health insurance among women with and without BADs; and receiving Pap smears, mammography screening, and colon cancer screening among women with and without BADs.
This review contains 12 highly rendered figures, 9 tables, and 86 references.
- 2
Female Sexuality: Assessing Satisfaction and Addressing Problems
By Jennifer Potter, MD
Purchase PDFFemale Sexuality: Assessing Satisfaction and Addressing Problems
- JENNIFER POTTER, MDAssociate Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Director, Women’s Health Center, Beth Israel Deaconess Medical Center, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFSexuality is important to women of all ages. Although changes in sexual function occur with aging, hormonal transitions, illness, the use of medications, and disability, many women can maintain a satisfying sex life by making appropriate adaptations. Clinicians who take the time to obtain a complete and careful sexual history and perform a pertinent physical examination can help the majority of women who present with sexual complaints. Effective treatment must address the contribution of psychological, relationship, and biologic factors and often requires the collaboration of physicians and psychotherapists, as well as sex and physical therapists in many circumstances. Simply initiating a discussion about sexual concerns is frequently the most valuable aspect of treatment for women and their partners. Also useful are provision of basic education about normal female genital anatomy and sexual function across the lifespan; permission to explore masturbation, erotica, and versatile sexual techniques, as well as nongenital pleasuring; information about lubricants; and the prescription of estrogen in the setting of vulvovaginal atrophy. There are as yet no approved agents to treat the biologic component of hypoactive sexual desire. However, it may be appropriate to consider using androgen supplementation in patients with surgical menopause, as well as the addition of bupropion in patients taking selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors (SSRIs). This review discusses the epidemiology of female sexual disorders, the female sexual response and sexual behavior, and the diagnosis and management of specific sexual disorders, including desire, arousal, orgasm, and sexual-pain problems.
This review contains 4 figures, 41 tables, and 96 references.
Keywords: Sexual dysfunction disorder, arousal, orgasm, desire, dyspareunia, vulvodynia, vestibulitis, vaginismus
- 3
Intimate Partner Violence
- JANE S. SILLMAN, MDAssistant Professor of Medicine, Department of Medicine, Harvard Medical School, Senior Physician, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFIntimate-partner violence describes relationships characterized by intentional controlling or violent behavior by someone who is in an intimate relationship with the victim. The abuser’s controlling behavior may take many forms, including psychological abuse, physical abuse, sexual abuse, economic control, and social isolation. Abuse may ultimately lead to the death of the victim from homicide or suicide. Typically, an abusive relationship goes through cycles of violence. There are periods of calm, followed by increasing tension in the abuser, outbursts of violence, and return to periods of calm. These cycles often spiral toward increasing violence over time. The victims of intimate-partner violence are usually women, but intimate-partner violence is also a significant problem for gay couples and for the disabled and elderly of both sexes. This review discusses the epidemiology, diagnosis, treatment, outcomes, and prevention of intimate-partner violence. Risk factors for experiencing violence, risk factors for perpetrating violence, and consequences of abuse are also analyzed.
This review contains 5 figures, 14 tables, and 30 references.
Keywords: Domestic abuse, intimate-partner violence, elder abuse, child abuse, batterer, sexual abuse, physical abuse
- 4
Approach to the Patient With a Breast Mass
By George Plitas, MD; Monica Morrow, MD, FACS; Brandon R Bruns, MD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With a Breast Mass
- GEORGE PLITAS, MDAssistant Attending, Breast Service, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New York, NY, Assistant Professor of Surgery, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York, NY
- MONICA MORROW, MD, FACSChief, Breast Service, Department of Surgery, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, Anne Burnett Windfohr Chair of Clinical Oncology, Professor of Surgery, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York, NY
- BRANDON R BRUNS, MDAssociate Professor of Surgery, R Adams Cowley Shock Trauma Center at the University of Maryland Medical Center, Baltimore, MD
Purchase PDFA breast mass is the most common presenting symptom among patients in a breast clinic. The presence of a breast mass can cause a great deal of anxiety in women, as well as their physicians. The differential diagnosis of a palpable breast abnormality is broad, although the majority of breast masses are benign. The responsibility of the physician who is evaluating a breast mass is to exclude the presence of malignancy. Once cancer is ruled out, the physician should then attempt to provide an accurate diagnosis, appropriate treatment, and reassurance to the patient. This chapter discusses the assessment of normal breast physiology, identification of a breast mass, evaluation of the various classifications of breast mass (e.g., dominant mass with clinically benign features and dominant mass with suspicious features), differential diagnosis and management of common benign breast masses (e.g., cysts, fibroadenomas, phyllodes tumors, hamartomas, fat necrosis), and the risk of breast cancer associated with benign breast lesions. The chapter also discusses the diagnosis and management of a breast mass in male patients. Tables outline breast lesions that may present as a palpable abnormality, factors used for the assessment of breast cancer risk, physical characteristics of benign and malignant breast masses, the accuracy of fine-needle aspiration, and benign breast lesions by category. Figures illustrate diagnostic procedures, the anatomy of the human breast, visual inspection of the breasts, physical examination of the breasts, breast palpation technique, the evaluation and management of a new breast mass, and the identification of cysts.
This review contains 10 figures, 14 tables, and 64 references.
Keywords: breast mass, lobuloalveolar development, subareolar nodularity, parenchyma (glandular elements), stromal tissue, ovarian graafian follicles
- 5
Approach to the Patient With a Pelvic Mass
By Carolyn D. Runowicz, MD; Mary I. Fatehi, MD; Joseph T Chambers, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With a Pelvic Mass
- CAROLYN D. RUNOWICZ, MDAssociate Dean for Women’s Affairs, Professor of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Florida International University, Herbert Wertheim College of Medicine, 11200 S.W. 8 Street, AHC2 693, Miami, FL
- MARY I. FATEHI, MDDirector, Gynecologic Oncology at Long Island College Hospital, Associate Professor, State University of New York at Downstate
- JOSEPH T CHAMBERS, MD, PHDChairman, The Mary Polak Oenslager Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Long Island College Hospital, Professor, State University of New York at Downstate
Purchase PDFEvery year, between 5% and 10% of women in the United States undergo surgery for a suspected ovarian neoplasm; however, only 13% to 21% of these women prove to have an ovarian malignant neoplasm. A pelvic mass may be identified in symptomatic or asymptomatic women during an abdominal or pelvic examination or on imaging studies. The differential diagnosis is extensive, because a pelvic mass may be of gynecologic or nongynecologic origin and may be associated with congenital, functional, neoplastic (either benign or malignant), obstructive, or inflammatory processes. The underlying cause and potential risk of cancer varies with age. The first section of the chapter provides an overview of diagnostic evaluation. This is followed by a section that discusses diagnostic considerations in patients of specific age groups-namely, prepubertal girls, adolescents, women of reproductive age, and postmenopausal women. The specific presentations discussed for these patients include cystic adnexal masses, cystic teratomas, leiomyomas, endometriomas, malignant neoplasms, anatomic abnormalities, and ectopic pregnancy.
This review contains 15 tables, and 45 references.
Keywords: Pelvic mass, adnexal mass, ovarian tumor, fibroid, endometriosis, leiomyoma, endometrioma, ectopic pregnancy, cyst
- 6
Cardiovascular Disease in Women
By JoAnne Micale Foody, MD, FAHA, FACC; Fatima Rodriguez, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFCardiovascular Disease in Women
- JOANNE MICALE FOODY, MD, FAHA, FACCMedical Director Cardiovascular Wellness Program, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- FATIMA RODRIGUEZ, MD, MPHResident Physician, Department of Internal Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFHeart disease is the leading cause of death and disability in women in the United States. In 2007, almost half a million women died of cardiovascular disease (CVD). Almost one out of every two women in the United States will die from some cardiovascular event—most likely myocardial infarction (MI), hypertensive heart disease, or stroke. In addition, CVD claims more lives than cancer, Alzheimer’s disease, chronic lower respiratory diseases, and accidents combined. Heart failure now represents a growing epidemic in women—particularly older women. Despite its importance for women, CVD has traditionally been viewed as a disease of middle-aged men, and most clinical data come from studies in middle-aged men. Yet there is increasing evidence that significant gender differences exist. Moreover, although mortality associated with coronary artery disease (CAD) in men has dramatically declined over the years, the mortality gap between men and women persists. This chapter reviews those uniquely female attributes that are associated with differences in cardiovascular disease presentation and discusses ways to reduce risk and improve clinical outcomes.
This review contains 2 figures, 9 tables, and 100 references.
Keywords: Women's health, cardiovascular risk, coronary artery disease, coronary heart disease, acute coronary syndrome, heart failure, prevention, cardiovascular disease
- 7
Musculoskeletal Problems in the Female Athlete
By Irfan M Asif, MD; Emily Edwards, DO; Kimberly Harmon, MD
Purchase PDFMusculoskeletal Problems in the Female Athlete
- IRFAN M ASIF, MDDirector, Primary Care Sports Medicine Fellowship, Assistant Professor, Department of Family Medicine, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, TN
- EMILY EDWARDS, DODepartment of Family Medicine, University of Tennessee, Knoxville, TN
- KIMBERLY HARMON, MDDirector, Primary Care Sports Medicine Fellowship, Professor, Departments of Family Medicine and Orthopaedics and Sports Medicine, Team Physician, University of Washington, Seattle, WA
Purchase PDFMusculoskeletal injuries in the female athlete are, for the most part, similar to those in the male athlete. However, there are differences in the incidence of these injuries and in the sports in which they tend to occur. Stress fractures are more common in the female athlete because of the higher prevalence of disordered eating and subsequent energy imbalance that leads to detrimental effects on bone. In addition, female athletes have a higher rate of noncontact anterior cruciate ligament (ACL) injuries than male athletes. Other musculoskeletal problems are also more common in females, such as multidirectional instability of the shoulder, adhesive capsulitis, and patellofemoral pain. Finally, as a function of greater participation by females in certain sports, such as dance and gymnastics, injuries specific to those sports are more common in females. This chapter addresses injuries that are seen commonly in the female athlete and reviews unique issues related to exercise and the female reproductive system. Figures depict the management of stress fractures, a stress fracture of the inferior pubic ramus, the tension aspect of the femoral neck, stress fractures of the rib, multidirectional shoulder instability, adhesive capsulitis, spondylolysis, proper squat landing technique, and the female athlete triad. A table outlines the recommended intake of both calcium and vitamin D for bone health at various ages.
This chapter contains 9 figures, 1 table, 59 references, and 5 Board-styled MCQs. - 8
Cardiovascular Disease in Women
By JoAnne Micale Foody, MD, FAHA, FACC; Fatima Rodriguez, MD, MPH
Purchase PDFCardiovascular Disease in Women
- JOANNE MICALE FOODY, MD, FAHA, FACCMedical Director Cardiovascular Wellness Program, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- FATIMA RODRIGUEZ, MD, MPHResident Physician, Department of Internal Medicine, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- 9
Approach to the Patient With a Pelvic Mass
By Carolyn D. Runowicz, MD; Mary I. Fatehi, MD; Joseph T Chambers, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With a Pelvic Mass
- CAROLYN D. RUNOWICZ, MDAssociate Dean for Women’s Affairs, Professor of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Florida International University, Herbert Wertheim College of Medicine, 11200 S.W. 8 Street, AHC2 693, Miami, FL
- MARY I. FATEHI, MDDirector, Gynecologic Oncology at Long Island College Hospital, Associate Professor, State University of New York at Downstate
- JOSEPH T CHAMBERS, MD, PHDChairman, The Mary Polak Oenslager Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Long Island College Hospital, Professor, State University of New York at Downstate
- 10
Approach to the Patient With a Breast Mass
By George Plitas, MD; Monica Morrow, MD, FACS; Brandon R Bruns, MD
Purchase PDFApproach to the Patient With a Breast Mass
- GEORGE PLITAS, MDAssistant Attending, Breast Service, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, New York, NY, Assistant Professor of Surgery, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York, NY
- MONICA MORROW, MD, FACSChief, Breast Service, Department of Surgery, Memorial Sloan-Kettering Cancer Center, Anne Burnett Windfohr Chair of Clinical Oncology, Professor of Surgery, Weill Cornell Medical College, New York, NY
- BRANDON R BRUNS, MDAssociate Professor of Surgery, R Adams Cowley Shock Trauma Center at the University of Maryland Medical Center, Baltimore, MD
- 1
- Pelvic Floor
- 1
Urinary Incontinence and Overactive Bladder Syndrome
By Kristie A. Greene, MD; Lennox Hoyte, MD, MSEECS
Purchase PDFUrinary Incontinence and Overactive Bladder Syndrome
- KRISTIE A. GREENE, MDFellow, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, University of South Florida College of Medicine, Tampa General Hospital, Tampa, FL
- LENNOX HOYTE, MD, MSEECSAssociate Professor and Director, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, University of South Florida College of Medicine, Director, Urogynecology, and TGH-Pelvic Floor Disorders Group, Tampa General Hospital, Tampa, FL
Purchase PDFUrinary incontinence falls into two broad categories: stress incontinence and urge incontinence. Stress urinary incontinence occurs when urethral closure pressure cannot increase sufficiently to compensate for a sudden increase in intra-abdominal pressure, as from a cough or Valsalva maneuver. Urge urinary incontinence occurs when an unintended bladder contraction creates an insuppressible urge to void, leading to urinary leakage. When women have signs and/or symptoms of both stress and urge incontinence, it is referred to as mixed urinary incontinence. Overactive bladder syndrome is defined by the Standardization Subcommittee of the International Continence Society (ICS) as urinary urgency, with or without urge incontinence and usually with frequency and nocturia. Nocturia, which is often associated with urinary frequency, is defined as a need to urinate that awakens the person during the night. This chapter discusses the epidemiology and physiology of urinary incontinence and overactive bladder syndrome in women, as well as diagnosis and treatment. Tables list foods and beverages that may cause urinary frequency and urgency; features of urge incontinence, stress incontinence, and mixed incontinence; American Urologic Association (AUA) guidelines regarding level of evidence and indications for adult urodynamics; and currently available antimuscarinic drugs and their dosages, selectivity, efficacy, and side effects. Figures depict the journal of someone with mixed incontinence, a typical urodynamics suite, a urodynamic study of someone with detrusor overactivity, incontinence pessaries, and transobturator and retropubic slings.
This review contains 5 figures, 5 tables, and 44 references.
- 2
Constipation: Diagnosis and Management
- LENNOX HOYTE, MD, MSEECSAssociate Professor and Director, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, University of South Florida College of Medicine, Director, Urogynecology, and TGH-Pelvic Floor Disorders Group, Tampa General Hospital, Tampa, FL
- RENEE BASSALY, DOAssistant Professor, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, College of Medicine, University of South Florida, Tampa, FL
Purchase PDFConstipation is one of the most common gastrointestinal complaints in the general population. It is associated with a diminished quality of life and increased psychological stress. Although the prevalence varies widely, the rate for chronic constipation is 15 to 20% based on epidemiologic surveys in North America. There are many causes of constipation, and its definition is imprecise and variable. Diagnosis and appropriate management are therefore difficult but extremely important. This chapter primarily focuses on the diagnosis and management of constipation as it relates to adult females. Although it is not known why more women than men experience constipation, it is possible that hormone levels, which influence the digestive system, likely contribute. Pregnancy-related constipation is also common because of both hormonal changes and pelvic floor dysfunction after pregnancy. Women also tend to experience constipation prior to menstruation. In these cases, it is most likely that fluids that would normally soften stools in the colon are retained in other parts of the body. The female anatomy may also be a factor as functional outlet obstruction can occur after changes to the pelvic floor anatomy (such as after pregnancy). Figures illustrate the Bristol Stool Chart, rectal prolapse, protrusion of the posterior vaginal wall consistent with rectocele, enterocele with vaginal prolapsed, and enterocele with bladder prolapse. Videos show rectal prolapsed, rectocele, cystocele, descended perineum, and repaired perineum. Tables list causes of functional constipation, drugs associated with constipation, diagnostic criteria for functional constipation, and Rome criteria of irritable bowel syndrome.
This review contains 5 figures, 6 videos, 6 tables, and 99 references.
- 3
Pelvic Organ Prolapse
By Lennox Hoyte, MD, MSEECS; Renee Bassaly, DO; Stuart Hart, MD; Mona McCullough, MD, ME; Elisha Jackson, MD
Purchase PDFPelvic Organ Prolapse
- LENNOX HOYTE, MD, MSEECSAssociate Professor and Director, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, University of South Florida College of Medicine, Director, Urogynecology, and TGH-Pelvic Floor Disorders Group, Tampa General Hospital, Tampa, FL
- RENEE BASSALY, DOAssistant Professor, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, College of Medicine, University of South Florida, Tampa, FL
- STUART HART, MDAssistant Professor, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, College of Medicine, University of South Florida, Tampa, FL
- MONA MCCULLOUGH, MD, MEClinical Instructor, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, College of Medicine, University of South Florida, Tampa, FL
- ELISHA JACKSON, MD
Purchase PDFPelvic organ prolapse (POP) is the descent of one of more aspects of the vagina and/or uterus. Evaluation of POP always begins with a thorough history and physical examination. Management choices include observation, conservative options, and surgical options. Surgical management is divided into two categories, which are restorative and obliterative. It is important to counsel patients that although POP may affect quality of life, it is not life-threatening. This chapter is designed to guide the healthcare provider with a review of epidemiology, anatomy, evaluation, and management of POP. The chapter contains 14 figures that illustrate examples of common examination findings, devices, and treatment options. Also, there are 5 tables that provide concise reference materials to help guide the healthcare provider.
This review contains 91 references, 14 figures, and 6 tables.
Key Words: constipation, mesh, pain, pelvic floor, pessary, POP-Q, risk factors, surgery, vaginal wall
- 4
Cervical Cancer Prevention and Screening
- ANDREW QUINN, MDResident, PGY-1, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, New York Hospital, New York, NY
- CAROLYN D RUNOWICZ, MDExecutive Associate Dean for Academic Affairs, Professor of Obstetrics and Gynecology, Herbert Wertheim College of Medicine, Florida International University, Miami, FL
Purchase PDFWith the advent of HPV DNA testing and the availability of HPV vaccinations, the recommendations and rationale for screening and prevention of cervical cancer and its precursors have undergone revision, reflecting this new knowledge and understanding of cervical intra-epithelial neoplasia and the role of HPV. This review incorporates the new guidelines and rationale for current screening guidelines for cervical cancer and in the management of patients with atypical or unsatisfactory cervical cytology.
This review contains 4 figures, 4 tables, and 71 references
Keywords: Cervical cancer, Gynecological cancer, HPV, HPV testing, HPV vaccine, Pap smear, HPV DNA, Human papillomavirus
- 5
Constipation: Diagnosis and Management
- LENNOX HOYTE, MD, MSEECSAssociate Professor and Director, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, University of South Florida College of Medicine, Director, Urogynecology, and TGH-Pelvic Floor Disorders Group, Tampa General Hospital, Tampa, FL
- RENEE BASSALY, DOAssistant Professor, Female Pelvic Medicine and Reconstructive Surgery, Department of Obstetrics and Gynecology, College of Medicine, University of South Florida, Tampa, FL
- 1
- 1
- Nutrition
- 1
Body Composition Changes in Starvation and Disease
By Sarah Purcell, M.Sc, Ph.D; Carla Prado, Ph.D; Steven B Heymsfield, M.D; M Cristina Gonzalez, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFBody Composition Changes in Starvation and Disease
- SARAH PURCELL, M.SC, PH.D
- CARLA PRADO, PH.D
- STEVEN B HEYMSFIELD, M.D
- M CRISTINA GONZALEZ, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFAbnormalities in body composition have been associated with worse prognosis in several clinical conditions. Conversely, certain disease states may induce unfavorable changes in fat mass and/or fat-free mass. In this review, body composition alterations and the associated consequences are outlined in different disease states and clinical conditions, including cancer, HIV/AIDS, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, cardiovascular diseases, bariatric surgery, critical illness, and chronic kidney disease. This review also describes methodological considerations of commonly used techniques for body composition assessment in clinical settings. These include dual x-ray absorptiometry, bioelectrical impedance analysis, air displacement plethysmography, and ultrasonography.
This review contains 3 figures, 2 tables and 105 references
Key words: bariatric surgery, body composition, cachexia, cancer, cardiovascular disease, chronic kidney disease, chronic obstructive pulmonary disease, critical illness, fat mass, fat-free mass, HIV/AIDS, malnutrition, nutritional status, sarcopenia
- 2
Diet and Exercise in the Treatment of Obesity
- MEGHAN ARIAGNO, RDN, LDN, CDEBrigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFThis review addresses the role of nutrition and physical activity in weight management. There is not one standardized approach toward weight loss, but research demonstrates the effectiveness of following a reduced-calorie plan, as well as emphasizing increases in physical activity. Other important elements of consideration include promoting contact with weight management clinicians to provide structure, encouragement, and support. Physical activity alone has not been proven to support weight loss but in combination with a lower caloric intake can be helpful toward achieving weight loss. Sustaining weight loss is difficult for most individuals, so the support of clinicians is valuable not only in the starting phase but in the long term as well.
This review contains 1 figure, 4 tables and 37 references
Key words: activity, calorie, carbohydrate, diet, dietitian, exercise, intervention, lifestyle, maintenance, obesity, portion, technology, weight
- 3
Energy Balance, Exercise, and Cancer Risk
- ELAINE B TRUJILLO, MS, RD
Purchase PDFExcess body weight is a risk factor for most cancers. Furthermore, obesity is associated with worsened prognosis after a cancer diagnosis and negatively affects the delivery of systemic therapy, contributes to morbidity of cancer treatment, and may raise the risk of second malignancies and comorbidities. However, an obesity paradox may be occurring in patients with cancer; this paradox has been observed when cancer patients with an elevated body mass index (BMI) have improved survival compared with normal-weight patients, and this has been observed in a variety of cancer patients. The reliance on BMI as a measure of body fatness has limitations in the cancer population; hence, the use of tools that directly measure body fat may be more predictive of cancer risk. Despite public health recommendations for achieving and maintaining a healthy weight for cancer prevention and survivorship, few studies have evaluated the effect of intentional body weight loss on cancer risk, although the evidence is suggestive of a relationship. Future research needs to elucidate if weight loss after a cancer diagnosis decreases the risk of recurrence and mortality, and if so, how much weight loss is needed.
This review contains 4 figures, 1 table and 65 references
Key words: body weight, cancer, interventions, lifestyle, morbidity, mortality, obesity, prevention, risk, sedentary, survivorship, weight loss
- 4
Dietary Patterns and Risk of Cancer: Current Evidence and Future Directions
By Fang Fang Zhang, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFDietary Patterns and Risk of Cancer: Current Evidence and Future Directions
- FANG FANG ZHANG, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFDietary patterns capture the overall diet and its constituent foods and nutrients, representing a powerful approach to identifying the effect of nutrition on health and disease. In this review, we describe the two main approaches being used to characterize dietary patterns: a prior approach that defines dietary patterns using predefined diet quality indices, and a posterior approach that derives dietary patterns using factor or cluster analysis. Methods to define diet quality indices (Healthy Eating Index, Alternative Healthy Eating Index, Alternative Mediterranean Diet Score, Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension Score) are presented, and their similarities and differences are discussed among the different approaches. We review the recent evidence on the relationships between dietary patterns and cancer outcomes, including all-cancer incidence and mortality and the incidence of colorectal, breast, prostate, and lung cancers. Despite the different methods that are used to characterize dietary patterns in different studies, results consistently suggest that adherence to existing dietary guidelines is associated with a reduced risk of cancer incidence and mortality. Given the important role of dietary patterns in cancer prevention, clinicians need to consider providing appropriate nutrition counseling to improve patients’ dietary patterns. Continuous efforts need to be devoted to better characterize the relationships between dietary patterns and cancer risk by studying specific cancer types, different cancer subtypes, and population subgroups, with a better approach that can accurately assess dietary patterns throughout the life cycle.
This review contains 3 figures, 6 tables and 91 references
Key words: Alternative Healthy Eating Index, breast cancer, cancer incidence, cancer mortality, cluster analysis, colorectal cancer, Dietary Approaches to Stop Hypertension, dietary patterns, diet quality index, factor analysis, Healthy Eating Index, lung cancer, Mediterranean Diet Score, prostate cancer, Recommended Food Score
- 5
Overview of Public Health Dietary Guidelines for Prevention of Cancer
By Karen K. Collins, MS, RDN, CDN, FAND
Purchase PDFOverview of Public Health Dietary Guidelines for Prevention of Cancer
- KAREN K. COLLINS, MS, RDN, CDN, FAND
Purchase PDFDiet is now recognized as a vital element in cancer prevention strategies, both for its potential to influence cancer development directly and for its role in avoiding unhealthy adiposity. Dietary guidelines for cancer prevention based on systematic review synthesizing human and laboratory research identify choices that merit the highest priority. This review summarizes current understanding of diet’s multiple intersections with the process of cancer development and discusses major current dietary guidelines for cancer prevention. Dietary guidelines for reducing cancer risk address steps to provide sufficient amounts of cancer-protective factors and to limit exposure to foods and drinks that may facilitate cancer development while emphasizing the importance of an overall plant-rich dietary pattern and healthy weight. Tables and figures provide background to help health professionals discuss diet’s role in cancer prevention and emphasize priorities based on guidelines from systematic reviews of research rather than responding to single studies or non–evidence-based sources. These guidelines reflect the multiple roles that diet can play in cancer prevention and are compatible with dietary guidelines aimed at promotion of overall health.
This review contains 4 figures, 3 tables and 58 references
Key words: alcohol, American Institute for Cancer Research, cancer prevention, diet, dietary guidelines, dietary pattern, nutrition, obesity, plant-based diet, plant-rich diet, public health, recommendations, red and processed meat, reducing cancer risk, weight
- 6
Nutritional Considerations in the Management of Dyslipidemia
By Mohamad Saleh, MD; Francine K Welty, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFNutritional Considerations in the Management of Dyslipidemia
- MOHAMAD SALEH, MD
- FRANCINE K WELTY, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFCardiovascular disease (CVD), the leading cause of death in industrialized countries, is a dietary disease. In this review, we summarize the evidence from prospective, observational studies and randomized primary and secondary prevention trials of various diets supporting a role of dietary components in the development of CVD and in lowering low-density lipoprotein cholesterol (LDL-C) and cardiovascular events. The role of saturated fat in raising cholesterol and triglyceride is discussed, as well as studies showing that elevated levels of both LDL-C and triglyceride increase the risk of atherosclerosis and that lowering of LDL-C lowers the risk of CVD and its clinical sequelae, including unstable angina, myocardial infarction, and death. Randomized trials of omega-3 fatty acids and the Mediterranean diet and CVD outcomes are reviewed. Classification and causes of various types of hypercholesterolemia and hypertriglyceridemia are summarized. Finally, guidelines for nutritional management and treatment of these lipid disorders to lower levels of LDL-C and triglyceride and prevent CVD are provided.
This review contains 4 figures, 5 tables and 64 references
Key words: cardiovascular disease, coronary heart disease, lipids, low-density lipoprotein cholesterol, Mediterranean diet, nutrition, saturated fat, triglyceride
- 7
Diet Advancement After Weight Loss Surgery
- LAURA ANDROMALOS, MS, RD, CD, CDE
Purchase PDFDiet advancement after bariatric surgery has not been standardized across various bariatric programs. It is generally agreed that patients should advance through a textured progression while the gastrointestinal tract heals; however, the content of each diet stage is open for interpretation. The postoperative diet is intended to promote healing and weight loss while minimizing diet-related complications. This review presents the literature regarding the progression of patients through a postoperative bariatric surgery diet, macro- and micronutrient needs in the early postoperative period, and management of common diet-related complications, including nausea, dumping syndrome, gastroesophageal reflux disease, and defecatory dysfunction.
This review contains 5 tables and 45 references
Key words: Bariatric surgery, bariatric surgery diet, postoperative diet, macro-nutrient needs, micro-nutrient needs, diet-related complications
- 8
Nutritional Management of Celiac Disease
By Ciarán P Kelly, MD; Satya Kurada, MD; Mariana Urquiaga, MD
Purchase PDFNutritional Management of Celiac Disease
- CIARÁN P KELLY, MDProfessor of Medicine, Medical Director of The Celiac Center, Director of Gastroenterology Fellowship Training Program, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
- SATYA KURADA, MD
- MARIANA URQUIAGA, MD
Purchase PDFCeliac disease (CD) is an autoimmune disorder characterized by an immune response to gluten peptides in wheat, barley, and rye. The diagnosis of celiac disease is confirmed by three important characteristics: consistent symptoms, positive celiac-specific serology, and small intestinal biopsy findings of inflammation, crypt hyperplasia, and villous atrophy. CD may present with overt gastrointestinal symptoms, including diarrhea (or constipation), weight loss, and abdominal bloating and discomfort, or covertly with micronutrient deficiencies such as iron deficiency with anemia. A gluten-free diet (GFD) remains the mainstay of treatment. The aim of this review is to highlight the pathogenesis of CD, concepts and challenges associated with a GFD, and nutritional management of CD applicable in clinical practice to internists, gastroenterologists, and dietitians. Patients should be referred to an expert celiac dietitian for education on adherence to a GFD to address gluten contamination in the diet, the psychosocial implications of following a GFD, and macro- and micronutrient disequilibria arising from celiac disease and the GFD. Several novel therapeutics are on the horizon in various stages of development, including glutenases, antigliadin antibodies, tight junction regulators, modulation of the immune response to gliadin, and efforts to engineer less toxic gluten-containing foodstuffs.
This review contains 3 figures, 5 tables, and 61 references.
Key words: celiac disease, genetic engineering, food engineering, gluten, glutenases, gluten-free diet, oats, IgY, nutrition, tight junction regulators, wheat
- 9
Endoscopic Techniques for Obtaining Enteral Access
By Marvin Ryou, MD; Sanjay Salgado, MD
Purchase PDFEndoscopic Techniques for Obtaining Enteral Access
- MARVIN RYOU, MDAssociate Staff Physician, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Boston, MA
- SANJAY SALGADO, MD
Purchase PDFIn the absence of contraindications, enteral feeding is recommended for patients who are expected to be intolerant of oral feedings beyond 7 days. Enteral access can be accomplished by a variety of means, including surgical, endoscopic, or radiographic methods. This review focuses on endoscopy-guided options for enteral access. These methods include gastric feeding, which can be accomplished by orogastric, nasogastric, or percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy tube placement, and postpyloric feeding, accessed through oral or nasal jejunal tubes, percutaneous gastrostomy with a jejunal extension, or direct percutaneous jejunostomy. The indications, techniques, complications, and comparative data of these placement options are outlined, and special clinical considerations (including establishing access in patients with dementia or cirrhosis and those on anticoagulation) are discussed.
This review contains 5 figures, 1 table, and 33 references.
Key words: direct percutaneous jejunostomy, endoscopy, enteral access in cirrhosis, enteral access in dementia, enteral feeding, enteric access, nasogastric feeding tubes, percutaneous endoscopic gastrojejunostomy tubes, percutaneous endoscopic gastrostomy tubes
- 10
Parenteral Nutrition Associated Liver Toxicity: Prevention, Diagnosis and Management
By Meredith A. Baker, MD; Lorenzo Anez-Bustillos, MD; Duy T. Dao, MD; Gillian L. Fell, MD; Kathleen M. Gura, PharmD; Mark Puder, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFParenteral Nutrition Associated Liver Toxicity: Prevention, Diagnosis and Management
- MEREDITH A. BAKER, MD
- LORENZO ANEZ-BUSTILLOS, MD
- DUY T. DAO, MD
- GILLIAN L. FELL, MD
- KATHLEEN M. GURA, PHARMD
- MARK PUDER, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFLong-term parenteral nutrition (PN) treatment is limited by parenteral nutrition–associated liver disease (PNALD), which is characterized initially by intrahepatic cholestasis, typically defined as a direct bilirubin greater than 2 mg/dL in the absence of other causes of liver disease. PNALD is typically less common and less severe and progresses more slowly in older children and adults than in infants. The etiology of PNALD is multifactorial. Key factors include immature liver function, sepsis, and a lack of enteral nutrition. Additionally, nearly every component of PN has been attributed to or exacerbated hepatotoxicity. PN preparations must be carefully individualized and monitored to minimize hepatotoxicity from its various components. Although many hepatotoxic components or imbalances have been recognized, soybean oil–based lipid emulsions continue to be widely used as they are the only lipid emulsions currently approved for PN by the Food and Drug Administration. Fish oil–based lipid emulsions have been shown to reverse PNALD, with an associated decrease in mortality. As such, fish oil therapy should be considered early once biochemical cholestasis is detected in PN-dependent patients. Studies investigating the use of novel lipid emulsions for prevention and treatment of PNALD are ongoing.
This review contains 5 figures, 5 tables, and 114 references.
- 11
Overview of Enteral Nutrition
By Rebecca Lynch, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC; Erin Sisk, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC
Purchase PDFOverview of Enteral Nutrition
- REBECCA LYNCH, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC
- ERIN SISK, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC
Purchase PDFEnteral nutrition (EN) is recognized as a medical nutrition therapy for patients with a functional gastrointestinal tract who are unable to maintain their weight and health by oral intake alone either due to a highly catabolic medical condition or a functional limitation. EN support provides calories and protein to help improve or maintain adequate weight, lean body mass, and overall nutritional status. EN also provides nonnutritive benefits such as maintaining intestinal integrity, supporting the immune system, and preventing infection. EN support can be tailored to a patient’s nutrient needs, and there are various formulas that vary in composition of macronutrients, concentration, and electrolytes for specific disease processes or conditions that may help with tolerance and absorption. EN support complications include issues with access, diarrhea, constipation, electrolyte abnormalities, hyperglycemia, and dehydration/overhydration. Generally, EN is well tolerated. While a patient is on this type of nutrition support, it is important to closely monitor tolerance, weight, laboratory values if indicated, and overall clinical progress, with adjustment to the regimen as needed.
This review contains 1 figure, 4 tables, and 48 references.
Key words: enteral access, enteral formula, enteral nutrition support, gastric residuals, gastrointestinal tract, immunonutrition, malnutrition, medical nutrition therapy, tube feed formula, tube feed tolerance, tube feeding, volume-based feeding
- 12
Nutrition for Healthy Infants and Toddlers
By Sharon Collier, RD, LDN, MEd; Jenny Kinne, MS, RD, LDN
Purchase PDFNutrition for Healthy Infants and Toddlers
- SHARON COLLIER, RD, LDN, MED
- JENNY KINNE, MS, RD, LDN
Purchase PDFFeeding and eating are essential to life. As the infant grows into a toddler, the child goes through transitions with feeding, starting with breast milk or formula, transitioning to complementary feeding between the ages of 4 and 6 months, and then advancing to table foods. It is important to provide adequate nutrition to meet the growing needs of the child from a macronutrient and micronutrient standpoint through infancy to childhood. Throughout this time, anthropometric measurements are obtained to assess proper growth. Feeding is a dynamic part of a child’s life that varies at each stage of childhood, which comes with challenges such as avoiding choking hazards, preventing potential food allergies, providing a varied diet to meet macronutrient and micronutrient needs, and supporting advancement in textures for appropriate development of feeding skills and avoiding issues with picky eating. Providing proper nutrition from quality, quantity, and texture standpoints at each stage of childhood is essential to ensure adequate nutrition to promote healthy and expected growth and development.
This review contains 4 figures, 10 tables and 43 references
Key words: breast milk, complementary feeding, food, food safety, formula, growth, infant, micronutrients, neophobia, nutrition, oral health, physical activity, toddler
- 13
Surgical Treatment of Obesity
- LUISE PERNAR, MD
- MALCOLM K. ROBINSON, MDDirector, Nutrition Support Service, Brigham and Women’s Hospital, Assistant Professor of Surgery, Department of Surgery, Harvard Medical School, Boston, MA
Purchase PDFObesity is associated with numerous comorbidities and shortens life expectancy. Currently, over one third of adults in the United States are obese, making management of obesity a significant public health concern. Given the modest benefits of behavior change alone, weight loss surgery has become a popular tool in the treatment of obesity. Numerous studies have documented the benefits of weight loss surgery in promoting weight loss and resolution of comorbidities. The hormonal and physiologic changes that are induced by some weight loss procedures are not yet fully elucidated, but it is thought that changes in hunger sensation and metabolism drive the observed effects.
This review contains 4 figures, 2 videos, 3 tables and 60 references
Key words: bypass, obesity, sleeve gastrectomy, surgery, weight loss
- 14
Diet and Nutrition in the Treatment of Prediabetes and Diabetes
By Priscilla Escalona Villasmil, MD; Richard D Siegel, MD
Purchase PDFDiet and Nutrition in the Treatment of Prediabetes and Diabetes
- PRISCILLA ESCALONA VILLASMIL, MD
- RICHARD D SIEGEL, MD
Purchase PDFThe incidence of type 2 diabetes has been increasing dramatically throughout the world, closely linked to Westernized dietary patterns, physical inactivity, and rising rates of obesity, and has become a challenging health problem. Lifestyle changes are effective measures to prevent diabetes, and diet is one of the most important components of diabetes treatment. There is now strong evidence from epidemiologic studies and randomized controlled trials (RCTs) that type 2 diabetes can be prevented or at least delayed in those at high risk for progressing to diabetes by a combination of diet and physical activity resulting in weight loss. Medical nutrition therapy (MNT) is the process by which the nutrition prescription is customized for patients with diabetes. RCTs have demonstrated a positive effect of MNT in diabetes management. Studies documenting the effectiveness of MNT for type 1 and 2 diabetes report improvements in hemoglobin A1C and in other outcomes. A nutrition prescription should be individualized for each patient based on individual preferences, cultural background, and social and financial context. Lifestyle interventions should be considered monotherapy in prediabetes and the initial treatment of type 2 diabetes. Evidence from prospective cohort studies and RCTs has shown the importance of eating patterns in the prevention and management of diabetes. With the worldwide increase in obesity, it will be important to get further evidence of how lifestyle interventions affect clinical outcomes such as microvascular and macrovascular disease.
This review contains 6 figures, 6 tables and 90 references
Key words: Diabetes mellitus, nutrition, prevention, obesity, lifestyle, glucose, diet, physical activity
- 15
Nutrition for the Healthy Child
By Meera Boghani, MS, RD, LDN; Mollie Studley, MS, RD, LDN
Purchase PDFNutrition for the Healthy Child
- MEERA BOGHANI, MS, RD, LDN
- MOLLIE STUDLEY, MS, RD, LDN
Purchase PDFPreschool and school-age children are children ages 3 to 6 and 7 to 12 years, respectively. This life stage is characterized by a period of slower growth velocity compared with infancy, which precedes it, and adolescence, which follows it. During the early school years, children continue to develop and refine feeding skills, expand their food choices, and learn to eat a variety of flavors and textures. Parents and other caregivers control the type of foods and the environment in which the foods are presented, often influencing eating habits and behaviors later in life. A healthy diet is needed not only to maximize the child’s growth but also to prevent chronic diseases, such as type 2 diabetes, hypertension, and obesity. When assessing a child’s nutrition, emphasis should be placed on not just weight and body mass index but also assessing intake of macro- and micronutrients from foods. A healthy diet should include a variety of food groups, with emphasis on whole foods over processed foods. Recently developed tools such as MyPlate and the Dietary Guidelines help American families move toward a healthful diet to help minimize the risk of chronic diseases.
This review contains 3 figures, 7 tables and 78 references
Key words: childhood obesity, developmental disability, energy needs of children, evaluation of growth charts, failure to thrive, food allergy, nutrition-focused physical findings, nutritional status, SoFAS
- 16
Nutrition for the Healthy Adolescent
- LAUREN CULLITY, MS, RD, LDN
Purchase PDFAdolescents need proper nutrition to continue to grow and develop. There are many aspects to consider when providing nutrition to adolescents. In this review, we discuss adolescent nutritional needs and provide ways to assess and guide adolescents as they transition to adulthood. We also discuss the latest research regarding bone health, obesity, and eating disorders.
This review contains 2 figures, 7 tables and 43 references
Key words: adolescent, bone health, eating disorders, energy needs, female athlete triad, growth, nutrition, obesity, polycystic ovarian syndrome, puberty
- 17
Behavior Modification in the Treatment of Obesity
- PAUL DAVIDSON, PHD
Purchase PDFThis review addresses the three most common components used in helping individuals deal with weight loss from a behavioral perspective. Relevant literature and recent findings are reviewed and summarized, showing that programs containing behavioral techniques, along with an emphasis on diet and exercise, tend to lead to improved results. Factors related to better weight loss outcomes include assessing empathically, setting reasonable goals, enhancing a sense of self-determination, seeing a patient more frequently, focusing on decreasing caloric intake, and encouraging regular physical activity. Newer technologies, such as Internet- and smartphone-based interventions, seem promising but lack sufficient research evidence at this point. It is also clear that just as reasons for weight gain are patient specific, treatments likely do best when they are more highly individualized.
This review contains 3 figures, 2 tables and 33 references
Key words: behavior, cognitive restructuring, decision tree, 5As, intervention, mindfulness, modification, motivation, obesity, relapse prevention, self-monitoring, stages of change, stimulus control, treatment, weight loss
- 18
Alterations in Macronutrient metabolism in Starvation and Disease
By L John Hoffer, MD, PhD
Purchase PDFAlterations in Macronutrient metabolism in Starvation and Disease
- L JOHN HOFFER, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFThis review explains starvation as both a physiologic process and a disease. It includes a detailed explanation of the modifying effects of metabolic adaptation and systemic inflammation, as interpreted in a clinical context. It navigates the reader through the difficult shoals of vague and conflicting terminology that burden this topic and provides current definitions and nuanced explanations of the important but frequently misunderstood terms related to starvation and its modifiers and consequences. It provides a succinct explanation of the physiology of total fasting and its clinical correlates. Finally, it explains the interactions among starvation, sarcopenia, frailty, involuntary weight loss, systemic inflammation, cachexia, and disuse muscle atrophy. The multiple and interacting causes of generalized muscle atrophy are pointed out. Inadequate appreciation of these interactions can result in failure to diagnose and treat starvation-induced diseases. A clinical approach to involuntary weight loss is outlined.
This review contains 6 figures, 2 tables and 56 references
Key words: adaptation, cachexia, frailty, hypoalbuminemia, inflammation, ketosis, kwashiorkor, malnutrition, marasmus, muscle atrophy, protein-energy malnutrition, sarcopenia, starvation, systemic inflammation, weight loss
- 19
Determining Protein Requirements in the Acutely Ill Patient
- L JOHN HOFFER, MD, PHD
Purchase PDFThis review discusses protein requirements in disease. It begins by explaining how protein requirements are determined in normal health and the process of nutritional adaptation. It points out the salient features of diseases that increase a patient’s protein requirement, with detailed attention to the effect of systemic inflammation both to increase protein requirements and prevent normal adaptation to starvation. The review also explains and reconciles problems of uncertainty about how much protein to provide to acutely ill patients. Finally, it provides the clinical information and physiologic reasoning necessary to choose appropriate amounts of protein to provide to individual acutely ill patients.
This review contains 1 figure and 59 references
Key words: adaptation, cachexia, frailty, hypoalbuminemia, inflammation, malnutrition, muscle atrophy, nutritional requirements, protein-energy malnutrition, protein requirements, systemic inflammation
- 20
Techniques for Assessment of Body Composition in Health
By Carla M Prado, RD; Camila LP Oliveira, MSc; M Cristina Gonzalez, MD, PhD; Steven B Heymsfield, MD
Purchase PDFTechniques for Assessment of Body Composition in Health
- CARLA M PRADO, RD
- CAMILA LP OLIVEIRA, MSC
- M CRISTINA GONZALEZ, MD, PHD
- STEVEN B HEYMSFIELD, MD
Purchase PDFBody composition assessment is an important tool in both clinical and research settings able to characterize the nutritional status of individuals in various physiologic and pathologic conditions. Health care professionals can use the information acquired by body composition analysis for the prevention and treatment of diseases, ultimately improving health status. Here we describe commonly used techniques to assess body composition in healthy individuals, including dual-energy x-ray absorptiometry, bioelectrical impedance analysis, air displacement plethysmography, and ultrasonography. Understanding the key underlying concept(s) of each assessment method, as well as its advantages and limitations, facilitates selection of the method of choice and the method of the compartment of interest.
This review contains 5 figures, 3 tables and 52 references
Key words: air displacement plethysmography, bioelectrical impedance analysis, body composition, disease, dual-energy x-ray absorptiometry, health, muscle mass, nutritional status, obesity, sarcopenia, ultrasound fat mass
- 21
Determination of Energy Expenditure
- GRACE PHELAN, MS, RD, LDN, CNSC
Purchase PDFNutrition interventions are often designed to influence energy balance, ultimately optimizing the health of individuals or groups. Goals include weight loss in obese and overweight individuals or weight gain in growing children, pregnant women, and the underweight. In some cases, weight maintenance is the intention for healthy weight adults or children who have the opportunity to grow into their current weight. Determining the energy requirements for each person can help explain the presence or absence of weight changes and direct subsequent nutrition goals and interventions. Quantifying energy requirements also helps to avoid over- and under- feeding. This is particularly relevant in people suffering from acute or chronic disease or illness. In the acute care setting overfeeding can worsen metabolic disturbances including, but not limited to, hyperglycemia and hypercarbia while underfeeding can negatively impact immunity, organ function, and activities of daily living.
This review contains 3 Figures, 5 Tables and 66 references
Key words: nutrition, energy expenditure, body composition, calorimetry, bioelectrical impedance analysis (BIA), doubly-labeled water (DLW), reverse Fick equation, Harris-Benedict equation, Millfin-St. Jeor Equation, Owen Equation, Ireton-Jones Equations, Penn State Equations, hypocaloric feeding
- 22
Nutrition and Fetal Origins of Diseases in Adults
By Amanda K Barks; Phu V Tran, PhD; Michael K Georgieff, MD; Anne Maliszewski-Hall, MD
Purchase PDFNutrition and Fetal Origins of Diseases in Adults
- AMANDA K BARKS
- PHU V TRAN, PHD
- MICHAEL K GEORGIEFF, MD
- ANNE MALISZEWSKI-HALL, MD
Purchase PDFAccumulating evidence suggests that the early-life environment has lasting effects on health and disease into adulthood. The current concept of developmental origins of adulthood disease has expanded beyond the original observation by Barker and colleagues correlating low birth weight with adulthood cardiovascular and metabolic disorders. Notably, the fetal-neonatal nutritional environment has a significant role in influencing an individual’s wellness in adulthood. During critical periods of fetal and neonatal development, tissues and organ systems are most vulnerable to nutrient deficiencies. Through fetal programming mechanisms such as epigenetic modification, a biochemical process that regulates gene expression without altering the genetic code, developing tissues adapt to nutrient-poor environments to preserve normal development of critical organ systems, including the brain. However, these programmed adaptations can have negative long-term health consequences if the postnatal environment does not match the fetal-neonatal environment in which the programming occurred. These long-term adverse health outcomes constitute the true cost to society, in both increased medical costs and the indirect cost of lost productivity. Here we review the effects of nutrient deficiencies on fetal programming and subsequent health outcomes, as well as the potential mechanisms that underlie fetal programming.
This review contains 3 Figures, 2 Tables and 115 references
Key words: critical period, epigenetics, fetal programming, iron, long-chain polyunsaturated fatty acids, neurodevelopment, nutrient deficiency, protein-energy, vitamins, zinc
- 23
Nutrition for the Healthy Adult
- MARIJANE G. STANIEC, MS, RD/LDN, CNSC
Purchase PDFMany of today’s healthy adults will be plagued by chronic diseases, such as obesity, hypertension, heart disease, and diabetes, and be robbed of the quality of life they desire. According to the 2015–2020 Dietary Guidelines for Americans, about half of all American adults have one or more diet-related chronic diseases. The question, “What should healthy adults eat to stay healthy?” may seem simple. However, many primary care providers feel vulnerable answering questions about nutrition. This review serves as a summary of the most up-to-date guidelines about added sugars, sodium, types of fat, and cholesterol for healthy adults and a refresher for health care providers caring for them. Other important related issues, such as the latest recommendations for physical activity, the problem of adult weight gain, the need for adiposity screening, the powerful role of the primary care provider, and suggestions nutrition-focused primary care, are discussed.
This review contains 5 Figures, 5 Tables and 137 references
Key words: weight gain, cholesterol, Dietary Guidelines, sugar-sweetened beverages, adiposity, added sugar, hydrogenated oils, physical activity, waist-to-height ratio, nutrition-focused, Primary Care
- 24
Fiber and Nutritional Health
- JOANNE L SLAVIN, PHD, RDJoanne L Slavin, PhD, RD, Professor, Department of Food Science and Nutrition, University of Minnesota, St. Paul, MN
Purchase PDFPopulations that consume more dietary fiber have less chronic disease. According to the 2002 Dietary Reference Intakes (DRIs), dietary fiber includes carbohydrates and lignin that are intrinsic and intact in plants that are not digested and absorbed in the small intestine. Functional fiber consists of isolated or purified carbohydrates that are not digested and absorbed in the small intestine that confer beneficial physiologic effects in humans. Total fiber is the sum of dietary fiber and functional fiber. Fibers alter laxation, attenuate the rise in blood glucose, and normalize blood cholesterol. The solubility of fibers was originally thought to determine physiologic properties, with soluble fiber linked to cholesterol-lowering properties and insoluble fiber linked to laxation effects. The DRI Committee recommended that other descriptors for fiber be developed, suggesting viscosity and fermentability. Manufacturers are allowed to list total dietary fiber, soluble fiber, and insoluble fiber on the Nutrition Facts panel. DRIs recommend consumption of 14 g of dietary fiber per 1,000 kcal based on epidemiologic studies showing protection against cardiovascular disease. Usual intake of dietary fiber is only 15 g/day. Even with a fiber-rich diet, a supplement may be needed to bring fiber intakes into the recommended range. Dietary messages to increase consumption of high-fiber foods such as whole grains, pulses, fruits, and vegetables should be broadly supported by the medical profession.
This review contains 3 Tables and 38 references
Key words: constipation, diarrhea, dietary fiber, health claims, laxatives, plant foods, stool weight, transit time
- 25
Oral Health and Nutrition
By Carole. A. Palmer, Ed.D., RD, LDN; Zhangmuge Cheng, MS, RD, CNSC, LDN
Purchase PDFOral Health and Nutrition
- CAROLE. A. PALMER, ED.D., RD, LDNProfessor Emerita and Former Head, Division of Nutrition and Oral Health Promotion, Department of Comprehensive Care, Tufts University School of Dental Medicine Professor Emerita and Former Master’s Program Director - Dietetic Internship/Master’s Program Tufts’ Friedman School of Nutrition Science and Policy Adjunct Professor (retired), Program in Public Health, Tufts University School of Medicine
- ZHANGMUGE CHENG, MS, RD, CNSC, LDNRegistered Dietitian II, Sodexo Kent Hospital, Warwick, RI
Purchase PDFOral diseases are among the most prevalent diseases affecting global health. In his report on the crisis in oral disease in America, the Surgeon General warned that one cannot be truly healthy without oral health. Oral health means freedom from all oral health problems; tooth decay (dental caries), periodontal diseases, tooth loss, oral-facial pain, oral cancer and the effects of its treatment, oral infections, craniofacial birth defects and more. The relationships between oral conditions and systemic health and disease are many and synergistic, and most involve dietary and/or systemic nutritional factors. Diet and nutrition can play important roles in the etiology, prevention, and/or management of oral conditions, as they do in overall health and disease. Today, all health professionals and educators need to be aware of and consider oral issues and their possible diet/nutritional implications as a component of optimal health care and education. This review article provides a brief overview of how diet and nutrition impact and are impacted by oral conditions, and offers general guidelines and resources for providing meaningful interventions throughout the life cycle.
This review contains 3 figures, 3 tables, and 57 references
Keywords: biofilm, cariogenic, dental caries, dental plaque, ECC-early childhood caries, lactobacillus, mucositis, non-cariogenic, periodontal disease, Streptococcus mutans
- 26
Oral Health and Nutrition
By Carole. A. Palmer, Ed.D., RD, LDN; Zhangmuge Cheng, MS, RD, CNSC, LDN
Purchase PDFOral Health and Nutrition
- CAROLE. A. PALMER, ED.D., RD, LDNProfessor Emerita and Former Head, Division of Nutrition and Oral Health Promotion, Department of Comprehensive Care, Tufts University School of Dental Medicine Professor Emerita and Former Master’s Program Director - Dietetic Internship/Master’s Program Tufts’ Friedman School of Nutrition Science and Policy Adjunct Professor (retired), Program in Public Health, Tufts University School of Medicine
- ZHANGMUGE CHENG, MS, RD, CNSC, LDNRegistered Dietitian II, Sodexo Kent Hospital, Warwick, RI
Purchase PDFOral diseases are among the most prevalent diseases affecting global health. In his report on the crisis in oral disease in America, the Surgeon General warned that one cannot be truly healthy without oral health. Oral health means freedom from all oral health problems; tooth decay (dental caries), periodontal diseases, tooth loss, oral-facial pain, oral cancer and the effects of its treatment, oral infections, craniofacial birth defects and more. The relationships between oral conditions and systemic health and disease are many and synergistic, and most involve dietary and/or systemic nutritional factors. Diet and nutrition can play important roles in the etiology, prevention, and/or management of oral conditions, as they do in overall health and disease. Today, all health professionals and educators need to be aware of and consider oral issues and their possible diet/nutritional implications as a component of optimal health care and education. This review article provides a brief overview of how diet and nutrition impact and are impacted by oral conditions, and offers general guidelines and resources for providing meaningful interventions throughout the life cycle.
This review contains 3 figures, 3 tables, and 57 references
Keywords: biofilm, cariogenic, dental caries, dental plaque, ECC-early childhood caries, lactobacillus, mucositis, non-cariogenic, periodontal disease, Streptococcus mutans
- 1

- 1905-522-8526
- 1-855-647-6511
- For Individuals: [email protected]
For Residency: [email protected]
Copyright © 2025 Decker Medicine LLC. All rights reserved.
Trusted since 1980
